SEOTips.ws

Sponsored Video

Cora SEO Software measures 520 on-page and off-page SEO factors for your keywords

Facebook Contests: How to Get Your Fans Excited

Facebook Contests: How to Get Your Fans Excited

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you ever run a Facebook contest? Are you wondering if you should use them for your business? To learn about Facebook contests, I interview Andrea Vahl for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Andrea Vahl, co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies. She regularly writes about Facebook for Social Media Examiner (in fact she was our community manager for 2 years), and has an alter-ego known online as Grandma Mary. Andrea shares how a Facebook contest can work for your page and your business. You'll learn about the different contests available and what contest apps to use. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher.  Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Contests Why should businesses run contests on Facebook? When it comes to what contests can do for your Facebook page and your business, Andrea is a contest fan girl. There are many benefits of running a contest and Andrea's top three follow. You'll hear the benefits of each and the best types of prizes to give away. Help grow the likes on your page and your Facebook presence Grow your email list Help promote a product you're selling Listen to the show to find out how we did a photo contest called Help Me Launch. Examples of successful contests Andrea shares a few success stories with Facebook contests and what range of prizes can develop good success. Andrea helped set up a contest for a client on Facebook called Chocolate for Breakfast. It was a contest where the giveaway was a small box of premium chocolate truffles. The contest was run for one week. From this, the client got 700 new fans and 400 email addresses. At the time, the page was at the early stages with around 1200 fans. So for the cost of the premium box of chocolates, the client got a huge response. The contest was on the client's Facebook tab (like you're supposed to do), and it required people to like the page to enter. Discover how a contest on a tab works and what information people need to enter to participate. It was a sweepstakes contest where you didn't have to enter any photos, essay or video. It was a random-draw winner with anyone eligible to win. You'll hear how it was promoted and the frequency of the posts. Another client of Andrea's, Camp Bow Wow, did a contest called Bad to the Bone. They're a doggy daycare facility and also have home buddies dog training courses that they give away. This contest encouraged people to submit pictures of their bad dogs. People would then vote on who was the baddest dog. The winner would get a free year of dog training lessons, which was a great prize. Hear how this contest was run over a couple of stages and why it lasted about a year. It was a huge success, with over 15,000 new fans. Andrea encourages people to think about how you can piggyback on different techniques that have worked well. Create some fun around the contest and engage with your audience. A bigger brand that ran a contest was Eggo. They did a Waffle-Off, which encouraged people to submit recipes with Eggo waffles. People would submit recipes and show you the various ways to enjoy Eggo waffles. It was user-generated content and photos. People were very engaged with the contest. It was easy to set up and it took off for Eggo. You'll discover why there might be less participation if it involves the need to enter a photo or a movie. If you want to start your first contest, Andrea advises you to run a sweepstakes type of...

How to Use Social Media Insights to Improve Your Marketing

How to Use Social Media Insights to Improve Your Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you marketing on Twitter, Facebook or Pinterest? Do you know which type of posts your followers prefer? Social media analytics let you see who your followers are and what they like. In this article you'll discover how to use your audience insights from Twitter, Facebook and Pinterest to improve your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Track Follower Preferences on Twitter Twitter provides a free analytics dashboard with key statistics about your account. You can measure your success in a variety of ways, ranging from the number of new followers to your most popular tweets. You can access the Twitter analytics dashboard here. After you log into your account, you'll see a 28-day summary of your profile. The summary shows the number of times you've tweeted, tweet impressions, followers and profile visits. Next to each number is an up or down arrow, representing the change over the previous period. The right side of the screen shows a summary of your analytics for the current month. If you scroll down, you can see summaries from previous months so you can compare and track your progress. What do you do with this information? Start tracking it from month to month. Create a table and list the number of followers you have at the end of the month. Then measure the monthly and overall percentage increases or decreases from the first column or month you started. If you want to see more detailed analytics for your profile, click on View All Tweet Activity. The page that appears shows a helpful and informative graph that lets you see the number of impressions that your tweets have earned over the last 28 days. On the right side of the page is an overview of your engagement rate, link clicks, retweets, favorites and replies. The 28-day range is the default setting, but you can change it to a more specific or broader range of dates. Make your selection from the drop-down menu on the right side of the page. Below the main graph on this page is a breakdown of all of your tweets within the selected date range. From here, you can see the number of impressions and engagements and the engagement rate for each tweet. Click on View Tweet Activity to see more information for a specific tweet. The report details how many people engaged with the tweet and the number of impressions. It also shows how many people clicked on your profile, favorited the tweet or retweeted it. Why is this information beneficial? Because it lets you see what content is working (what your audience likes) and what isn't. This helps you refine your content strategy to post about topics that your followers care about. #2: Discover Fan Insights on Facebook Facebook offers its own version of analytics called Facebook Insights (available after your page has received 30 likes). Use this information to make improvements to your content and determine the best times to post. To access these metrics, click Insights at the top of the page. From here, you can click these tabs to view a variety of analytics. Overview The Overview section provides the most important analytics. It lists page likes, post reach (the number of people who have seen impressions of a post) and engagement (the percentage of people who saw a post and liked, clicked, commented on or shared it). Scroll down the page to see your five most recent posts. For each post, view metrics on reach, engagement (broken down into post clicks, likes, comments and shares) and if applicable, how much money you spent promoting the post. Likes In the Likes section, you'll see a graph showcasing your page's growth in terms of audience. You can change the date range to see the total page likes for a certain range of dates or a particular date. For the time period you selected, you can also see net likes, which is the number of new likes minus unlikes and paid likes.

How to Host a Blab From Your Smartphone

How to Host a Blab From Your Smartphone

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to broadcast live video from Blab with your mobile phone? Looking for tips to improve your mobile Blab broadcasts? Business owners and marketers can use Blab to interact with customers and prospects in real time, from anywhere. In this article you'll discover how to successfully broadcast on Blab from your smartphone. Listen to this article: What Is Blab? Blab allows anyone (businesses included) to have their own "show," where two to four people will be "on air." The show is a live broadcast that viewers can tune in to, participate in the conversation, and potentially join the discussion via video if there's an open seat. Using Blab feels similar to Google Hangouts and Facebook Live Video, with a little bit of Reddit thrown in. Blab emphasizes user engagement and is a platform that lets anyone chime in. As a live video discussion happens among multiple users, people can comment on the content right as it's happening. The average active user spends 65 minutes a day watching different blabs. Businesses and marketers currently use Blab to host after-shows, hold interviews, facilitate discussions, offer coaching and teaching (think webinar), and record podcasts. You can record blabs so users can view them whenever they want, giving marketers the ability to create permanent, valuable content. Blab From Your Smartphone To use Blab, you'll need an account. It's recommended that you log in with your Twitter account so it's easy to share your blab to your Twitter followers. Once you log in, you'll see some live blabs, a tab to see whom you're following, and the option to create your own blab. To start your own blab, click the grey and black "+" button in the center of the top navigation bar. When you create your own blab, you'll be asked to name your blab. You can also add tags. Tagging is one of the best things you can do for your blab, because it attracts a relevant audience not already connected to you. This helps a new audience find your blab as well as your business. Once you're hosting a blab, you can call in. You can also choose to lock the other seats to prevent anyone else from calling in or you can keep them open. To spread the word about your blab, click on the arrow in the options between the video and text. From here, choose any or all of the options to share your blab link on social media, in a message, or in an email. You'll be able to see who's joined the blab, as well as any conversations happening. To show their approval, viewers can give "high fives" to speakers by clicking on the hand symbols in the corner of the speaker's video. Get More Out of Blab Here are some tips to help your on-the-go broadcast go smoothly, get the most audience interaction, and increase viewership. Be Prepared Remember that Blab is live, which means there's no stopping, restarting, or editing things out. If discussions veer away, that's fine in many cases. If things fall stagnant, though, it's good to have a list of topics to get the conversation back on track. Keep an agenda in front of you with topics you want to cover during your blab. Add Value Being entertaining is always good when you want users to tune in, but providing high-value content will keep users both engaged and waiting for (or subscribing to) your next blab. One way to do this is to invite industry leaders to chime in on relevant topics. Another way to add value is to share a list of applicable resources in the comments during each blab. Be Ready to Respond to Users Anything that's live and allows for viewer participation has the risk of something going wrong. An angry customer may chime in, or chaos could break out in the comments among users. Keep an eye on the discussion as much as possible and watch out for discord from guests who video call-in with you. Finally, answer questions from people, and comment on the discussion. Promote Your Blab

5 Ways to Find More Time to Blog

5 Ways to Find More Time to Blog

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is there a blogger inside you, waiting to emerge? Need tips for producing more content? Writing quality content will help you attract more customers and increase your visibility. In this article, you'll discover five ways to find more time to blog. #1: Commit to a Niche When you're committed to a particular niche, it's easier to write for the audience you want to attract because you've already conducted extensive research on most of the topics they're interested in. An added bonus is to use their evolving interests to point you toward topics you haven't considered. If you notice that your target buyers are looking for advice you know nothing about, you know where to start expanding your knowledge. Listen to this article: For example, say you're selling artistic pieces for home decoration. You don't necessarily know everything about interior design, but your audience would appreciate advice in that area. In that case, you can research it. And if you can base the tips and arguments you share on your actual experience, the articles will be much more believable and your readers will trust you more. #2: Limit Your Time on Distracting Sites If you blog for business, you spend a lot of time online. You need to be aware of all of the emerging trends in your niche, and monitor the behavior and interests of your target audience. You also likely frequent Reddit, Facebook, and other sites to get inspiration for new blog articles. How often do you plan to spend only five minutes on these sites, only to lose track of the time? That's why you need the Chrome plugin StayFocusd. You can use StayFocusd to prevent you from spending too much time on distracting websites. It's easy to install and you can customize the settings for your own preferences. First, set the days you want StayFocusd to monitor. Then, decide how much time to give yourself for browsing. Finally, set a list of the sites you want the tool to block for you. When you reach your time limit, you'll get an eye-opening message that prompts you to get back to work. #3: Plan Your Articles With Mind Maps When you find inspiration for an article, your first instinct is to sit down and write that piece as soon as possible. Wait! Once you get the initial idea for the post, you should plan the structure of your article. If you take the time to develop an outline, you'll significantly speed up the writing stage. You can use an online mind mapping tool such as MindMup to create your outlines. Start with a unique and captivating headline, and then make notes for your intro. Finally, consider the main points you'll cover and create subheads for each of the different paragraphs you're going to write. Use the outline as a guide, and remember that it's flexible. You can make adjustments to the outline as you work as long as you maintain a focused thread in your article. #4: Use Tools to Curate Inspiring Content Inspiration is everywhere online, and it can be difficult to keep track of and remember it all. That's where a tool such as Evernote or Pinterest comes in. For example, you can pin all of the interesting online sources you encounter to themed inspiration boards. As your boards are populated with pins, look for a way to connect those pieces of inspiration into a complete article. #5: Source Quotes From Industry Research and Influencers When you support your tips and arguments with quotes from respected research resources and industry experts, you not only increase the value of your content, but also add depth and reliability. Begin your article with a great quote to drive attention to the problems and solutions you're writing about. Then, in each paragraph, use a few short quotes to corroborate your points. Remember, you'll need to credit each author and source you quote. Make sure you include proper attribution within the article. In Conclusion Many social media marketers and business owners get focused...

7 Eye-Opening Live Chat Strategies Every Marketer Should Know

by Rikke Thomsen @ Sleeknote.com

The post 7 Eye-Opening Live Chat Strategies Every Marketer Should Know appeared first on Sleeknote.com.

5 Instagram Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

5 Instagram Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you up to date with the latest Instagram changes? Want to know what the changes mean for marketers? In addition to a brand-new logo, Instagram has rolled out updates to its ad products, video features, and news feed algorithm. In this article, you'll discover how the most recent Instagram changes can affect your marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Video Length Increased Ready to share longer videos on Instagram? In case you haven't heard, Instagram rolled out an increased time limit for videos from 15 to 60 seconds in April. Most users should have this capability with the latest version of the app. You can shoot video directly from the Instagram app or use your photo library. Features allow you to add filters, turn off the sound, and choose the cover photo. With these changes, you can share more video content, especially if you like to repurpose content from other networks, such as downloading your Snapchat story video to Instagram. #2: Videos Show Views and Viewers Now you can find out how many people are viewing your videos on Instagram. Simply look at the view count below each of your videos. When you click on your number of views, you'll get to see the number of likes, along with the option to follow those who liked your video. This may give you an idea of the amount of reach you're getting versus engagement. So if you see that hundreds of people viewed a video, but only a handful liked it, you can assume that it didn't resonate well with your audience. If you have hundreds of views and hundreds of likes, however, you have a winning video. #3: A Tap on Photo Ads Reveals the Call to Action When someone taps once on your ad photo, it brings up your call to action. You can let users click through to your website or app, depending on what you configured when setting up your Instagram ad. Note that this isn't the case with ad videos on Instagram. If you do a single tap on an ad video, it will turn on the sound. A second single tap will turn off the sound. Do a double tap to like the video, just as doing a double tap on an ad image will like the image. This is something worth noting when choosing between image and video. #4: Profile Click-throughs From Ads Include the Call to Action If you link your Instagram profile to your Instagram ad, when someone taps on your Instagram profile, it will place your ad's call to action at the top of your profile. Note that this only happens if users go to your profile by tapping on it above your ad. If they were to access it anywhere else, the call to action would no longer be there. Linking is something to keep in mind when choosing your call-to-action button text. When someone taps through to your Instagram profile from your ad, you'll want to display a call to action and profile bio text that align with your campaign. Would you want Apply Now, Book Now, Contact Us, Donate Now, Download, Learn More, Shop Now, Sign Up, or Watch More at the top of your profile? And what bio text and link would you want below that? Keep this in mind for every Instagram ad campaign. #5: News Feed Visibility Shifts With Algorithm While most people are focused on the logo change, the biggest change is the rollout of the enhanced Instagram algorithm. If you take a close look at your own Instagram news feed, you may notice that it's no longer in chronological order of newest posts first. Instead, you'll see posts in the order that Instagram deems the most important to you. It's not overall engagement or recency that wins the news feed, but rather how much Instagram thinks you care about that particular Instagram user. For example, a photo with 9 likes and no comments from three hours ago from someone you occasionally engage with is several posts ahead of a photo with 180k likes and 640 comments from an hour ago from a celebrity with a verified profile whom you rarely engage with. As an individual,

7 Biggest PPC Nightmares Sinking Your ROI

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

PPC advertising should be straightforward. You buy an ad. Your ad appears on Google. That ad gets clicked. You spend a little dough per click, and voila – you’re a marketing genius. Traffic is booming and you’re appearing in all the right places. Except that’s not always how it works. And for some strange reason, […]

How to Use Facebook Business Manager to Share Account Access

How to Use Facebook Business Manager to Share Account Access

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have multiple business pages and ad accounts on Facebook? Looking for a secure way to share access to them? Facebook's Business Manager makes it easy to give people access to your Facebook presence without sharing your password. In this article, you'll discover how to add your Facebook accounts to Business Manager. Listen to this article: #1: Set Up Business Manager To get started with Business Manager, first you need to create an account. Go to https://business.facebook.com/ and click the Create Account button. Log in with whatever credentials you currently use on Facebook. In a minute, you'll be able to designate a business email address, which will be the one that appears on and communicates with the Business Manager tool. Next, enter your business name and click Continue. Now type in your name and the business email address that you want Business Manager to communicate with. Even though you use your personal credentials to log in, everyone else you interact with through the tool will see your business address. When you're done, click Finish. Now that you've set up your account, here's how to use it to manage your Facebook business pages and ad accounts. #2: Connect With Business Pages Facebook's Business Manager lets you manage multiple Facebook pages, get an overview of analytics when you log in, and jump from one page to another within the tool. Here's how to add your page, request access to a page, or create a new one. Claim an Existing Page To claim an existing Facebook page that your business owns, click on Claim Assets and select Page. Then type in either the page name (which should begin to auto-populate) or the page's URL. The auto-populate feature is hit or miss, so it's a good idea to have the page URL in hand. When you're finished, click Claim Page. Request Access If another admin is managing the Facebook page, click Request Access and select Page. Then type in the Facebook page name or URL for which you want to request access and click Request Access. Create a New Facebook Page If you don't yet have a Facebook page, or want to create an additional one, click Add New and select Page. Next, select the category for your new page and then follow the prompts to finish setting up your page. Manage Your Pages Once your Facebook page is set up, you can easily manage it from within Business Manager. To do this, simply click the name of the page that you want to manage on the overview page of Business Manager. To quickly jump back and forth between the tool and your pages, click the Menu button to display or hide the Business Manager menu whenever you're on your Facebook page. #3: Assign Access to Pages Managing who has access to your Facebook pages is an important and welcome function of the Business Manager tool. To add new people, click Add New and select People. As you can see below, Facebook clearly defines what level of access admins have versus employees. Type in the email address of the person you want to add. Next, select which of your pages you want this person to be able to access, and which role he or she will be assigned. For more information about roles, select Learn About Roles from the Default Role menu, which will help you further decide what level of access to grant the new person. Next, select any ad accounts to which your employee will have access. Finally, you can assign your employee to a product catalog if you have one set up. If not, click Skip. You should now see a confirmation that your invitation has been sent. It will be delivered to the email address that you entered in Step 1, and you'll receive notification when that person has accepted his or her new role. If at any time you need to change an admin's or employee's role, click Business Settings and then select People. #4: Add Ad Accounts There are three ways you can add Facebook ad accounts to B...

Local Social Media Marketing With Facebook and Instagram

Local Social Media Marketing With Facebook and Instagram

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

How do you promote your business locally? Are you using Facebook and Instagram? To explore how to reach a local customer base on social media, I interview Bruce Irving. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Bruce Irving, the host of the Smart Pizza Marketing podcast, where he helps local pizza restaurants master marketing. He's a former pizzeria owner and you can find him at SmartPizzaMarketing.com. Bruce explores why social media marketing is worthwhile for local businesses. You'll discover tips to get your local business started with social media video. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing for Local Business Bruce's Story Bruce has been in the pizza industry since he was 16 years old. He worked his way up and then partnered with someone to run his own pizza business. The restaurant did a pretty high volume of sales for their style of restaurant, which had 10 seats plus takeout and delivery. Starting in the late 1990s, Bruce and his partner used old marketing methods such as direct mail, which worked well until the mid-2000s. Around 2008, the effectiveness of that kind of marketing started to dwindle, so they tried marketing their restaurant on social media. Even as the economy struggled after the 2008 economic crash, their pizza business was successful and growing. When relatives and friends in the pizza business started asking how Bruce and his business partner used different types of marketing to grow, they began sharing their methods. Bruce decided he wanted to talk to other pizzeria operators so they could learn from each other. In 2015, Bruce started his podcast and the knowledge-gathering he did for it evolved into creating an agency that helps local pizza-specific restaurants run social media and digital advertising. For the last 16 months, Bruce has been running the agency full time, helping local pizzerias grow their business and get better results with online marketing. Listen to the show to discover why podcasting was a great way for Bruce to learn from other business owners while running his own pizza restaurant. Video in Social Media A pizzeria is a very visual style of restaurant. The cooks often work the pizza dough and put together pizzas in front of a big window because it's entertaining. Even more traditional restaurants are moving to the open-kitchen concept because the chef creating the food is part of the show. To bring this entertaining element to the web, Bruce encourages clients to do video. A lot of them shy away from video in the beginning, but it's important to become comfortable in front of the camera. Different styles of videos work in any business, not just restaurants. For instance, you can do tutorials. You can also give people a look behind the scenes. If you have the best pizza in town, show your fans why. Do you make your own dough? Do you use a special kind of sauce? Do you cut up all of your own vegetables? Showing what makes your restaurant special helps you compete with every other place in your neighborhood and the big chains. Your personality also differentiates you from your competitors. If you're a personable owner and can be charismatic in front of the camera, your personality (along with your products and services) separates you from other brands.   It's all in the sauce - the special Stanislaus Pizza Sauce married with PizzaMan Dan's secret blend of spices - which makes your PizzaMan Dan's pizza mouth watering delectable! TODAY ONLY - yes, MONDAY - we're celebrating our long time relationship with the family-owned Stanislaus Farms in Stanislaus Count...

Getting Started with Automated Email Marketing

by Sherice Jacob @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

Email marketing is one of those pivotal, game-changing facets of online marketing that nearly every serious marketer needs to not only know how to do — but do successfully. As you’ve learned to grow your business, you no doubt have come across email marketing jargon such as segments and drip feeds. But what does it […]

How to Map Behavioral Metrics Into Your Key Business Drivers

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

Digital marketing is a blessing to marketers because of the wealth of data it provides. Online marketers can analyze and dissect innumerable elements to gain a deeper understanding of the habits and preferences of their customers. As a result, they can effectively put themselves in their customers’ shoes and optimize the entire experience. This allows […]

6 Ways to Use Advanced Twitter Search for Increased Influence

6 Ways to Use Advanced Twitter Search for Increased Influence

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to be a recognized expert in your industry? Looking for relevant conversations to weigh in on? Using Twitter's Advanced Search to monitor keywords and conversations can help you connect with influencers and uncover opportunities for thought leadership. In this article you'll discover six ways to use Twitter's Advanced Search to increase your influence in your industry. Listen to this article: #1: Find Conversations to Participate In Doing a keyword search on Twitter is a quick and easy way to find out what people in your industry are talking about, identify accounts to follow, and discover new business opportunities. With Twitter's Advanced Search, you can create complex searches with keywords that are relevant to your industry. To start, choose three or four keywords that are relevant to your industry and use the Boolean search operator "OR" to create a single search for all of your terms. For example, search for "digital marketing" OR "digital marketing advice." Look at the search results to find conversations in your niche. Then join relevant discussions to offer expert advice and build meaningful connections with people in your industry. Use the OR operator to ensure that every key phrase or search term is relevant to your mission. Keep this list updated and weed out the keywords that aren't helping you find the best results. Soon you'll have a filtered list of conversations to review on a daily basis. You can also add keywords like "recommend" to find prospects looking for services you offer. You can also use a keyword search to optimize your own Twitter profile. Add keywords to your bio to help other users find you. Including key phrases (such as "public speaker" and "charity worker") may help you uncover new opportunities. #2: Monitor Hashtags for Media Opportunities You can follow specific hashtags and keywords to discover people who are looking for thoughtful comments or quotes. For example, the hashtag #journorequest is popular among journalists and industry writers. You can create an advanced search that pairs both #journorequest and your key industry terms ("skincare expert" or "facial expert," for example) to find opportunities for free coverage in print and online. Once you've uncovered opportunities through hashtag monitoring, reach out to users to share your expert insights. This helps you get media coverage for your business and create meaningful connections. #3: Connect and Converse With Industry Peers Your influence is often measured by the network you keep. Use Twitter's Advanced Search filters to find key contacts and people to follow in your industry. Filter Results by Account In Twitter's search box, search for a keyword (or group of keywords). Then to filter your results, click More Options and select Accounts to see only those accounts that contain your keywords. Once you create a tailored list of key industry contacts, follow those users, add them to a list, or use a monitoring tool like TweetDeck to track what they're saying. Filter Results by People You Follow You can also limit your search to only the users you follow. To do this, enter your search term (for example, "social media data"). Then filter your results by clicking More Options and selecting From People I Follow. Your search results will only include tweets that match your search query and are from the accounts you follow. Filter Results by Date You can add a date range to find conversations relevant to your topics of interest and occurring within the last few weeks from users you follow. This gives you the opportunity to add comments, share your insights, and show thought leadership within your online peer group. Filter Results by People You can also use Twitter search to find previous conversations you've had with your contacts. This is a great way to revive relationships and build camaraderie.

13 Instagram Marketing Tips From the Experts

13 Instagram Marketing Tips From the Experts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to improve your Instagram marketing? Are you interested in the latest tips and tools for Instagram? Instagram is a fast-growing platform and businesses are eager to establish a presence and encourage engagement on the network. We asked social media experts to share their hottest Instagram tips. Here’s what they had to say. Listen to this article: #1: Shoot Square Your Instagram feed is only as good as your photographs, so starting with high-quality photos makes your Instagram marketing more effective. One of the best ways to save time and compose better photos for Instagram is to shoot square photos. Many digital cameras and smartphones have this in their settings so it’s really easy to do. This lets you save time on cropping and ensures that the essential elements in the photo won't be cropped out later. Because shooting photos inside the Instagram app can be limiting, I like to use Camera Awesome by the SmugMug team on my iPhone (also available for Android users). Using this app, you can take fantastic photos using the grid to follow the rule of thirds. Peg Fitzpatrick is a speaker, social media strategist and co-author of The Art of Social Media. #2: Use a Customized Link Shortener to Track Traffic One of the most important things marketers need to know is how well their Instagram account is driving traffic and leads back to their website. Unfortunately, Google Analytics can’t accurately track this traffic when users visit your website from your mobile Instagram account. To monitor accurate click rates, I recommend businesses use a customized bit.ly link (or a link from another shortener) exclusively for the URL in their Instagram bio. Then you can check your bit.ly data to document how many clicks your Instagram account is actually sending to your website. Create a different bit.ly link each time you change the link for a new landing page, campaign or default page to continuously track successful traffic leads. Jenn Herman is a social media trainer, blogger and Instagram advocate. #3: Be Strategic With Your Bio Link For personal use, Instagram is fun and spontaneous. But if you want to use it as a marketing tool, you have to be a little more calculating with it. I suspect the businesses that are really killing it on Instagram (like Nordstrom, Starbucks, Nike and others) plan their posts well in advance. If you’re a smaller brand or a one-man show, you can still develop a great presence on Instagram. Use the link in your bio to connect to a landing page that holds the same posts you put on Instagram, and allows you to collect leads, promote your ecommerce site, gain subscribers to your blog, collect entries for a giveaway, etc. Jim Belosic is the CEO of ShortStack. #4: Cross-Promote Your Partners Cross-promote whenever you can! The trend on Instagram now is to share the love, so to speak, by tagging others or even by outright promoting other companies, products and services. Locally we have restaurants that serve beer from the many craft brewers in the area. Both the brewers and the restaurants take full advantage of Instagram by tagging each other. The brewers also support one another with tap takeovers, which are rich grounds for Instagram photos and tags. The results are threefold: higher recognition for everyone involved, increased followers (who in turn tag the businesses during visits) and increased traffic and sales for the local businesses. Lisa Karl is a partner and founder at Savvy Digital Business. #5: Take Advantage of Trending Hashtags Users can now use Instagram's Explore feature to find posts related to trending hashtags such as #LoveWins, #CanadaDay and #FullMoon. If these trending tags are relevant to your brand, include them in timely posts to aid discovery. On the topic of search, Instagram also introduced the ability to search by emoji.

Live Video Strategy: How to Create a Show That Engages

Live Video Strategy: How to Create a Show That Engages

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Interested in broadcasting live video? Have you considered starting a live video show? To explore how to create a successful live video show, I interview Luria Petrucci. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Luria Petrucci, a live video expert. She's the host of Live Streaming Pros, a live show dedicated to helping businesses produce professional live streams. She's helped big brands such as AT&T and Panasonic, and influencers such as Michael Hyatt, Amy Porterfield, and Pat Flynn. Luria explores four levels of broadcasting equipment. You'll discover how to create an engaging flow for your live show. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video Strategy Luria's Story Luria got started with video in 2005. She was one of the first video podcasters to create content for the video iPod. (This was before the iPhone and long before YouTube "became a thing.") Shortly thereafter, Luria started doing live video, too. By 2007, she was live-streaming from a professional studio and from mobile devices and began learning how live video creates a connection with her audience. Ever since, she's been doing a weekly or daily show. Before Periscope and Facebook Live, Luria's live-streaming tech included a NewTek TriCaster and Ustream. She also did some YouTube. Justin.tv (which is now Twitch) and Livestream were the other early platforms, although they focused more on business. Although Ustream focuses more on businesses now, it concentrated on creators back then. Luria enjoys seeing other people getting excited about going live, because she's believed in live video for so long. She says live video creates a strong relationship with her audience and is the reason her audience has stuck with her for 11 years through massive business changes, partnership changes, and all of the hard stuff that goes on in business. People tell her they've been watching her since day one. (Note: Back then, Luria was known as Cali Lewis.) Listen to the show to discover what tech Luria used in the early days, as well as what live video was like at the beginning. Why Consider Live Video Live video is the best marketing conversion tool Luria has ever seen because of its impact. When people are watching you on live video, they know you're not faking it. When you're selling something or trying to lead people into a funnel, live video is easy because of what Luria calls the "conversational call to action." Like most people, Luria has a hard time selling. People don't like to sell because they don't like to be sold to. The conversational call to action is really about helping people. You're letting them know you're there for them and will take care of them. When you offer something in a live video, it's easier to sell it because you're not really selling. When somebody asks a question, your answer proves the value of your products or services. Also, although the excitement for and accessibility of live video is new, its formulas and structure are proven. Listen to the show to hear what I love about live video. The Four Levels of Live Video Gear Luria explains what gear you need for live video in four levels. She calls level 1 the "selfie stream." You hold your mobile phone in your hand and the live video is raw, up-close, and personal. For level 2, add some gear to your mobile phone such as a microphone, video stabilizer, and a light. This gear adds a little polish to your video and removes the shakiness. Level 3 is going live from a computer with software like Wirecast. Finally, level 4 is for TV-quality video.

Content for Leads: How to Create Content That Spreads and Fills the Funnel

Content for Leads: How to Create Content That Spreads and Fills the Funnel

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create content? Are you looking to generate more leads? To learn how to get the most from your content, I interview Jason Miller. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jason Miller, the senior manager of content and social at LinkedIn Marketing Solutions. He's the author of Welcome to the Funnel: Proven Tactics to Turn Your Social and Content Marketing Up to 11. Jason is also an excellent photographer specializing in rock bands. Jason focuses on creating sharable content that also generates leads. You'll discover how content ties into influencer relationships and how to leverage it. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content for Leads How Jason got started in content and social Jason worked in the music industry before he decided to reinvent himself in the social space. He tried to bring social to his music label, but they weren't interested. So Jason quit, went back to school for training in SEO and digital marketing. He worked at a little startup called Market Tools, then Marketo and he's now at LinkedIn. Jason talks about his time at Marketo. He led global and content marketing and did the blog and the social channels himself when he first started. It was chaos, he recalls. Jason learned very quickly how to solve other marketers' problems and write about them, which is how he grew his blogging skills. "It was B2B marketing, which could be quite boring," Jason recalls. "I took what I call the George Costanza approach, where I do the exact opposite of what everybody else is doing." For example, if someone said to Jason that social media doesn't work in B2B, he would do the exact opposite and prove them wrong. After a tremendous amount of trial and error to find out what worked and scaling his content efforts, Jason was successful. Listen to the show to hear the backstory for Welcome to the Funnel. Build relationships that tie into content Jason believes it's essential to include influencers in your marketing strategy, especially in your content. When you first start building your presence, seek out thought leaders in the space. Figure out how to take their wisdom and feature it in your content. You'll add third-party validation and keep from talking too much about yourself. At the same time, you also get on their radar. They know you're helping them spread the word and eventually you can find mutual benefit. Listen to the show to learn how going to conferences helped Jason get into guest blogging.  How to create sharable content that generates leads Jason believes we don't need more content, we need more relevant content. He has a concept he started at Marketo and brought over to LinkedIn called, "The Big Rock." Basically you need to ask yourself what conversation you want to own, and then write the book on it. Jason suggests going from thinking like a publisher to actually publishing like a publisher. When Jason first got to LinkedIn, the question was, "How do I market on LinkedIn successfully?" Since the conversation was being owned by others, Jason decided to take it back. He wrote a 65-page book called The Sophisticated Marketer's Guide to LinkedIn. It was everything you wanted to know about marketing on LinkedIn, written very strategically. It was broad-reaching content gated for the purpose of collecting email addresses. It was great for lead generation, bringing people into the funnel, helping out fellow marketers and getting the word out. According to Jason,

Google Analytics and Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

Google Analytics and Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you track the return on your social media activity in Google Analytics? Want to discover some valuable shortcuts? To explore cool hacks for Google Analytics, I interview Annie Cushing. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Annie Cushing, Google Analytics expert and chief data officer at Outspoken Media digital marketing agency. She's a total analytics geek who loves teaching other marketers how to make the most of their analytics data. Annie explores Google Analytics, social reporting, dashboards, and more. You'll discover how to customize Google Analytics reports for yourself. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google Analytics and Social Media What's New in Google Analytics Starting May 15, 2017, Google Analytics will allow people to do remarketing across multiple devices. Annie explains that if someone visits your site on their mobile device and then comes back to it on their laptop, as long as they're logged into Google in both places, you'll be able to target them across their devices. This new capability is a huge step forward for remarketing audiences because few people shop only on their computer, tablet, or phone. Annie explains that Google previously relied on user IDs to offer remarketing features, but most businesses couldn't implement the technology very easily. Only advanced analysts could set it up for sites where users were highly incentivized to log in. Because most businesses don't have sites like that, this new ability is groundbreaking. Annie says one issue she regularly sees with clients is they seldom use Google Analytics for retargeting. Instead, they use AdWords and DoubleClick. However, Google Analytics enables marketers to get much more granular with targeting. For instance, you can serve an ad to someone who visited a certain page but didn't convert or to someone who put something in a cart but didn't check out. Hopefully, multiple-device retargeting will incentivize more people to take advantage of Google Analytics. Listen to the show to discover how a retargeting ad saved Annie last Christmas. Google Optimize Google recently announced they were releasing Google Optimize, a free tool for A/B testing. For example, say you want to experiment with product page design, such as the placement of the price or Buy button or different font colors or text. In an A/B test, you run two versions of your page and compare how each version performs. Up until this point, Optimizely has been the industry standard. At Social Media Examiner, we use Visual Website Optimizer. Annie believes Google Optimize is perfect for small- to mid-sized or even large businesses. (Google Optimize 360 is the enterprise-level version.) Annie recommends that businesses get what they can from the free version first. Then as your organization develops more sophisticated testing needs (for instance, reducing the bounce rate or increasing the conversion rate), consider paying for more advanced features. Annie also notes that Google Optimize is user-friendly. To move things around, you simply drag and drop. You don't have to ask a developer to customize the page for you. Listen to the show to hear my description of how optimizing tools work. Ad Blockers and Do-not-track Technology Annie explains how ad blockers and do-not-track tools impact your analytics data differently. If you run display ads on AdWords, then ad blockers will impact your overall effectiveness. As people choose to block ads, impressions and conversions will decrease. A lot of publishers,

8 Ways to Optimize Facebook Ad Targeting

8 Ways to Optimize Facebook Ad Targeting

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Could your Facebook ad targeting use some refinement? Looking for new ways to reach your ideal audience with Facebook ads? Facebook's new targeting options help you improve the conversion rate of your Facebook ads. In this article you'll discover eight ways to optimize your Facebook ad targeting. Listen to this article: #1: Narrow Lookalike Audiences With Interests If you enjoy a high amount of traffic to your blog or have a wide list of existing customers, using lookalike audiences is a great tactic. Unfortunately, in many cases, lookalike audiences are too large. The minimum lookalike audience in the U.S., for example, is around 1 million users. To find a smaller and more focused audience for your ad, test your ads using different interests. When you find the right combination of lookalike audience and interest, you'll have a more targeted audience and reduce the cost per click/conversion. Here's how to combine interests with a lookalike audience. First, choose the lookalike audience you want to use. For example, in the image below I chose Lookalike (US, 1%) with 1.9M people. Then scroll down to Detailed Targeting and add interests one by one. Test the option above versus the traditional solo-flying lookalike audience, which is much broader. See if you're managing to hit the sweet spot inside what's already a well-defined audience. Refining Interests With Companies and Blogs Your options for defining an audience by their interests have changed significantly in the last year. In the early days of interests targeting, the interests you could choose were limited and usually on a high level (for example, Running, Marathons, Ironman Triathlon). Now you can define companies, blogs and even influencers as interests. Rather than use broad terms, you can choose interests like RunKeeper, Nike+ Fuelband, Jeff Galloway and Runner's World Blog. These kinds of interests typically perform much better than broad terms. If your audience is too small, try choosing dozens of companies, apps, influencers and blogs. Here's an example of an old high-level audience combination. Here's a recommended mix of smaller audiences. You can start out broad and work your way to more niche interests, or start small and expand. Whatever tactic you choose, make sure to give each method a chance to gain enough impressions to measure it accurately. #2: Expand the Age Range One common practice for defining your target audience is to choose the right ages based on your product definitions or Facebook Insights. For example, when building an ad campaign for college students, most advertisers will pick an age range of 18-22. A great way to lower your cost per conversion is to expand your age range. To test a wider age range, try one of these options: Choose an age range of 10 years (for example, 18-28) Choose an age range of 30-40 years (for example, 18-58) You may be surprised to see that Facebook still shows your ad mainly to your target audience while the cost goes down. #3: Use the Must Also Match Feature Last October, Facebook launched a new feature called Detailed Targeting. This allows you to choose "must also match" interests rather than just a group of interests. Several experiments in different categories and industries have shown that adding "must also match" interests leads to a more engaged audience and reduces click/conversion costs by up to 25%. For example, if you choose Twitter as an interest and Social Media Marketing as a "must also match" interest, it will work better than choosing both interests as usual or just one interest. To test what works for you, change the interest in the Must Also Match at Least One of the Following box. Try adding two or three interests, and keep close tabs to see if your conversion rates improve. If not, you went one interest too far. #4: Exclude Website Visitors

Small Business Social: How to Build Relationships

Small Business Social: How to Build Relationships

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media to attract and engage customers? Are you wondering how you can use social media to market your business and drive sales? To learn how you can develop relationships with social media and content, I interview Jeff Korhan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jeff Korhan, author of Built-In Social: Essential Social Marketing Practices for Every Small Business. He also trains and coaches small businesses on social media marketing at Jeff Korhan.com. Jeff shares his knowledge of and experience with social marketing from running his own small business, and how you can implement it into your business. You'll learn about the 'Social Marketing Process' and the importance of collaboration and cooperation. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Build Relationships With Content and Social Media What did the experience of running a local landscaping company teach you about social marketing? When Jeff first started his local landscaping business, he had just completed 10 years in the corporate world and was fairly ignorant of how small businesses operated. He started to research and study the industry he was about to move into and discovered by accident that small businesses were less formal than the corporate world. Even back then, people wanted to get to know you. Today it's something that can easily be done with social media. You'll find out what Jeff discovered about consumers and why it was the key to getting his business off the ground. Jeff explains how going door-to-door led him down the road to content marketing. Not only did he spend a lot of time with customers, he also spent time reaching out to other people in his industry. The one thing they all had in common was that they all used Yellow Pages for advertising. This led him to explore other options to stand out from his competitors. You'll discover what kind of advertising worked for Jeff and an example of an ad he used. Jeff figured out before the age of social media that he could get business by educating his consumers with his expertise. He started to look for a way to differentiate his business from local competitors and found out that there were a lot of unanswered questions. You'll find out what you need to do to resonate with your customers to help build your business. Listen to the show to find out why you need to start thinking of how you can be the source of answers and how educating people can make you an authority. The Social Marketing Process  Jeff explains the 3-step Social Marketing Process, which is: Content attraction Social engagement Sales conversion The first component is that content attracts attention. You should start at the beginning. Use content to attract the attention of people to help build an audience. You need to publish the information online, where people can find it. The second component is to engage with people and develop relationships using social media. Over time, once you have developed trust, this is when the third component, the sales conversion, almost becomes a byproduct if you've got a sales process in place and you know how to convert people to whatever it is you're selling. Jeff finds that some businesses don't have a reliable sales process. In his book, he writes about how to develop that process and if you have one, how to make it even better. When it comes to knowing what kind of content to produce,

5 Steps to Improve Your Customer Service Using Twitter

5 Steps to Improve Your Customer Service Using Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do your customers use Twitter to ask questions and request support? Need a better way to manage your Twitter support? By following the steps in this article, you'll deliver a superior customer service experience on Twitter. In this article, you'll discover how to create a better Twitter customer service process for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Create Internal and External Policies Create two policies: one to clarify what's expected from internal staff, and the other to address customer expectations and how to ensure their concerns are being heard. Some key considerations and questions to answer include: What Is the Journey When People Tweet You or Your Brand? Think about the entire journey from the tweet to response and then action. Without someone constantly monitoring Twitter, it can be very easy to miss tweets sent to your brand. How Will You Respond and What Will You Say? Customer service can be tricky. Often tweets are sent from heightened states of emotion. Before reacting, set up an internal policy for team members to outline how to react to any tweets that are time-sensitive, have delicate subject matter, or involve a complaint. Decide whether to discuss customer concerns within Twitter or move them offline. Twitter's tweaks to its direct messaging platform mean you can choose to allow anyone to direct message you, even when you aren't following each other. This feature is off by default, but you can turn it on within your Security and Privacy settings. This is a great way to allow customers to get in touch in a more private way. Secondly, Twitter now allows the creation of deep links within tweets. This allows you to embed calls to action such as "Send a private message." By offering this within a discourse, users can move seamlessly between regular tweets, mentions, and private messaging. Customer service is more ubiquitous. Lastly, crafting the perfect customer service response can be difficult to do in 140 characters. Many brands and businesses use tools that allow you to link to longer tweets. For customers, however, this disrupts the experience of staying within Twitter to deal with the issue. One way to get around the 140-character limit is to use a simple Twitter hack that allows you to link a series of replies. Once you write a tweet, click Reply to that tweet, remove your Twitter handle that appears automatically (you don't need it), and type out the second response. When users click on one of the tweets or choose View Conversation, they'll see the string of replies. Then the conversation is joined up and you haven't had to go into private messaging or another tool to get around the character limit. This is a great Twitter hack for customer service, where you often need more space to take care of your customer. What Is Your External Policy? As great as it is to get your team members all on the same page for customer service, it's important to inform your customers so they know what to expect. If your Twitter handle is answered around the clock, great! However, you can also set hours of business where your team can respond quickly to queries on Twitter, and then add this information to your Twitter bio or as a pinned tweet. That way, customers know where to turn at any hour of the day and are given an option for any high-priority communication. #2: Assign Role Responsibility Whose job is it to manage your customer service online? If the responsibility lies with just one person, it's fairly easy. However, if there are multiple customer service advocates for your brand, or the number changes on weekends and holidays, then you need a structure for areas of responsibility. You can use a calendar or Google sheet to assign responsibility and show who's in charge and when. You can enhance it by using color-coding or a tagging system. If you use a customer service tool, it's even easier.

Twitter for Business: How to Use Twitter to Grow Your Influence

Twitter for Business: How to Use Twitter to Grow Your Influence

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter for your business? Are you wondering how to use Twitter to grow your online influence? To learn how to best use Twitter for your business, I interview Joel Comm for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Joel Comm, author of numerous books including Twitter Power 2.0 and So, What Do You Do? He's also the host of The Joel Comm Show, a business podcast. Joel shares how he uses Twitter to grow his platform. You'll learn how to grow a quality Twitter following, and which types of content work best. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter for Business So, "What do you do?" Joel explains how he asks questions and helps people discover what their core is. This can include passions, talents, skills, abilities and personality, which are used to bring value to the world around them. This is how you find ultimate fulfillment. Listen to the show to find out the importance of starting a conversation. Why marketers should pay close attention to Twitter Joel explains how Twitter is still relevant. They have 200 million active users every day, which is really impressive when up against Facebook's 1 billion–plus accounts. The thing that made Twitter cool in the first place is its simplicity. It remains relevant because it's where people gather. Joel calls it the virtual water cooler. Twitter is a place for short conversations, which can be extremely powerful and relevant. Joel says that the water cooler strategy is to engage. You'll find out the two different ways that Joel engages on Twitter and why significance is so important. The most essential part is to be authentic. You can connect in the moment, which can be greater than you might imagine. Joel describes how pictures are an excellent use of Twitter. He likes to tweet from Instagram and can post from his Instagram account to Facebook, Twitter, Tumblr and Foursquare, all at the same time. Twitter only allows 140 characters, so when you use pictures, it can be a lot of bonus words. Even mundane pictures can get a lot of interaction. Listen to the show to hear an example of a picture that Joel used that made him realize there's a lot of power in mundane tweets. How Joel uses Twitter today to grow his platform  Joel has started to check out more of what people on his stream have to say and then reshares their content. He does this more than tweeting his own original content. It's the giver mentality. A couple of Twitter's strengths are the retweet and the favorite. They're great opportunities to focus on the value that others bring. There are days when Joel doesn't tweet at all. Other days, he can get 5 or 6 tweets in. It all depends on what's happening that particular day. You should never just tweet for the sake of tweeting. When it comes to a tweeting strategy, you'll discover why it's important to be true to yourself and be aware of the types of businesses Twitter works best for. Listen to the show to find out why Joel generally uses the standard retweet over a customized retweet. How to grow a quality Twitter following Joel advises starting with absolutely nothing. If you are new on Twitter and don't know where to begin, Joel recommends you start with a hashtag that is in an area of interest. The next step is to discover people who are talking about your personal or business interests. As entrepreneurs, there is typically an overlap of the two. Once you start to follow people,

Proven Retail Marketing Tactics To Boost Sales

by admin @

Retailers are looking to boost sales, especially now towards the second half of the summer. Traditionally speaking, months such as June and August are slower online commerce months. Many are on vacation, outside, and spending less time online. To help brands out, here are proven retail marketing tactics to boost sales. These tips are for […]

The post Proven Retail Marketing Tactics To Boost Sales appeared first on .

How to Build a Lead Magnet Into Your Product to Fuel Growth

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

If you’re looking for new ways to prospect new business for your product or service, a lead magnet could be a valuable investment. A lead magnet is essentially a gateway drug or a bribe to coax your target audience into your marketing or sales funnel. You ‘bribe’ a prospect with a specific piece of value […]

Marketing Day: Facebook Instant Articles update, Google Display Network & more

by Amy Gesenhues @ Marketing Day – Marketing Land

Here's our recap of what happened in online marketing today, as reported on Marketing Land and other places across the web.

Marketing Day: AMP links at large, August’s top 10 YouTube video ads & FTC news

by Amy Gesenhues @ Marketing Day – Marketing Land

Here’s our recap of what happened in online marketing today, as reported on Marketing Land and other places across the web. From Marketing Land: How Facebook’s, Instagram’s and Snapchat’s audience size estimates compareSep 15, 2017 by Tim Peterson Facebook’s and Snapchat’s self-serve ad-buying tools estimate the size of advertisers’ target audiences. Here is how those […]

How Gary Vaynerchuk Turned a Video Series Into a Popular Book

How Gary Vaynerchuk Turned a Video Series Into a Popular Book

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use videos to enhance your brand? Want to find ways to grow your business? To discover how he created a video series that exploded his personal brand and his business, I interview Gary Vaynerchuk. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Gary Vaynerchuk, CEO of VaynerMedia, host of the #AskGaryVee Show and author of Jab, Jab, Jab, Right Hook. His brand-new book is called #AskGaryVee: One Entrepreneur's Take on Leadership, Social Media, and Self-Awareness. Gary will explore how he created a video show that became an audio podcast and a book. You'll discover Gary's thoughts on what's hot in social. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How Gary Vaynerchuk Turned a Video Series Into a Popular Book Gary's big dreams Gary recalls that from a business and entrepreneurial standpoint, he's always dreamed big. At 14 years old, he started working for his dad bagging ice for $2 an hour and by his third day on the job was plotting how to open 4,000 wine stores. Although a lot of people think Wine Library TV grew his business, Gary clarifies that he'd been in business for over a decade and built a $50 million+ operation before he started Wine Library TV and talking about marketing. Gary launched Wine Library TV on February 1, 2006, which was less than a year after YouTube had been created. He says that while the show didn't really pop until the summer of 2007, he felt there were enough comments to make it worthwhile. He notes that Ze Frank and Rocketboom were also making some noise around the same time. Gary's patience paid off and when he ended up on the Conan O'Brien Show, Lifehacker, TechCrunch, and Diggnation, everything exploded. Listen to the show to discover how and when Gary discovered he was good at being a personality. The start of #AskGaryVee During the summer of 2014, D Rock (David Rock) emailed Gary, asking to make a film about him. Gary agreed and before the film even aired, Gary asked David to work for him full time doing video content. Then on a random day a year and a half ago, Gary invited David and Steve Unwin from his editorial team into his office to shoot the first episode of #AskGaryVee, in which Gary answered random questions people asked him on Twitter. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=76d0lQiCqNI When asked how the format for the show came about, Gary shares that he felt his keynotes were stagnating because he was telling the same story over and over. To get out of that rut, he started pushing event organizers to let him add a Q&A component to his presentations. For example, during a 45-minute keynote, he would do 30 minutes of speech and 15 minutes of Q&A. Gary believes his ability to answer any question about business, social media, technology, or branding off the cuff is what separates him from other speakers. Gary realized he didn't need to travel to answer questions and he could use the video show to deliver something he was really good at. Then, he made the decision to use it to get to the point where his keynote speeches were solely Q&A sessions. Gary explains that the format for #AskGaryVee is simple. They go into an all-glass conference room at VaynerMedia, Gary sits down in front of the camera, and India asks him five questions that come from social media (Snapchat, Instagram, Facebook), which Gary answers in one take. Any edited spots, which are rare, go to black and white so they're clearly recognizable. In addition to #AskGaryVee, Gary recently started #DailyVee, which is a day-in-the-life vlog that gets edited into episodes to help entrep...

Freak Success: A Dialog With Chris Brogan

Freak Success: A Dialog With Chris Brogan

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you feel like you don't fit in? Are you wondering how you can succeed in business by being different? To learn about how your unique qualities can help you achieve success in the business world, I interview Chris Brogan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Chris Brogan, publisher and CEO of Owner Magazine, co-author of The Impact Equation and host of The Owner's Mind podcast. His latest book is called The Freaks Shall Inherit the Earth. Chris shares why some freaks are successful in business and how you can follow their lead. You'll discover how to face your fears, run with your ideas and put them into practice. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Freak Success The motivation behind the book and who the freaks are Chris says that it was his children who were the motivation behind his new book, The Freaks Shall Inherit the Earth. He explains the reasons why he believes that neither of them is suitable for real employment, and therefore wrote the book for them. During the process, he realized that it doesn't only include his story of how he was a freak who never fit in, but there are a lot of people out there exactly like him. Chris believes that there is an economic shift that's close to happening, and that cottage industries are coming back in a world of Dollar Shave Club. A lot of people aren't necessarily saying "I hope IBM hires me," they want to forge their own path. An example is Jake Thompson who has an apparel brand called Compete Everyday, which is a similar premise to Life Is Good. You'll hear Chris' definition of the word freak, and why they choose their own adventure. Listen to the show to hear Chris' story about the original Choose Your Own Adventure books. Why some freaks are successful in business and others are not Chris explains why Richard Branson is successful for being a freak. One of his very first businesses was a company that sold records in the UK. When he told people he would distribute records overseas, he discovered that he could get them for a lot less money. So he went on to resell them in the UK and undercut all of the other retailers. He has since gone on to own 400 successful companies, lives on an island of his own creation and has been knighted. You'll discover why Richard Branson is Chris' biggest business idol. A true freak is someone who stays true to what they are passionate about, even if they don't fit within the box. Then you have people who are weird for weird's sake. This is the type of person who looks for attention, but it's not really who they are. Chris gives an example of violinist Lindsey Stirling, who is doing extremely well. She has 2.3 million likes on Facebook and has a huge group that follows and connects with her. Although what she does has no part in modern pop culture, she has stuck with her love of the violin and brought her own energy to it. It's a way for her to put her own story out there. The freaks who are successful actually stay pretty close to who they are. They have something to offer and help others at the same time. One way to find out if you're a freak is to consider the quote by Ralph Waldo Emerson, "Do not go where the road may lead, but go where there is no road and leave a trail." You'll find that people react differently to it. Some people find it too scary to think about. Listen to the show to find out why most people want instructions and feel fear if they hav...

How to Enhance Customer Experience With Social Media

How to Enhance Customer Experience With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have happy customers? Want to use social media to help keep them that way? Giving people an awesome experience on social media increases customer satisfaction and builds long-term loyalty. In this article you'll find five ways to improve your customers' experience with social media. Listen to this article: #1: Show Your Gratitude To keep your customers happy and gain a true edge over the competition, be sure your customers know they're seen and appreciated. Proactively reach out to fans and followers on a regular basis. Make your message truly resonate by keeping it personal. Innocent Drinks has more than 200,000 Twitter followers, and they take time to reply to and retweet fans who mention them. A treat is a great method to show your customers gratitude. Do customers regularly order from your web shop? Send them a thank-you note on social media. You can even offer them a small incentive, such as a personalized discount on their favorite items. While this will boost traffic to your website, your customers' happiness level will get an even greater lift. #2: Ask for Your Fans' Opinions Since the rise of social media, it's become a lot easier to reach out to customers and incorporate their preferences into your products and services. Your fans, especially your brand advocates, love to share their thoughts on their beloved products. So give them something to chime in about. #SamsoniteXLiberty - B-Lite or Cosmolite? pic.twitter.com/QV9CWTiMuW — Samsonite (@MySamsonite) June 26, 2015 One of the easiest, most straightforward means of asking for fan feedback is to create a short poll. While asking these kinds of questions on your website might be distracting for fans, social networks are the perfect arena for them. #3: Integrate Feedback When you stay in touch with your customers on social media, it's easy to see what does and doesn't resonate with them. General Mills learned through listening to their customers online and monitoring the right keywords on social media that families weren't just cooking with Pillsbury Dough. They also use it to make shapes and designs for fun as a family activity. By studying these insights, General Mills revitalized their brand and started focusing on the product's family activity value. This Pillsbury Dough holiday commercial is true to the brand. Gathering feedback is key, but it's meaningless if you don't do anything with it. Create a document or spreadsheet with all customer feedback, and then separate suggestions and complaints. Integrate the suggestions, deal with complaints (see #3), but also add them to your document so you can keep track of successful ways to handle them in the future. Review customer feedback regularly and integrate it into your brand activities. #4: Solve Issues Promptly Another way to keep customers happy and show them you care is to solve any issues promptly, whether it's a question or complaint. That means constantly monitoring social media accounts so you can see comments and reply as soon as possible. Set up a unique company policy with a step-by-step program to showcase how you want to handle complaints. Also, depending on the type of business you're in, decide how to rectify certain situations. For example, if someone is unhappy with your service, do you give a refund or a discount? Take it a step further and try to understand why your customer had an issue or question to begin with, and keep track of how frequently he or she contacts your business. When you make an unhappy customer into a happy one, you typically get a brand advocate as a result. Also, if your business finds itself in a social media crisis, no matter what the type or source, own up to it and address it immediately. Your customers' patience, and the customer experience in general, gets challenged the most during problem times. Identify keywords and set up alerts to stay on top of the situation.

Blog to Book to Business: How to Live Your Dream

Blog to Book to Business: How to Live Your Dream

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you dream of writing a book? Are you wondering how publishing a book can help you grow your business? To learn how you can combine your passion with your business, I interview Jeff Goins for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jeff Goins, a blogger who followed his passion and amassed 200,000 monthly followers and published three books—all very quickly. His books include You Are a Writer, Wrecked and The In-Between. Jeff shares how he achieved his dream of becoming a writer, while building a successful business. You'll learn what it takes to jump from blog to book and why you should start now. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blog to Book to Business What do you tell people you do for a living? Jeff typically tells people he's a writer, although he does a lot of other things. He finds it easier to tell people that, and it allows him to own his identity. Jeff called himself a writer well before he was writing. It allowed him to step into the title and it reminds him of how far he has come. Listen to the show to hear why many aspiring authors don't own their dreams. The story of dreams and fears Jeff explains that he went solo about 8-9 months ago, but it has taken him about 3 years to get to this stage. He originally started with a blog, which turned into a side business. It wasn't until the end of last year that he realized he was making enough money that his wife didn't have to work anymore. He eventually quit his job at the beginning of this year to become a full-time writer, blogger and speaker. Jeff's blog, Goins Writer, isn't his first blog. Up to this point, he had attempted eight other blogs, all of which failed. It was these failures that prepared Jeff to persevere. He eventually set up his personal blog, where he talks about writing and his own struggles. This was an attempt to learn how to build a platform so he could get published and share his journey with others. You'll hear why Jeff forced himself into writing a personal blog and why he made the decision to give it two years. Listen to the show to find out what fuels Jeff's writing. The importance of writing for more popular blogs When he started a blog, Jeff did the relationship thing first. You'll discover what he did to reach out to the people he admired and why they were a huge influence when it came to the launch of the Goins Writer blog. Once he had seen the power of this in action, he was able to partner with communicators who had audiences that he wanted to connect with. Within the first year of his blog's launch, Jeff wrote over 100 articles on 100 websites. He believes it was the single best strategy for building his audience. Every multi-author blog out there constantly looks for exceptional talent and it's a win-win for both parties. It was one of the keys to Jeff's success. Jeff had listened to people like Jon Morrow, who had essentially done the same thing. Jon didn't have a blog for years. Instead he established himself first as a guest author for other blogs, including CopyBlogger and ProBlogger. So before he even wrote a single post on his own blog, he already had an email list of about 13,000 subscribers. Listen to the show to hear what Jeff discovered when he gave away his best content. Making money When Jeff launched his blog, he had a day job working for a nonprofit organization. His blog at the time was not making any money.

6 Tips to Get Your Business Started on Social Media

6 Tips to Get Your Business Started on Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to create a business presence on social media? Looking for tips to get started? Setting up a good foundation on social media can help you build visibility and connections for your business. In this article you'll discover six tips to get your business started on social media. Listen to this article: #1: Create Profiles on Multiple Social Platforms Social media-friendly businesses don't simply create a Facebook page or Twitter account and leave it at that. They target multiple platforms, including LinkedIn, Instagram, Pinterest and perhaps even Tumblr, too. From the outside, it may seem unnecessary to have an account on each of these channels, but from an SEO perspective, it absolutely is. When potential clients do a Google search for your business name, you want them to see a full list of your social media profiles in addition to your website. Chances are they'll click through to read your reviews, see how many followers you have and maybe (hopefully) even ask a question. KnowEm is a quick, easy way to find out if your business name is available on specific social networks. Enter your business name in the search box, and the tool will search for your name across different platforms. There's also a special category for business networks. #2: Fill Out Your Profiles Completely It's important to fill out your social profiles completely. Incomplete or inactive social media business profiles give visitors little reason to like or follow your business. And inactivity is likely to have the same effect. You'd be surprised how many social profiles are incomplete or inactive for months on end. When filling out your social profiles, keep these questions in mind: What will people gain by following you? Remember that people are busy, so you need to give them a reason to follow you. Do your profile summaries and descriptions include the who, what, where and why of your business? Also, make sure that your contact information is clearly visible. #3: Allow Blog Comments Commenting systems such as Facebook Comments, Livefyre and Disqus make it easy for people to interact with your content through social media. Each system has its advantages. Livefyre is ideal if you want to encourage discussion. It's used by popular websites like Hootsuite, CNET and New York Magazine. Disqus gives you strong moderation features, requiring users to create an account prior to posting comments. It's a great choice for business bloggers. Facebook Comments is the best choice if you get most of your engagement through Facebook, and it allows for direct Facebook shares. #4: Add Share Buttons to Your Blog The easier you make it for visitors to share your content, the more likely it that they'll share your content. That's why it's important for blogs to have social media sharing buttons installed. Include share buttons on your blog posts, home page, landing pages and anywhere else that provides value to visitors. For articles or other high-value content, try placing share buttons at the top, bottom and side of the page. #5: Connect With Your Followers Don't forget that social media is all about being social. If you only post about your products and services in an attempt to generate sales, you'll likely hear crickets in return. Your message won't be heard on social media unless you're actively speaking with people. It's not necessary to reply to every comment of course, but at least try to stimulate engagement by responding to questions or providing further value when and where you can. This is called proactive engagement, and it should be an important part of your business's social media plan. Follow these key guidelines when interacting with customers through social media: Show some personality. Be lighthearted and humorous, but also serious when it really matters. People buy from people, so the more you show your brand's human side,

4 Ways to Use Dark Facebook Posts for Business

4 Ways to Use Dark Facebook Posts for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to target a segment of your Facebook audience? Have you considered dark Facebook posts? Dark (unpublished) posts are a great way to tailor different messages to various audiences without posting multiple messages to your page timeline. In this article you'll discover four ways to use dark Facebook posts for your business. Why Dark Posts Before getting into how to use dark Facebook posts, it's important to understand what dark posts really are, and just as importantly, what they are not. Dark posts (also known as unpublished posts) are not the same thing as targeted posts, but they do have much in common. They both allow you to promote posts to specific fans of your page. However, there are two main differences. Listen to this article: First, targeted posts allow you to target an audience based only on parameters such as gender, relationship status, educational status and so on. With targeted posts, you can base your targeting on a variety of parameters. Dark posts, on the other hand, allow you to use keywords (for example, specific job titles) for targeting. The second, and biggest, differentiator is that while both types of posts will show up in the targeted fans' news feeds, dark posts publish without showing up on your page's wall itself. How to Create Dark Posts in Power Editor 1. Log in to Power Editor, and choose Manage Pages from the drop-down menu in the top-left corner. 2. In the left column, select the page for which you're creating the post. 3. In the main area of Power Editor, click the Create Post button. Next, you'll see the Create Unpublished Page Post dialog box. 4. In the top right of the dialog box, choose the post type (Link, Photo, Video, Status or Offer), and then fill in the details for your post. Make sure to select This Post Will Only Be Used as an Ad (in the lower-left corner) so the post won't appear on your Facebook page. 5. Next, choose interest categories and/or add keywords for specific interests. Then click Create Post. The post is saved to your list of posts, and a half-moon symbol appears to the left of the saved post, indicating it hasn't been published yet. 6. When you're ready to publish your post, select it from the list and click Create Post. The key point to remember with dark posts is that you can target specific fans, but you aren't crowding your wall with multiple posts. Hence, these posts are "dark." Now that you understand what dark posts are and how to create them, here are some tips for making the most of them. #1: Reach Fan Segments by Targeting Interests There are distinct interest groups that your community members will fall into and with which they will identify. If you target these groups using text that highlights their interests, your community members will feel like you're speaking directly to them. Suppose that you manage a pizza parlor and you plan to introduce a brand-new pizza next month. Different aspects of that new pizza (for example, the price, the gluten-free crust, Thai seasonings, etc.) will appeal to different segments of your audience. In this case you might create several variations of a post to target different attributes. Because you don't want a bunch of similar posts showing up on your wall, your best option is to use dark posts to target segments of fans. Once the posts are out there, you're able to gather data on engagement rates. Use the data to decide which particular post is worth sharing. You can then promote it on your wall for all of your fans to see. #2: Run Micro-Campaigns A solid social strategy requires big-picture thinking and thoughtful adherence to the core values you want associated with your brand. But this strategy can sometimes be too restrictive if you want to promote specific products to targeted segments. Suppose that you own an online shoe store. You have four new product lines to launch that appeal to four different segments: women...

Advanced Blogging: How to Go Big With Your Blog

Advanced Blogging: How to Go Big With Your Blog

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a blog for your business? Are you ready to take your blogging to the next level? To explore how to build your blog readership, I interview Darren Rowse for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Darren Rowse, the world's leading authority on blogging. He authored the book ProBlogger and founded two popular blogs: Digital Photography School and ProBlogger. Darren has been blogging since 2002 and his work has inspired millions of people. Darren shares how he built a mega-blog with millions of monthly readers. You'll discover how to attract more readers, engage your audience and monetize your blog. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Advanced Blogging How Darren started blogging In 2002 Darren came across a blog for the first time and knew right away it was a medium he wanted to explore. Almost immediately, he started his first blog. Darren explains that he had no background in technology or writing, just a fascination with community and communication. He developed an audience for his personal blog over the next year and a half, writing about a variety of niche topics (photography, spirituality, movies, politics). When his audience "complained" that there was too much variety, Darren split the topics up into different blogs. From there, Darren began to experiment with making money from blogging. It evolved from a hobby into a part-time job, then grew into a full-time business. Listen to the show to hear how many blogs Darren launched over the years. Why it's never too late to start blogging When Darren first started blogging, he looked at the big bloggers and thought he was too late to start. At that point, the big names had only been blogging for a year or two. However, Darren says new bloggers are breaking through all the time. More blogs mean greater opportunities to network and the ability to grow faster, especially if you can get on the radar of an influencer in your niche. While there may be a ton of bloggers out there, Darren explains that there's nobody who has your exact set of experiences, opinions, stories, skills and perspectives, and that's what sets you apart. If you can harness your uniqueness, there's certainly a way to get noticed. Listen to the show to hear how blogging in your niche will serve you well now and in the future. Digital Photography School, then and now Darren started Digital Photography School in 2006. It evolved from one of his previous blogs—a digital camera review blog. It was quite profitable, Darren explains, but not particularly satisfying. He wanted a blog about photography that he enjoyed writing—where he could build a relationship with his readers and answer common photography questions. When the site launched, Darren wrote all of the blog content himself (two to three posts per week), focusing on evergreen content and throwing shareable content into the mix. It was on a free theme, boot strapped, and gradually began to rank in Google and develop a following. He monetized using AdSense and Amazon affiliate marketing. A photography enthusiast, Darren says he's the guy in your circle of friends who people ask to photograph parties because they can't afford a real photographer. He's also the one everyone comes to before they buy a camera. He started the site writing beginner-level content. As the site developed, he hired professional photographers to write for the more advanced audience. Now,

8 Twitter Tips to Improve Your Twitter Marketing

8 Twitter Tips to Improve Your Twitter Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your Twitter marketing working? Do you want more engagement for your tweets? Knowing how to write your tweets and when to publish them can increase visibility, boost engagement and drive traffic to your site. In this article you'll discover eight tips to deliver better tweets. Listen to this article: #1: Tweet Without Links Research shows that tweets without links get more engagement. Remember that not everything you tweet has to have a link. If you limit the number of links you share on Twitter, you'll add value to the ones you do. For example, I tweeted this same quote with and without a link. The one without the link got more engagement. Twitter is an excellent platform to build your brand and create trust, so spend time developing relationships with your followers rather than just sharing a lot of links. Plus, when you tweet fewer links, the people who trust you know whatever links you choose to share are likely worth clicking. #2: Use the Right Hashtags If you want to get noticed, add hashtags that give your tweets context. It's important not to overdo it with hashtags, however. Handy tools like Hashtagify and RiteTag can help you find the right hashtags to use. Find Hashtags With Hashtagify Hashtagify allows you to search for a hashtag you want to use. In the Search box, type in your hashtag (socialmedia, for example) and press Enter. The results let you see the most popular related hashtags. By default, you see the results in Basic Mode view, which looks like a mind map. Click the Table Mode button to see the related hashtags ranked in order of popularity. You can use any of these alternative hashtags or combine several of them for each tweet. Check Hashtag Relevance With RiteTag Once you determine what hashtags you want to use, use a tool like RiteTag to find out how relevant they are. Go to RiteTag and sign in with (and authorize) your Twitter account. Then click the New button at the top of the page. In the Compose New Tweet box, type in your tweet. You'll notice that when you add hashtags, RiteTag gives you a color-coded rating for each hashtag in real time. Green is good, blue is cool and red is overused. RiteTag also has a Chrome extension that shows the tool's codes and analytics for your tweets whenever you use Twitter, Buffer, Hootsuite or another platform to compose or schedule a tweet. Using Hashtagify and RiteTag together is a great way to find effective hashtags for your tweets to get the most visibility and reach. Use these tools to do research and then build a library of hashtags for your future tweets. #3: Add Images for Shared Links It's no surprise that tweets with images stand out and get more engagement than tweets without images. Fortunately, there are a variety of tools you can use to find the right images to use in your tweets. Twitshot is an online tool you can use in any browser that makes it easy to find images to use when you share links. It's also available as a Chrome extension and iOS app. Compose your tweet in the Twitshot tweet box and paste in the URL you want to share. Twitshot then searches for and lets you see all possible images that go with that link. Select one of the available images or upload your own image. Everyone knows that tweets with images stand out, but not everyone takes the time to add them. Consistently incorporating images will improve your engagement. #4: Tweet With the Proper Format To compose a tweet in the proper format, you need to have all of the individual elements in the correct order. Start your tweet with text and then add a link. Make sure to include the attribution with @mentions if applicable. Then add hashtags and insert your image. Now that you know the rules for composing a tweet, you can break them for effect. Come up with multiple ways to tweet the same information to add variety to your Twitter stream.

How a Blog Launched a Movement: The Vani Hari Story

How a Blog Launched a Movement: The Vani Hari Story

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a blog? Want to use your blog to inspire change? This episode explores how a blogger followed her passion and grew a mega following in a few short years. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. Join me as I interview Vani Hari, who is known online as the Food Babe. Her popular blog, FoodBabe.com, focuses on healthy eating. She's built a large platform through articles and videos that investigate unhealthy ingredients in food. Her new book is called The Food Babe Way. In this episode Vani will share how she got started with her blog and built her following. You'll discover how to apply Vani's lessons and journey to your own business blog. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How a Blog Launched a Movement Vani's story Vani's parents were from India, and moved to the United States right after they married. The first thing Vani's father introduced her mother to was a McDonald's hamburger. Since cows are sacred in India, her mother had never eaten a hamburger before and it was a shock to her system. It turned out American food didn't sit well with Vani's mother, so she just made Indian food at home. However, she let Vani and her brother eat whatever they wanted. Because the siblings wanted to fit in with their neighbors and peers (Indian food looked weird and smelled funny to some of the other kids), they shunned their mother's cooking and asked for fast food and other processed foods. As a result, Vani had a lot of health issues as a child: eczema, asthma, allergies and stomachaches. She didn't tie them to food; she thought they were largely genetic, because her brother also had health issues. Many years later, her health issues caught up with her. Vani was working in a prestigious job for a big-six consulting firm shortly after she graduated from college. She gained over 30 pounds right away (eating catered meals brought into the office and fancy dinners out), and landed in the hospital with appendicitis. Vani didn't look or feel well. It was a major wake-up call. After her recovery, when Vani got back to work, she started to research health and nutrition. She wanted to lose the weight and get healthy. Vani set out to learn about what she was eating; what the ingredients were, why they were in the food and why the food companies were using them. She discovered the chemicals put in food (many of which were invented in the last 50 years or so) were there just to improve the bottom line of the food industry, to figure out how to sell food cheaper by using food-like substances and making them taste like real food. Vani realized the majority of the food she had been eating was processed and had little to no nutrients left in it. The health incident happened 14 years ago and Vani started the blog 4 years ago. The Food Babe Way is all about adopting healthy eating habits. Listen to the show to discover what Vani's aunt told her cousin about Vani's new look. FoodBabe.com Vani says she created the blog because her co-workers and friends asked her to. She explains how she came up with the name. After asking her husband to register the name EatHealthlyLiveForever.com, Vani recalls him saying, "Are you crazy? That's a horrible name. No one's going to remember that." She asked him to come up with something better. A few minutes later, he saw FoodBabe.com was available on auction, and suggested that. At first Vani didn't want to call it Food Babe because for most of her life, she was anything but a food babe. She decided she wouldn't call herself the Food Babe,

How to Use Facebook Custom Audiences for Increased Reach

How to Use Facebook Custom Audiences for Increased Reach

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for new ways to reach people on Facebook? Have you explored custom audiences? Facebook custom audiences provide many ways to increase your chance of getting your content in front of the right people. In this article I'll share how to use Facebook custom audiences to increase visibility and reach. Listen to this article: #1: Upsell Products and Services While Facebook is an excellent place for branding or getting sales, one of the best uses for Facebook custom audiences is to upsell. Create a custom audience of everyone who recently purchased a specific product or service, and then target this audience with upsells. Think of it as replicating Amazon's high-converting People Who Bought This Also Bought section. For example, target people who recently purchased a MacAir via your website and upsell them MacAir accessories like a CD drive, airplane adapter, the Apple magic mouse and so on. If you offer website-related services, upsell logo overhauls and website speed improvement packages. Consultants could offer time-sensitive upgrades. Post something like, "Recently bought the starter package? Upgrade to the silver package within the next 72 hours and save 20%." #2: Target Traffic Sources Individually Create one landing page per traffic source, and then build custom remarketing lists for each landing page. Then create campaigns based on the URL people visited. To do this, go to Campaigns. Then select Audiences. Then click Custom Audience. Separate traffic sources with landing page URLs to create lookalike audiences for each platform. As a result, you can find out whether customers who came via Google are different from customers who came via Facebook, Bing, etc. Depending on your findings, you can customize ads to better address each target group. Once you set up one landing page per traffic source (e.g., one landing page for AdWords and one for Facebook ads), you can create a custom audience based on which page people visited. Create separate remarketing and cross-channel campaigns for each platform. For example, customize separate campaigns for people who visited your website via Facebook, via Google and via Twitter. #3: Refine Targeting With Audience Insights Audience Insights on Facebook can be used for more than just profiling people who currently like your page. For example, use Audience Insights to learn more about the characteristics of customers depending on what platform they visited prior to buying from you. Then, create one custom audience per platform. Next, use Audience Insights to learn more about your visitors. You will be able to create customer profiles, find additional targeting and come up with new split testing options by using that information. The information you retrieve for each custom audience looks like every other Audience Insights screen (except of course the information will be about your custom audience). The concept of learning more about people based on traffic sources can even be taken a step further by separating the campaign type. For instance, create custom audiences with people who visit your website through a Google or remarketing audience, as well as people who bought from you. The latter requires the installation of a conversion pixel. #4: Target Visitor Behavior Create custom ads and landing pages based on visitor behavior. Target behavioral patterns, such as what people bought and what pages they visited. Start with your custom audience, and narrow it down by interest and behavior. Fill out the audience with as many specifics as you like. For instance, target all customers who bought from you, reside in the U.S., travel frequently, often buy online and are interested in sports. Strategic split testing of behaviors and interests for custom audiences is easily overlooked. Most interests are surprisingly similar to behaviors and the other way around,

How to Curate Your Social Content With Reddit

How to Curate Your Social Content With Reddit

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for new content to share to your fans and followers? Have you considered Reddit as a source for valuable content? Using Reddit will reveal unique and interesting content that helps you stand out from the crowd. In this post you'll discover how to use Reddit for content curation and inspiration. Listen to this article: #1: Find Subreddits in Your Niche Many marketers already know Reddit is useful for discovering content, but browsing its individual communities, called subreddits, can be time-consuming. Fortunately, you can make that task easier if you create a multireddit, which is a custom dashboard of content around a particular topic. First, you need to find subreddits you want to include in your multireddit, and compile a master list of subreddit names, organized by topic. Discover Relevant Subreddits There are thousands of active subreddits, so it's important to find those that share the best content in your niche. Here are some easy ways to search for relevant subreddits: The subreddit search box lets you search for all subreddits related to a keyword (for example, fitness). Use the Reddit site search to find site-wide mentions of your keyword, plus a list of subreddits where the term appears most frequently. You can use advanced search operators to focus your search. You can also combine advanced operators. For example, I did a search for posts with "paleo" in the title on the r/xxfitness subreddit. I then sorted the results by New to see the most recent posts. To perform granular searches, use the Boolean operators AND, OR and NOT (or the minus symbol). You can also group keywords with parentheses. Along with search features on Reddit, you can use metareddit to find subreddits. This third-party directory allows you to filter results by number of subscribers and last post, as in the example here. The results are displayed in a word cloud, where the size of the words correlates to the number of subscribers. Make a List of Subreddits To keep track of the subreddits you find, create a spreadsheet of subreddit names organized by topic. As you find subreddits you want to add to your multireddit, note the subreddit's name after the r/ in its URL (for example, http://www.reddit.com/r/HealthyFood). Here's a list you might create for health and fitness subreddits. #2: Create a Multireddit Once you've found a group of relevant subreddits, organize them as a multireddit. You can include all of the subreddits you found in one big multireddit or create a handful of more specific multireddits. After you log into the site, go to the Reddit front page, and click on the dotted line on the left side. Click the Create button, and type in a name for your multireddit. (Note that you can't use spaces or symbols in the multireddit name.) When you're finished, click Create again. Now that you've created your multireddit, you can begin adding subreddits to it in the upper-right corner of the screen. Type a subreddit name into the Add Subreddit box and click the plus sign (or press Enter) to add it to your multireddit. You can also add a description for the multireddit and choose whether it's public (other redditors can find it) or private (only you can view it). Open the sidebar from the front page to access any multireddits you've created. You can filter the content in your multireddit using the tabs at the top of the page: Hot: Posts that receive the highest engagement (upvotes/comments) New: The most recent posts Rising: Posts that are gaining popularity Controversial: Posts that receive an equal mix of upvotes and downvotes Top: The most popular posts of all time Gilded: Posts that received reddit gold Promoted: Sponsored content You can also search for keywords within your multireddit. For example, if you're looking for healthy recipes to share on your social channels,

Facebook Live: Fuel All of Your Content With Live Video

Facebook Live: Fuel All of Your Content With Live Video

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you broadcast on Facebook Live? Want to discover how to use your videos to create more content? To explore why Facebook Live is a path to success for creators, I interview Chalene Johnson. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Chalene Johnson, a lifestyle expert, author of Push, and host of two top podcasts: Build Your Tribe and The Chalene Show. She's also active on Facebook with 1 million fans and regularly uses Facebook Live. Chalene shares how she uses Facebook Live. You'll discover what she does to leverage the content she captures. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Live Chalene's Background With Video While Chalene has developed a number of businesses, most people associate her with fitness and a program called Turbo Kick that she created for fitness instructors to teach in health clubs. Instructional videos were part of the program and when a cast member fell ill, Chalene was forced to be on camera. Since that time, she's done many videos and discovered the more she relaxed, the better she could connect with her audience, whether it was for fitness or business. Chalene first broadcast live on Periscope in the summer of 2015. She remembers it well because it was also the day she was hacked. Chalene stresses there's no correlation between the two events. You can listen to Episode 158 of this podcast for the backstory. When she got early access to Facebook Live, Chalene went live and applied what she'd learned on Periscope. Her first Live reached a half-million people within 20 minutes and she knew it was a game-changer. Listen to the show to discover Chalene's philosophy on the importance of doing things that are scary. What Facebook Live Is All About Chalene believes Facebook Live is like TV, meaning you can use it to spread your message, become famous, or have a reality TV show. Mike and Chalene discuss the connection between bloggers becoming paid authors, musicians on YouTube becoming paid recording artists, and the likelihood that a future show host will be discovered through Live video. Listen to the show to hear why podcasters should consider live-streaming video. How Chalene Goes Live Chalene and her team have an organic plan in place for her Live videos. The calendar is set around the promotion of the Virtual Business Academy, the Marketing Impact Academy, and Smart Success. Eighty percent of the content for each Live broadcast relates to the upcoming promotion, so it attracts the people interested in the related product. Currently, she's promoting Smart Success. Chalene aims to go live a couple of times each week. She's noticed that the longer she broadcasts, the better the video does in terms of reach and live viewers. Often, she plans to go live for 15 minutes but ends up broadcasting for an hour. Chalene's Live prep starts when she wakes up at 5:45 AM. She spends the first hour of her day in learning mode focusing on a certain topic. She then finds a way to relate what she's studying to the product she's promoting. For example, since she's studying the neuroscience behind behavior, discipline, and habits, she'll do a Live broadcast about developing good habits, which ties into her promotion of Smart Success. To prepare, Chalene writes down a proposed title, five bulleted discussion points, and any research or stats she wants to reference. She describes how to start a broadcast and in which order to share information. In the first 10 seconds, tell people what you're talking about and why they need to stay tuned.

Our New Podcast: Social Media Marketing Talk Show

Our New Podcast: Social Media Marketing Talk Show

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you noticed that social networks seem to change every week? How can anyone possibly keep up, right? We have a great new (and free) solution for you--the busy marketer. I'm excited to announce the new Social Media Marketing Talk Show audio podcast. Each week your friends at Social Media Examiner bring you: #1 News: Our news team breaks down the critical social updates of the week. #2 Commentary: We bring on industry experts to talk about what the news means. #3 Tips: You'll discover actionable insight that could give you an advantage. Social Media Marketing Talk Show In each episode, we cover the top 10 to 20 major announcements from Facebook, Instagram, LinkedIn, Twitter, Pinterest, YouTube, and Snapchat for the last week. On this week's Social Media Marketing Talk Show with Michael Stelzner, we explore Facebook's latest growth with Mari Smith; Amazon's social network, Spark, with Jeff Sieh; LinkedIn's new Web Demographics tool with Viveka von Rosen; and other breaking social media marketing news of the week! Your Action Plan Step 1: Click here now to SUBSCRIBE in iTunes/Apple Podcasts app (scroll down for other options). Step 2: Click the Subscribe button. Step 3: Download the episodes. Step 4: Sit back and enjoy the content, knowing you'll never miss important social media marketing news. Step 5: If you like Social Media Examiner, we'd love a review. Confused? Watch this video to discover how to subscribe on your iPhone. Here are some quick links to the new show on all major platforms: iTunes/Apple Podcast | Android | Google Play | Stitcher | RSS Hear More About the New Show To learn more about this new show, listen to this special episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast below...

Instagram Stories: How to Create Engaging Stories

Instagram Stories: How to Create Engaging Stories

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Instagram? Wondering how Instagram stories work? To explore how to craft Instagram stories for business, I interview Sue B. Zimmerman. Instagram Stories The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Sue B. Zimmerman, an Instagram marketing expert who helps businesses and marketers take their Instagram marketing to the next level. She's the author of the Instagram Strategy Guide ebook and a regular speaker at Social Media Marketing World. Sue shares how a number of businesses are creating engaging Instagram stories. You'll discover several techniques to improve your own Instagram stories. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Instagram Stories Why Marketers Should Consider Instagram Stories Sue started using Instagram Stories as soon as the feature rolled out in 2016. She still uses Snapchat, but she says now she mostly relies on Instagram Stories. She says pulling together content to tell a story is creative work, similar to scrapbooking. Sue recommends that you develop a thread that keeps people engaged in your story from start to finish. Also, create Instagram stories with content that's original to Instagram, rather than duplicating content from other platforms. Sue says Instagram stories have three main benefits: First, Instagram stories direct followers to your actual Instagram feed, where your posts are always available. (Instagram stories disappear after 24 hours.) Stories that are entertaining and engaging give your followers a quick and easy way to consume your content. Engagement is important to the new algorithm that determines what people see in their Instagram feed. Because Instagram stories boost engagement with your Instagram posts, they improve your chances of showing up at the top of people's news feeds. Listen to the show to discover when Sue still uses Snapchat instead of Instagram Stories. Instagram Stories and Posts We talk about the highly produced content that marketers often feature on their Instagram feeds, and Sue says high production value is not necessary for Instagram stories. Sue shares a few examples of businesses that use Instagram stories in creative ways. These businesses create stories that are different from the content in their regular Instagram feeds. For example, Jenny Schatzle, who owns a gym in Santa Barbara, uses Instagram stories to let people know when she's starting new sessions. Her stories are more like ads, which is a completely different approach than her regular posts on Instagram. Sue has also seen companies with products (such as shoe company M.Gemi) use stories to feature sales and direct people to their Instagram feeds. Sue notes that marketers use text differently on Instagram posts and stories. The more successful accounts on Instagram typically include the text in the description, not on the photo itself, so people connect with the experience of the product or service that the photo depicts. However, in an Instagram story, text can add value. People who don't have the volume turned up in the story can read the text on the video or the photo. I ask how Instagram Stories has changed the way people interact with content on Instagram. Sue shares a few changes she's noticed since the release of Instagram Stories and the algorithm change. Although she's been posting less frequently on Instagram, Sue gets more engagement with her posts over a longer period of time. She attributes that engagement to having active Instagram stories. People discover Sue through her stories, which provide value.

Marketing Your Food Product

Marketing Your Food Product


Penn State Extension

Marketing is more than advertising; it is everything you do to promote your business and your food products, from the moment you conceive of a product to the point at which customers buy it.

Social Media Visuals: How to Easily Create Visuals Without a Designer

Social Media Visuals: How to Easily Create Visuals Without a Designer

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use visuals in your social media? Want tools and tips to help you create images? To discover how to create great social media visuals when you're not a designer, I interview Donna Moritz. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Donna Moritz. Donna is a visual marketing expert, and her blog Socially Sorted was recognized as one of Social Media Examiner's Top 10 Social Media Blogs in 2015 and 2016. Donna will share why social media marketers should care about visuals. You'll discover what to consider before you design images for social media and learn about new tools to help you. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Visuals Why care about visuals? Because the news feed is so busy these days, Donna explains, marketers need to do everything they can to capture attention. She says visuals catch that attention and typically drive users to take some sort of action because visuals support an emotional connection. Donna points out that the fastest-growing channels such as Periscope and Snapchat are highly focused on visual content, as are Instagram and Pinterest. She also notes that traditional platforms Facebook, LinkedIn, and Twitter are giving more attention to visual content and users are 44% more likely to engage with content that contains pictures. Video is also on the rise, Donna adds. Socialbakers research shows that brands are now uploading more video directly to Facebook than YouTube, and about 80% of all video engagement is coming from Facebook native video. And that's before Facebook Live is really being measured. Plus, she says, 110 years of video footage is watched on Periscope every day. According to the Content Marketing Institute, out of a range of priorities for content creators, visual content is in the top three. Visual content is a very important topic because it works. Marketers just need to find out where to start and how to produce and use images efficiently. Listen to the show to discover the current standard image format and how image sizes have changed. Getting started with images Before you start to design images, Donna says you need to think about what types of visual content get shared well on which platforms. Content that's effective on Facebook might be different from what works on Instagram, which might be different from Twitter. She's seen people get overwhelmed trying to do visual content on every platform, and advises that it's better to focus on visuals for one particular platform at a time. She also cautions that you shouldn't jump into visuals on a new platform until you have systems in place for visuals on the one before it. Donna shares her Visual Content Blueprint, which is five elements to help you create images that work. First, decide what the image is going to be in regards to what works on the targeted platform (more on this later). Then consider the call to action. It could be asking for more connection or engagement (likes or comments), driving more shares or click-throughs, or a combination. Next, think about your landing content (where people arrive when they click through or share). Will people get more information, blog content, a free download, or something else of value? After that, make sure users are achieving some sort of goal. Do you want them to sign up for something, read a blog post, or stay on your website? Donna recommends that every image be able to stand alone. That way, if something is pinned or shared out of context, people will still understand what you're offering and how to get it.

How to Drive Traffic to Your Blog Posts: A Game Plan for the Top Social Networks

How to Drive Traffic to Your Blog Posts: A Game Plan for the Top Social Networks

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to drive more traffic to your blog? Looking for ways to use social media to promote it? Understanding how to best share your blog posts on many social networks will maximize your visibility and reach. In this article you'll discover how to promote your blog articles on Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Instagram and Pinterest. Listen to this article: #1: Spread the Word on Facebook There are multiple ways to share your blog articles on your Facebook personal and business pages. Update Your Status With a Link When you first post about your blog on social media, the easiest thing to do is to share a link. But rather than simply restate the title in the update, lead into it with a question, a statistic or a bit of interesting information to tease what's in the article so people will want to read it. Create and Share Photos Image posts stand out on social channels. Facebook allows you to share one or multiple photos with a status update to your business page. (You can only share a photo or a photo album on your personal page.) Start with an engaging photo that's representative of your article, with or without the post's title. If there are multiple photos in your article or if it's a how-to or tour of your products, upload the photos as an album, or even better, a photo carousel. For clarity, it's better to upload larger photos rather than smaller ones, especially given how many people view social media via mobile. Facebook will resize the photos to fit. Here's a comprehensive list of social media image sizes. Remember to include the article link and a headline when you post photo updates. Upload a Video If you have a video embedded in your blog post, upload a snippet as native Facebook video to promote the post. The more active and engaging the video clip, the more attention it will draw in the news feed. Include an update and the article title, as well as the Watch More call to action. Then add your article link, which will show up at the end of the video. If you're feeling adventurous and you don't have a clip to share, create a short video telling people what they'll find when they read your article. Write a Note Facebook notes stand out in the news feed and will draw attention to your article. Notes recently got a makeover, and now look similar to blog posts. But rather than repost your article in its entirety, upload an image and write an intro to the article. Then add a clickable link to the end of your note calling readers to read more. #2: Tell Your Followers on Twitter Adding media to your tweets helps you stand out on Twitter. Tweet a Link As with a Facebook status update, it's easy to share a link to your article on Twitter. The tweet doesn't need to be the title, but it can be, since links don't populate unless the user clicks View Summary. Be sure to add appropriate hashtags and @mention the guest author if appropriate. Again, get creative with your tweets so people will want to read more. Share an Image Upload an image when you tweet your article. The image can have the title in a text overlay, be representative of the content or both. Remember to add the link to the article at the end of your tweet. A link takes up 23 of your 140 characters, and an image takes up 24 characters. Upload a Video (or GIF) to Your Tweet Upload a short video or GIF to call attention to your article in the Twitter feed. The maximum length of a Twitter video is 30 seconds so if your video is a little longer than that, you can shorten it after you upload it to Twitter. Remember to add the link to the article at the end of your video or GIF tweet. #3: Let Your LinkedIn Networks Know There are three ways to share articles on LinkedIn: with an update, a photo or a LinkedIn Publisher post. Update Your Status With a Link Include your article's link in your status update.

How to Market a Product: 18 Effective Marketing Tips to Skyrocket Sales - Oberlo

How to Market a Product: 18 Effective Marketing Tips to Skyrocket Sales - Oberlo


Oberlo

Learning how to market a product can help you grow your store’s sales quickly. Check out these 18 marketing tips to skyrocket your sales!

Video Authenticity: How to Perform On-Camera

Video Authenticity: How to Perform On-Camera

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to connect with your audience via video? Looking for tips to convey confidence and authority? To explore how to improve your on-camera performance, I interview David H. Lawrence XVII. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview David H. Lawrence XVII, an actor and professional voice artist. You may recognize him as the Puppet Master from the TV show Heroes. He specializes in audio and video communication and his course is called Camera Ready U, where he helps actors and marketers with their on-camera performances. David explores ways to be yourself in front of the camera. You'll discover how to prepare for a video performance. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Video Authenticity David's Story David started as a voiceover talent and moved into on-camera work. In both cases, after David found success, people asked him how he achieved that success. At events such as Social Media Marketing World, David talked about simple things people can do on-camera to be authoritative or authentic. For instance, he talks about how to hold your hands, what to do with your eyes, or how to hold your posture. After speaking, David would be mobbed by people asking about his course, so he decided to create one. As David developed his course, he discovered he knew so much more than he realized about his area of expertise. David created an inventory of all of the things he knew and that became the Camera Ready U curriculum. The same thing happened with voiceovers. David started by teaching commercials and ultimately created 36 different classes for VO2GoGo, covering not just the art of voiceover, but also the business and technology aspects. Listen to the show to discover how long David has been in the entertainment industry. Least Important Factors for Video Videos don't have to be perfect. Comb your hair, brush your teeth, put on makeup, wear your cool outfit, and whatever else you need to establish your base. After you do that, the key is not to be a better version of yourself, but your most authentic self with all of your flaws. That's what makes you human. Don't kick yourself if you flub a word or don't remember to turn your shoulder. People will connect with you when you're simply being yourself. And you can't be yourself when you're constantly trying to be that better version of yourself. The notion of perfection gets in the way of being real. Also, your equipment doesn't matter. If you want to get very artsy, you might need a more expensive camera. But you don't even need to buy a camera. You can start vlogging immediately with your smartphone. You may need to add a light, but you can simply set up a table lamp. Plus, you might want to get a $20 lavaliere microphone from Amazon. And that's it. You can do whatever you want with that minimal setup. Listen to the show to hear David and me discuss how people can hold themselves back with an "I can't until I..." mentality. Authenticity On-Camera Have you ever watched a video and thought, "This guy's a bag of wind" or "She's fake"? It's because they've spent too much time trying to present and too little time being themselves. The people viewers connect with most often are those who seem down to earth and genuinely interested in the subject. When you stop worrying about how you look and sound, you can start thinking about the content. And when you can focus on your content, viewers feel you're speaking to them. You make a connection. When you're completely interested, immersed, and can't wait to help people with their needs, your authenticity meter goes through the roof.

10 Snapchat Hacks to Make Your Snaps Stand Out

10 Snapchat Hacks to Make Your Snaps Stand Out

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to take your Snapchat marketing up a notch? Have you explored all of Snapchat's features? Learning to use all of the features Snapchat offers is a big part of telling stories people will want to follow. In this article, you'll discover 10 hacks for creating more appealing Snapchat stories. Listen to this article: #1: Use Complementary Color Schemes You may be familiar with the color gradient that Snapchat gives you to doodle on your photos, but did you know you can get all of the different shades of color too, including black and white? When you select a color, drag your finger over to the top left of the screen for lighter shades that will eventually turn to white. Or drag down towards the bottom for darker shades and the bottom left for black. #2: Customize Text Size and Color You can also change the color and size of your text, down to the letter. Here's how you do it: after you write something, click the T symbol to make the text bigger. Next, tap on your text. Then play with the color picker to change the color. Finally, press and hold over the text to bring up the highlighting tool, and select individual letters for which you want to change the color. Tap done to finish. You can now pinch smaller, expand bigger, and rotate the bit of text to make even funkier snaps. #3: Combine Snap Filters Snapchat features a good range of filters and geofilters, so many that sometimes one just isn't good enough. Here's how to choose more than one filter. After you take your photo, swipe right or left to choose your first filter. Next, hold one finger steady on the screen, and swipe with a different finger to select another filter. At the moment, you can do this for up to three filters per photo/video. #4: Use Close-ups in Video This hack is easy, yet many people don't make the most of it. When recording video on Snapchat, focus on your subject and play with the zoom function. Doing this can help you retain your viewers' interest for the entire 10 seconds. While recording with either the front-facing or rear-facing camera, simply slide your thumb up and down the screen to zoom in and out. #5: Add a Soundtrack to Snaps It's easier than ever to incorporate music into your snaps. If you have a favorite song that sums up the moment you're snapping, simply load the song onto your music player on your phone (iTunes, Spotify, etc.), and when you start snapping, the song will continue playing in the background. Note: Pay attention to music rights, especially if you're a big brand. You could find yourself in trouble if you use unlicensed music in a way that could be portrayed as advertising your product. #6: Use 3D Stickers in Videos 3D stickers are a fairly recent update to Snapchat. They offer a great way to make your 10-second videos a lot more entertaining. You can add 3D stickers to make your emojis and Snapchat graphics stay in place in a video. It's simple to do. First, shoot your video and select your sticker by clicking the square on the top line. Next, place your sticker where you want it to appear in the video. Then, at the point of the video you want the sticker to stick, simply press and hold, then release. #7: Create Custom Filters Another neat little trick is to create your own color filters/gradients for snaps. Use the emojis and stickers Snapchat gives you. First, find an emoji that has an outline color you want to use (maybe your brand colors). Next, make the emoji larger by expanding it multiple times, and as you do, move it to one side and down. The more you expand it, the more blurred it becomes around the edges of the emoji. You can place it in such a way you get a cool gradient on your photo or video. Also, you can combine Hack #6 and Hack #7 to create 3D filters! #8: Enable Hands-free Snapping One of the restrictions of Snapchat is that you must keep your finger on the button.

Launching: Why Podcasts Are a Hot New Way to Launch a Product

Launching: Why Podcasts Are a Hot New Way to Launch a Product

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you getting ready to release a product, book or service? Do you want to know how a podcast can boost your launch? To learn why podcasts can be a very powerful marketing tool when it comes to starting a launch, I interview Brian Clark and Chris Ducker for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Brian Clark, founder of Copyblogger Media and host of the new podcast New Rainmaker. Chris Ducker is the author of Virtual Freedom and host of The New Business Podcast. Both Brian and Chris are serial entrepreneurs. Brian and Chris share why they've chosen podcasts to launch their new products. You'll discover ideas for your own launches and why you should give audio a chance. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Launching With Podcasts Why launch a special podcast with the same name as a new book? Chris explains that podcasting has been good to him from a personal brand perspective, and it's been a way for him to grow his own personal network of contacts and business associates. It also enables him to expand reach ridiculously in a short period of time. Chris says that he enjoys podcasting because he is more of a talker than a typer. The last thing he wanted to do after he had written his book was to write blog posts to promote it. So when they put together a marketing plan for the book, there was no doubt in Chris' mind that a special podcast with the same name would be the best approach. Listen to the show to find out the two main reasons why Chris chose podcasting to help with the launch of his new book. Why add a podcast to the launch plan for a new product? Brian tells the story of how during his time as an attorney, he was first introduced to the word rainmaker, which means the person who brings in the business. It was back in 1998 that Brian started to publish online and he became an entrepreneur. He didn't have professional or family privileges, so he couldn't be the traditional type of rainmaker that he had observed earlier. Reflecting on it, he saw that the Internet was his way to become a rainmaker. Nearly sixteen years later, it's played out really well. It's the genesis of the concept itself. Copyblogger has done a couple of podcasts, and although they don't have the hugest uptake, people do love them. Brian says that they see audio as a completely new channel to reach people who may not be familiar with their brand, and this is in line with the product they'll soon launch. You'll hear why Brian sees audio as the best foundational content, from which you can create every other form of content. Listen to the show to find out why the New Rainmaker podcast is more than just a podcast. Where is the world of podcasting heading? Brian believes that the reason podcasts didn't do as well as expected back in 2005 was because it was hard for people to make money with sponsorships or advertising. However, everyone uses content to sell things, and the world seems to be waking up to this. Consequently there has been a big resurgence in podcasting. The way Apple has embraced podcasts as a format within iTunes has made it easy to subscribe and more people than ever are now aware of them. You'll hear why podcasts work for anybody who knows what they're talking about, and why Brian believes we are entering the golden age of podcasting. If you want to read more about where the world of podcasting is headed, be sure to check out Social Media Marketing podcast...

Becoming a Blogger: Do You Have What it Takes?

Becoming a Blogger: Do You Have What it Takes?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you thinking of starting a blog or restarting your blog? Do you wonder if you have what it takes to attract a strong blog audience? To learn about what it takes to become a successful blogger, I interview Stanford Smith for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Stanford Smith, co-author of Born to Blog. He is also the founder of the Pushing Social blog and host of the Pushing Social podcast. Stan shares how he started out with blogging and how Pushing Social became a blog-based business. You'll learn how to recognize your personal traits and how they can be built upon to grow a successful blog. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Starting a Blog How Stan's blog has helped his business Stan explains that his business is about offering content marketing strategies for small- to medium-sized businesses. He helps people understand how social media can work for them. His blog has been the sole reason why he was able to leave his 9-5 job and work full-time on Pushing Social. The blog is the main way Stan attracts leads, talks to prospects and educates people about his services. Stan's advice for people in a 9-5 job right now is to build up your audience and understand where your next step is going to be. If you want to market yourself in a really effective, cost-efficient way, then blogging is a great place to start. He talks about how he knew he was ready to go out on his own and why he should have done it earlier. Listen to the show to find out how all of Stan's business comes from his blog without any advertising. Common traits for becoming a successful blogger Stan starts with the notion that there are five traits people have that are necessary for blogging, and the good news is that everyone has at least one. You'll learn in detail about each trait. The five traits are: Dreamer Good storyteller Teacher Persuader Curator The idea is to take that trait or role that you play, recognize it, build upon it and then use it to create a successful blog. Stan talks about his two traits and how he can weave them into a blog post. Some of the most popular bloggers have 3 or 4 traits. Listen to the show to find out how to discover which trait you have. Do you need to be a great writer to be a good blogger? Stan believes that you don't have to be a great writer to be a good blogger, in the classic sense. When people think of the word writer, they think of poets or prize-winners. However, this does not have to be the case for blogging. You'll hear what it takes to be a great conversational writer and what this means. You need to be able to communicate in a way that builds rapport and relationships. Stan explains the difference between a blog writer and an article writer. Blogging is not just about text. For example, take a look at Gary Vaynerchuk's story about his video blog. Blogging is the platform. If you feel you are better at speaking and doing audio, then put that out there and use the podcast platform. Video is also another platform. Remember, writing is just one way of expressing yourself on a blog. Listen to the show to hear the benefits of how you can talk it out, record it and then transcribe it back.  Do you have what it takes to become a blogger? Stan explains that there are three steps to becoming a successful blogger. Have a borderline obsession with a topic. To stop yourself from getting burnt out,

Live Video and Marketing: Where the Industry Is Heading

Live Video and Marketing: Where the Industry Is Heading

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Interested in using live video for business? Have you considered creating a live video show? To find out what live video can do for your business, I interview Brian Fanzo. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Brian Fanzo, a tech evangelist who specializes in live video. He's the founder of iSocialFanz and host of the FOMOFanz podcast. Brian explores live video, where it's headed, and how it can help your business. You'll discover whether to use Facebook Live or Periscope if you're just getting started. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video and Marketing What Live Video Means for Business Whether yours is a small business, a brick-and-mortar store, or an ecommerce company, you need to shrink the distance between yourself and your customer, Brian explains. Live video is much more than a marketing play because it shrinks that distance by humanizing your brand and business. Live video is also the gateway to technologies such as augmented reality (AR) and virtual reality (VR), which Brian believes will be huge by 2020. To embrace AR and VR, he says, companies and brands will need to have a live video strategy already in place. He says today's consumers want you to convince them that you can be trusted, that you're a resource, are invested in them, and can understand them. They don't want to be marketed or sold to; they want to engage and have a conversation with you. Businesses need to spend time building rapport, a relationship, and trust with their audience, and live video is a great vehicle for that. With regard to building trust, Brian believes the most valuable statement anyone can make on live video is, "I don't know." If a brand admits they don't know something on live video, it adds validity to what they do know. (When you're stumped, you can also ask audience members to send you a message on Twitter or Facebook, and say you'll have your product manager get back to them.) Listen to the show to hear more about the strategy behind using live video to break down barriers with your audience. Getting Started With Live Video Brian says that according to Cisco, 79% of Internet traffic in 2020 will be video. Nowhere did anyone say that's going to be great video, good video, or live video, Brian continues. However, he believes most brands are thinking about video. Many people think live video is scary because they picture themselves on the video. Brian has to remind them that the best live videos are often made when you're celebrating customers and employees. And if your live video brings people access they can't get anywhere else, the camera doesn't even need to be on you. For example, say you use live video to interview a client, a customer, or a celebrity while they're in the office. As the person behind the camera, you can watch the comments for questions and decide which are important enough to ask the guest. With these kinds of live videos, all of the scary elements of being on air are taken away. Listen to the show to discover my process for doing live videos. Innovative Examples of Live Video Brian says Cisco has done an amazing job with their We Are Cisco campaign. Employees in different offices are trusted to take over the company's social media accounts, including Snapchat and Instagram, to share their point of view. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oMjEzVH1d0k Not only does the campaign celebrate Cisco's employees, it's also a great recruiting tool. The company doesn't have to convince job applicants that they trust their employees; the proof is v...

How to Automate The Content Marketing For Your Blog

by The BlogPress Team @ BlogPress

Many experienced bloggers and people who are into digital marketing will always tell you that content is the most important thing for raising your brand awareness and maintaining the general presence of your business on the internet. However, no one told you that it can become really boring once you have to update every social […]

The post How to Automate The Content Marketing For Your Blog appeared first on BlogPress.


How to Automate The Content Marketing For Your Blog was first posted on November 29, 2016 at 12:46 pm.

How to Schedule Tweets on Twitter Using TweetDeck

How to Schedule Tweets on Twitter Using TweetDeck

by @ How to of the Day

Scheduling Tweets on Twitter will help you to grow your account. This practice allows you to maintain an online presence on social media at times you’re unavailable and cannot post Tweets in real time. Twitter's TweetDeck tool allows you to schedule Tweets for any time.

Facebook for Local Business: Creative Ways to Grow

Facebook for Local Business: Creative Ways to Grow

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your local business on Facebook? Wondering how to market your business more effectively? To explore how to use Facebook in creative ways, I interview Anissa Holmes. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Dr. Anissa Holmes, the author of Delivering WOW: How Dentists Can Build a Fascinating Brand and Achieve More, While Working Less! Her podcast is the Delivering WOW Dental podcast. She's a practicing dentist and teaches Facebook marketing courses for dentists. Anissa explores how local businesses can grow using Facebook. You'll discover why Facebook is more valuable for local businesses than review websites. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing for Local Businesses Anissa's Story After practicing dentistry in the U.S. for several years, Anissa moved to her husband's home country of Jamaica in 2010 and started a new dental practice from scratch. She knew most dentists typically get 10 to 15 new patients per month through referrals, but with a startup practice in a totally different country, she decided to try promoting her new practice on Facebook. In early 2010, Anissa set up a Facebook business page and began sharing what happened in the practice each day, including behind-the-scenes snapshots and stories about how the practice's dental services were changing people's lives. Anissa's strategy worked. Her practice began getting 5 to 10 new patients a month. Anissa figured she was onto something and began buying Facebook ads. As the Facebook algorithm changed, she made adjustments. Her practice now spends about $500 a month on Facebook and those marketing efforts attract about 50 new patients every month. With such outstanding growth, the practice's revenue tripled, and Anissa's practice was able to pay for a new office with three times the space totally out of profits. The practice is debt-free and so is Anissa. She shares that this financial success and security is a result of the business growth she achieved through Facebook marketing. After dentists started asking Anissa how her practice was achieving those crazy results, last year Anissa created a Facebook course and began lecturing to dentists all over the world about Facebook. The journey has been interesting, Anissa says, and she attributes the success to Facebook. When new customers come in, they already know the practice and how it can solve their problems. They're already connected and ready to make a purchase. Listen to the show to learn more about Anissa's background. Why Local Businesses Need to Go Beyond Review Sites If your new customers hang out on Facebook, Anissa says, that's where you need to be. People aren't hanging out on Yelp or Google. Most people (including Anissa) check Facebook first thing in the morning, between daily tasks, and in the evening. That's why Facebook marketing needs to be your focus. Anissa says creating the right content is important. A lot of businesses post information about how great they are and share a lot of stock content, but Anissa says that really doesn't work. She stresses that local businesses need to share their story and what makes their business unique. For example, if you have a plumbing company, what are you offering that's different from everyone else? To compete with photos of kids, community happenings, and articles, Anissa creates engaging posts that connect with people and make them want to click, including content about community impact and what her practice does to change patients' lives. Anissa also shares testimonials.

How to Craft Instagram Posts That Drive Sales

How to Craft Instagram Posts That Drive Sales

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Instagram to promote your products and services? Interested in ways to drive sales with your posts? A good Instagram post is not as simple as just snapping a photo, applying a filter and posting it to your news feed. To have a real impact, your posts need to be carefully crafted and shared with purpose and intent. In this article you'll discover how to create Instagram posts that increase engagement and drive sales. Listen to this article: #1: Design Images to Capture Attention If you're posting a photo of a product on Instagram, be creative with the shot and make sure it reflects well on the product. Find an Interesting Angle Think about whether you should show the entire product, frame the shot a certain way or include another item to accompany the product. Warby Parker posts creative photos of their eyewear on Instagram, often garnering more than 2,000 likes per post. Even with a simple pair of glasses, there are hundreds of ways to capture it in a photo. Once you find the most effective angle for your products, stick with that approach and be consistent. Don't forget that your Instagram posts are also part of your brand. Focus on Lighting Whether photos are taken indoors or outdoors, good lighting is crucial. This may seem like Photography 101, but lighting also tells a story about your product. Even with careful tweaking and tuning, Instagram's editing tools often can't fix a photo taken with poor lighting. Think about whether your photo should be shown in color or in black and white, and how to portray it best. Prada posts a variety of photos taken in unique lighting. Their exceptional professional shots speak specifically to their brand. Use a Filter Instagram realized early on that much of the app's value and appeal was in its filters. Each filter has a unique story that it communicates. While there is some evidence that photos with no filters perform best, filters may be necessary to achieve a coherent look for your brand. The novelty of the #nofilter hashtag excites some users, but artistically edited photos contribute to the purpose of your posts. Does the X-Pro II filter or Valencia filter present your product in a refreshing or edgy way? There is an array of filters at your disposal to communicate a particular mood for your brand and products. #2: Tell a Story With the Caption You can give life to a photo with the caption. Nike's caption here is evocative and tells a story instead of merely describing the product. It's important to identify what type of description resonates best with your audience. In Nike's case, this photo represents the culmination of training for the Chicago Marathon. #3: Add Relevant Hashtags Hashtags make your photos discoverable. Use popular hashtags when they apply to your photo or your brand. It's best to stick with three to five hashtags at a time. You don't want to overload your photo with too many hashtags because that can be viewed as desperation. Also be cautious about piggybacking on current trending hashtags. Some brands create their own relevant hashtags, such as Tiffany & Co.’s #TiffanyLeather or #TiffanyAtlas, strategically crossed with more purpose-driven popular tags. Create a Hashtag Campaign Regramming user-generated content is one of the best ways to promote your community and products. Create a brand-centric hashtag campaign for your followers to use. Stitch Fix asks their fashion-forward followers to showcase their styling choices with the hashtag #StitchFixFriday. This hashtag not only fosters a sense of community, but also reaffirms who your audience is. Remember that engagement is a two-way street. Follow and pay attention to your followers, and like the posts that are strategically and aesthetically aligned with your brand. #4: Use a Call to Action Consider adding a call to action to your post, which prompts customers or shoppers to do something.

Social Sharing: How to Get More People to Share Your Content

Social Sharing: How to Get More People to Share Your Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you publish content online? Want more people to share your content? To learn how to get more people to share your content, I interview Mark Schaefer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Mark Schaefer, author of The Tao of Twitter and Social Media Explained. His blog Grow was awarded #2 on our top 10 blogs of 2015. Mark also co-hosts the Marketing Companion podcast. His latest book is called The Content Code: Six Essential Strategies for Igniting Your Content, Your Marketing, and Your Business. In this episode Mark will explore why people share via social media. You'll discover what you can do to improve your chances that people will share your content. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Sharing How Mark got into content and blogging Around 2008, Mark started his own business doing consulting and teaching. He realized if he was going to talk about Twitter, blogging and Facebook, he had to use them. So he started a blog as an experiment. It took him about 9 months to find his voice, Mark recalls. It dawned on him that all of his contacts and business were coming through his blog, so he needed to pay attention to it. The blog really started kicking in around 2010, and has been building ever since. The turning point happened when Mark started to write posts that were more authentic and had personality. Instead of finding his audience, Mark's audience found him. Mark tells new bloggers "To stand out, you need to be original. And to be original, you need to have the courage to tell your own story and have your own voice." In 2009 Mark wrote a post that was a little bit controversial, called The Social Media Country Club. As a new blogger, Mark felt like an outsider. He says it seemed like all of the influential bloggers were in this club, where they never said anything negative about each other. Mark was thinking, "How are we going to grow if we don't challenge each other?" Coming from 27 years of marketing experience, Mark expected any channel used for business to be measurable, while others felt it was all about the conversation. Though nervous, Mark started speaking his mind. The reaction was supportive and positive. His audience was grateful somebody finally said it. Listen to the show to discover what Mark blogged about at first and how he felt about it. Why marketing with content is so difficult today Whether you're an individual blogger, working in a business or working for a brand, many niches are getting crowded with content and social media activity. This makes it very difficult to compete. Mark feels this was predictable. He says when the Internet first started, everyone needed a website. If you were the first one with a website, you had an advantage. Then you needed to be found. If you were the first one to figure out search engine optimization, you had an advantage, because you're going to be at the top of the search rankings. However, after your competitors figured it out, it got harder and more expensive to be in marketing. He says it's the same thing with blogging. It's hard to be seen, because people are figuring it out. People are trying to stand out, but creating more or better content isn't necessarily the answer. For the last year, Mark has been obsessed with figuring out how to maneuver in this very crowded world. And that's why he wrote The Content Code. Listen to the show to hear my Times Square analogy. Mark's code for success Mark explains how all conversations are about content: creating more,

How to Track the ROI of Your Video Marketing

How to Track the ROI of Your Video Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to measure the ROI of your marketing videos? Looking for tools to help track sales from your videos? A simple framework and a few tools can reveal if your video campaigns are working for you. In this article you'll discover how to track and measure the ROI for your video marketing efforts. Listen to this article: #1: Outline Your Campaign Costs Take the time to do a complete breakdown of all of the projected costs of your video marketing campaign, including the marketing hours you'll spend promoting it. Include a buffer of at least 20% of your projected expenses if you manage the campaign on your own. This buffer will be used for unexpected costs, such as having to reshoot footage or invest more in editing. Keep in mind that there are video marketing companies that offer all-inclusive video marketing packages, and this can make doing a cost outline much easier and more effective. #2: Determine the Financial Tipping Point Think about how many sales you need to make from your video marketing campaign to break even. After you reach your break-even amount, everything else will be pure profit. But first you need to determine that amount. You can make this a very simple process. For example, if your video marketing campaign has a budget of $5,000 per month, you should expect to see your monthly sales go up by more than $5,000. If your average sale is $100, you already know that you'll need to make at least 50 sales to compensate for the cost of the video. You should track your sales (and other metrics) year-over-year in addition to month-by-month to make sure that you've adjusted for any seasonal changes. #3: Track Sales From Your Video Campaign That's all easy enough, but now you need to differentiate income from your video campaign from income from other marketing factors. To distinguish your video campaign from other marketing factors, you can always track people who flow from your video and go on to make a purchase. Do this by using web tools to embed links that are specific to your videos. Keep in mind that these won't track all of your sales. There will always be people who see your video and make a purchase later on or in a non-traditional way, so you'll need to inflate your sales slightly to get a true ROI. The benefit, naturally, is that you'll know that your video made you at least that amount of money. Use any one of these tools separately or combine them for more complete video marketing campaign analysis. Brandwatch makes it easy to quantify your company's brand awareness. Through this tool, you can identify brand sentiments to see if your campaign is working and whether you're building brand awareness in a positive, meaningful way. Clicky allows you to break down website visitors into marketing demographics and track their activity live. If you're hosting your own videos (rather than uploading them through a service), this is an ideal way to get a better picture of your audience. Audience demographics can be critical in determining not only your ROI and awareness, but also why a particular strategy may not be working (you're targeting the wrong demographic entirely, for example). Wistia offers one of the most advanced video analysis suites available. Not only does this tool provide demographic information, but it can also directly track engagement. You can see how long visitors watched and what actions they took when they finished watching. This includes any purchases that they may have made. Wistia can integrate into your sales funnel and give you critical information about optimizing your video marketing results. YouTube offers analytics such as YouTube Insights that will break down your viewership by demographic and track outgoing clicks. You can embed marketing prompts directly into your YouTube videos so you can funnel your viewers directly into a sales channel. #4: Improve Your Video Marketing Campaigns

How to Find More Customers With Twitter

How to Find More Customers With Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to find new customers for your business? Have you considered searching for them on Twitter? Thanks to public updates, searchable bios and a plethora of third-party tools, you can find customers on Twitter easier than you can on any other network. In this article I'll show you how to find your current and future customers on Twitter, without advertising. #1: Start With a Strong Profile Before you start looking for potential customers on Twitter, you need to make sure that any potential customers who visit your profile know who you are and what you do. Listen to this article: Start by visiting your Twitter profile and reading your bio. Make sure that any products, services and qualifications are clearly listed in your bio, along with your website link and location. If they're not, click Edit Profile and add them. Once you're finished, save your changes. To complete your profile, make sure that you pin a tweet at the top that highlights your business, products, services, free ebook, top case study or anything else you want to promote to potential customers. You can create a new tweet for this or use one you've recently tweeted. Click on the three dots beneath your tweet to pin it to the top of your profile. Pinning the tweet ensures that potential customers don't miss the message you're trying to send them. Once your profile is set, you can start searching for potential customers on Twitter. #2: Search for Potential Customers Using Their Bios Can you identify potential customers by keywords they use to define themselves and by their location? If so, you can use Followerwonk to discover them. This Twitter search engine allows you to search for people using the criteria shown here. You then get the following search results. As a free user of Followerwonk, you need to click through to the person's profile to follow or add him or her to a Twitter list. If you want to do the latter, start by going to your Twitter profile and clicking on the Lists tab (to the left of the Edit Profile button). Scroll down to find the Create New List button. Give your list a name that you'll recognize, add a description and set the list to Private. If it's set to Public, each user you add to this list will be notified. When you visit the profile of a potential customer, you can follow that person and/or add him or her to your newly created list. To add someone to a list, click the Settings wheel icon to the left of the Follow button. Now go to your Twitter list and see the news feed of updates from the potential customers you've added to your list. Use this list to start engaging with your potential customers. #3: Get Specific Tweets Delivered to Your Inbox Do you know your potential customers' needs or pain points? Do they share them on Twitter? If they do, you can get potential customers, primed to buy, delivered directly to your inbox. Start by using Twitter search to query a few things you think your potential customers might talk about on Twitter in relation to your products or services. For example, if you have a web hosting company, you might want to search for recommend web hosting ? -http -link to find people looking for recommendations for web hosting. The -http -link­ part will remove a majority of the results that contain links, which usually won't be tweets from potential customers. Once you find a few good searches, head over to IFTTT, sign up for a free account and create a new recipe. Start by selecting Twitter as the trigger channel. Next, choose New Tweet from Search as the trigger. Paste in your Twitter keyword search that generated some potential customers. Then select your choice of an instant email, email digest or Gmail notification as the action. The best option is an instant email or Gmail, as you want to be the first person to respond. Now customize the email you want to receive.

How to Lower DHEA

How to Lower DHEA

by @ How to of the Day

Keeping your hormone levels in check can boost your quality of life in every way. Dehydroepiandrosterone (DHEA) is one of the most important hormones in your body as it regulates the production of androgens and estrogens. To lower your DHEA levels, start by eating a healthy diet, exercising, and getting the right amount of sleep. Talk with your doctor and ask them to monitor your levels over time. Be careful about any medications that you take and over time you should start to see and feel the positive results.

Marketing Instagram Style: What Marketers Need to Know

Marketing Instagram Style: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Instagram for marketing? Are you wondering how you can grow an Instagram following that will build your business? To learn how Instagram can help you engage your audience, I interview Jenn Herman for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jenn Herman, who blogs at Jenn's Trends and is one of our top 10 social media blog winners for 2014. Her blog focuses on social media management. She's author of the ebook, The Ultimate Beginner's Guide to Instagram. Jenn shares why marketers should consider Instagram for their business. You'll discover the types of images that will engage your audience, how to drive traffic to your website and examples of marketers who are successful on the platform. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show. Instagram Marketing Why marketers should consider Instagram Jenn explains how a lot of people use Instagram for personal communication. Many people believe that it's a platform for selfies and pictures of food. However, Instagram is much more than that and goes a lot deeper. The marketing aspect is so much stronger now, and will only continue to grow. So far this year, the main buzzword has been visual marketing, with Facebook and Twitter embracing visual content. Not only is Instagram a visual platform, it also gives you the capacity to create visual content for other sites. With the Instagram tools available, you can create fun artwork to use on your blog, website, Facebook and Twitter. It's very useful for cross-promoting. Right now, 65% of the world's top brands use Instagram and Jenn says the number continues to grow. There are 200 million monthly active users on Instagram, 70% of which log in daily. This is a huge base of people for marketers to reach. No matter who your target audience is, some of them will use the platform. You'll hear why you can reach people more clearly through Instagram than you can with any other platform. As a marketer, you should aim to create original images for Instagram. There are many different ways to incorporate your products and services into an image to make it look more native and get better engagement. Listen to the show to find out what our 2014 Social Media Marketing Industry Report revealed about visual marketing. Marketers who use Instagram well The first brand example that Jenn talks about is fashion designer Michael Kors. The way they do product placement on Instagram is amazing. The images they create for their fans are behind the scenes at fashion shows, photo shoots and great shots of their products. These types of images can help you to connect with your audience. Although Jenn loves the images, she says it's their lack of engagement that lets them down. Instagram is a highly engaged and active environment. Jenn advises marketers to be aware of this, and make sure that you're responsive to your followers. Listen to the show to hear the type of images we used to create some buzz prior to Social Media Marketing World this year. Engagement on Instagram Jenn states that engagement is considerably higher on Instagram than it is on Facebook, Twitter and Google+. When Jenn tests her blog posts on all of the different platforms, Instagram almost always comes out ahead. One way to create engagement on Instagram is to ask a question in the caption. This encourages your readers to start or join the conversation. When they start to respond, you receive a trail of comments.

Rewarding a Web Design Company: The Penguin Effect

by Emily Kelly @ OCG Creative

When you work in a web design company, in digital marketing, or in SEO, Google Algorithm updates are often a trigger for mild panic attacks. You hold your breath as you start to see the effects of the change. You cry a little if your traffic starts to tank, or you jump for joy if… Read More

The post Rewarding a Web Design Company: The Penguin Effect appeared first on OCG Creative.

How Content Can Help You Build a Loyal Following

How Content Can Help You Build a Loyal Following

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you trying to build an engaged loyal following that loves you and your business? Have you tried to use video, podcasting or social media to build engagement? I explore these questions with Pat Flynn for our new Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This New Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a brand-new show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Pat Flynn, founder of Smart Passive Income. Pat shares insights into his tactics and strategies and how social media content contributes to the success of his business. You'll learn how to create content to publish on different social media platforms to connect to a large audience. And you'll discover the techniques to use to build a loyal fan base. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Content for Business The business strategy behind Smart Passive Income  Pat explains how content plays a key role in his business. You'll learn why his focus is to provide valuable content for those looking for information. You'll hear how you can do this when you share content based on your own experiences. Pat shares the results his business has had from his different content platforms: blog, video and podcast. Listen to the show to discover Pat's personal stories behind his successful business. How to make a personal connection with your audience Pat talks about the different ways he shares personal information about himself to connect with his audience and how he incorporates this into his business content. Pat shares the reason why he gives his audience strategic insights into his personal story. Pat shares how he connects with his audience on Facebook. You'll find out the strategy behind the different components of Pat's Facebook page photo and how this strategy helps him connect with his audience. People like to connect with people. You'll pick up some useful tips on how to build affinity online. Listen to the show to discover why Pat leverages his "trifecta" content creation strategy (blogging, video and podcasting) to connect with a wide audience. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bJIJ_6G9Z84 Pat's video strategy YouTube is the #2 search engine in the world. Pat explains how he uses videos to respond to questions from his audience. Pat explains how this strategy works well for his business and drives traffic back to his website. Listen to the show to find out how Pat intentionally uses keywords in his videos for great results. Pat's blogging strategy Pat blogs three times a week. He publishes content based on his own experiences and explains what he does wrong, what he does right and the results he gets. He's very transparent with all of the different processes. Pat talks about the Niche Site Duel, where he was challenged to build a website from scratch. Pat publicly displayed the process and how it reached #1 in Google. Pat explains the role email marketing plays in his business model and why it's crucial for business. You'll discover why email is still the best tool to use to connect with people in a direct and personal way. Listen to the show to discover insights into the business strategies behind Pat's successful blog. Pat's podcasting strategy You'll discover how Pat was surprised by the extent that podcasting helps his brand. Learn how Pat discovered that 20% of his readers find his website through his podcasts. Find out how to train your podcast audience to get to your blog with calls to action in your podcast. Pat uses the Pretty Link Pro plugin and domain names for easy redirect URLs to get podcast listeners to come to his site.

Twitter Marketing: How to Succeed on Twitter

Twitter Marketing: How to Succeed on Twitter

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter for your business? Are you wondering how to get more out of your Twitter marketing? To learn how to successfully market your business using Twitter, I interview Mark Schaefer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Mark Schaefer, the author of The Tao of Twitter, Return on Influence and co-author of Born to Blog. He's a college educator, blogger, consultant and speaker. This is his third appearance on this show! Mark explores what you need to know about using Twitter for your business. You'll discover the path to Twitter success, how to utilize everything Twitter has to offer to market your business, and manage your followers and lists. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Marketing How Mark got started with Twitter  Mark believes that you really need to immerse yourself in the social web in order to truly understand it, or be successful as a consultant or teacher. Mark immersed himself in Twitter 7 years ago, when he started his own consulting business and started to teach. Mark admits that he was not an early fan of Twitter. It took him months to figure out that this platform was more than just the advertising, technology, mentions or hashtags. Once he understood the powerful human aspect behind Twitter, it changed his life and he wanted others to understand it too. Mark calls Twitter the greatest networking tool ever created. Many of the connections he's made around the world would not have been possible without Twitter and his blog. Listen to the show to discover more about Twitter's powerful ability to connect you with potential clients and opportunities.  The three elements of the Tao of Twitter Mark identifies tao as the Chinese word meaning path. He explains that there is a certain path to success. Behind every Twitter success story, perhaps behind every social media success story, there are 3 essential elements to this path: meaningful content, a targeted audience, and authentic helpfulness. You'll hear Mark discuss each of these three elements in detail and how they work to create meaningful connections for your business when you use Twitter. According to Mark, there is no better way across any social media platform to create an audience than Twitter. It offers so many ways to find the right people for your business. Listen to the show to discover how these three elements work together to lead to success on Twitter.  How businesses can use Twitter  In The Tao of Twitter, there is a chapter called "25 Ideas to Toast Your Competition". Mark offers a few examples of this in the show. He thinks that Twitter is under utilized by businesses today, yet it has the power to transform your business. For instance, Twitter search can be the most powerful source of marketing research available to you. It offers users the ability to target an audience down to a specific zip code, sentiment, or keyword. Twitter's Advanced Search allows you to find potential clients, conduct competitive research, track trends, or provide customer service, all in real-time. Mark explores the benefits of paid promotions and ads on Twitter. According to Mark, this is a great time to try Twitter advertising. The inventory is high and the cost is relatively inexpensive at the moment, but Mark projects that this may not be case for long, as more people learn to leverage this opportunity. Listen to the show to discover a little known trick that makes Twitter advertising especially attractive to marketers.  Broadcast content versus being helpful

9 Ways to Find Niche Products and Start Selling Online [in 2017]

9 Ways to Find Niche Products and Start Selling Online [in 2017]


The BigCommerce Blog

Conquer your entrepreneurial dreams, learn how to find a product niche, and start selling online right now with these 9 must-follow tips.

Facebook Ads Strategy: How Marketers Need to Alter Their Techniques

Facebook Ads Strategy: How Marketers Need to Alter Their Techniques

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook ads? Want to learn the latest strategies? To discover what's changed with Facebook ads and how to get better results, I interview Rick Mulready. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Rick Mulready, the host of the Art of Paid Traffic podcast. He's a Facebook Ads coach and has numerous courses on Facebook advertising, including the FB ADvantage. Rick will explore what's changed with Facebook ads and share new strategies that work. You'll discover best practices for video ads, carousel ads, and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Ads Strategy Rick's story Rick spent 12 years in the corporate online advertising space, working with big companies like AOL, Yahoo, Funny or Die, and Vibrant Media. He did everything from banner and video ads to search and text advertising. Rick got into Facebook ads around 2010, while still in the corporate world. This was when Facebook was making a name for itself as a social platform, when small businesses could post on their pages and people would see it, and when Facebook started to allow business to advertise. Rick loved Facebook advertising. He saw the power in it, and taught himself as much as he could. He started running campaigns for entrepreneur friends while still in corporate, and the rest is history. Rick left his job at the end of 2012 and has been specializing in Facebook ads ever since. For the first couple of years, Rick focused on social media in general. He hosted the Inside Social Media podcast, where he interviewed the heads of social media from some of the biggest brands around the world. That was great, yet Rick still gravitated toward the Facebook ad side. In January 2015, Rick started the Art of Paid Traffic podcast, where he covers Facebook advertising and everything else to do with paid traffic such as YouTube ads, copywriting, landing pages, metrics, analytics, and so on. It's a combination of case studies, interviews with experts, and solo shows. Listen to the show to learn why only big businesses could really utilize Facebook ads in 2010. How Facebook Ads has evolved A lot has changed in Facebook advertising – such as targeting – over the past year or so, Rick says. For instance, you can upload your email list and create a targeted audience out of them. Also, you can retarget people coming to your website or a landing page. When most people think of targeting, they think of interest targeting, which is targeting fans of another page or somebody in their space. Facebook has recently rolled out detailed targeting. Before, if you wanted to target fans of Social Media Examiner or Entrepreneur Magazine, you could only do one or the other. Now, you can set up ads to target people who have an interest in Social Media Examiner and Entrepreneur Magazine. To take it a step further, you can exclude an audience. For instance, target fans of Social Media Examiner and Entrepreneur magazine, but exclude people who like Inc. Magazine. It's a much more detailed subset of that audience. When Facebook reported its Q4 earnings, they basically said their customer is not the advertiser. While they're making money off of advertising, their customers are the 1.5 billion Facebook users. Facebook recognizes that without these users, they won't have people coming to advertise on the platform. Therefore, Facebook is protecting the user experience. They want to make sure advertisers think of value first to take care of Facebook users. While you can still run an ad to an opt-in or registration page,

A Peek Inside Sleeknote’s New Advanced Features (Product Update)

by Isabella Rasmussen @ Sleeknote.com

The post A Peek Inside Sleeknote’s New Advanced Features (Product Update) appeared first on Sleeknote.com.

26 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Marketing

26 Tips to Improve Your Pinterest Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Could your Pinterest marketing use a jumpstart? Are you curious about what's working for other businesses? Tweaking techniques that have been successful for others can help you drive traffic, connect with your target audience, and increase sales. In this article, you'll discover 26 tips to improve your Pinterest marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Share Pin It for Later Links The Pin It button encourages users to pin content from your site onto their own boards. Engagement is captured even when users aren't on the platform. The same idea holds true for Pin It for Later links. You can post Pin It for Later links, along with the prompt "Pin it for Later" across social media. To create a Pin It for Later link, attach the URL of the pin you want users to save, add it to a post on social media after explaining what it is, and attach it to the phrase "Pin it for later!" This is a great way to drive traffic to Pinterest and build up repins. #2: Add 20-30 Keywords in Promoted Pins Keywords are the most important targeting feature you can use with promoted pins. Pinterest recommends that you use 20-30 keywords per promoted pin. That's just enough to get you noticed, but not so many that you're showing your content to the wrong people. Using a large number of keywords can help you cover all of the broad, specific, short, and long keywords you need. You'll show up better in searches when users are looking for content like yours, and it helps ensure that your pin is placed in the right category. These keywords won't show up on promoted pins; they work instead like targeting criteria, matching your content with the people looking for it. Think outside the box. Dollar Shave, for example, recently promoted their razors for Father's Day gifts, and attached a Father's Day keyword even though it's not a direct description of the product. #3: Feature Multiple Products in Single Pins Featuring multiple products in your pins can help them to get more engagement. This tactic can add value to a single pin for two reasons: first, you show users how many amazing things you have to offer; and second, you have a better chance of appealing to more users by featuring more options. You can feature multiple complementary products (like an assembled outfit from your collection) or show multiple uses for a single product (like six types of crafts that use mason jars). Not only does this increase the chance of appealing to more users, but it can also lead to larger sales. #4: Capitalize on Image Height Pinterest's pages are full of vibrant, high-quality, colorful images. So how do you make yours stand out? Image size (or image dimension) matters a great deal. While Pinterest automatically scales all images you upload to match the exact width, you choose the height of your images. Vertical pins (pins that appear taller) perform better on Pinterest. It's recommended that you use image dimensions from about 2:3 and 1.3:5 (with the minimum recommended width being 600 pixels). Note: While you can design pins with the extended dimensions 1.2:8, pins that reach the maximum height don't perform quite as well. #5: Include Text Overlay on Images While descriptions matter, images reign supreme on Pinterest. However, visuals still need a little help sometimes. To catch the attention of users scrolling quickly through feeds, add text overlay directly onto your images to make them stand out and explain why your pin and the content behind it are so valuable. In most cases, text shouldn't make up the majority of the pin. It can, however, be helpful to show off step-by-step tutorials, listicles, or a few words telling pinners what the pin is. Keep the text simple, the phrases short, and all of it easy to read. Bold text can make the description stand out. Plus, make sure the text is strongly contrasting in color from the rest of the image. #6: Choose Light Over Dark Images

10 Ways to Use the New LinkedIn Mobile App

10 Ways to Use the New LinkedIn Mobile App

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you tried out the new LinkedIn app? Do you want to make the most of its features? The new LinkedIn app makes it easy for marketers on the go to do nearly everything they'd do on a desktop from a mobile device. In this article, I’ll share 10 ways to use the new LinkedIn mobile app to stay in touch with your professional contacts. Listen to this article: #1: Write Updates The LinkedIn mobile app makes it easy to create and share updates, especially if you want to use images. To get started, go to the Home tab and click the Share button or Photo button at the top of the screen. If you click the Share button, you can create an update that includes text, links and mentions of other LinkedIn members. You can even upload a photo. Click the Photo button to take a picture or share an image from your gallery. Go this route if you know you want to share a pic. When you select Take a Photo or click the camera icon, it will go right to your camera. After you shoot the picture, you have the option to save or discard it. Then write your update and click to share the image. As an added bonus, you can now easily choose to share to your whole LinkedIn network, to LinkedIn and your Twitter account or to only your first-degree connections. Previously, you could only upload photos from your gallery. Now, if you're at an event, you can take a live pic and post it to LinkedIn as an update in seconds. Customized Graphics The ease of posting visuals on LinkedIn's mobile app is a powerful feature for visual marketers. Use a program like Word Swag (iOS) or Textgram (Android or iOS) to create a beautiful quote graphic. Then share it as an update on LinkedIn. As long as the quote graphic is relevant to your audience, anything business-related that you would normally share on a photo-centric social network can be shared with your LinkedIn network, as well. #2: Share LinkedIn Publisher Posts The LinkedIn mobile app doesn't offer the functionality to create a post on LinkedIn Publisher, but you're able to share existing LinkedIn Publisher posts with your network. To share a post, click the Me tab, swipe to the left and select your post. (If you're an Android user, you can get to your posts by selecting your profile from the Me tab.) Once you open the post, click on the little share icon in the top right. That will take you to a new screen with the options to Share or Message. To send your post as a private message, click the Message icon. In the To field, type the name of the person to whom you want to send it, write your message and then click Send. To share the post to your network as an update, click Share, write a message about the post and click on the Share button at the bottom. Remember, if you want to increase the visibility of your LinkedIn Publisher posts, you need to share them as updates several times. #3: Engage With Your Connections' Updates The redesigned LinkedIn app interface makes it easy to find, share and otherwise engage with your connections' updates. This is a great way to stay top of mind with your network. If you find an update that you want to share, click the Share button in the lower right of the post. In the pop-up menu that appears, select Share. Then write a short message about the update and click the Share button in the lower right. Since the new LinkedIn app launched, I seem to be getting more relevant updates in my news feed. It's much easier to like, comment and share when I have downtime, because the content I really want to interact with is right at my fingertips. #4: Check Out Who's Viewed Your Profile or Content On the Me tab, you can see people who have viewed your content or engaged with you, whether you're connected on LinkedIn or not. Then you can easily interact with them. Check out who viewed, liked or commented on your last post or share, and click on the post to respond.

How to Run a Successful Twitter Contest

How to Run a Successful Twitter Contest

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to boost engagement on Twitter? Have you thought about running a Twitter contest? Twitter contests are a creative, fun way to attract more followers, engagement and shares on the platform. In this post you'll discover how to run a Twitter contest for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Identify the Objective Successful marketing starts with clear goals, and this is true for Twitter contests, too. Think about what you hope to achieve with your contest. For example, you might want to increase traffic to your website or collect email signups from potential prospects. Or perhaps you're keen to increase the number of followers or generate more brand mentions on Twitter. Deciding on the goal of your campaign is key, as it will inform the type of contest you launch. #2: Choose a Prize The prize has an important bearing on the overall success of your contest. Choose something that is highly relevant to your brand or related to your company or services in some way. A free iPad is an impressive prize, but it's unlikely to generate long-term gains or brand engagement unless your company offers iPad-related products or services. A Twitter contest isn't an opportunity to offload that box of branded pens or last year's merchandise though. Do a brainstorming session with your team and discuss what types of prizes are likely to excite your loyal followers and inspire new ones. Opt for prizes that are useful, exclusive or seasonal to generate more interest. This is obviously easier for consumer-focused brands, such as those that offer retail, fashion, tech and edible products. However, service-based businesses can package a service or offer tangible prizes like ebooks, branded stationery, free memberships or access to exclusive training materials. You could also team up with other brands or companies and offer a prize bundle to make the reward even more substantial or compelling. #3: Select a Contest Type When selecting a contest type, it's important to consider the barrier to entry for the contest and how it will affect the number, quality and relevance of entries you receive. For example, a simple contest that requires only a retweet will have wider appeal than one that also requires people to upload a photo or answer a question. However, this additional level of effort will help to separate half-hearted followers from those who are really invested in your brand or product. There are a variety of different Twitter contests that work well. Here are three types to consider for your business. Sweepstakes A sweepstakes contest is perfect if your main objective is to drive followers to a landing page on your website. When you tweet about the contest, share the link to your landing page and include text that drives people to enter the competition on your website. Keep in mind that including a number in your tweet, as Rosetta Stone did in this example, increases retweets by 17%, according to Twitter. The level of success of this type of contest will be influenced by the number of followers your brand already has on Twitter. Without a request for retweets or replies, this contest is unlikely to increase brand reach or grow your followers. However, because the contest is hosted on your website, you can promote it on your other social media channels and in your email campaigns, too. Tool tip: Tools like Wishpond or Woobox make it easy to launch custom sweepstakes Twitter contests and manage entries. Retweet and Follow Reward loyal fans with an exclusive contest and encourage new followers with a retweet and follow contest. This is a good choice if you want to boost your reach on Twitter, encourage retweets, attract new followers and increase @mentions of your company's Twitter handle. To encourage more engagement on Twitter, ask followers to submit a photo or answer a quiz to qualify. For example,

Google+ Hangouts: What Marketers Need to Know to Get Started

Google+ Hangouts: What Marketers Need to Know to Get Started

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Google+ hangouts for your marketing? Are you wondering how hangouts can help your business? To learn how to get started with Google+ hangouts, I interview Brandee Sweesy for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Brandee Sweesy, who is a Google+ hangouts marketing expert. For the last 20 years she has been helping entrepreneurs grow a following with video. Brandee shares how you can use hangouts to promote your content. You'll learn the different techniques to help brand your hangouts and the best ways to promote attendance. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google+ Hangouts Marketing What is a Google+ hangout? Brandee states that first of all, it's free. Google describes it as a unification of their video, chats and messenger service all in one place. It was a replacement for Google talk and Google chat. Hangouts can either be private or you can stream live to your YouTube channel with Hangouts on Air. Brandee explains that if you're a consultant or coach, you can use hangouts like you would Skype. The quality of the video is amazing. If you want to record your private hangout sessions, then you will have to use Camtasia or ScreenFlow. These hangouts are great to use for team meetings, consulting, coaching or when you privately advise people. With a hangout on air, you can host yourself and up to nine other people. You can all be on the video at the same time, where you can chat and give a presentation. This can be done with private hangouts and hangouts on air. You'll discover why you need to keep control of the sound-activated screen and what you need to do. Hangouts on air stream live to your YouTube channel. It's linked to your Google+ page. If you have a Google+ profile or a Google+ business page, you link it to your YouTube channel. You need to have your YouTube channel verified for uploads of more than 15 minutes and most hangouts run longer than that. The great advantage when you stream live to your YouTube channel is that at the end of the broadcast, you have unlimited YouTube content. You'll find out what you need to add once you have finished the live stream to be able to optimize your video marketing. When you stream live, it also runs on your Google+ profile page at the same time. Once you start a hangout on air, you can take the embed codes and share them on a Facebook tab, website or blog post. You can then direct people to watch it there. There's also a Hangouts on Air page that lists all of the hangouts that are currently on air. Listen to the show to learn about how you should name your hangouts to grab people's attention. How does a hangout differ from a webinar? Brandee first saw hangouts as a possible replacement for webinars. A lot of the webinar platforms are expensive and if you only do a few, it can be hard to justify the cost. Many webinar platforms base their price on the number of viewers. But with a hangout on air, you have unlimited viewership. Brandee explains how she has done webinars by herself with a slide presentation embedded on a website that has unlimited viewers. With hangouts on air, you don't need to buy expensive plugins for your website. People can enter their email address and then flip over to a Watch Live page. You'll discover the best option to help build engagement and keep viewers from getting distracted. The advantage with hangouts is you have the opportunity to share an image wit...

Pinterest Success: Creative Ways to Use Pinterest for Your Business

Pinterest Success: Creative Ways to Use Pinterest for Your Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Pinterest for business? Are you wondering how your business can benefit from Pinterest? To learn some creative ways to use Pinterest to help your business, I interview Cynthia Sanchez for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Cynthia Sanchez, host of the Oh So Pinteresting Podcast. She freely admits that she's addicted to Pinterest. It's changed her life in a major way and now she helps other businesses figure out how to tap into this growing network. Cynthia shares how you can use Pinterest for market research and how to get your content seen by more people. You'll learn about some of the most popular trends on Pinterest and how to create attention-grabbing images. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest for Business How did Pinterest grab you? When Cynthia was practicing as an oncology nurse, part of her work was to develop a program called Navigation. The role involved a lot of teaching and reaching out. At the end of 2011, she joined Pinterest to find information not only for herself, but also her patients. It started to take over her life unlike any other social media platform. She had the entrepreneurial spirit, but in the medical world, the opportunities are very limited. In February 2012, Cynthia launched her blog Oh So Pinteresting. It evolved from personal use to more business use. A local company noticed she knew a lot about Pinterest and approached her for help. The business grew from there and she said goodbye to the nursing world. The reason Cynthia started with a blog first was because it seemed less technologically daunting. She used WordPress for her self-hosted site. The podcast started a year later when the time seemed right. You'll discover what type of people Cynthia interviews for her podcast and the areas discussed, with Pinterest being such a visual platform. Listen to the show to find out the reaction to Cynthia's blog at the New Media Expo. How people use Pinterest for market research Cynthia says there are a lot of ways you can use Pinterest for market research. If you already have a presence on Pinterest, take a look at the people who follow your account. You can click on the number of followers you have to see a list pop up with all of the people who follow you. From this, you'll see if you have a predominant age group or gender following you. You have to remember that Pinterest is an international type of service. When you click through your followers, you can see the other boards they're following. You'll find out what you can learn when you click through and how this can help you with some ideas for your business. There are a few other things to look out for within a Pinterest account, which include people's location and if they link up to their other social networks. You'll learn what benefits there are to people having their Twitter account linked to their Pinterest account. Cynthia shares the benefits of a free analytic service called PinLeague. The difference with PinLeague and Pinterest's own analytics service is that you can see who your most influential followers are. You'll learn what you can gain when you dig deep into their accounts. Listen to the show to find out other ways you can check out your competitors and how it can help guide your Pinterest activity. Some of the more popular trends on Pinterest Cynthia believes that the most important thing overall,

How to Create Facebook Image Posts That Engage

How to Create Facebook Image Posts That Engage

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use images in your Facebook marketing? Are your image posts performing as well as you’d like? While targeting, relevancy and timing play significant roles in the success of Facebook campaigns, the right image is key to improving engagement. In this article, you’ll discover how to improve the performance of your Facebook image posts. Listen to this article: #1: Start With Quality Images People respond to outstanding images. These are pictures that inspire likes, comments and shares, and encourage people to engage. The importance of images (as well as video) has skyrocketed in recent years, so images that were good enough in the past may not be anymore. While most brands think they share captivating images, unfortunately most are missing the mark. You not only need to use pictures that are high-quality and unique, you need to make sure those pictures relate to your brand and stimulate engagement. For example, even though TripAdvisor has access to some of the most captivating imagery in the world, some of their images work better than others. After reviewing their 20 most recent posts on Facebook, I discovered that TripAdvisor receives an average 251 likes and 30 shares per post. Many of those posts display user-generated content like this beautiful landscape above with the text, "Caption this …" An image like this used to be "enough" for fans to get excited about and engage with. (And 376 likes would make many fan pages stand up and cheer.) However, the text is very basic and it's just one view of a setting. Alternatively, but still in line with their brand, TripAdvisor recently posted 12 beautiful images of natural pools in an album with a clever title ("Natural Swimming Pools You Wish Were in Your Backyard") and a caption ("We like our pools au naturel."), designed for a reaction. The result? Nearly 2,700 likes and almost 300 shares. In this case quantity and quality paid off. There's no question about it. It's harder to compose Facebook posts like this. However, if you want to increase engagement on your images in a big way, it may be worth the time to put in the extra work. #2: Test for Performance To find what will inspire your audience to engage, you need an image that makes them stop in their tracks, followed by irresistible content. Trial and error with split testing is a surefire way to determine what your fans do and do not respond to. It just takes time. Study your image performance to see which ones fall flat, and which images trigger a response, whether it's in the form of a like, share, click, sign-up, purchase, etc. When you find what works, replicate and scale it. You should also review images that don't lead to a response, so you can try to understand why they weren't successful. Keep in mind that the image itself is not the only thing that makes a post successful. Pay attention to the title, body content, call to action and any additional text (such as percentage off in an ad or expiration date for a deal) as well. After testing images to see what resonates with your audience, gather images that are in alignment with your brand. Then, write out your messaging in the form of titles, text and calls to action. Don't go with just the first few things that come to mind. Get creative and take the time to do this right. Now, mix and match to create a massive library of image and text combinations. Some of the combinations should be completely different and others just slightly different. The goal is to make sure that every post people see for your brand is different than the one before. #3: Pay for Visibility Facebook has changed quite a bit in recent years. Organic reach is not what it used to be. So unless you already have thousands of highly engaged fans, the odds of an organic photo post performing well are slim. The answer? Facebook advertising. If you're going to put in the time to develop amazing photo posts,

4 Ways to Create Social Media Ads That Stand Out

4 Ways to Create Social Media Ads That Stand Out

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your ads getting noticed as much as you'd like? Are you looking for ways to grab your audience's attention? Successful social media ads entice consumers to watch, listen to or click on the message. In this article you'll discover four ways to create social media ads that stand out. Listen to this article: #1: Script It for Broadcast Podcasting is a great opportunity to reach a new, attentive and engaged audience. Whether your ad is scripted like a radio spot or read aloud by the podcast host, it will come across as more authentic than any sponsored Facebook post ever could. The audience knows it's an ad because it sounds like an ad, and that's okay. Don't underestimate the time and resources this kind of advertising requires, though. You'll need to either have a trusted podcaster do it for you or be extremely creative with how you deliver your messaging, like this ad for Mail Chimp on the Serial podcast. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3O8Dzz8KzqQ #2: Use Video or GIFs Video has been hot for a few years now, but a lot has changed recently. For example, Facebook has autoplay on video and supports animated GIFs (finally!), and Instagram just announced they're releasing video ads to all brands. Great content combined with motion is an irresistible combination that gives you the opportunity to engage with consumers on a deeper level. Video marketing can be tricky though, so you need to keep a few things in mind. First, although many videos on social media feature autoplay, your message shouldn't rely on audio. Don't assume your audience is listening, but do assume they're watching. BuzzFeed and Business Insider do a great job at combining audio with visual elements in their videos if you need some inspiration. Second, if you're thinking about diving into Instagram video ads, know that they're limited to 15 seconds. So skip any opening graphics or stills and get right to the story. Also, Instagram was built on an audience that appreciates beautiful and inspiring visuals, so think beyond basic storytelling and consider using a mix of still imagery and video. For example, Stuart Weitzman’s Instagram ads like the one above (which are actually animated GIFs) are subtle but eye-catching examples of how brands are pushing creative boundaries on this platform. Or for something more entertaining, check out how Disney used Instagram video to promote the movie Big Hero 6. This ad features characters from the Big Hero 6 movie posting selfies, which is a perfect fit for this social platform. Plus, the ad isn't overly promotional, and Disney kept it fun and lighthearted. #3: Incorporate Humor Many brands have found success by taking social media advertising and turning it into a parody of itself. An example of this is Old Spice's “scratch and sniff” ad. With this ad, the company pokes fun at the entire online advertising space. It's on target for the brand's persona, and the cheeky copy and imagery leave a lasting impression on the viewer, which is something most traditional ads stopped doing a long time ago. While this ad was placed as a banner ad, the tactic can easily be translated to social media marketing. Humor is one of the best emotions to tap into if you want your content to generate engagement, so lighten up and make your audience laugh. Just know that using humor and sarcasm doesn't necessarily work for every brand. Your ad content and campaign need to reflect your brand voice and resonate well with your target audience. Done well, it works. If you miss the mark, it can be a social media disaster, as was the case with the DiGiorno #whyistayed campaign. #4: Provide Content Downloads Instead of simply advertising to consumers, what if you provided useful content? This isn't a new concept (it's basically Content Marketing 101), but it's something you want to embrace. Whether you're in B2C or B2B, you have something to offer.

Facebook Marketing for Small Business: What You Need to Know

Facebook Marketing for Small Business: What You Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your business on Facebook? Are you wondering how a small business can benefit from Facebook marketing? To learn about the opportunities for small businesses, I interview Ramon Ray for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ramon Ray, the author of The Facebook Guide to Small Business Marketing. He's also the founder of Small Biz Technology and the guy behind a great event called Small Business Summit. Ramon shares his tips and techniques when it comes to Facebook marketing. You'll learn how to grow a larger following on Facebook and turn Facebook engagement into sales. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing The marketing opportunity for small businesses When it comes to business, although Facebook is a great networking tool, Ramon believes that the most important thing any small business should do is start with a website and focus on email marketing. Facebook is the biggest social network out there and it's where your prospects, customers, friends and family are. Not only will Facebook help you find specific people, it also allows you to target these people. Ramon explains how Facebook having access to so much rich information makes it very simple for them to approach you and ask whom you want to advertise to. They are able to narrow it down. With Facebook, you can do this with a good degree of granularity, which works well for many people. Listen to the show to find out how marketing has changed from 10 years ago and how it's a lot more economical now. Some ways to grow a larger following for small business owners on Facebook Ramon lists three things that small businesses should do to grow a larger following on Facebook. Be consistent with your posting Be relevant Be excited about it Remember people aren't necessarily on Facebook to buy, per se. They're there to have fun. Many small business owners on Facebook don't realize the interconnectedness among people. You'll hear an example of how interaction can lead to more of your fans being drawn to your Facebook Page. Ramon believes that there is no other platform that allows you to create deeper engagement than Facebook does. When it comes to advertising a post, there are so many different ways to do it. Small business owners use Facebook as an engagement platform. Listen to the show to find out how Facebook can help you connect not only to individuals but their networks as well. How Facebook groups differ from LinkedIn groups Ramon states that although LinkedIn has some big, powerful groups, he believes the advantage that Facebook has goes back to friends of friends. This is where Facebook might have the edge. For example, with regards to LinkedIn groups, marketers talk about how to build the group and how you get the LinkedIn alerts. However, when you create a group on Facebook, you can make it private or public. In Ramon's opinion, what's nice is that overall, you are still operating in the realm of Facebook. The main differentiator when deciding whether to create a Facebook group or a LinkedIn group is, "What is your audience using?" When it comes to Facebook groups, you have to keep in mind that some are public and some are private. And Facebook has a very powerful search feature. Ramon talks about the rules of engagement for Facebook groups when it comes to business owners looking for opportunities. Don't dive in there and start selling your products.

Blogs, Books and Social: How the World Has Changed

Blogs, Books and Social: How the World Has Changed

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you think the world of publishing is evolving? Have you ever thought of self-publishing? To learn more about how blogs, books and social content have evolved, I interview Guy Kawasaki for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Guy Kawasaki, former chief evangelist for Apple and author of many books including Enchantment and What the Plus! Google+ for the Rest of Us. Guy shares his experience of publishing his first book in 1987 and how publishing has changed since then. You'll also learn tips and techniques to use on Google+. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Changes in Publication How the process of publishing books has changed Guy talks about what the book publishing process was like back in 1987 when he published The Macintosh Way and how it has changed since then. He explains the difference between a traditional publishing and self-publishing. With a traditional publisher, there's a lot of going back and forth and not a lot of control for the author. The timeline from finishing a book to it being on a shelf is around 6-9 months. Self-publishing today is a completely different world. You'll discover  how Guy's last book What the Plus was on sale on Kindle six days after he finished writing it.  Guy also shares the story of going from an electronic book to a print book. Listen to the show to hear the story of how What the Plus made it to paperback. How the publishing world is changing Guy explains why publishing is an industry in transition, where he feels this industry will go and the opportunities for publishers today. Guy shares how times have changed with desktop publishing and how anybody with InDesign or an Apple Mac and a laser printer can become a publisher. In addition, people with blogs and websites are publishers. With the variety of tablet computers available today, anyone with Microsoft Word can become a publisher. You'll find out why Guy believes in the theory of "infinite monkeys working on keyboards are going to produce a lot of masterpieces." Listen to the show to find out why now is a great time to self-publish. How Guy's publishing journey has changed and why Guy shares his story of how he ran out of ideas to publish on his own blog, which led him to guest writing for the American Express Open Forum, and how he ran out of ideas for that too. You'll learn why Guy considers his biggest challenges in blogging are to have enough topics to write about over time and to have the time to write. Now with Twitter, Google+ and Facebook, he finds himself more of a curator than a blogger. It's one thing to generate content; it's another to curate and find content. Guy says he has evolved from a blogger to a curator, and when he does write, he writes books. Social networks allow him to express himself spontaneously and the deeper ideas go into book format. He explains why a blog is the logical place to start and why he considers blogging good practice before writing a book. You'll discover the benefits of writing a blog-type post on Google+, compared to a stand-alone blog. Listen to the show to find out why Guy would use Google+ or a Facebook Fan Page today as a platform. How Twitter fits into the social ecosystem today Guy explains why his personal approach to Twitter now is unusual. You'll find out how Guy uses Twitter to curate great content from his website Alltop and a section there called Holy Kaw!

Measuring Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

Measuring Social Media: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you understand how to measure social media activities? Do you know how to gather the right data to help you achieve your business goals? To explore how you can measure social media activities, I interview Lutz Finger for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Lutz Finger, who is the director of data analytics at LinkedIn and co-author of the new book, Ask, Measure, Learn: Using Social Media Analytics to Understand and Influence Customer Behavior. Lutz shares why he's so interested in social analytics. You'll discover why Lutz believes social media analytics will have a bigger impact than the onset of the Internet did. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Measuring Social Media Why do so many businesses struggle with measuring social media activities? Lutz talks about the trial-and-error phase of social media measurement and how we've moved beyond that phase in some areas but are still learning in others. He says the promise of social media analytics has a lot of misconceptions around it. With easy access to data on trending content, followers, Klout scores, etc., businesses are trying to find a way to use the data. Lutz explains why this approach often leads to a negative outcome and why businesses should approach using data with a goal or question first. Lutz shares why it's important to understand how a metric is built and points to the Influencer metric as an example. He says that while there are at least 10 different Influencer metrics that have to do with reach, not every influencer can help fulfill every goal. He explains why he would consider Social Media Examiner an influencer if he wanted to put a new social tool in front of people who work with social media, but not if he wanted to sell clothing. Listen to the show to learn what influencer reach must be combined with to move people from awareness to intention. The difference between viral and contagious content Lutz says the term viral, when used to describe social media content, is wrong because something that's viral is equally infectious at every stage. For example, a story that is liked by 1 in 10 people the first time it's seen will be liked by 1 in 10 people in the future. He explains that when something is contagious, it gains weight as long as it travels. The more people who believe in it, the more trustworthy the story becomes, regardless of whether it's true. Listen to the show to find out how people convince an algorithm that something is contagious and how that's affected things like the New York Times Bestseller List. How social media data can empower a business Lutz states there isn't good or bad data, there's just useful and useless data. He explains that data is only useful when a business has the right question. He shares that many organizations start by asking what data they have and how they can measure it. Then they try to find something in the data to help their business. Lutz says you need to start with a question or goal, and then figure out how to capture the data that will help answer that question instead of using data to come up with a question you didn't have in the first place. He illustrates how a sales department can use data to answer the question, "How can we find new clients?" Listen to the show to discover why sentiment is an especially difficult metric to measure. How marketers can start measuring social media activities Once you have the question,

LinkedIn Prospecting: How to Find Your Next Customer on LinkedIn

LinkedIn Prospecting: How to Find Your Next Customer on LinkedIn

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use LinkedIn for your business? Are you wondering how to use LinkedIn to find prospects and customers? To learn about how to build strategic relationships through LinkedIn, I interview Viveka von Rosen for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Viveka von Rosen, author of LinkedIn Marketing: An Hour a Day and founder of Linked Into Business. Viveka shares how she prospects on LinkedIn for her business. You'll learn about the tools available to make prospecting easy and what you need to do to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: LinkedIn Prospecting What is prospecting? Viveka explains that a prospect is someone whom you either find or attract to you who's in a company, business, industry or organization that has a need for your product or service. Before social media, prospecting was done through very expensive outbound sales. However, social media and LinkedIn in particular have changed this. You'll hear why Viveka loves prospecting. Social media has changed us from the age of the seller to the age of the consumer. Consumers now tell us want they want. A large part of prospecting is to know who your ideal clients are and know their needs. Facebook, Yelp, LinkedIn and Twitter make the research a lot easier. As a seller, it's also a lot easier and cheaper to get out there and position yourself as a thought leader. This engenders the feeling of "know, like and trust" in a client or prospect with whom you may not have had direct interaction. It makes it easier to close the sale. In Jill Konrath's book, Selling to BIG Companies, she talks about how you have to know whom to sell to. This is why LinkedIn is so important—it tells you who works at the companies, their positions and whom they interact with. It enables you to reach out to the right person. Listen to the show to find out why groups can be so powerful. LinkedIn for prospecting Viveka explains the two aspects of prospecting—inbound and outbound. Actively prospecting is just a matter of research. With a combination of keywords, titles, company name and location, you can use the Advanced Search on LinkedIn to discover the people you want to interact with. These are your prospects. You'll hear about some of the great benefits of LinkedIn and also some of its limitations. One of the most powerful search categories is Location. Not only can you see who lives in your town, but also when you attend trade shows or conferences, it's a great way to connect with people before the event. A really cool app that you can use for conferences is Bizzabo, which has a LinkedIn API interface. There are thousands of events in there and you can see who will be at the event. It shows you their LinkedIn profile. In the show, you'll also discover another app which can be used for prospecting. If you want to meet prospects face to face before an event, a cool new app called Trendr will set up a live meeting place. Listen to the show to find out how you can discover if a prospect is active in a particular LinkedIn group. Viveka's experience on LinkedIn Viveka is extremely active on LinkedIn, either prospecting or inbound. She says that 70-80% of her business comes through LinkedIn and the remainder through things that she markets on Twitter. When you own a LinkedIn group, it allows you to position yourself as a thought leader. Viveka owns quite a few groups.

How to Get Started on Blab: Group Video Broadcasting for Marketers

How to Get Started on Blab: Group Video Broadcasting for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you a fan of live-streaming video for business? Have you tried Blab? Blab, the newest platform in streaming video, lets you build a personal and business presence while creating community. In this article I'll explore Blab and share ways you can use it for business. Listen to this article: About Blab Blab.im, which is currently available on desktop and iOS (Android is coming soon), is a live-streaming video platform that lets you host your own live video show or conference with up to four people engaging at the same time. The moderator has control over who is in the three additional video seats, but anyone who wants to tune in can use the right panel to chat and the left panel to tweet. Blab's ease of use, simplicity and functionality give it the edge over other live-streaming platforms. For instance, Meerkat, Periscope and Facebook Mentions are mobile-only and are mostly just you talking to your audience. Plus, if you want to interview someone, he or she needs to be right next to you. And while you can include up to 10 people on a Google hangout, the session feels more like an interview and doesn't provide the same sense of engagement as a blab. Another plus is that Blab's time length is open-ended and most blabs last about an hour. According to Shaan Puri, CEO of Blab, most people using the platform spend at least an hour "blabbing" each day. Blab is more than just a new toy. It's a substantial method of connecting, and others are getting as excited about it as I am! #1: Get Started on Blab Use the same account for Blab as you do for Twitter. Just log in and you're ready to go. If you want to change your bio or notifications, click on your photo and select Settings. Once on the platform, follow people to receive notifications about their blabs. Finding people to follow is simple: do a search by name or look anyone up by adding their Twitter handle after blab.im/. To start a new blab, click the purple button next to your profile picture. Then give your blab a title and choose up to three tags (keywords). Next, set up your blab to go live immediately or schedule it for the future. Record Your Blab If you're the moderator, you can choose to record the blab. Within a minute of the end of the show, you'll receive two links to an mp3 or mp4 with the recording. After you receive those links, you can upload your recorded blab as a video to YouTube or as a podcast on Libsyn, iTunes or your preferred host. Additionally, all of the blabs you record are archived for access on your profile under Replay. While archived blabs can be replayed at any time, viewers cannot chat, send feels or follow people during a replay. Promote Your Blab If you go live, you can tweet a link to let people know about your blab. Promote your scheduled blabs the same way you would promote any event. Create a custom graphic, email your network, schedule a Facebook event, tweet it out and share on all of your social networks. Moderate Your Blab When there's an empty seat, someone can request to join in. When the moderator approves, the new person enters the video chat. Blab is similar to a late-night talk show format. There's a host and a primary special guest. When another guest comes on, the previous guest can slide over a seat and stick around. #2: Use Blab Chat Commands There are a few unique commands enabled in the chat column on the right of Blab's layout. To ask a question, type "/Q", and the word Question appears in a grey box so it stands out. To change the topic of the blab, the moderator can type "/Topic". For a bit of fun, you can add interest to your chat comments by typing "/shrug" or "/tableflip" in the chat box. I'm not aware of other commands, but it wouldn't surprise me if the Blab development team has more Easter eggs hidden. #3: Give Kudos to Blabbers Instead of hearts, like those used on Periscope,

How to Create a Promoted Pin Campaign on a Budget

How to Create a Promoted Pin Campaign on a Budget

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to add Promoted Pins to your marketing mix? Are you wondering how to budget for a Promoted Pin campaign? You don't have to spend a lot of money on Promoted Pins for them to be effective. Because they have long-term visibility, they're a sound addition to your Pinterest marketing. In this article, I'll share how to build an effective, affordable promoted-pin campaign on Pinterest. #1: Start With Effective Pins While promoted pins are an excellent way to get the most visibility for your advertising dollar, it all starts with crafting a great social media image. Based on your business specialty or niche, create images that speak to your audience. Listen to this article: Also, use tall images to make sure your pins get noticed. They stand out better and command the attention of Pinterest users. Give yourself a selection of images and pin them ahead of time, so you have choices if you decide to test out various types of visual content using different small budgets. Once you decide what image you want to use, here's how to craft an ad for your promoted pin. Note: Promoted pins are still rolling out in the United States. If you don't have access yet, join the waitlist. #2: Choose Your Objective Go to your Pinterest profile and click the settings button next to Edit Profile to get to promoted pins in the drop-down menu. Once you click the Promote button, you'll see that Pinterest offers you two choices: Boost Engagement or Get Traffic. To get maximum benefit from your promoted pin ad campaign, choose Get Traffic to Your Website. Keep in mind this is a future strategy that does the promotion backwards. While you tell Pinterest that you want traffic to come to your website, what you really mean is that you want engagement for your pins. #3: Create the Campaign Give your campaign a name and then decide on what date or dates you want your promoted pin to be seen. Since the budget is low, you don't want to stretch it out too long. If it's your first time promoting a pin, use Saturday as your day. The more you use promoted pins, the more likely you'll find the best day for your brand. Keep fine-tuning this aspect of your campaigns. Now, decide how much money you would like to spend each day. I recommend spending $10 for one day or spread $10 over two days ($5 per day). #4: Select Keywords for Visibility The next step is to pick which pin you would like to promote. Then use keywords to tell Pinterest where you would like it to be seen. This is one of the most important things you can do to get your pin noticed. Keywords should include everything that anyone searching for what you have to offer would think of. So make sure you hit all of the right niche-specific terms for your pin. Depending on your niche, you can see an estimate of how many weekly impressions your pin may get. #5: Determine the Cost Per Click After you set your keywords, decide how much money you're willing to spend for each person who clicks on your pin to be directed to your website. This is where you may think you need a large budget to get good traffic. However, we're not after traffic right now. We want the engagement in the form of repins. Come up with a low cost-per-click (CPC) number. I usually offer 15 to 25 cents per click. A low CPC ensures you won't run out of money if people get click-happy. #6: Review Campaign Results Once your campaign is complete, review the results and wait for the resulting traffic. For example, I only spent $5 on the campaign below. It received a lot of engagement and impressions at the time, and I'm still getting traffic from it today. The point of this whole strategy is to turn small amounts of money into traffic generators for your website in the future. The 42 people who repinned this pin will show it to their followers. When their followers repin it, it opens up new reach for you on Pinterest.

How Top Brands Improve Customer Retention on Facebook

How Top Brands Improve Customer Retention on Facebook

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you nurture relationships with customers on social media? Want to decrease customer acquisition costs? When you cultivate relationships with social media, you improve customer retention and ultimately boost your bottom line. In this article I'll share how top brands use Facebook to improve customer retention, and how you can apply their tactics to your social media marketing. Listen to this article: The Value of Customer Retention It's easier to keep a customer than to acquire a new one. Gartner, Inc. statistics show that 80% of a company's future revenue will come from just 20% of its existing customers. Furthermore, according to Bain & Company (working with Earl Sasser of Harvard Business School), a 5% increase in customer retention can increase a company's profitability by 75%. With social media, the door is wide open for companies to build relationships 24/7 with the customers who influence referral rates and keep their businesses alive and thriving. #1: Embrace Your Brand Advocates Give your customers a place to share their voice and their stories, and you'll develop a kinship that will lead to brand loyalty. The Walt Disney Company, which has been the go-to source for brand and relationship marketing inspiration for more than 50 years, has truly embraced social media. The Father's Day post below personifies that commitment to fans. Disney took a story that applies to a substantial segment of its audience, and put it into video form using recognizable characters. This Facebook post does three things: promotes Disney's core values, celebrates its brand advocates and invites participation. Through brand experience storytelling, among other campaigns, Disney celebrates the fan experience and endears itself to customers in the process. #2: Provide Exceptional Customer Service Fans who turn to Facebook for answers can quickly become loyal customers, especially if you respond to them immediately and with accurate information. JetBlue has perfected the art of customer service with their remarkable ability to respond to their more than one million Facebook fans within mere minutes of a comment or post to the page. JetBlue sees each social media conversation as an opportunity to cultivate an enduring relationship with specific individuals. They empowered their team members to do what it takes to improve the customer experience and repair potentially broken relationships. Although most businesses may not have the resources to monitor their social media accounts 24/7, they can provide the tools and encourage their team to do whatever is necessary to enhance their customers' experiences online, as well as in-store. #3: Show Additional Uses for Your Product If there are other uses for your products, let your customers know. If there aren't, see what you can come up with and share those uses with your fans. Oreo, which has been very active with social media marketing, has taken relationship building to an entirely new level by sharing recipes via video to promote their product. These 10- to 30-second videos directly resonate with existing customers, who also happen to be their target audience. Through these videos, Oreo gives customers (who ideally have a package of Oreos sitting in their pantry) additional uses for their product. The result is customers keep eating and purchasing their cookies. Brainstorm to determine how your business can provide additional value to the products or services your existing customers already have. When you consider how your product can be utilized creatively and share those uses, you encourage additional purchases, while you cultivate customer relationships. #4: Address Customer Concerns Publicly Business owners and marketers aim to develop strategies with precision and avoid mistakes. However, no brand is immune to mishandled incidents, mismanaged campaigns or a full-blown social media crisis.

6 Productivity Tools for Twitter

6 Productivity Tools for Twitter

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to keep up with your Twitter activities? Looking for a way to streamline your Twitter marketing? The right productivity tools will help you manage your Twitter marketing more effectively and free up your time for other tasks. In this article you'll discover six tools and techniques that will boost your productivity on Twitter. Listen to this article: #1: Manage Twitter Messages With AgoraPulse Keeping on top of your Twitter mentions and messages can take a huge amount of time each day. According to research from Brandwatch, retail brands receive an average of 821 mentions per day on Twitter, but only manage to respond to 40 of them. You can do better than that by using a social media management tool like AgoraPulse. It allows you to display your mentions, direct messages, and monitoring alerts in a social inbox so you can respond as you would with an email. When you review or reply to messages, they're archived, which makes it easy to see which messages you've dealt with. The social inbox for your Twitter account is split into an Inbox tab for your incoming mentions and messages and a Monitoring tab for retweets and search queries. Whenever you reply to or review a message, it's highlighted and archived. This feature is particularly useful to archive low-value or spammy direct messages. Have you ever received one of those automated “thank you for following me” direct messages or something similar? With the Direct Messages filter, you can quickly select all direct messages that don't need a reply and review them in one go, which is a huge time-saver. Once you review or reply to all of your mentions, you'll get that lovely inbox zero feeling. Go to the Monitoring tab to view all of your retweets and searches. This tab is for less urgent messages, while the Inbox focuses on the most actionable messages. Select the Type filter to show only your recent searches or retweets. You can then reply to or like them on an individual basis, or via a bulk review if no action needs to be taken. If you work with a team or have a virtual assistant, you can assign individual messages to team members. To do so, view the message, click the Assign button, and select the relevant team member. You can easily see which messages have been assigned to which team members. If you have a social media team, using a social media management tool is important from a security standpoint. With AgoraPulse, you'll get full control over your team members and avoid having to share your Twitter password. Set aside two or three fixed times every day to attend to your Twitter engagement. Make sure you cap the time for these sessions (for example 10-15 minutes) so you can spend the rest of your day focusing on other areas of your business. AgoraPulse also integrates with Facebook and Instagram and offers reports and publishing features. #2: Automate Blog Content Shares With missinglettr When you post an article to your blog, how many times do you share it on Twitter? It's unusual for people to send just one tweet out when they publish blog content. If you want to maximize the engagement potential for your blog posts, use a tool like missinglettr to set up a drip marketing campaign for them. It allows you to publicize each individual article regularly via Twitter over the course of a year. To get started, set up your free account and connect your blog's RSS feed. Once you do that, missinglettr will start checking for new blog posts. When it detects a new article, it analyzes the content and creates a Twitter marketing campaign for that article for the year. The campaign consists of a series of tweets linking to the article and can include summaries, quotes, images, and a call to action. missinglettr will notify you when the campaign is ready so you can review it. Click the Review link to review the campaign schedule for the article.

New: Join ReferralCandy’s Affiliate Program And Get Rewarded!

by Raúl Galera @ Word-of-Mouth and Referral Marketing Blog

We have been talking about the importance of word-of-mouth marketing for years, helping thousands of ecommerce stores across many industries make over $55,000,000 USD in referral sales (and counting!) Finally, we have now decided to start our own program. If you love ReferralCandy as much as we do, here’s a good opportunity to get rewarded […]

The post New: Join ReferralCandy’s Affiliate Program And Get Rewarded! appeared first on Word-of-Mouth and Referral Marketing Blog.

Boostability Products

Boostability Products


Boostability

The Boostability suite of marketing products covers all your needs to achieve online marketing success.

Blab.im: Why Your Business Should Consider Blab

Blab.im: Why Your Business Should Consider Blab

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you host live-streaming video? Want to hear about the latest live-casting technology? To discover more about Blab, I interview Joel Comm. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Joel Comm, the author of many books, including Twitter Power 3.0. He also is host of The Joel Comm Show and he's all in on Blab! Joel will explore Blab live casting and why your business might want to consider using it. You'll discover the difference between Blab.im and other live-streaming platforms, as well as some tips to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blab.im How Joel got started with video Joel shares how he signed up for his first YouTube account in 2006. The next year, he decided that video online needed to be kicked up a notch. Inspired by the rise of YouTube and the reality show The Apprentice, in 2007 Joel produced and hosted the world's first competitive Internet reality show, called The Next Internet Millionaire, which received an honorary Webby award for reality TV. In 2008 UStream.tv became one of the first tools for streaming live video from a desktop, so he started doing The Joel Comm Show from his offices with co-host Dan Nickerson. They did a weekly interactive show that was usually about an hour long. Sometimes they would have a guest in his studio office, and other times they would just engage with the people who were commenting. It's very similar to how people comment on Blab. Joel believes streaming video is a great way to communicate, broadcast, share and deliver content, and build community. Listen to the show to learn what was involved with filming The Next Internet Millionaire. Joel and Blab Joel, who has been using Meerkat, Periscope and Live for Facebook Mentions for several months, thinks it was Mia Voss who first told him about Blab. She mentioned it at the beginning of August, and he started using Blab a couple of weeks later. He has been immersed in the platform ever since. He hosts two different shows and then logs on at other random times, either to do a Blab that's not really a show, to hang out and talk with people or to be interviewed on somebody else's show. Joel explains that Blab, in its simplest form, is a video conferencing tool that allows up to four people to be on screen at once. It's integrated with a chat room, and whoever wants to watch a blab can do so. Viewers are also able to interact with each other and the hosts. Blab is integrated with Twitter (your login is your Twitter account), and you're able to easily tweet from the Blab interface. There's a mobile app available for iOS devices and an Android app is on the way. What's so cool about Blab is that it works, Joel says. While Google hangouts sometimes require a whole tutorial, Blab is so simple that most people get it intuitively. Audience members click to request to join a seat. When the host approves you, you're on the show. People ask Joel what's better: Periscope or Blab. He believes that's not the right question, because it's comparing apples to oranges. Periscope, Meerkat and Facebook Live Mentions are all one-to-many broadcasting apps. They allow one person to instantly reach and talk at their audience. It's only a conversation in that those watching can comment, and whoever is hosting can refer to those questions and comments on video. Unless you have somebody right next to you on the screen, it's just one person. Blab puts the "social" component into social media in the most profound and effective way. Blab allows people to be face to face in real time with...

The Social Media Examiner Show: This Week in Social Media

The Social Media Examiner Show: This Week in Social Media

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Welcome to our weekly edition of what's hot in social media news. To help you stay up to date with social media, here are some of the news items that caught our attention. What's New This Week? We've got exciting news this week! The Social Media Examiner Show: Subscribe now (for free) and discover quick tips for marketing your business in our 10-minute daily podcast. Consume snack-sized social media content each day. The result: this daily dose of marketing know-how will equip you to take your social media to an entirely new level. Watch this quick video from our founder AND to discover how to subscribe via an iPhone. Subscribe via iTunes, Stitcher or RSS. Click here to help us spread the word about this new show. Other News Worth Noting Facebook Unveils Facebook at Work: Facebook at Work is "only available to people who have set up a work account through their employer" and is currently in beta only on iOS. Google Lets You Specify Your Social Profiles: Are you a website developer? This new feature allows you to "use markup on your official website to add your social profile information to the Google Knowledge panel in some searches. Knowledge panels can prominently display your social profile information."   Weekly Video Tip // Post by Social Media Examiner. . Studies Worth Examining Q4 Social Login Report: Facebook Losing Ground to Google: Janrain's Q4 2014 social login report shows that while Facebook is still the dominant way people log into websites, Google is closing the gap among music and consumer brand sites. Facebook lost 3% of its social login market share while Google gained 6% in 2014, going from 34% in Q3 to 40% in Q4. REPORT: Messenger Cuts Into Facebook App's Reach: According to November 2014 data from comScore, the Facebook Messenger app is boosting its share of overall reach among U.S. users, at the expense of the social network's flagship app. Messenger rose to fifth place in rankings of reach among smartphone apps at 43.1%. The main Facebook app still overwhelmingly topped the list at 69%. Facebook-owned photo- and video-sharing network, Instagram, took ninth-place position on the list at 30.7%. Social Media Update 2014: A September 2014 survey conducted by the Pew Research Center finds that Facebook has the highest concentration of users, capturing 71% of American adult Internet users and 58% of the entire adult population. However, its overall growth has slowed, while other sites continue to see increases in users. The study also broke down key demographic trends and frequency of use for each of the five major social networks: Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, Pinterest and LinkedIn. Data Driven and Digitally Savvy: The Rise of the New Marketing Organization: Forbes Insights and advertising technology company, Turn, surveyed 331 senior executives from a range of industries. Of those executives surveyed, 7 in 10 believe their reliance on data analytics for decision-making will either increase significantly (24%) or somewhat (47%) over the next 3 years. Data-driven marketing is credited with creating competitive advantages in customer loyalty (47%), gaining new customers (43%) and customer satisfaction (42%). Sixty-one percent note a measurable increase in ROI from data-driven marketing campaigns. Instagram 2015 Study: The Most Valuable Instagram Study for Your Business: Iconosquare released the largest Instagram study ever conducted, surveying 16,000 Instagram users, tracking 250 million media, and analyzing 39 billion interactions. The published results include 200+ pages of exclusive analyses, case studies and best practices. Their goal is to help marketers better promote their brand, understand best practices, analyze user engagement and recruit and retain users. How Long Does It Take to Plan Facebook, Twitter Content?: Research by Percolate reveals how long companies plan ahead for their content distribution on Twitter and Facebook...

How to Successfully Build a Brand from a Product

by Maciej Fita @

  The product may be what is sold, but ultimately, it is the brand that is actually bought. Think of all the thousands of different products there are out there, essentially selling the same thing. Why is it that some of them get so much attention while others don’t even seem to exist? Most of
Read more

Becoming a Media Company: How to Turn Your Business Into a Platform

Becoming a Media Company: How to Turn Your Business Into a Platform

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use content to capture the attention of consumers? Are you wondering how to reach out to a larger audience? To learn about how any business can become a media outlet, I interview Michael Brito for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Michael Brito, author of Smart Business, Social Business and his latest book, Your Brand: The Next Media Company. Michael shares the reasons why your business should become a media outlet. You'll learn the five characteristics behind a successful media company and how to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Becoming a Media Company Why you should become "the media" Historically the media has always captured the attention of consumers. Successful media companies produce great content and Michael says that brands need to think the same way. If you think about traditional media companies such as Condé Nast, it has a very diverse story and narrative. No matter what the subject is, a consistent story is shared across paid, earned and owned media. When you start to dissect what they do at Condé Nast, they are actually storytellers. As a brand, you need to figure out what story you want to tell and then figure out how to tell it. It's not just for social platforms, but across every form of the customer experience. This can include paid advertising. You have to think of every customer touch point for your business. Media companies are very good at having a consistent story across each touch point. You'll hear how brands have a lot of power within their own companies to tell a story. You just need to figure out the right operational framework to make it come to life. Listen to the show to find out what Forbes did that started to grab Michael's attention 3-4 years ago. Businesses that have become media via their content and platform Michael gives an example of a brand in the consumer space, B2B space and small business space. A company that's in the consumer space is Red Bull. Red Bull is definitely a media company that has a very diverse narrative, and it's not about energy drinks. It's more to do with epic events and empowerment. It's another brand that is consistent across all channels. Red Bull has its own in-house media agency that creates compelling content day in and day out, with the consistent message, "Red Bull Gives You Wings." When Red Bull helped Felix Baumgartner do a space dive, the brand was mentioned for months after the event. The story was told through visual content and long-form content, both paid and owned media. You'll hear why Michael believes that brands should capitalize on long-form content. Intel, a company in the B2B space, capitalized on its employees' passion for Intel's products. Today it's referred to as brand journalism. Consumers trust employees of a company, which especially helps when it comes to purchases. The small business example is a company based in San Francisco called Visage that does enterprise mobility software. Its Chief Mobility Officer blog talks about enterprise mobility and not about the company. Some of the writers are on staff and others are outside contributors. The story affects the way consumers view the brand. It's all value-added content to help non-consumers solve their problems. Michael says this is how brands need to think. Listen to the show to find out why long form is so powerful for any brand or company.

3 Ways to Use Psychology in Your Social Media Marketing

3 Ways to Use Psychology in Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for ways to connect with fans on a deeper level? Have you thought about using psychology in your marketing? Implementing basic psychological marketing principles in your social media activities can help you attract, engage, and form emotional bonds with your target audience. In this article, you'll discover three ways to use psychology in your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Give Gifts to Encourage Responses If you give people something they find valuable, they'll typically feel indebted to you. To incorporate this neuromarketing tactic in your social media marketing, you can offer a small gift like a discount, free trial, or free resource guide to your fans. Whatever you decide to offer, the goal is to answer the question: "What's in it for me?" On their Facebook page, Spanish soccer club Real Madrid recently offered free shorts with the purchase of a kid's shirt from the team's official store. In just an hour, the post received over 16,000 reactions and 63 shares. Although Real Madrid's massive Facebook following played a role in the success of their offer, this tactic can help drive engagement for businesses of all sizes. If you don't have the luxury of spending money on giveaways, you can drive engagement using free gifts. Anytime Fitness offered their Facebook followers a free downloadable calendar to plan their activity in and out of the gym and track progress toward their fitness goals. To use the reciprocity tactic on your social channels, take a closer look at your audience to better understand what they like and expect. Figure out what compels them to engage and come up with an offer that they're likely to share with friends. Offer something that's valuable to your audience while ensuring that they give you something in return. For example, give a 5% discount or a free trial of your product to anyone who shares and comments on your post. Or host a giveaway contest in which followers with the most shares and social media engagement receive a free product. In the tweet below, users are offered a free design course in exchange for being a beta tester and providing feedback on the course. Users can reciprocate by clicking on the link to apply. They might also want to share the good news with their Twitter followers, which is a form of engagement. The idea behind the reciprocity tactic is to compel the action of engaging with your brand by making people feel obligated to you. While you can't offer a giveaway every day, you can always post useful, shareworthy information related to your business. For example, if you're in the fitness industry, share articles and tips about exercise and healthy eating. #2: Use Emotional Triggers to Create Authentic Connections Connecting with your audience is one of the most basic ways to increase your social media engagement. This neuromarketing tactic makes use of the emotional reaction that's triggered when people feel connected to you. When people feel close to you and can relate to you, there's a great chance they'll engage with your company. To form an emotional connection, you need to start interacting with followers in a meaningful way. Laughter is one of the most effective tools for forming a strong emotional bond with people. Like Chipotle does here, you can use wit and humor to connect with your Twitter followers. The Mexican grill has a deep understanding of their target audience and the kind of humor they'll likely appreciate. This helps them avoid using humor that their followers might find offensive or lame. Chipotle also posts humorous replies to tweets from their fans. Your tweets can show enthusiasm toward your products with the right mix of humor. This works well for driving social media engagement. Here's how you can pull off this neuromarketing tactic to connect with your fans: Study your audience to see what kind of humor they like.

How to Drive Website Traffic With Instagram

How to Drive Website Traffic With Instagram

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Instagram to market your business? Want to direct followers to your website? With a few simple tactics, you can generate quality website traffic from Instagram. In this article you'll discover how to use Instagram to drive traffic to your website. Listen to this article: #1: Add a Website Link to Your Bio The most common way to lead Instagram followers to your website is to use the "link in bio" tactic. Instagram lets you include one clickable link in your bio, so make sure you use it effectively. To add a link, go to Edit Profile and type it in the Website text box. In Birchbox's Instagram bio below, their link directs followers to a customer appreciation day promotion on the company's website. With the tool Have2Have.it, you can use your bio link to direct followers to a page with the same look and feel as your Instagram feed, where they can click images to purchase your products or read your content. The New York Times has a Have2Have.it link in their Instagram bio. When followers click the link, they're taken to a curated page with the top stories of the day. Users can click on an image to see the story behind it. With an analytics dashboard, you can gain key insights to see what content performs best. Focus on high-performing posts to form a content strategy. By tracking clicks on Instagram, you can increase revenue and subscribers to online content (such as blog posts), newsletters or email campaigns. Of course, you'll want to track your click-through rate, so use a shortened Bitly link or vanity URL to know where your clicks are coming from. Overall, you can use this tactic for any links including an ecommerce website, YouTube channel or company blog. To take it a step further, create an Instagram landing page that captures email addresses through downloadable content like an ebook. The landing page design should mirror the look of your Instagram feed so there's a visual connection for the user. #2: Place a Call to Action on Images Design Instagram photos that convert. You can layer a call to action and your website URL directly onto an aesthetically pleasing photo. In Canva's post below, the image has a call to action asking followers to enter a contest for a year of free access. The photo caption then directs users to click the link in Canva's bio. This technique is beneficial for Instagram contests where you ask your followers to enter their email information on your website. Now, you have a strong piece of shareable branded content that drives followers to your contest. #3: Include a URL in Videos Instagram video brings digital storytelling to life. In fact, videos on Instagram generate three times more inbound links than image posts, so it's definitely worthwhile to invest in a 15-second narrative. Brands like Dollar Shave Club use video in innovative ways to spice up their Instagram feed. Their videos work similarly to a television commercial. Dollar Shave Club's videos include the URL in a text overlay and a voiceover ("Shave with a fresh blade anytime; try Dollar Shave Club.com") that further drives Instagram followers to their website. The videos are quick, fun and engaging, making viewers want to learn more. #4: Invest in Instagram Ads Instagram recently announced it was opening its API to all companies and brands. By investing in the platform, you can target the right audience demographic through people's interests. With an ad spend alongside your Instagram strategy, you're likely to see an increase in website visits and ecommerce conversions. Clickable links in Instagram ads give you an opportunity not only to be creative, but also let your followers learn more about your digital campaigns or attribute direct revenue from Instagram. There are three types of sponsored Instagram ads: image, video and carousel. Image ads are single photos that tell a story with their imagery.

8 Ways to Effectively Manage Your Facebook Marketing

8 Ways to Effectively Manage Your Facebook Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is Facebook taking up all your time? Interested in ways to maximize your workflow? When you streamline your work and know exactly where to look for the right information, your job becomes easier. In this article you'll discover eight ways to manage your Facebook marketing more effectively. Listen to this article: #1: Maximize Page Notifications You can get notifications for your page while you're on Facebook (click the world icon at the top of your page) or via email or text message. To adjust your notification settings, go to the Settings area of your page and select Notifications in the left sidebar. If you have multiple Facebook pages, you'll manage each page's notifications differently depending on how actively you want to monitor it. When you get notifications within Facebook, the information is more limited when you're logged in as your profile, but you do get some of the more important notifications that you specify. Click on a notification to get more information. When you're logged in as your page, you're acting as your Facebook page on Facebook (which is a good idea for making comments on other pages). To log in as your page, click the down arrow in the upper-right corner and select the Use Facebook As option you want. Or click See More for more options. Now the notifications symbol at the top of Facebook is specific for your page, and you can see new likes and messages. You also should check your notifications area regularly so you can see what's happening on your page at a glance each day. This is especially helpful because there may be activity on older posts. #2: Set Your Post Attribution Correctly Sometimes you may want to comment as your personal profile rather than your Facebook page. You can control this for each post individually or set a default preference in the Settings area. To change your identity for the comment or the like on an individual post, click the icon in the lower-right corner of the post and select how you want to post from the drop-down menu. If you want to set your default preference for how you comment on your page, go to the Settings area of your page and select Post Attribution. This works well if you aren't doing as much posting on the page and want to comment more frequently as your personal profile. #3: Review Page Admin Access to Stay Secure Reviewing the admins of your page is an important step toward making your page more secure. Make sure you're giving full admin control only to people you trust as full admins, because they have the power to remove the other admins or even delete your page. If someone's Facebook account was hacked, your page could be at risk. If you're an admin of other pages that you no longer work with, it's a good idea to remove yourself as an admin to reduce your own liability. To access the list of your admins, go to Settings and select Page Roles in the left sidebar. If you're a full admin of the page, click the X next to the admins who no longer need access. #4: Check Where You're Logged In Another security risk is being logged into Facebook from multiple locations. You might be shocked to find out that some sessions are still active. It's a good idea to end the activity to protect your account and your Facebook page. To find out what sessions are active, go to the Settings area on your personal profile, select Security in the left sidebar and click Where You're Logged In to see all of your sessions. Click End Activity next to the sessions you aren't using. #5: Curate Content With the Save Feature Finding good content to share is always a challenge, and sometimes you'll run across a good piece of content on Facebook that you want to share, but not right at that moment. Or maybe you don't have time to read the full article at that time but want to bookmark it. The Save feature can help you batch your work and bookmark good posts to share later.

Overcoming Fear: How to Break Through and Get Stuff Done

Overcoming Fear: How to Break Through and Get Stuff Done

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is fear holding you back in your business? Are you wondering what you can do to face your fears? To learn about the kinds of fears we deal with as marketers, I interview two small businesses owners for this 52nd episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, it's a panel discussion with Pat Flynn, founder of Smart Passive Income, and John Lee Dumas, the host of Entrepreneur on Fire. Both Pat and John share the fears that could have held them back in their businesses. You'll learn about the common fears marketers face and practical steps you need to implement. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Overcoming Fear John, what were some of your doubts when you had the idea of starting a podcast? John says that he had many doubts and fears when he had the idea for his Entrepreneur on Fire podcast. The idea for the podcast came about when he was on a commute to work as a commercial real estate agent. He liked to listen to podcasts and soon ran out of content to listen to. At the time, Pat Flynn had his Smart Passive Income podcast, for which he released one episode every two weeks. John soon realized that if he was running out of content, then so were others. He had the idea to start Entrepreneur on Fire as a 7-day-a-week podcast featuring interviews with today's most inspiring and successful entrepreneurs. In the beginning, John approached Jamie Tardy, The Eventual Millionaire, for mentoring. She agreed but thought he was crazy to commit to 7 days a week. Jamie thought it would be too much for his listeners to consume. John also joined Cliff Ravencraft's Podcast Mastermind and was told the exact same thing. You'll hear what John did with the advice from mentors and people already in that space. Listen to the show to hear the fears and doubts John had, and still has today. Pat, in the early days what were some of your fears? Pat shares the fears he faced when he first started out. One of the them was that the work wouldn't be appreciated or seen and whether it was the right thing to do. One of the biggest was the fear of failure and looking bad. When he was first let go from his job, he had the fear of not being able to provide for his family. He wanted to go down the path that was good for his and his family's future. You'll discover the kind of support Pat received from his wife, family and mentors. It helped him face the fear, doubt and resistance he encountered and got him to take action. When he wrote his first ebook in 2008, which was aimed at the architecture industry, he feared that nobody would buy it. This is one of the things that could have easily stopped him from writing the ebook. The take-home message is that you may not know John, Pat or me, but one thing is certain: We have all dealt with significant fear. We have all overcome it and gone on to do some pretty exciting things. Listen to the show to hear my story of when I put my idea for a social media blog out to some extremely influential people. My idea became Social Media Examiner. What about the fear of missing out? John believes the fear of missing out is prevalent. As entrepreneurs, it's the bright, shiny object syndrome. You see all these amazing platforms that you want to try. With all this going on around him, John always tries to remain focused. His passion is for podcasting and interviewing entrepreneurs. So his focus is to follow one course until he succeeds and it has stood him well.

Growing Your Audience: How to Increase Your Social Following

Growing Your Audience: How to Increase Your Social Following

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media to build an audience for your business? Are you wondering how you can convert your audience into customers? To learn how to grow an audience that wants more and more of what you have to offer, I interview Jeffrey Rohrs for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jeffrey Rohrs, co-host of the Social Pros Podcast and author of the new book, Audience: Marketing in the Age of Subscribers, Fans and Followers. He's also the vice president of marketing insights at Exact Target. Jeff shares why an audience is so important for marketers. You'll learn about seekers, amplifiers and joiners and how these audience types relate to your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Growing Your Audience Why an audience is so important for marketers Jeff explains that in his book Audience, he homes in on the concept of proprietary audience development. It's what people in social media, email marketing and even mobile have been doing, but he approaches it from a different angle. When Jeff talked to marketers about their audiences, which included Facebook fans, Twitter followers, YouTube subscribers and email subscribers, they didn't seem to have a strategy. In most cases, strategy was an afterthought or the outcome of a momentary campaign. Marketing was traditionally organized around a campaign. Jeff refers to it as a beginning, a middle and an end, then a cake to celebrate the results and then repeat it. You'll discover why audience development is a responsibility, primary to marketing. Originally marketers delivered the promise via email, but now you have to take that style of thinking into the social and mobile channels. Proprietary audiences will only be there if you build them. If not, you'll have to pay in the form of advertising. Jeff's message is to take a look at everything you do in marketing and try to optimize it to build a proprietary audience, because it gives you a huge competitive advantage. Before the Internet, creative thinkers only had to worry about great creative. They didn't have to assemble an audience because mass media did that for them. The difference today is not only coming up with the creative, but also thinking about distribution and building an audience that belongs to you—one that nobody else has access to. So when you have that great piece of content, you are able to push the button and reach your audience. You'll hear Jeff explain why it's important for businesses to have people in charge of audience development across all channels. Listen to the show to find out why proprietary audience development is the flipside of the content marketing coin. The definition of seekers, amplifiers and joiners Jeff explains that these are the three top-level audiences that marketers have exclusive access to. 1. Seekers Seekers are people who look for information or for entertainment. For example, you're a seeker when you turn on your TV and flip through the channels to find something to entertain you. You're also a seeker when you use Google or Google Maps. Search engine optimization is all about the process of delivering seekers to your website. Seekers are momentary. Once they have their fill of entertainment or find the information they need, they go away without a trace. You'll find out what you need to do with this audience type. 2. Amplifiers Amplifiers are what social media is built upon.

5 Facebook Advertising Tools That Save Time and Improve Your ROI

5 Facebook Advertising Tools That Save Time and Improve Your ROI

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you advertise on Facebook? Looking for more efficient ways to manage your campaigns? Facebook ad tools can make a world of difference in the amount of time, effort and money you spend on your ad campaigns. In this article you'll discover five Facebook advertising tools that save you time and boost your return on investment (ROI). Listen to this article: #1: Facebook Ads Manager App Facebook has offered Ads Manager for mobile devices since 2014, but earlier this year they launched a stand-alone iOS Ads Manager app with some pretty necessary features for advertisers. Now you can track ad performance, edit existing ads, revise ad budgets and schedules, receive push notifications and create ads from the app. It was nice to be able to manage ads with the first iteration of the mobile manager, but the stand-alone app is more convenient and powerful. It's designed for small- to medium-sized advertisers and allows you to create ads from your existing page posts or from images and photos on your device. If you're using Android, you'll be happy to know a version will be released later this year. #2: Facebook Ads Exclusion Targeting Facebook continues to add more precise targeting options to their ad platform, making it possible to market to incredibly granular groups, right down to specific individuals. Often though, it's beneficial to exclude certain segments to get your ads in front of the right audience. Enter Facebook's Exclusion Targeting, a tool launched to help you avoid targeting the same people twice. For example, you can exclude your existing customers from a promotion designed to generate new leads. Or target your website visitors (as a custom audience), but exclude those who've already converted. Facebook promises that exclusion targeting can help you lower your cost per action or cost per click, reduce money spent on wasted clicks and reach people who are more likely to buy or convert. It works with regular Facebook ads, as well as the newer (and awesome) carousel ad format on both desktop and mobile. See Facebook’s Help resource for instructions on setting up exclusion targeting. #3: Qwaya Sure, you can split test Facebook ads on your own, but if you're attempting to glean useful insights from it on any scale, you're going to want a tool to automate the process. Qwaya is a paid tool with a ton of features including ad scheduling, performance-based rule setting, autorotation of ads and a campaign organizer. But one of its best features is its ability to automate split testing (A/B testing) for both creatives and audiences. If you're already using Facebook Power Editor, you know that the ability to split test audiences, as shown above, is sorely lacking. Qwaya also helps you determine which combinations of imagery, text and targeting make up the best-performing ads with its split testing feature. #4: AdEspresso's Facebook Ads Compass Report AdEspresso's Facebook Ads Compass is like a report card for your Facebook ads account. If you're agency-side, don't worry; it lets you choose which account and which campaigns you'd like to analyze so you don't get a mass of information for all of your accounts together. If you're already using a tool to analyze your ads' performance, the Compass report might seem redundant. But it's a great starting place if you're a small business and have been doing the bulk of your Facebook ads optimization based on manual analysis. You have to factor in your time spent managing your Facebook campaigns into overall ROI, so a tool like this can help you save time and enhance performance (if you act on its recommendations!). AdEspresso has analyzed over $290 million in Facebook ad spend to create industry benchmarks against which your campaigns are compared in the Compass report. It's a great way to see how you stack up against other businesses in your industry. #5: Hootsuite Ads

How to Grow Your Email List with Video Marketing

by Alex Hamilton @ Sleeknote.com

The post How to Grow Your Email List with Video Marketing appeared first on Sleeknote.com.

6 Video Tools to Ignite Your Social Marketing

6 Video Tools to Ignite Your Social Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to bring more pop to your social media marketing? Looking for video tools to help? The right tools make it easy to create engaging video content. In this article, you'll discover six tools to create and improve your social media videos. Listen to this article: #1: Animoto to Create Video Compilations Animoto allows you to create professional-quality videos with pictures and video clips. There are both free and paid versions of Animoto. Pricing plans range from $8 a month for personal use to $34 a month for businesses. Here's how to get started with Animoto. First, sign up for a free account. You can create your free account with your Facebook profile or with your email address. Then click the Create button to start your Animoto project. Next, choose a style to customize the look and feel of your video. Click on the style template preview to see what your video would look like with that style. Now you're ready to add photos, video clips, and music. Animoto accepts photo and video uploads from your computer, smartphone, or other sources including Facebook, Dropbox, and Photobucket. You can add your own song or select one from Animoto's music catalog. Tracks available include instrumentals and songs. Now you'll want to personalize your video in Settings. Be sure to add a custom thumbnail, video title, and description for your video. All of this information helps with search engine optimization. When you're finished, you can preview your work. Click the Preview Video button to see what your video looks like. If you want to make changes, close this window and make any required edits. Finally, you're ready to produce your video. To do this, click Produce. Expert Tip: If you decide to choose music from another source (such as SoundCloud or YouTube), ensure you have full rights. You may be breaching copyright laws if you don't fully check the music ownership and third-party sharing rights. #2: Legend to Build Custom GIFs GIFs are images with movement. While there are apps that offer premade GIFs, consider customizing your own. This personalizes your brand and allows you to create unique content. Legend is a smartphone app that allows you to create GIFs by combining text, flash, and images. You can download Legend from Google Play or the App Store. Here's how to use Legend to create your own branded GIFs. First, type your text. You have 100 characters to work with. Next, choose a photo. You can take a photo using the camera on your phone, choose a photo from your photo library, or select a photo from Flickr. Now it's time to select your animation style. There are 18 variations to choose from, six on each screen. When you choose your color palette, it changes the color of your photo and your text. Then tap GIF to convert your work into a GIF and tap More to save it to your camera roll. You can share your animated GIF on Instagram, WhatsApp, or in a text message from the Legend app. You can also share it directly from the app to other social networks if you've already downloaded the apps to your smartphone. Expert Tip: Make Legend GIFs in bulk and save them to your camera roll to share later. #3: Relay for Snapchat Video Geofilters Relay is a graphic design and publishing tool for people who aren't graphic designers. You can use Relay to design your own customized Snapchat geofilters, which you overlay on your videos. Geofilters act as a personal branding tactic for your Snapchat stories, which lead to greater engagement. Relay provides a Snapchat geofilter template layout of 1080 x 1920 pixels. You can sign up for a free Relay account and try out a demo for 14 days. For pro features, it will cost you $12 per month or $96 per year. Paying for the whole year up front gives you four months free. Here's how to create a custom geofilter for Snapchat using Relay. After you create a Relay account,

Facebook Engagement: How to Get Seen in the Facebook News Feed

Facebook Engagement: How to Get Seen in the Facebook News Feed

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to understand Facebook engagement? Are you looking for Facebook engagement tactics that lead to news feed visibility? To learn how to better use Facebook, I interview John Haydon for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview John Haydon, author of Facebook Marketing for Dummies and founder of Inbound Zombie, a consultancy focused on small- and medium-sized nonprofits. John shares why Facebook engagement is so important. You'll learn how to better engage Facebook fans. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Facebook Engagement Why Facebook engagement is so important John says that his definition of engagement—from a Facebook perspective—is like, comment and share, because that's what really matters. In his experience working with Facebook and nonprofits, which is slightly different than the for-profit world, John encourages an organization to work with existing community and get that community talking about them. He says he thinks about engagement, as it pertains to Facebook, as word of mouth. John explains that when your current customers or donors engage with content from your Facebook page (or talk about that content), their friends see that content. That's increased exposure for your organization. John says that exposure starts by getting your current community, the people who already love you, to engage first. Listen to the show to find out how the news feed algorithm impacts engagement.  How Facebook page managers should spur engagement  John wants to change the word posting to planting because when you plant something, like a bush, you have to stick around and take care of it. If you post an update on Facebook, you want to pay attention to how it's performing. If people are commenting, liking and sharing, you want to be involved in that comment thread. Recalling Amy Porterfield's words from a few weeks ago, John says the more people notice that you stick around, the more they'll engage with your content. John agrees that community management on Facebook comes down to identifying the best-performing content, then tweaking and experimenting with content to optimize how you're posting, topics, times that you're posting, etc. Listen to the show to hear what you’re missing by not interacting with what people are saying on your Facebook page. The Talking About This metric and how it's calculated John explains this metric as anything that a Facebook user does to create a story in their news feed for their friends to see. He says that when a user shares something, likes a page, RSVPs to an event a page has published or tags that page in a photo or a status update, all of these actions put content into the news feed of that user's friends so that they become aware. It's really what you might call viral reach. Anything that creates viral reach is Talking About This. Listen to the show to learn more about Talking About This. How a Facebook page used engagement to achieve a goal Three years ago, the Brain Aneurysm Foundation was doing Facebook upside-down. John worked on a strategy that started with letting people use the page to express who they are. The foundation tapped into the passion around the issue and encouraged people to share their stories on the page. One of the first posts was, "If you've had a friend who found out they had a brain aneurysm, what would be your number-one tip?" Now their Facebook page is mostly made up of posts by others who come to share their stories.

Online Security for Business: What Marketers Need to Know

Online Security for Business: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your online identity secure? Are you concerned about hackers? To discover how to secure your social profiles, your online accounts and your identity from hackers, I interview Chalene Johnson and Darren Natoni. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Chalene Johnson and Darren Natoni. Chalene is a fitness celebrity, author of the book Push and has large followings on Instagram and Facebook. She's also someone whose online identity was hijacked and sold to the highest bidder. Darren is a former special agent with the DEA who specializes in online security. He's also the chief technology officer for Shaun T, a fitness celebrity with millions of followers. Chalene and Darren will explore what marketers and entrepreneurs need to know when it comes to securing their online accounts and more. You'll discover how to be safe online and protect your identity from hackers. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Online Security for Business When Chalene got hacked Chalene explains how she was enjoying a perfect day (a fact that she even tweeted out), when she got hacked. Someone changed her bio and had been tweeting at the same time she was tweeting. So Chalene changed her password to something out of the ordinary, logged back in and changed her bio. Then, it happened again. The hackers were sending out porn and tweeting other people at the same time Chalene was on Twitter. Her other accounts were hacked as well. She felt like she wasn't safe in her own home. Even though it was an Internet attack and there wasn't a physical threat, Chalene recalls that it felt like it. Darren shares where he was on the night of Chalene's cyberattack. He and his wife just got home from dinner and were flipping through Instagram when they noticed that Chalene's account had content she normally wouldn't post. So he texted her and said he thought she'd been hacked. She wrote back that she knew and was freaking out. He said to call him so they could get it under control and get the hackers out of her system. By the time Chalene called Darren, her Twitter, Instagram and Facebook had been taken over. And, though she didn't realize it yet, the hackers were also in her inbox. Chalene and Darren spent eight hours, working through the night, trying to patch everything up. People assume it's personal, Chalene says, but that's not the case. It hit her especially hard because social media is her livelihood. The hackers deleted everything she posted on Instagram over the last four and a half years, and they started posting videos of animal cruelty and violent porn. Chalene felt helpless and responsible. The cost of the hack, which included security experts, loss of wages and rebuilding her security, was in excess of $200,000. Darren says hacking is a sport for some people and a hobby for others. They are experts in their field. Since they don't have legal ways to demonstrate their expertise, this is how they do it. Don't worry about hackers, Darren suggests. Focus on what you need to do to protect yourself. Situations like this expose holes that we knew existed, and that we should have patched, but kept putting it off. It's like waiting until a health condition pops up and then deciding to get in shape. Sometimes it takes an unfortunate disaster to get someone to appreciate the value of simple preventive measures. Listen to the show to hear how engaging with the hackers made things worse for Chalene. What defenses to put in place Darren says to protect yourself,

Mobile Marketing: How to Get Started

Mobile Marketing: How to Get Started

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use mobile marketing for business? Are you wondering how to get started? To learn how mobile marketing and social connect, I interview Jamie Turner for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jamie Turner, co-author of the book Go Mobile. His blog, the 60 Second Marketer is ranked as one of the top 10 marketing blogs by Social Media Examiner. He also runs a social media and mobile marketing agency called 60 Second Communications. Jamie shares how to start with mobile marketing and why you should pay more attention to mobile customers. You'll learn what tools to use and the difference between mobile websites and mobile apps. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Mobile Marketing Why marketers should pay more attention to mobile customers Jamie states that 15-50% of the people who visit your website come in from a mobile device and this number will continue to grow. When consumers visit your website from a mobile device, you need to be there to meet them, understand mobile marketing and know how to connect with customers on mobile. You'll have to learn how to use mobile, as it's a way to build a bridge between you and your customer. You'll discover how more people check prices on their mobile devices while shopping and what you need to provide them to make sure they buy from you. And you'll hear that when people buy a product on mobile devices, particularly tablet computers, their total ticket price is typically higher than it is via a desktop computer. It's important to be mobile-ready—not only for B2C but for B2B too. Listen to the show to find out how many people bought a virtual ticket on a smartphone while attending Social Media Marketing World. Is there a social media connection when it comes to mobile marketing? Jamie sees email as a social media tool. Sixty-seven percent of all "C-level" executives check their emails from their mobile devices. The better-known tools being LinkedIn, Facebook, Twitter and YouTube. We all need mobile websites. Remember when consumers visit your site, one of the prominent things you want to do is give them the ability to connect with you on social media platforms from their mobile device. You'll hear Jamie give a great example of how you can use LinkedIn on a mobile device in a business environment. Photography is easy on a smartphone. Look at how well Twitter and Facebook have integrated photos into their mobile apps. It's a great opportunity to grab customers. You'll find out how Ramon De Leon, a regional Domino's pizza guy in Chicago, evangelizes his business with the use of Twitter. Jamie explains what mobile websites mean and the difference between a mobile website and a mobile app. You'll discover what you need to do to make your website mobile and why the WPtouch plugin for WordPress is an awesome tool to have. Listen to the show to find out why social is mobile. The most common types of marketing when dealing with mobile users Jamie lists 7 things businesses have to think about when it comes to mobile marketing. Mobile websites SMS Mobile display ads/banner ads Mobile paid search Location-based marketing Apps QR codes These are the primary tools out there. Jamie's advice is to make sure you always start with a mobile website and then move into paid search or QR codes. You'll hear Jamie give an example of how a restaurant can use SMS to drive more foot traffic to their business.

5 Visual Content Tools to Boost Engagement

5 Visual Content Tools to Boost Engagement

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do want to create stronger visual content for your social channels? Looking for tools to help? A number of budget-friendly tools make it easy to create visual content that invites your social media audience to engage with it. In this article you'll discover five tools for creating visuals that engage your social community. Listen to this article: #1: Quiz Your Followers Apester is a digital storytelling platform that allows you to create and embed surveys, personality tests, video quizzes and polls into your social posts. The polls and quizzes alone can engage your community even if they're not shared. The idea is to increase reader engagement, make stories more shareable and get people to take part in the conversation. At the same time, you're collecting feedback that you can use to produce more relevant content in the future. Apester has a user-friendly interface that makes it easy to create "personal interaction units." When you embed these units in your content, you create a seamless user experience that gets your audience actively involved in the story. The tool makes it easy to share your content on social networks (such as Facebook, Twitter, Pinterest and Reddit). When a user clicks on one of the share buttons, it creates a shared link directing users to your blog. #2: Curate a One-Stop Content Trail The average bounce rate on blogs for new visitors is 60.2%, and the average reader stays only 1 to 2 minutes on your website. One way to get people to really engage with your content is to use a tool like Roojoom, which is a content curation and creation platform. Roojoom lets you collect content from your online and offline sources (such as your web pages, videos, PDFs and marketing materials) to create a "content journey" for readers. You then guide readers step by step through the journey, all from within one centralized place. Readers can then share links to the Roojoom instead of to individual sources. They're encouraged to interact with the content, and this keeps them reading the content until the end. Once they're hooked, most people will turn to social media and share links to the great content they discovered. #3: Invite Community Collaboration on Maps Visual tools that engage a community are pretty awesome, but tools that actively get users to take part are on a whole other level. Dubbed a "community visualization platform," you can use Mapme to let your community develop and add to existing maps you create around a specific topic, such as startups in San Francisco. In other words, they're maps created by the people for the people. Mapme is a visual user-generated tool aimed at businesses and organizations. You'll find a gallery of maps built with Mapme on the company's website. Once you've created a map based on a topic, you share it with your customers on social media, who can then get involved by adding new locations. It's similar to Foursquare, but it's not restricted to places of entertainment. Each map can be customized by content, look or feel (such as a logo) and different categories. When you create a map, you fill in the activity on the map, and then open it up to public users of your site. There's no better way to connect with your community than by getting them actively involved. #4: Display Instagram Galleries Instagram has claimed its throne as the king of engagement with over 300 million active monthly users who like about 2.5 billion photos and videos per day. But currently the only way to display Instagram photos on your website or blog is with a third-party widget. SnapWidget is one of the most popular, visually appealing widgets, and more than 100,000 websites use it daily. The tool offers both free and paid versions. The free version lets you pull the photos from an Instagram hashtag or account and display them on your blog. You can personalize the format, as well as the size, layout,

Connecting With People: How to Be Human With Your Social Marketing

Connecting With People: How to Be Human With Your Social Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you struggle to connect with people on social media? Are you wondering how to be human with your social marketing? To learn why so many marketers struggle connecting with people via social media and what you can do to fix it, I interview Bryan Kramer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Bryan Kramer, a social business strategist, CEO of PureMatter and host of the From the Author's Point of View podcast. His new book is called Human to Human. Bryan shares what it takes for marketers to connect on a human level online. You'll discover the techniques that work best and examples you can use in your social marketing. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Connecting With People Why so many marketers struggle to connect with people via social media Bryan explains that marketers have always learned how to communicate, but never how to be social. Brands used to be able to push out one-way communication to their audience, and it was seen as acceptable. However, since social came about, human-to-human interaction has changed. Marketers now struggle to connect with people via social media because of fear. With the mass adoption of social media, it has enabled global and public conversations. Brands are now under a magnifying glass and are struggling to find their voice. Bryan expresses that there's still a lot of fear in the business community because of social. In his new book, Human to Human, he has divided the fears into three distinct categories. You'll hear an example for each category. Fear of not being on social media. Fear of saying the wrong thing. Fear of what engaging means for your company. Lady Gaga is a great example of someone who engages with fans in a more intimate setting, which is away from Facebook and Twitter. It's within this network that fans help her create content. This idea is perfect for brands that are afraid to dialogue with millions of people. They can instead measure it down to a group of people with whom they want to actually engage. For businesses to overcome their fears, they need to educate their audience and their employees. You need to help these people understand how to conduct a dialogue and how to be human online. Bryan explains that part of it is to understand the different senses, in the way you can interact with people and then teach it to them. With the sensory marketing that is available right now, there is something for everyone. Listen to the show to find out why it's important to start with one sense at a time. Explain what you mean by "In social, content is important, but context is HUGE." Bryan says that with the convergence of social, mobile and digital technology, it has changed the way we communicate with each other. It's become a floodgate of communication without context. This is where the problem lies. Over 90% of human communication is conveyed through video language queues. This means that if 90% of what you talk about in person has to be visual communication, then it leaves only 10% non-visual communication online. You'll hear what Matt Clark at Tweet Pages creates for prospects, and why it's a great example of human-to-human communication. This has led Matt to become a speaker for Social Media Marketing World 2014. It shows you how powerful the use of context is. Bryan shares why it's going the way it is now because of all of the social tools that are available to us.

Stand Out: How to Build a Following That Matters

Stand Out: How to Build a Following That Matters

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you wondering how to stand out in the noisy online world? Want to build your status as a thought leader? To discover new ways how to stand out, I interview Dorie Clark. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Dorie Clark, author of Reinventing You and an adjunct professor at Duke University. She's also a consultant and speaker. Her clients include Google and Microsoft. Her latest book is called Stand Out: How to Find Your Breakthrough Idea and Build a Following Around It. In this episode Dorie will explore how to stand out in the noisy online world. You'll discover why creating breakthrough ideas and becoming an expert are essential today. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Stand Out Dorie's backstory Dorie started her marketing and strategy consulting business nine years ago, following a pretty eclectic career. After studying theology in graduate school, Dorie was a political reporter, a spokesperson for first a gubernatorial and then a presidential campaign, and ran a non-profit. Through her journey, Dorie noticed increasing numbers of people reinventing themselves, so she wrote Reinventing You to capture best practices for the process. She then realized the next challenge (after you find the place to make your mark) is to become a recognized expert. She wanted to learn from the best, so Dorie interviewed 50 top thought leaders, including Seth Godin, Daniel Pink and David Allen, to try to figure out how they came up with their breakthrough ideas and built their following. Dorie wanted to demolish the myth that famous people are perceived as having always been famous. There are certain replicable actions that anyone can do with the right strategy. One common thread is that all of the people she profiled are known for their ideas. The idea comes first, and then these people roll up their sleeves and work in the trenches in their profession to spread their ideas. Mindset is a key factor in whether someone will be successful. Dorie refers to Carol Dweck from Stanford University, who talks about a growth mindset versus a fixed mindset. If you have a growth mindset and you're not getting the results you want, you believe if you change what you're doing, you'll get those results. If you have a fixed mindset and you're not getting the results you want, you think it must be because you're not smart or talented enough, and there's nothing you can do to change it. Sharing ideas puts you in a position of vulnerability, because it's possible people won't like them. However, it's fundamentally an act of generosity if you have ideas you believe can help the world. People need to step up and be willing to share their ideas, because those who are doing it now are no different than anyone else. They are just willing to do something differently. Listen to the show to learn more about what stops most people from becoming successful. Why create a breakthrough idea? A breakthrough idea is something new and valuable that you (and often only you) can contribute, Dorie explains. This is more important than ever, because the world we live in today is so competitive and globalized. There is always going to be someone willing to do the work for less money than you. Ten years ago, if you needed a website designed, you went to the Chamber of Commerce mixer to see who does websites, and you picked a designer. Now, you go on Elance or Odesk and find someone who will do it for half the price around the world. As a result,

Twitter Cards for Blogs: How to Set Them Up

Twitter Cards for Blogs: How to Set Them Up

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you heard of Twitter cards? Are you wondering how you can use them for your business? To learn about how Twitter cards can be beneficial to your blog, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast goes deep on the subject. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode you'll discover the different types of Twitter cards available, how to set them up and what to tweak in order to have more customization. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Cards for Blogs What is a Twitter card? A Twitter card is a way for you to add more text and images to your tweets. Twitter cards give you a lot more options than you get with an ordinary tweet. With a normal tweet, you can upload an image that has to be rectangular. If it isn't, Twitter crops the top and bottom for it to fit. When you create a tweet with an image, the default is displayed on Twitter.com and on mobile apps. Tweets with images do not support Twitter cards. They are completely separate. Twitter cards work similarly to how Facebook pulls in default information from a post when you paste a URL into Facebook. It pulls in an image, a headline and some text. Listen to the show to hear why I believe Twitter cards only work on Twitter.com and their own mobile app right now. How a Twitter card works If you go to Twitter.com and go to a Twitter account that has Twitter cards enabled, you'll see the option to View Summary in the bottom right of the tweet. With Twitter's mobile app, you have to click on the tweet to see the Summary card. You'll hear the advantages and disadvantages of this one-click process. One of the benefits you get with a Twitter card is the amount of content you can add. You get 70 additional characters for the title, and 200 additional characters for your description. When you click on View Summary in a tweet, you'll notice that below the tweet is where your additional content appears. There's also the ability to include images. You can even include tall images. For example, I was able to display an image that was 480 x 580 pixels within a Twitter card. Listen to the show to find out what information you can include and what is powerful if you have a multi-author blog. Twitter card benefits for bloggers There are three types of Twitter cards that work well for bloggers. These are the Summary card, the Summary card with large image and the Photo card. 1. The Summary card is the default that most bloggers will likely choose. It shows a small image that's offset to the right, and all text is below it. This is very similar to how Facebook works. 2. The Summary card with large image is a better option if you have nice big images on your blog. The difference here is that the large image is above the content. When someone hits View Summary, they will see the large image before the additional information you have included. 3. The Photo card is essentially the same as the Summary card with large image, except it doesn't have the summary. Instead you just see the photo with a headline. To see a Photo card in use, you can check out Mashable on Twitter. At Social Media Examiner, we use the Summary card and we use the Summary card with large image for My Kids' Adventures. Listen to the show to discover how the images you create for Facebook Open Graph on your blog can also be used for Summary cards. How to set up a WordPress blog to work with Summary cards First of all, you need to install the WordPress SEO by Yoast plugin.

How to Know You’re Ready to Quit Your 9-5

by Kayla Hollatz @ ConvertKit

Quitting your job can look glamorous online. You see influencers on Instagram snapping photos of their decadent lunches before cruising on a sailboat to the next island. You see startup founders taking ski trips with potential investors and bloggers traveling around the country in an RV van to meet up with readers. While quitting your […]

The post How to Know You’re Ready to Quit Your 9-5 appeared first on ConvertKit.

Theft: 9 Ways to Protect Yourself From Losing Your Data

Theft: 9 Ways to Protect Yourself From Losing Your Data

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you rely on your computer for business? Is your computer and data secure? To learn more about ways to protect yourself and your business, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast gives you insight into the subject. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll learn different ways to protect your data and make sure your business is back up and running very quickly if you were ever to lose it. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Computer Security Why secure your computer? There are two main reasons to secure your computer. Peace of mind. If your hard drive was to crash or you had your computer stolen, you need to know that it doesn't spell the end of your business. It allows you to sleep at night. Theft and a hard drive crash are almost the same outcomes. Peace of mind is a big deal. Business continuity. You don't want the loss of your computer to be the end to their business. This is why it's essential to implement security measures. The good news about a lot of this stuff is, it's set and forget. It only takes a small amount of your time, and in certain cases some financial investment, to know that you will be able to continue to operate no matter what happens to your computer. Recently I received a phone call from my office informing me that my two iMacs had been stolen. When the police arrived we were informed that another office within the same building had also been targeted. The alarm system was set, it hadn't been disarmed and even the motion sensors hadn't been triggered. They broke through the office window, taking the computers with them. You'll hear the reason why my office was vulnerable. In total I lost about a day and a half of my time and you'll discover how I got back online within 5 hours. I thought I would share my story with you and hopefully you'll be able to take some notes from it. Here are 9 tips to protect yourself from losing your data. #1: Set-up a remote backup I highly recommend that you have a remote back-up plan in place. I use CrashPlan and for approximately $60 a year have unlimited back-up capabilities. Listen to the show to hear how CrashPlan works and the different account levels they offer. #2: Back-up to an external hard drive You have to make sure that your hard drive is external from your computer. If you put yourself in the minds of the thief, they want to make a quick buck. They don't really care about your hard drive, just your computer. An external hard drive is critical. In my case they left the hard drive behind and I was able to plug it into my new computer. It was the key to everything. For the iMac they have got a really cool thing called Time Machine. Make sure you store your external hard drive somewhere out of sight. Remember the thieves unplug all the cables and just take the computer. Listen to the show to hear how Time Machine works similar to CrashPlan, and how it can get you back up and running very quickly. #3: Secure your browser passwords You should make sure you have a password to log onto your computer. A password can be a deterrent, although when someone does steal your computer, they are likely to reformat the hard drive, rather than try to figure out the password. Make sure you also password protect your web browser. This is really important because we access our banking accounts, merchant systems, blogging tools, email etc from within a web browser. Everything seems to live out in the cloud these days.

Google+ Marketing: Why Marketers Should Not Overlook Google+

Google+ Marketing: Why Marketers Should Not Overlook Google+

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you given up on Google+? Are you wondering whether it is worth managing yet another social network? To address some of the benefits and misconceptions of Google+ marketing, I interview Jesse Stay for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jesse Stay, author of several books including Google+ for Dummies and Google+ Marketing for Dummies. Jesse shares insights into Google's strategy and what this means for your business. You'll learn what's critical for a successful approach to your Google+ marketing and why Google+ may be essential to your business even if you don't think so now. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google+ for Marketers Here are some interesting Google+ stats: 250 million Google+ accounts, 150+ million active users, 50% sign on daily (Google I/O 2012 conference) 69.4% male (Google+ Social Statistics) Most Google+ users are mobile, not desktop users (The Google+ Developers Blog) Jesse explains why you cannot compare Google+ to Facebook and why he thinks Google+ is more comparable to Twitter. You'll learn why Google+ is more than a destination site. Find out how the Google+ platform is intended to be a layer on top of all other Google products and how Google+ is becoming integrated into the entire Google experience. Listen to the show to find out why Google+ is the glue that connects all Google products together socially. How Google+ can help you Jesse explains why you first need to look at your Googlestrategy to figure out how your business can use Google+ best.  For example, your Google+ marketing can help you to: Improve your search results in Google Bring social connections into your YouTube videos Add a CRM experience into Gmail and Google Calendar Build connections through Google Hangouts When you establish a presence on Google+, build relationships there and get endorsements on the content that you share through Google+, you increase your Google search ranking. Listen to the show to learn how your Google+ marketing improves your Google strategy. The future of Google+  Jesse talks about how Google has proven rumors wrong. Google+ recently released new capabilities for notifications on the Google+ platform. Plus Google+ also has a much stronger integration into Google Apps and you're now able to restrict conversations from sharing outside of the domain. This gives Google+ more privacy and makes it more friendly for business use. Google+ is continuing to grow and add more features. Jesse shares how Google+ can help you gain an edge in Google search engine results. He explains why there is no easier way to get better ranking in search at the moment than by building a Google+ presence. Learn how to give authority to the content that Google is indexing within Google  search results. Listen to the show to find out more about the future of Google+ and what this means to you and your business. Google+ marketing tools  At this time, most third-party social media tools do not integrate with the Google+ API. This can make it challenging for busy marketers to add yet another social media network to their marketing mix. Jesse says to have patience and anticipates they will be releasing APIs at some time. You'll hear about Webmaster Tools where you can find, for example, statistics to help you track how your content is affected within search results as a result of people liking it on Google+.

How to Use Content Marketing and SEO to Compete with Amazon

by Josh Steimle @ Sleeknote.com

The post How to Use Content Marketing and SEO to Compete with Amazon appeared first on Sleeknote.com.

How to Launch Your Product Using Facebook

How to Launch Your Product Using Facebook

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you launching a new product or service? Want to create buzz and get the word out to the right people? Facebook is a great way to promote the launch of a product or service and generate excitement. To be successful, you need to plan your content, write your posts and make good use of the tools Facebook has to offer. In this article you'll discover how to launch a product or service using Facebook. #1: Before Pre-launch: Start Planning Early You'll want to map out your launch strategy at least two months ahead, and most likely even earlier than that. Plan what types of launch material you'll have available to share on social media to get the buzz going. You may also need to start designing some of these materials. Listen to this article: If you have an online product, you can use some great freebies to help get people onto your list. Some examples of great freebies or launch materials include: Images and infographics: Think about designing several versions of your images so they're size-optimized for each social site. Also, if you'll be using them in a Facebook ad, make sure the images are 1200 x 628 pixels and comply with the 20% text rule. Free ebooks, reports or white papers: These freebies could be part of your final product or something valuable that will promote the final product. Free webinar or other educational content: If you're launching an online product, you may want to host a webinar, telesummit or some other type of live event. Plan when that event will occur and when you'll start promoting it. Sale or discount period: If you're offering an introductory price, figure out how long that will last and how many posts you might have around that promotion. Facebook contests: If you're having a contest to promote the launch or new product, plan the timing and determine what type of contest will work best for you. When launching a course, for example, you might plan all of the content and decide when you'll communicate about it to people on your email list and in your social media posts. If affiliates or promotion partners will be helping you get the word out about your product or service, start assembling that team and putting together resources for the team to use. Be sure to make it easy for affiliates to build buzz on Facebook and other social media channels. Write a variety of Facebook posts and tweets so they can either cut and paste them or have a great starting place to add their own wording. Social Media Examiner provided a variety of images to their affiliates to help promote Social Media Marketing World. Some of the images were appropriate for Facebook ads, while others were useful for tweets or blog posts. They also provided a variety of tweets and Facebook updates that were ready to use, and people just had to add their affiliate link. #2: Pre-launch: Build Buzz To start building buzz and generating excitement around your product or service, post teasers about it. If appropriate, use both your Facebook page and profile to let your Facebook fans and personal friends know that something is coming. Using video on Facebook to promote your launch will go further in the news feed. Make sure you're creating a variety of content. You can see that this video post reached nearly 39,000 people and had over 8,000 views. You can also give people a sneak peek into your process. Bathers Beach House in Australia started posting about their restaurant months before it opened. They shared the building process, gained the interest of potential diners and grew to over 4,000 fans before they even opened their doors. This led to a successful opening of their restaurant, and they continue to have high engagement and interaction. If you have affiliates or promotional partners, consider co-creating material to launch the product, such as a webinar or live Q&A session. Gena Shingle Jaffe launched a legal course for entrepreneurs,

Mobile Marketing: Are You Ready for the Revolution?

Mobile Marketing: Are You Ready for the Revolution?

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a mobile strategy for your business? Are you interested in discovering what the future of mobile marketing has in store? To learn how to market your business with mobile, I interview Tom Webster. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Tom Webster, the Vice President of Strategy and Marketing at Edison Research. He's authored studies such as The Social Habit and Twitter Users in America. He's co-authored a new book with Tim Hayden called The Mobile Commerce Revolution: Business Success in a Wireless World. Tom explores how mobile marketing impacts your business. You'll discover why successfully mobile marketing goes beyond technology, how consumer behavior is already being shaped by mobile, and how to respond to the mobile commerce revolution. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Mobile Marketing Why Tom wrote his new book  Working in consumer behavior and market research, Tom has tracked human behavior for decades. He helps brands figure out why humans do what they do. His particular area of interest is to capture the opinions and study the behavior of people out of their homes and on the go. For Tom, understanding mobile marketing goes beyond the technology. It's about being able to understand people's needs, wants, and desires while they are in transition, out and about, and away from home. This idea was the impetus behind his new book, The Mobile Commerce Revolution: Business Success in a Wireless World Listen to the show to learn how it's been possible for Tom's company, Edison Research, to study mobile behavior for decades.  What is the mobile commerce revolution Every year, experts in various trades are asked if this is going to be the year of mobile when, in fact, the year of mobile has already happened. According to Tom, the mobile commerce revolution is already upon us. You'll hear Tom describe the Starbucks mobile app as an example of how much consumer behavior has already been shaped by mobile. There's no special technology to the Starbucks mobile app. It's nothing more than a bar code on your phone that's tied to a method of payment. Yet it's eliminated the need for a wallet and made it simpler to purchase items using something Starbucks customers already have in hand: their smartphones. The use of this smartphone app has become such default behavior that it’s prompted customers to make a purchase at Starbucks when they otherwise might not have. If you base your mobile strategy on the technology, then you will not make it. Mobile isn't about technology. It's about being able to understand and enable human behavior. Listen to the show to hear what companies with successful mobile strategies are doing that others aren't. How marketers should respond to the mobile explosion  It's easy to be lulled into thinking that big data and clickstream analytics will give you everything you need to know to develop your mobile strategy. However, the first step when you develop a successful mobile strategy is to examine human behavior. Tom describes the mobile web as having three distinct eras. We've moved past the first two eras of optimizing for mobile and responsive design. We are now moving towards a new era of contextually relevant experiences based on a customer's unique needs and wants in the context of their specific location. Mobility enables this capability to happen. There is a serious measurement gap between the online and the offline interactions because our focus has either been on search or on purely technology solutions.

Webinars: Growing Leads and Sales With Live Online Events

Webinars: Growing Leads and Sales With Live Online Events

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use webinars in your marketing? Are you looking for new ways to generate sales and leads? To explore the art of using webinars to generate leads and ultimately sell, I interview Lewis Howes for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Lewis Howes, author of The Ultimate Webinar Marketing Guide and host of the School of Greatness Podcast, where he focuses on leadership and personal development. Lewis is also an athlete and he's on the USA Men's National Handball Team. Lewis shares why webinars are the most effective way to connect with your audience. You'll discover how to use webinars to generate leads and ultimately sell. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Successful Webinars Why marketers should take a closer look at webinars Lewis believes that webinars are the ultimate way to convert your audience into customers. Companies of all sizes, as well as entrepreneurs, use them because they generate more sales than any other online marketing strategy. Social media helps you get your information out there, connect with your audience, get feedback, build relationships and more. However, tweets and Facebook posts don't usually result in a huge number of instant sales. A webinar, however, gets you in front of a captive audience that's interested in learning what you have to share for an extended period of time. It's more than just a quick message, post, article, picture or video. It's an interactive way to connect, build trust and make sales sooner rather than later. Most webinars are free. Then at the end, you can refer them to your solution, product, coaching or live event. You can convert in a more effective way than by just using social. Listen to the show to discover how webinar tools have changed. What tech you need Lewis recommends GoToWebinar, because he feels it's the most consistent. Plus, it's the standard format most marketers are used to. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MMbufbv1f2c Other platforms to explore include Adobe Connect, Google Hangouts, Ustream, Livestream and WebinarJam. Listen to the show to hear about the webinar tools we use at Social Media Examiner: GoToWebinar and WebEx. How to get people to register for a webinar Lewis suggests you start by promoting your webinar to your email list, and then encourage those who register to promote it for you. For example, on the post-registration thank-you page, put up a video or some text and ask registrants to share it on Facebook or Twitter. To make this easier, there are tools you can use such as the WP Sharely plugin or create a pre-populated Tweet button through ClicktoTweet.com. Another way to generate leads is to partner with others. Lewis talks about how he does affiliate webinars where people in a similar marketing space promote his information to their audience. He'll do a webinar with free content, offer his product or service and then give a 50% commission to that affiliate. You're paying someone to generate leads for you. Listen to the show to hear the results of a successful affiliate marketing webinar. Optimizing the registration process Lewis likes to use LeadPages templates for his webinar registrations. He'll create three different registration templates: one with a simple image, a headline and opt-in; another that's more in-depth, including a compelling headline and a list of benefits; and a third that's a hybrid with a video and bullet points.

LinkedIn Audience Network and Facebook Instant Articles WordPress Updates

LinkedIn Audience Network and Facebook Instant Articles WordPress Updates

by Grace Duffy @

Welcome to this week’s edition of the Social Media Marketing Talk Show, a news show for marketers who want to stay on the leading edge of social media. On this week’s Social Media Marketing Talk Show with Michael Stelzner, we explore LinkedIn Audience Network with Viveka von Rosen, the Facebook Instant Articles and AMP WordPress [...]

This post LinkedIn Audience Network and Facebook Instant Articles WordPress Updates first appeared on .
- Your Guide to the Social Media Jungle

Google+ Marketing Tactics: How to Promote Your Content on Google+

Google+ Marketing Tactics: How to Promote Your Content on Google+

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Google+ for business? Are you wondering how to promote your content on Google+? To learn about Google+ tactics that are available to marketers, I interview Lynette Young for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Lynette Young, author of Google+ for Small Businesses. Her agency, Purple Stripe, helps businesses thrive with social media. Lynette is a Google+ marketing expert who has more than 1.5 million followers on Google+. Lynette shares why she got hooked on Google+, and how businesses can use the tools available to succeed on the platform. You'll discover how to get your content to show up in Google, and how Google+ users are different than Facebook users. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Google+ Marketing Tactics How did you get hooked on Google+? Lynette explains how she is always on the lookout for the next piece of digital publishing software, whether it be blogs in the late 90s or Twitter in 2004/05. She likes to explore what's new and the new places people go online to talk and build communities. So when the first private beta invites for Google+ started to go out, Lynette spent 4 hours on the platform. She fell in love with it straight away and has stuck with it ever since. Lynette says that when she started on Google+, she had a little more confidence than with other platforms because it's Google. She soon figured out the set of tools available and what they could offer for her as a person and as a marketer. Listen to the show to find out why Lynette feels that Google+ is very anti-Apple. The business benefits of using Google+ Lynette looks at Google+ as the Internet and part of Google. Right now they have about 60 products and Google+ is just one piece of it all. It's a way for Google to link all their products together. When you are in the Google ecosystem, it's where you live for search, email, videos, etc. Lynette sees Google+ as a platform that touches everything she does on the Internet. Since the platform launched, it's grown up in many ways and like it or not, Google owns quite a large chunk of the Internet. As marketers, we use a large number of their products in our everyday lives. When you're signed into Google+, you receive alerts when you get new activity. This appears in the right-hand corner of your screen as a bell icon. Lynette explains how it's not so much about the numbers you get, but what you do with them. So whenever you go to a Google property, you'll see these alerts. You'll hear why people are drawn into these numbers, even if they aren't on Google+. Listen to the show to find out how Google attracts you into their ecosystem and tracks your activity. What Facebook marketers need to know about Google+ users Google+ is more of an interest-based network, whereas Facebook is the place where people connect with others they already know. Lynette says that Google+ is more like Twitter or Reddit. Not in the form of how you can publish, but how the communities separate themselves and group together. As a marketer, this is what you want. If you want to get your message out, you obviously want to gravitate toward people you know will meet your criteria and will hopefully want your product. Lynette finds it a lot easier to reach these communities on Google+ than she does on Facebook. You'll discover why published content on Google+ takes a different path than it does on Facebook,

Pinterest Traffic: How to Use Pinterest for More Exposure

Pinterest Traffic: How to Use Pinterest for More Exposure

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to drive more traffic to your site with Pinterest? Are you looking for ways to improve your Pinterest exposure? To explore how Pinterest can help your business I interview Pinterest expert, Vincent Ng. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Vincent Ng, host of the Pictures to Profits podcast and author of Pinterest Marketing: How to Search Optimize Your Pins and Boards for Pinterest. He's a Pinterest expert and blogs at MCNG Marketing. Vincent shares how to use Pinterest to drive more traffic to your website. You'll discover reasons why you should use Pinterest in your social media marketing, tips on images and plugins that can boost traffic to your site and provide social proof for your company and what you need to know about Pinterest's smart feed and promoted pins. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Pinterest Traffic How Vincent got started with Pinterest While Vincent has successfully used Twitter and Facebook for his social media clients, he found neither site could drive much traffic to his blog. Curious about Pinterest's rapid early growth, he explored the site and discovered a fair amount of traffic going to his blog from it. That is when he decided it was the site he needed to be on. Vincent has been on Pinterest since its beta stage four years ago and has witnessed how much the platform has changed and evolved since the beginning. Listen to the show to discover the major changes and trends Vincent has witnessed on Pinterest. Reasons to consider Pinterest for your marketing People are naturally drawn to attractive, magazine-quality images. Information can be processed very quickly when it's seen as an image or picture. Pinterest makes it possible to leverage beautiful, shareable images to drive more traffic to your site. You'll hear Vincent describe how to lay out your images to get the most impact and reach from Pinterest. Pinterest is also a powerful way for users to discover things they might not have expected to find. It's become a visual search engine for products and can link items together based on how they've been previously pinned or searched. Vincent shares how many people bypass Google and go directly to Pinterest to search for products and lifestyle topics because the content is curated by actual users and the results tend to be high quality. Listen to the show to find out how Pinterest's visual recognition engine links related products to be searched and discovered. The biggest mistakes people make on Pinterest The biggest mistake businesses make on Pinterest is neglecting to redirect the source of a pin back to their site. The source is the URL where you want users to be directed when they click on your pin. You could potentially get hundreds of pins and repins on your image, but you lose the opportunity to grow your blog with Pinterest if you don't link directly to your site as the source of the pin. Listen to the show to learn how to edit your image to redirect where you would like your pins to point users. The Pinterest smart feed and what marketers need to know about it The Pinterest smart feed is a new algorithm based on the quality of the pin, the quality of the pin's source (blog or website) and relevance of pins. Each factor is measured based on the number of users who link to the specific pin or the source. High-quality images and the most popular sources are given preferential treatment on Pinterest's feed. It also boosts pins from people you follow and will suggest related pins based on what's pinned...

Where & How to Sell Products Online? - Free Guide

Where & How to Sell Products Online? - Free Guide


Ecommerce Guide

In an increasingly digital-age it’s very rare for those with a physical product or high street presence, to not take advantage of the many channels there are to sell online. Selling a product online allows you to reach a wider audience and new customer pockets, with 41% of the world’s global internet users purchasing products …

How to Create a Content Management Process With Trello

How to Create a Content Management Process With Trello

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you develop multiple pieces of content at one time? Looking for a better way to organize and manage your content? Whether you’re working solo or with a team that manages content for clients, it's essential to have a system in place to ensure that everything you publish is managed properly from ideation through promotion. In this article, you'll discover how to manage your content with Trello. Listen to this article: #1: Create a Trello Account To get started, you need to create a free Trello account. Fortunately, the free account offers all of the features you’ll need for content management. #2: Understand How to Structure Your Trello Once you log in, you can create the following as a free account holder. You can create an unlimited number of teams to keep specific groups of projects organized. For example, in terms of content management, you may want the following: If you have a large company, create multiple teams so that each team has its own set of boards to manage its own blogs, such as the sales team blog, the marketing team blog, the development team blog, the support team blog, etc. If you have an agency, create multiple teams so that one team represents your agency’s blog, and the rest of the teams represent your clients’ blogs. If it’s just you as a small business owner, create one team for your own personal blog and one team for your business blog. You can add an unlimited number of members to your account under the teams you’ve created. You can also create an unlimited number of boards. Boards can be visible to specific members, specific teams, or publicly to anyone with a link. Members with access to a board can subscribe to that board and get notified about any changes to the board. Within each board, you can have an unlimited number of lists. Members with access to the board can subscribe to specific lists to get notified when anything in the list has been updated. Within each list, you can have an unlimited number of cards and assign them to members. Cards can have due dates, multiple labels, and a main description. They can also contain a discussion thread in which you can mention specific members, include multiple attachments and checklists with task items that can be dated, and be linked to specific members. As you can see, Trello has a lot of options for organizing a content management system, from simple to highly complex. The last two screenshots come from example content management boards for Trello’s own Editorial Calendar. You can also peruse public examples of ReadWrite’s Editorial Calendar, The Changelog Weekly Newsletter, WP Curve’s Guest Writer Management, and Buffer’s Blog Post Ideas. Now, here are some ways to use Trello for your own content management. #3: Create a Simple Idea and Process Board If it’s just you or a team of people who need to manage ideas, use Trello to create an idea management board. To do this, click on the + icon next to your profile photo to add a new board. Then name your board and (optionally) link it to a team. Inside your board, you can add as many lists as you want based on how you plan to organize your content. For example, if you have content ideas for blog posts, ebooks, videos, and podcasts, create a list for each type of content. Then have one list for In Progress, one list for In Review, and one list for Published. You can use your lists to represent where content is in the process and use color labels. For example, use green for blog posts, yellow for ebooks, orange for videos, and red for podcasts. Or you can use your lists as topic categories and your cards as specific ideas. Then have one list for In Progress, one list for In Review, and one list for Published. The point is there are no rules. It’s just a matter of what setup is easiest for you and your team to understand and manage. Remember that as your cards and lists grow,

How to Use Content Marketing to Sell Products Online (with Neil Patel)

How to Use Content Marketing to Sell Products Online (with Neil Patel)


Sleeknote.com

Want to learn how to sell with content marketing? Read this interview with Neil Patel to learn how to increase on-site engagement and more.

3 Steps for Adding Video to Your Social Media Marketing

3 Steps for Adding Video to Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is video part of your social media marketing mix? Looking for tips to get started with video? Making the right decisions in three key areas will help you create videos that engage people. In this article you'll discover three steps to add video to your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Choose a Video Type The great thing about social media is that you can create many different types of videos to keep your publishing schedule interesting and your followers engaged. Eighty-eight percent of businesses say that video is an important part of their marketing strategy. However, the biggest struggles are to stop recycling old content and choose the right type of video content. Here are five ways that you can include video in your social media marketing. Grab Attention With Pre-roll Video Pre-roll video ads are short 15- to 30-second videos that grab the viewer's interest in a product or service. You can use them on social media sites such as YouTube, Facebook, Twitter and Instagram. The secret to a successful pre-roll video is to gain the viewer's attention quickly, as most people naturally gravitate towards the Skip button or scroll past videos on their news feed. This pre-roll video from Geico pulls the viewer in by showing a runaway vacuum. Use humorous tactics like this to make your video stand out in the news feed and compel viewers to watch the whole thing. (Editorial Note: This video was removed from public view after this article published.) httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Xmzm1JCOqtU Show Viewers How to Do Something One way to produce highly targeted content is to teach your audience how to do something. This helps you improve shares and attract new followers. Fitness trainer Kayla Itsines regularly produces videos that teach her target audience how to do various fitness moves. Content like this has helped her become an influencer in the fitness industry, gaining her 4.4 million followers on Instagram. Her videos are easy to follow and they feature content that people would normally expect to pay money to see. http://www.instagram.com/p/_XYsJfACNp/ "How to" video searches on YouTube are up to 70%, with over 100 million hours watched on the platform. Problem-solving content is valuable and video is one of the best ways to offer it. Capitalize on Trending Topics Marketers are always hoping to create the next viral video, but with so much competition, it's not as easy as it sounds. That's why it's important to take advantage of the trending topics across social platforms. The Trending Topics sections on both Twitter and Facebook are popular sources of news content for social users. If you create a video related to a trending topic, you can potentially tap into a huge market. Jimmy Fallon created an a cappella video to celebrate the new Star Wars movie. Creating content around a popular event helped this video to secure millions of shares across social media. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZTLAx3VDX7g Take a look at the events likely to create a buzz during the calendar year and incorporate these into your video marketing strategy. Go Behind the Scenes Showing people what goes on behind the scenes at your company is a great way to connect with your audience on a personal level. It helps close the gap between brand and customer, which is important in the world of marketing. In this video, Ben and Jerry's introduces one of their Flavor Gurus and gives viewers a brief look at what goes into creating their products and what it's like to work for the company. http://www.instagram.com/p/39m2aMRkLn/ Showcase Products When it comes to video content, 76% of consumers say that they would share a video if it's entertaining. When you incorporate a product video into your social strategy, it's important to strike a balance between promoting your product and keeping the tone light, fun and informal.

5 Ways to Improve Your Social Media Results

5 Ways to Improve Your Social Media Results

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your social media audience losing interest? Do you want to tap into your followers' emotions? Using psychology to connect with your target audience is a powerful way to engage and motivate them to take action. In this article you'll discover five psychology principles you can use to improve your social media marketing results. Listen to this article: #1: People Prefer Stories to Stats In Made to Stick: Why Some Ideas Survive and Others Die, authors Chip and Dan Heath share research that reveals we're more likely to donate when we hear the story of an individual in need rather than data about an entire impoverished area. Even though a region's suffering has a larger impact than that of an individual, the individual's story is appealing because we have an emotional response when hearing the experiences of others, not statistics and abstract information. To apply this principle to your social media marketing, tell a story to reach your audience emotionally. Guinness does this well through their marketing campaigns. Rather than spout information or simply show a scene, this ad takes the viewer through a complicated situation that gradually unfolds to reveal the outcome. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rx0MRawkrj4 Ads like this one follow the "show, don't tell" principle. They lead audience members through a story they need to interpret for themselves based on the actions of the characters. Your social media content can impress your audience and be more memorable if you share a personal experience; whether it's your own or someone else's. By creating a journey with a resolution, you can make an emotional impact on your viewers. #2: Personal Benefits Generate Interest Expressing how people can benefit from your product or service will help you increase engagement on social media. Taco Bell's Twitter account socially engages its audience with its witty and interactive tweets. Most importantly, the people behind the account understand what makes people tick. Take a look at this popular tweet. Who wouldn't like a free meal? Imagine what people are thinking as they watch the World Series. They're likely hoping someone steals a base with the promise of free breakfast from Taco Bell. This keeps the brand at the top of its audience members' minds. Of course, you don't have to give everyone in the country a free breakfast to garner attention. There are other effective methods to let people know what you or your product can do for them. Taco Bell's strategy shows that captivating the audience begins with thinking about what they want, first and foremost. Apple famously focused on the consumer when Steve Jobs described the iPod as "1,000 songs in your pocket." Now imagine if he had described the features instead: high storage and smooth texture. People would probably be thinking, "So what? How does this apply to me?" httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6SUJNspeux8 The next time you share something about your brand on social media, explain or show why it will make a difference in people's lives. #3: Social Proof From Peers Increases Trust These days, reviews and testimonials on products and services are available at the click of a button. Consider a 2008 study that involved hanging public-service messages on residents' doors, asking them to use fans instead of air conditioning. Results found that telling a group that 77% of their neighbors were using fans was more effective than mentioning residents could save $54 a month. What our peers do, impacts our decision-making. Crate and Barrel's website invites customers to leave reviews for products and gives them the option of uploading a picture. Pictures help other potential customers visualize how the product would look in a home setting. There are a number of ways to create social proof; show Facebook likes and post testimonials to tell your audience about how popular your product is.

Online Internet Marketing for Home Businesses

Online Internet Marketing for Home Businesses


The Balance

Here's a look at online marketing and using the web to make more money by applying Internet marketing techniques and strategies.

How To Get Word-of-Mouth: 40+ Successful Examples To Learn From

by Jon Tan @ Word-of-Mouth and Referral Marketing Blog

Over the past year, the ReferralCandy blog has been analyzing and dissecting all sorts of word-of-mouth successes: Established brands, new ideas on Kickstarter, and everything in between. We’ve read countless books and studies about the subject: Made to Stick, Tipping Point, Unleashing the Ideavirus, Contagious… you name it, we’ve probably read it. We’ve learned a […]

The post How To Get Word-of-Mouth: 40+ Successful Examples To Learn From appeared first on Word-of-Mouth and Referral Marketing Blog.

How to Win With Pinterest Contests

How to Win With Pinterest Contests

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you considered running a Pinterest contest? Looking for tools to help? Pinterest contests can increase your followers, boost engagement, and promote your brand and products. In this article, you'll discover how to easily host and manage a winning contest on Pinterest. Listen to this article: #1: Choose a Contest Management Tool Pinterest contests can be challenging to run, simply because they're hard to keep up with. Fortunately, Pinterest contest apps can make the process significantly easier. Some apps will even create landing pages to capture valuable lead information (like email addresses and phone numbers) that users otherwise wouldn't likely submit on a social media platform. If you're going to host a Pinterest contest, here are three apps you may want to try. Wishpond Wishpond has a user-friendly interface and features a lot of great tools for customizing your contest to fit your needs. Wishpond's contest app allows you to create "entry galleries" where other users can vote on their favorite pins or boards that have been entered into the contest. Users can do this by submitting their email addresses, providing an additional way to capture lead information. Other features allow you to choose customizable landing page templates, add a countdown to your landing page to increase urgency (and entries), and access analytics to see views, conversions, and conversion rates. You can also share entry forms on Facebook and Twitter. The landing page is designed to be both desktop- and mobile-friendly. You can preview the landing page and entry forms while creating them. The Wishpond contest app features the ability to have two different periods (or sections) of the contest: one period allows entries and another only allows voting on the entries. Wishpond offers a free trial, so you can see if the software is right for you. The basic plan, which includes social promotions, starts at $45 per month. PromoJam PromoJam's Pin-It-to-Win-It promotions app makes it easy to run a Pinterest contest. It can take as little as 10 minutes to get your contest up and running. With PromoJam's Pinterest contest app, you can create an SEO-optimized URL for your landing page. Choose from a variety of stunning and fully customizable landing page templates. This landing page converts into a confirmation page once users have submitted their entry. Other PromoJam features include the ability to share customized QR codes for your contest, view analytics and user entries as the contest progresses, add social plugin buttons (like a Facebook like option) to your campaign, and use a random winner selection tool. To use PromoJam's Pinterest contest app, you need to upgrade to the pro plan, which costs $249.99 a month, and allows you to collect up to 10,000 user submissions. Woobox Woobox is another amazing contest app that's used by brands like Fisher-Price, Crayola, and Shopify. Woobox's Pinterest contest features let you collect email addresses, allow unlimited entries or only one per user, create tabs for Facebook pages, create HTML entry forms, add an age restriction, and require users to follow you to enter (users must follow you on Pinterest for contest eligibility). Woobox has a free plan and trial, so you can get a feel for the interface before you purchase. To access all of the social promotion apps continually, including the Pin to Win app, you'll need to upgrade to a paid plan. The basic plan starts at $30 per month. #2: Pick a Contest Type At a first glance, it seems like the easiest way to host a Pinterest contest would be to ask users to repin a specific pin. That would be easy to track and easy for users to participate. However, it's not a valid option. You're not allowed to ask users to pin one specific pin. Here are some other options to consider. Require Pinners to Use a Specific Hashtag

5 Facebook Marketing Hacks for Your Website

5 Facebook Marketing Hacks for Your Website

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Is your website using Facebook to the fullest? Are you wondering how you can get the most out of Facebook for your business? To learn how to use Facebook to your advantage, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast goes deep into the subject. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll discover 5 Facebook hacks you can employ on your website to help drive more traffic and exposure. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing Hacks #1: Use the Correct-Size Images on Your Website You have probably noticed on Facebook that some posts have large images at the top, and underneath there is a URL, the website name and a small description. If you have content on your website that you want seen in the news feed, then you can alter the size of the image, which will lead to more exposure and click-throughs to your website. Facebook queries all of the actual images that are on your website and will choose to display the image with the largest dimensions. Facebook only allows users to select three images. To see how this works, check out my friend Jon Loomer's guide on Facebook Link Thumbnail Image Dimensions. The aspect ratio of your image is the critical factor. The aspect ratio is 1.91:1. This calculates out to about 1200 pixels wide by 627 pixels deep. The ideal size is 400 pixels wide by 209 pixels deep. You need to make sure that at least one of your images inside the article is larger than all of the others. It should be in the 1.91:1 aspect ratio. Listen to the show to find out what happens when an image is deeper than it is wide and how it can appear in the Facebook news feed. #2: Implement Facebook Open Graph Tags Facebook has its own language called Open Graph. This allows you to tell Facebook certain kinds of attributes, which include the image it should use as a default on a page, where it should pull text from and what the description should be. This kind of information helps your content appear more appropriately in the news feed. You can discover all of the data behind Open Graph and find everything you need to know about how it works. It's a great guide even for the non-techie. If you are on WordPress, Open Graph is easy to implement with a plugin called WP Open Graph. It allows you to set data on a macro-level and on a post-by-post basis. It's a great way to control what shows up when people share your articles on Facebook. The best way to keep your shared content up to date on Facebook is to use Facebook's Debugger. It's a great tool to stop Facebook from pulling in information that's no longer relevant. Listen to the show to find out how the Debugger tool works, and how it will help you with your Open Graph. #3: Add a Facebook Share Button to Your Website When you add a Facebook Share button to your website, you need to make sure that you use the code from Facebook or the WordPress plugin, which was developed by Facebook. It doesn't matter if your website is WordPress or not, you can visit here and paste in the URL you want to share and choose the different layouts for your button. You'll discover the best Share button to use for social proof on your website. If you use WordPress, it's easy to use their default plugin. This plugin allows you to do the same as the Facebook one, but it does everything automatically for you. When it comes to the placement of the Share button on your website, many people like to put it at the top of a blog post. This way,

Social CRM: How Marketing Can Benefit From Social Media and CRM

Social CRM: How Marketing Can Benefit From Social Media and CRM

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to know more about your customers and prospects so you can serve them better? Are you wondering what social CRM is and how your business can benefit from it? To learn how social CRM can help marketers, I interview Kyle Lacy for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Kyle Lacy, director of global content marketing and research at Salesforce ExactTarget Marketing Cloud. He's authored numerous books, including Twitter Marketing for Dummies and Social CRM for Dummies. Kyle shares why social CRM is important for marketers. You'll discover some of the best CRM solutions available, what their basic functions are and how social CRM can help with social media ROI. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social CRM The difference between customer relationship management (CRM) and social CRM Kyle states that customer relationship management (CRM) and social CRM are combining. CRM manages all of your customers' data, and when you add the word social, it takes in all of the social data too. Whether you want to sell to customers or retain them, social CRM just adds those social data points. This can be a Facebook profile, Twitter account, etc.—basically anything that has to do with social media. It's the ability to manage all of your data points around the customer within a single software source. Listen to the show to find out why Kyle doesn't distinguish between the two. The definition of CRM systems Kyle explains that a CRM system is software that allows you to manage every single touchpoint you have with your customers. For example, their email address, what they bought previously from you, their Twitter handle, and so forth. It's really based on what level of business you have. So if you're an enterprise company, then the CRM solution would be Salesforce. However, if you're a smaller company, Nimble would be a great alternative. CRM systems are anything to do with a customer interaction. This can be either in a store or online. Listen to the show to discover why these people aren't just customers, but prospects too. Why social CRM is important for marketers Kyle refers to Mary Meeker's State of the Internet report that was released at the end of May this year. He thinks that we have reached a point where social media has hit maturity, and for us to realize the true value of it, we have to be able to connect it to our customers who are already in our systems. For example, if a retailer has 1000 customers within their CRM solution, they need to be able to find the social pieces of data that connect them to these existing customers. As a business, you want to turn these customers into advocates. To do this, you need to manage your data around the customer. Kyle believes that from a social standpoint, it allows you to recognize the true value of social and you can use it to communicate more effectively. You'll discover how you can drive more sales when you combine customer email addresses with their social networks. One of the biggest things that Kyle sees right now is marketers who use the one-click sign-on using Facebook on their website. When a customer visits your website and signs in through Facebook, you get all that customer's information. There is so much data you can pull when you connect with customers on a social network. Listen to the show to find out how social CRM can improve your advertising effectiveness while reducing your customer servic...

How to Create Facebook Video Ads: A Step by Step Guide

How to Create Facebook Video Ads: A Step by Step Guide

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Interested in creating Facebook video ads? Looking for an easy-to-follow guide? Facebook video ads don't require a lot of time or money. All you need is a script and some basic gear. In this article you'll discover how to design and record your own Facebook video ads. Listen to this article: Why Create Facebook Video Ads? According to data from comScore, 64% of consumers are more likely to buy products after watching videos about them. You can use the power of video ads to get more leads and sales for your business. Here are some ways to use video ads: Introduce your brand. This can be the type of video you would normally have on your home page, in which you share your company mission and story. Give value upfront. Use a how-to or tutorial video as an ad. Or simply share great content and get people to click through to your website. Build your email list. Create a quick video introducing your free ebook or upcoming webinar. Share testimonials. If your customers record a video testimonial for you, ask them if you can use it in a video ad. This is a great way to retarget people who have visited your sales page. For these videos, use animated text and images, a recording of yourself (or other people) or a combination of both. All of these options can work well, depending on your business and the goals for your campaign. This article focuses on how to create your own video ad, with the goal of building your email list. Here's an example of what this video ad might look like in a fan's Facebook news feed. The goal of this video ad is to entice people to sign up for a free report, which is similar to the strategy that this article focuses on. Here's how to get started creating your own Facebook video ads. #1: Set Up the Equipment You don't need a lot of fancy equipment to create a great-looking video. The most important thing is to be authentic and relatable in your video. For the background, you can use a white wall or backdrop, or a nicely decorated room in your house, as long as it doesn't distract too much. The example below uses a brick wall backdrop. You can use your smartphone to record the video. If your phone isn't older than three years, you probably have some great HD video recording options. If you want to turn the quality up a notch (and have the money to invest), the Logitech C930e webcam is a great alternative. Good audio quality is essential for a great video. Consider using a Blue Yeti or Rode Podcaster USB mic. Lighting is also important; however, you don't need professional lighting equipment. Simply use lamps from your living room or home office to light the area. Or record your video in a room where steady sunlight is coming through the windows. Avoid direct sunlight though, as this can overexpose your video and result in unwanted shadow effects. #2: Practice the Script Next, you need to practice your script. If you haven't created one yet, follow the five steps to create the perfect script: grab attention, build interest, cultivate desire, create persuasion and end with a strong call to action. Here's a basic script example: Struggling to eat healthy? There's a new method that makes it easy. This free guide shows you exactly how. 79,894 people have already tried it. Click Download to get your free recipes. This script is a great starting point for a talking-head video ad, but you'll likely feel like a robot when you say these words on camera. To make it flow better, say the script out loud a few times, and add some words that make it feel more natural to you. Also, consider introducing yourself to add a personal touch, especially if you're targeting a new audience. After some tweaking, the basic script above looks like this: Hi, do you ever struggle with eating healthy? My name is …. and I'm the founder of …. I've created a new method that makes eating healthy very easy, and I'm offering a free guide that shows you ex...

How to Use Pinterest for Local Businesses

How to Use Pinterest for Local Businesses

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to connect with local customers on Pinterest? Wondering how to drive foot traffic with Pinterest? Pinterest offers local businesses a way to cultivate relationships with prospects and customers who are primed to walk through your door. In this article you'll discover how to use Pinterest to market a local business. Listen to this article: #1: Find Out What Likely Customers Are Interested In Before you do anything on Pinterest, spend some time on the platform studying the people you want to reach. You likely have an idea of who your target audience is. Are they the same people you're hoping to reach on Pinterest? Find out what your target audience is doing on Pinterest, who they follow, and what kinds of things they're pinning. Start by browsing the categories on Pinterest. Click to the right of the search box to open the drop-down category list. Click through the categories that are most relevant to your business and check out related topics. From here, you can start to see where your content and business might fit in on Pinterest. Try searching for related words in the Pinterest search bar. Pinterest's Guided Search will show you the most commonly searched words and phrases with your search term. You can also click through to the most popular pinners and pins and boards from that search term. This is a great place to find your target customers, and learn what kind of content your target customers value and how they share it. #2: Create Keyword-Friendly Boards and Profiles Now that you've identified popular topics and keywords for your target audience, you can begin building your profile. You've likely discovered some popular topics that are related to your industry. Use the interest topics you've identified for your boards. For example, if you're a hair salon, "Hair styles DIY," "Curly hair tips," and "Prom styles" might be good boards for your business. Your Pinterest profile is a perfect place to embed your keywords. This will help you get discovered on Pinterest and also on Google. Add keywords to your profile name, profile description, board titles, and board descriptions. #3: Fill Your Boards With Informative Content People come to Pinterest looking for things to learn and to buy. Now that you know what your audience finds interesting, consider what informative content you can share on your boards. This is the type of content that will get more repins and help you reach more people. Create some boards that are related to your local community. For example, if you're a restaurant, create a board to share events that are taking place in your area. If you're a vet, you could share educational content related to health and care for animals, popular pet products, and favorite places to take pets in the surrounding area. Informative content will help you extend your reach. In addition to curating that content from others, you should also create your own content. Think about what customers need to know in order to value the service you provide. What kind of customer education is needed in your industry? Create simple graphics to explain a point or a new regulation. Even for non-designers, it's easy to create informative and engaging infographics with online tools. You might also write an explainer article or create a video to show how something gets done. Share your content on Pinterest as a vertical pin. Pins perform best at 600 x 1200 (or more) pixels. Remember to write an information-rich caption to get more engagement. #4: Drive Foot Traffic and Click-throughs With Rich Pins Pinterest rich pins allow you to embed information from your website that is updated dynamically to encourage customer conversions. Here are some rich pins that might be helpful for your local business: Use article pins if you have a blog or create blog content. When you create article pins, the headline, author, and story description will automatically be pul...

More Marketing Time: How to Procrastinate Your Way to Success

More Marketing Time: How to Procrastinate Your Way to Success

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you spend too much time on insignificant tasks? Want to have more time to do what you do best? To learn how to multiply your time as a marketer by procrastinating, I interview Rory Vaden. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Rory Vaden, the co-founder of Southwestern Consulting, an organization designed to empower sales pros. He's the author of Take the Stairs. His newest book is Procrastinate on Purpose: 5 Permissions to Multiply Your Time. In this episode Rory will explore how busy marketers and business owners can get ahead by procrastinating. You'll discover how the principles of time management have changed over the years, as well as why and how to embrace the focus funnel. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: More Marketing Time Rory's backstory Raised by a single mother who sold Mary Kay cosmetics, Rory grew up around women who taught him the principles of success. Rory says it also means he knows more about makeup than cars. During college at the University of Denver, Rory was recruited to work in a program called Southwestern Advantage, where he sold educational children's reference books door-to-door and eventually managed salespeople. He says that's where he developed a passion for sales. In 2006, Rory and three others started Southwestern Consulting, with the mission to help salespeople achieve their goals in life. They now have 115 team members and are working with more than 1,000 people. Rory's first book, Take the Stairs, is all about the psychology of overcoming procrastination, improving self-discipline and getting yourself to do things you know you should do that you don't feel like doing. It answers the question, "How do the most disciplined people in the world get themselves to be disciplined?" Rory's second book, Procrastinating on Purpose, addresses the question, "How do the most successful people today think about time and do they believe the same clichés we often hear about time management?" Rory says a lot of them don't. Listen to the show to discover what launched Rory's speaking career. Why people struggle with time management Rory says there is no such thing as time management, only self management. In the world we live in today, time management isn't just logical, it's emotional. Our feelings of guilt, fear, worry and anxiety, as well as our desire for success and our need to feel valued dictate how we spend our time—as much as our inbox, our to-do list and our calendar do. There's also a new type of thinker that has emerged: the multiplier. Rory shares the history of time management. Era one time-management thinking is one-dimensional. It was developed in the 1950s and 1960s, and was all about efficiency. All things being equal, doing things faster is better. However, there is a point of diminishing returns with efficiency. Era two time-management thinking is two-dimensional. This was ushered in by Dr. Stephen Covey, author of The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People, in the late 80s. Dr. Covey gave us the time-management matrix. The Y axis was importance (how much something matters) and the X axis was urgency (how soon it matters), so it was a way to score tasks and prioritize based on their score. While prioritizing is a relevant skill today, there is a massive limitation—nothing about prioritizing creates more time. Rory believes you cannot solve today's time-management problems with yesterday's time-management solutions. People who are multipliers, Rory says,

How to Create Twitter RSS Feeds for Better Prospecting

How to Create Twitter RSS Feeds for Better Prospecting

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Twitter to find prospects? Looking for a better way to organize relevant conversations? You can use your favorite RSS reader to monitor customized Twitter searches, Twitter lists, and hashtags that relate to your business. In this article, you'll discover how to set up RSS feeds to easily monitor and manage a steady flow of Twitter leads. Listen to this article: Why Create RSS Feeds From Twitter Among social networks, Twitter has some major advantages to the social seller. It's generally acceptable for anyone to chime in on any conversation at any time. There's a mind-boggling volume of activity, and a great deal of it is relevant to prospecting. Many marketers find Twitter's web interface and mobile app to be less useful for mining opportunities, however. A better option to consider is to use an RSS reader app like Feedly, which makes it easy to organize feeds by theme, priority, stages in the buyer's journey, and any number of other useful parameters. Reader apps can be used as "asynchronous" queues, whereby aggregated content stays put until you view it. Here are step-by-step instructions for setting up Twitter timelines and organizing them into RSS feeds for maximum lead generation efficiency. #1: Create Targeted Twitter Timelines Create and Save Twitter Advanced Searches Twitter advanced searches can be goldmines to social sellers. You can set up queries that involve parameters like language, geographic location, sentiment, and the appearance of question marks. This helps you keep your finger on the pulse of what relevant people think of various brands and products, what they want to learn more about, and what their pain points are. For example, say you notice people asking about the best solution to pain points that your product is perfect for. If you're quick on the draw, you can jump in with content that answers users' questions and reach out to provide more advice if they're interested. To see who's talking about your company, type your company name in the Twitter search box, located at the top-right corner of the screen. On the results page, you'll see a list of tabs: Top, Live, Accounts, Photos, Videos, and More Options. Click on More Options, and from the drop-down menu, select Advanced Search. From here, you have virtually endless Twitter search refinement options. You can zero in on tweets with certain words, phrases, and hashtags, as well as the language they're written in. If you want to target when people are replying to your tweets (or anyone else's), add the relevant username in the To These Accounts box. Also choose whether you want to include positive, negative, questions, and/or retweets. When you're finished, click Search and then check out the results. If you need to refine your search, just click the Back button. Once you're satisfied with the search parameters you've set up, save the search by clicking More Options and selecting Save This Search. Repeat this process to set up advanced searches for the queries you want to track in your RSS-powered dashboard. Tip: Trying to set up a search that's returning results you aren't sure about? You can use the free tool from Warble to test-drive your advanced searches as daily email alerts. See what your queries return for a few days before you go through the RSS-creation process. It's also a good long-term option if you'd rather see tweets as emails than use an RSS reader. Subscribe to Relevant Twitter Lists Curated by Others Twitter lists can help you segment the Twitter accounts you monitor, making it easy to keep abreast of what's happening among specific groups of people and companies. You can use lists to monitor accounts without following them, so it's a great way to keep an eye on the competition, too. There are thousands of existing public lists that others have spent years curating and maintaining. Finding and subscribing to these can be useful when setting...

How to Start Affiliate Marketing with the Best Affiliate Programs of 2017

by Raghav Haran @ Oberlo

In this post, I’ll show you how to implement and create your own affiliate program, how to partner with the right affiliates, and how much to pay them through commission.

The post How to Start Affiliate Marketing with the Best Affiliate Programs of 2017 appeared first on Oberlo.

7 Ways to Track Your Social Media Marketing Activities

7 Ways to Track Your Social Media Marketing Activities

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you tracking your social media marketing results? Do you know where to find metrics to help you improve? Tracking social activity helps you attract a higher-quality following, communicate more effectively and provide content that resonates with your audience. In this article you’ll discover seven ways to track metrics and improve your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Discover Optimal Times to Post Use a tool like SumAll to track metrics such as what times of the day you get the most engagement and which content types work best for your social posts. As you gather these insights, start scheduling your posts at optimal times. Make other changes as well, such as a different content type or voice, to connect with and grow your audience. #2: Examine the Reach of a Keyword on Twitter To track the reach of a specific keyword or hashtag on Twitter, use a tool like TweetReach. For example, if you're running a campaign with an associated hashtag, you can determine how far your hashtag traveled over a given time frame. TweetReach's free service will look at 1,500 tweets for a given keyword. For example, below are the results for a search for the hashtag #MondayBlogs. The results show that the term had a reach of nearly 211,000 accounts. TweetReach also shows you the most influential accounts that help spread your message and makes it easy for you to engage with them. With the premium service, you can track a hashtag over weeks or months to see how your campaign is spreading on Twitter. #3: Research Your Competition If you want to know where your competitors excel and where they're falling short on social, use a tool like Rival IQ to find out. Why is this good to know? If your competitors are tanking on Snapchat, for example, chances are you will too. Or if your competitors aren't on Snapchat, it might be worth a look to see why. Maybe they were on the platform previously and it didn't work out, or perhaps it's just a venue they haven't explored yet. A recent blog post from Rival IQ reveals engagement rates for Shopify and their competitors, complete with detailed graphics showing where each company has a social presence and where they get the most interaction. You may find some of the results surprising. For example, Shopify gets the most engagement on Instagram. That's probably not the first place you'd think people would go for an ecommerce solution, but Shopify is connecting well there. #4: Identify Industry Influencers Use a tool like BuzzSumo to identify who the influencers are in your field and what they're talking about. Then connect with those people, talk to them and make sure you're responding to them when they tweet you. Beyond that, you can use BuzzSumo to find out which posts are getting the most action, discover relevant keywords you may have been unaware of and find new Twitter chats to participate in. You can also see who shared the best content so you can target your following habits in the hope that they'll follow you back. Filter your results if you want to see what video is performing best or for details on infographics, for example. You can go back for a year, which is particularly useful if you have season-specific content. All in all, BuzzSumo gives you insights on how to word your posts and whom to engage with for growth on which social platform. It's a great tool for fine-tuning how you present your content on social media. Check out how your own posts rank to make sure that you're improving over time. #5: Determine Website Traffic Sources With a customized landing page, you can measure many metrics, the most basic of which is just where website traffic is coming from. Say you're spending 10 hours a week crafting Twitter posts because you're certain that your audience is there. If you then discover that your Facebook landing page is driving more traffic, you can streamline your efforts either by reducing the...

Facebook Split Testing: How to Make Your Ads Better

Facebook Split Testing: How to Make Your Ads Better

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you run Facebook ads? Have you tried split testing? To explore different ways to split test your Facebook ads so you can refine your ad campaigns, I interview Andrea Vahl. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Andrea Vahl, a Facebook marketing expert. She's co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies and co-founder of the Social Media Manager School. In addition, Andrea is a regular contributor to Social Media Examiner. Andrea explores Facebook split testing and how best to optimize your Facebook ads. You'll discover which elements to split test first. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Split Testing How Andrea Became Involved With Facebook In 2006, Andrea started using social media to promote her side business (in-home wine tasting). She says that as she was learning how to use Facebook and Twitter, she didn't see a lot of articles that were entertaining and explained things step by step. So Andrea decided to use one of her improv comedy characters to make an entertaining, fun, and useful blog. She chose Grandma Mary, and dubbed her a "social media edutainer." According to Andrea, Grandma Mary gets a little cranky about social media. The character is the voice of people who are frustrated with having to learn social media. Grandma Mary explains social media in an endearing, engaging, and understandable way. Andrea started her blog about nine years ago, and when the parent company of the wine business folded, she made the blog her side gig. It grew substantially (she had a lot of Twitter followers and Facebook fans), which led to the book deal for her to co-author of the Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies series with Phyllis Khare and Amy Porterfield. Today, Andrea still blogs about Facebook, does Facebook consulting, runs ad campaigns for clients, and more. It's her full-time business and she gets to speak and train on Facebook all over the world. Listen to the show to discover which two loves Andrea combined when she created Grandma Mary. What You Can Split Test Andrea explains that the concept of split testing Facebook ads involves keeping things constant, while changing one thing about the ad at a time. That way, you'll easily be able to tell which variable contributed to the better-performing Facebook ad results. Then you can stop the ads that aren't performing, continue running the ones that are, and hopefully get your click price and cost lower and lower. For example, if you split test an ad to 1,000 people, 500 would see one version and 500 would see another. Then you compare the results. The hope is that you learn what works and what doesn't so larger audiences can be reached. First of all, Andrea says, you can split test all kinds of keywords, which go into the Interests area. For instance, if someone lists jogging as an interest in a profile, and you use that keyword in the Interest area of your Facebook ad, your ad will get shown to that person. Your ad could also be shown to people who have liked pages that are related to jogging, such as types of jogging clothing or shoes. You can also test all kinds of demographics. For example, say you want to reach people who are 35 to 55, live in a certain city, like certain things, and maybe own a home. There are all kinds of demographics targeting you can put in your ads to reach your perfect prospect. For Interests, Andrea suggests using general keywords like "jogging" and "running," versus specific pages like Runner's World or Nike shoes.

How to Optimize Your Tweets for Search

How to Optimize Your Tweets for Search

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more exposure for your Twitter account? Have you thought about applying SEO tactics to your Twitter marketing? With a few simple techniques, you can increase the chances that your Twitter account shows up in both Twitter and Google search. In this article you'll discover how to improve the visibility of your Twitter account with SEO. Listen to this article: Start With Relevant Keywords Keywords that you're already using in the metadata of your website are a good place to start. Your website keywords might not translate perfectly to Twitter, but if you combine them with popular hashtags and topics that work well in your content, you'll have a good group to test. You'll know which keywords are working best by monitoring your engagement, link clicks and reach. Any spikes in those metrics will show you which tweets have effective keywords in them. Then you can use those keywords more in your tweets and profile. You can also expand your keyword list by including the names of events that your company is always involved with. Make the list as big as you like as long as every word is relevant to your brand. Most importantly, keep this list updated. With your keywords in hand, here are some ways to boost your visibility for both Twitter and Google search. #1: Optimize Your Account for Twitter Search Tweets get the main stage on Google right now, but optimizing your account for search on Twitter will allow you to have long-term searchability. Handle and Username Make sure your handle and username match your website and brand name. Consistent branding across all of your channels is your best bet for being found by the audience you want. Your handle and username don't have to match each other, but they should be related. Your handle is also included in your unique Twitter URL (for example, https://twitter.com/SMExaminer). Your username shows up next to your profile photo for all of your tweets. You can change your username easily. But changing your handle is trickier, and you'll lose your verification badge if you have one. Changing your username or handle may also confuse your followers and cause people to unfollow you. If you're going to change either one, try to do it only once. Don't use a lot of numbers in your username either because Google may flag it as spam. Bio, Photo and Link Your bio, photo and link are the places to make changes and updates to promote campaigns or events. Twitter indexes your bio regularly, so any changes affect your relevancy score in search. You can use up to 160 characters in your bio section, so make the most of them. The bio's main purpose is to explain to potential followers what you usually tweet about and why they should follow you. Update your bio regularly to match the type of content you're currently tweeting about. If you have a campaign or event you're involved with, make sure you include relevant keywords and hashtags in your bio. This will help you show up more on both Twitter and Google when people search for those keywords and hashtags. The profile photo also has some SEO weight. Before you upload the photo, add relevant keywords, separated by dashes, to the filename of your photo (for example, social-media-examiner.jpeg). This won't make you shoot to the top of results on its own, but SEO tactics are most successful when the different pieces are working together. Also make sure your photo is exactly 200 x 200 pixels for optimal loading speed. Your link is the biggest call to action for your Twitter account. Many brands shorten their URL to make it more trackable and user-friendly. If you want to shorten your URL, get a branded link shortener because some link shorteners can be flagged as spam. Also think carefully about which page your bio link is sending your Twitter followers to. The safest option is to use the main page of your brand's website because it usually has the best SEO authority.

How to Increase the Facebook Visibility of Your Local Business

How to Increase the Facebook Visibility of Your Local Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you have a Facebook page for your local business? Are you looking for ways to reach your customers on Facebook? Because your audience is naturally limited by the area you serve, local marketing on Facebook can be challenging. In this article you'll discover nine ways to use Facebook to get more local exposure for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Use Local Videos and Images Facebook native video is more visible and gets more reach in the news feed, so it's a good idea to have a Facebook video strategy for your local business. Really tailor your videos to appeal to local users. Add a fun video about a local event, share a quick tip or even cross-promote another business. Your video doesn't have to be professionally done to get results. This local video about elk in Estes Park received over 220,000 views, and led to at least one direct booking. Local images are also very shareable. If your business doesn't have regular images to post, take pictures occasionally when you're out and about in your town to share in the future. When your local clients recognize the area, they're more likely to visit your page and your business. #2: Feature Your Customers and Fans Share photos of happy customers on your Facebook business page. Personal photos help your visibility with the friends of your customers. Encourage people to tag themselves in your photos. Remember, a page cannot tag a fan unless the admin is a personal friend of that person. Only people can tag other people or people can tag themselves. Also, thank your customers from time to time. Post an image and tell your community how much you appreciate them. When you have a post such as a photograph that people can easily like, you increase your chances of being seen by those people in the future, because they have already interacted with your page. #3: Collaborate With Other Local Businesses One of the best ways to connect with your community is through other local pages. Interact regularly as your page with other local pages: share their posts, tag them, comment on their posts and show them a little love. This will make you more visible to their audience. A side benefit of promoting other pages in your community is they're likely to promote you too. Create a formal cross-promotion plan or just give other pages a shout-out from time to time to create goodwill. #4: Use Reviews Social proof and recommendations can benefit your business in a major way, so use the Reviews capability on Facebook for your local business. Reviews show up prominently on mobile phones especially. To enable reviews, make sure you set Local Business as your category and have a physical address. You also need to check the Show Map box on the About tab. For further details, see #6 of our Frequently Asked Facebook Questions post. Be sure to respond to all reviews (good and bad). If you have negative reviews, try to correct the issue. You may even want to consider giving your best customers a little incentive to leave a (hopefully positive) review about your product or service. #5: Build Your Email List One thing that many local businesses don't do often enough is build their email list. Once you have a list, you're able to email your customers to promote something new, share a contest and so on. Like with reviews, offer something good as an incentive to get people to opt into your list. #6: Create Local Awareness Ads Reach people who are near your business with a local awareness ad, either because they live nearby or because they’re in your area with their mobile device. Create a different call to action, such as Get Directions, for each ad. A local awareness ad is also the perfect way to attract someone to your business for the first time with a coupon. #7: Join Local Groups If your business focuses on B2B, then a networking group could be a great place to reach other business owners,

How to Use LinkedIn Showcase Pages for Business

How to Use LinkedIn Showcase Pages for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for more ways to use LinkedIn for your business? Have you considered showcase pages? LinkedIn showcase pages enable you to promote certain products or services to specific customer segments. In this article you'll discover how to use LinkedIn showcase pages for your business. Listen to this article: What Are Showcase Pages? Showcase pages are an extension of your LinkedIn company page and allow you to highlight a particular product line or brand. Although you need to have a company page to create showcase pages, they're somewhat of a standalone feature. Each showcase page has its own followers, status updates and functionality, sort of like a mini LinkedIn company page. Any showcase pages you've created for your business are listed in the right column of your company page. For example, IBM has a number of showcase pages, including IBM Cloud, IBM Analytics, IBM Security, IBM with MSPs, IBM Social Business and IBM Watson. Here's how to set up showcase pages for your business's products and services. #1: Choose a Page Name First, you need to choose a page name. To take advantage of showcase pages for SEO, include your target SEO keywords as part of the page-naming process. For example, because I provide search engine optimization training, I claimed, created and optimized the showcase page with the same name: Search Engine Optimization Training. The URL for the showcase page I claimed is http://www.linkedin.com/company/search-engine-optimization-training. As you can see from the URL, showcase pages are not directly linked to your LinkedIn company page. The URL just says .../company/..., and only the name of the showcase page is included in the URL. This means no one else can claim a LinkedIn showcase page with that same name. It's sort of like registering and claiming a really cool .com URL and making it yours. #2: Create a Showcase Page To create a showcase page, log into your LinkedIn company page, hover or click on the down-pointing arrow next to Edit and select Create a Showcase Page from the drop-down menu. You can claim up to 10 showcase pages for your company. If you need additional pages, reach out to LinkedIn’s support team and request them. #3: Optimize the Page for Search Without a doubt, Google loves LinkedIn company pages, and frequently ranks them high in search results if they're properly optimized. The same principle applies to showcase pages. The more followers you have and the more actively those followers engage with your showcase page, the better. There are a number of ways you can optimize your showcase pages for search. You get more SEO juice by including target SEO keywords in the showcase page name (as described earlier) and in the description. You can use up to 200 characters to draft an engaging and compelling product or service description, so make good use of this real estate. In the Website area of your page, make sure you include a link to the corresponding service or product page on your website. Also add your logo and a header image to your showcase page. For the header image, you can upload an image in the PNG, JPEG or GIF format. The maximum file size for the image is 2MB, and it must be 974 x 330 pixels or larger. Be sure to invite people to follow your showcase page and encourage them to engage with your posts. When you post status updates on the page, keep them focused and include your target SEO keywords. Companies Using Showcase Pages Here's a look at how three well-known companies use showcase pages to promote their products and services. Adobe Creative Cloud The Adobe Creative Cloud showcase page has more than 15,700 followers and features an excellent and relevant header image. The Adobe company page encourages visitors to follow all of their LinkedIn showcase pages. Intel IT Center The Intel IT Center showcase page, which has more than 47,200 followers,

5 Tips for Better Facebook Live Broadcasts

5 Tips for Better Facebook Live Broadcasts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Thinking of going live on Facebook? Wondering how to get the most out of your Facebook Live broadcast? With Facebook Live, you can show your expertise in real time, take people behind the scenes, and much more. In this article, you'll discover five tips to succeed with your next Facebook Live broadcast. Listen to this article: #1: Promote Before You Broadcast Facebook Live allows you to target your personal network, the fans of a business page (if you're an admin), a group, or an event. If you can't find a group or event to meet your needs, consider starting one. It's important to let your audience know about your upcoming live video with news feed posts. Experiment with images and perhaps even a short video to tell them about the bigger video to come. If your live video is important enough, you can boost your announcement posts as paid Facebook ads. Then, remind your audience again right before you go live. For example, here's how NASA Earth promotes upcoming live videos in their news feed and encourages interactions. Don't forget about the world outside of Facebook. Invite your blog readers, email subscribers, and followers from other networks. Include a link to your account, business page, group, or event. #2: Prepare and Practice Before you broadcast your live video, you need to do some preparation to ensure that viewers will be able to hear you clearly without distraction, follow your future broadcasts, and participate. Set Up Your Location Here are some tips for optimizing the location and setup for your live video: Try to minimize background and ambient noise. While users will expect the production quality to be a bit raw and unrehearsed, be sure that they can see and hear you without undue distractions. Decide whether to hold the phone yourself or use some type of mount. You could also delegate the job to a co-worker. For the live video, you can use either the front- or rear-facing camera. Choose a spot that has a strong broadband connection. Facebook recommends that live videos last at least 10 minutes, but you can go as long as 90 minutes. Tip: Forward your calls to avoid distractions during your broadcast. Set a Policy for Instant Feedback Two new Facebook Live features allow viewers to provide feedback and ask you questions during the broadcast. They can click on the same six emoji reactions that replaced the simple like back in February. These will appear for a few seconds onscreen; Facebook compares them to applause and boos. Users can also comment during the video, so you should decide in advance how and when you will acknowledge your audience. Facebook recommends that you address commenters by name and make it clear how much you appreciate their involvement. If you need to block a user, click on the profile picture next to their comment and select Block. Note that when the video is replayed, the comments will appear at the same point they did during the live event. Do a Practice Video Before you use Facebook Live for the first time, consider doing a practice run. To get all of the practice time you need, set Facebook's Who Should See This? privacy setting to Only Me. You'll see the live video exactly as it will appear, but no one else will. If you're having trouble changing the privacy setting from the mobile app, open your desktop or laptop and set your preferences at Facebook.com. Your changes will be integrated automatically by the app. Remember, Facebook doesn't allow business pages to post to a group or event, so you'll need to use a personal account in those instances. You can remind your audience about your company association in posts and during the video. To launch your live video, open the Facebook app and go to the personal, business, group, or event page that you want to target. Tap to start a new post and look for the Live icon at the bottom of the screen. In Android,

How to Automate Your Tweets: 3 Useful Twitter Apps

How to Automate Your Tweets: 3 Useful Twitter Apps

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Does tweeting take up a lot of your time? Do you want to share content automatically? There are tools you can use to automatically tweet your best content when your followers are most active and engaged. In this article you'll discover how to automatically schedule your tweets at optimal times. Why Automate Twitter? Putting together a Twitter content calendar can be a time-consuming task. You've likely experienced times when you've run out of ideas or had trouble finding articles to curate. A great way to keep your posting schedule full is to automate Twitter. You can schedule your posts automatically when the engagement and potential reach are higher. Listen to this article: Keep in mind that only a small portion of your followers will see your content the first time you post it. That's why it's a good idea to share the same content more than once. With smart scheduling and automation, you can reshare your content without being a Twitter spammer. This guide will help you schedule your best content when your followers are most engaged. #1: Find Out When to Tweet With Tweriod Before you start scheduling content on Twitter, take the time to analyze your followers' activity. You want to find out when your audience is most active and engaged on Twitter. This is a necessary step to maximize engagement. There are a number of analytics tools you can use to identify these peak periods. One free and easy-to-use tool is Tweriod. It shows you the intervals when your Twitter followers are most active. To get started, go to Tweriod and sign up with your Twitter account. Note that the time zone is determined according to your Twitter profile's settings, so make sure it's correct. After signing in, go to your dashboard and click on My Analysis to get a free premium analysis. On the results page, you'll see which time periods give you the most exposure on weekends and weekdays. For example, the Twitter account below has the most exposure on weekdays from 5 to 7 PM and 8 to 9 PM. On weekends, this account gets the most exposure from 5 to 6 PM and 8 to 10 PM. On your dashboard, you can also see when your followers are online. The results below show that followers are active between the same time periods on weekdays and weekends. Now you know the peak time periods for your followers on weekdays and weekends. In the next section you'll discover how to schedule tweets for these periods. #2: Set Up a Posting Schedule in Buffer A scheduling tool like Buffer can save you a lot of time with your Twitter account. Here's how to set up your own scheduling plan. After you sign in with your Twitter account, click on the Schedule menu. Make sure the time zone matches the settings of your Twitter account. According to when your followers are most active, set up a posting schedule for weekdays and weekends. It's up to you to decide how often you want to post content. You may want to experiment with different posting schedules to see what works best for you. Buffer has a beta feature that will identify the best times to post during the day by analyzing your past 5,000 interactions (likes, favorites, clicks, etc.) and similar profiles in the same time zone. On the Schedule page, scroll down and click on the Try Our Optimal Timing Tool (Beta) link. You can specify how many times you want to post per day, and the tool will calculate the optimal times for posting. Click on the Submit button. Next, you'll see a list of optimal times for you to post on Twitter, according to Buffer. Pro tip: Revise these peak times regularly, since your audience changes over time. Focus on optimizing your posting schedule by using data from Twitter analytics and Buffer. Before you move on to the next step, spend some time scheduling tweets. Here is a great guide to finding high-quality content to share on Twitter. #3: Fill Your Buffer Queue Using IFTTT

Facebook Freebooting: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Freebooting: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use video in your marketing? Want to make sure your copyright is protected? There are simple steps you can take to brand your videos so you're protected if people upload them to Facebook as their own. In this article you'll discover how to protect your video content from freebooting on Facebook. Listen to this article: What Is Freebooting? Freebooting (also known as video piracy) is the act of downloading someone else's copyrighted video (usually from YouTube) and uploading it to Facebook as your own. You need to protect your content and make sure you don't unknowingly propagate the work of pirates. Joe Hanson of It’s Okay to Be Smart explains that freebooting "is not the same as sharing or linking or embedding [online media] from its original source. Freebooting means downloading it without permission from the creator or copyright holder and redistributing it for your own use, often for your own monetary gain. When it comes to video piracy in 2015, Facebook is ground zero." http://i.imgur.com/oqvxxMB.jpg Of the videos on Facebook, 72.5% are pirated. "According to a recent report from Ogilvy and Tubular Labs, of the 1,000 most popular Facebook videos of Q1 2015, 725 were stolen reuploads," says Hank Green. "Just these 725 'freebooted' videos were responsible for around 17 BILLION views last quarter." A recent trend I'm seeing on Facebook is scraped YouTube videos that have been lightly edited and compiled into a montage with large captions or subtitles on the video itself. Given that Facebook has the Autoplay feature on both desktop and mobile, users are more likely to feel drawn in to watch a video and click/tap for the audio if they read the caption. Freebooting hurts people who work hard to create their video identity. For instance, if you're monetizing your YouTube channel, you'll miss out on ad revenues if someone is scraping and reusing your videos. Facebook is just starting to dig into revenue sharing for their ads, but it's only available to a select few advertisers so far. Granted, if there's a call to action or watermark on an illegally uploaded video, it could potentially help increase the visibility of the original creator. But still… Here's how to protect your content, deal with piracy when it happens and avoid sharing pirated videos. #1: Understand Facebook and YouTube Video Piracy Policies YouTube is stringent with their copyright links, so they'll take infringed content down immediately if a complaint is filed. Unlike YouTube, Facebook won't automatically take down pirated content. Facebook is clearly on a mission to ramp up their own video consumption. Native Facebook video posts have the most organic reach, which is probably what has spawned this trend among users. Under pressure to do something about freebooting, Facebook came up with video matching technology to make life a lot harder for pirates. It lets the creator know when a duplicate video is being shared on Facebook. "Videos uploaded to Facebook are run through the Audible Magic system, which uses audio fingerprinting technology to help identify and prevent unauthorized videos from making their way onto the platform," Facebook states. #2: Report Freebooted Videos Destin Sandlin of Smarter Every Day created the following video (which you can share on Facebook) to simplify what freebooting is and the impact it has for content creators. He talks about a German DJ who created a YouTube video that got over 5 million views in four years. A verified Facebook page then downloaded the video from YouTube, uploaded it as a native Facebook video and got 5 million views in four days. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=L6A1Lt0kvMA Destin shares three tips for what to do when you come across freebooted videos anywhere on the Internet. He says to capture the freebooted content (with a screenshot or video screen capture), comment (state that it's stolen and direct people back to the original vid...

5 Tools to Measure Social Media ROI

5 Tools to Measure Social Media ROI

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you struggle to determine an accurate ROI in social media marketing? Wondering which of your social media campaigns are most profitable? It's important to know whether the money you've invested in your social media marketing has provided a return that's worth what you've put in. In this article, you'll discover five tools to help you accurately and completely measure your social media ROI. Listen to this article: #1: Kissmetrics Kissmetrics is an analytics platform designed to optimize marketing success and ROI. It lets you track individuals, groups of similar individuals, and your users as a whole throughout their visit to your site. People are tracked anonymously on their first visit all the way through multiple visits and conversions, and even after they've left and come back. It's a great tool to evaluate customer behavior and ROI. The stand-out feature of Kissmetrics is that it notes when users leave and come back, and what they do when they return. You can track ROI coming from Facebook, LinkedIn, Twitter, or any website, and attribute the conversion credit to the correct social media channel, allowing you to track your entire customer lifecycle more accurately. This, in turn, provides valuable information about ROI, and lets you see which paid advertising sources are actually working and converting. A free trial of Kissmetrics is available when you first sign up. After that, plans start at $120 per month. A/B testing reports are available with the Power Plan, which is currently $600 per month. #2: Customer Lifetime Value Calculator While plenty of social media campaigns prioritize sales or on-platform engagement, social media is frequently used to connect with new audiences and generate new leads. If that's your goal, it's a good idea to calculate your approximate customer lifetime value (CLV). You can use the Customer Lifetime Value Calculator to find out not only what a new lead is costing you, but also whether it's worth it. With this tool, you can create CLVs for each of your different customer groups. For example, a jewelry store can calculate the value of customers who make big, one-time, high-value purchases like wedding rings, as well as customers who buy a much less expensive charm bracelet, but who come back an average of six times to add charms to the bracelet. By knowing an estimated CLV, you can quickly determine how much you're willing to spend on lead generation or engagement campaigns on social media. The Customer Lifetime Value Calculator is free and fast. #3: RJ Metrics' Cloud BI For a more in-depth analysis of CLV, try RJ Metrics' CloudBI. The tool not only automatically calculates CLV, it will even break the CLV down to show the social media channel that sent you the customer in the first place. RJ Metrics also offers amazing features like churn analysis that gives you insight into your customers' behaviors, and analysis about marketing ROI as it pertains to customer acquisition cost. In addition, RJ Metrics will show you the all-time value based on the acquisition source and repeat order profitability from different sources. This helps you decide which social ad platforms are working for you and which to invest in. You can even have reports sent to you on a regular basis. #4: Cyfe Cyfe is an all-in-one reporting tool that provides an insane amount of information about how your content is shared across social media and the impact it's having on your overall ROI. You can use widgets to create multiple customized dashboards where you can see the reporting on Facebook ads, Twitter engagement, Shopify orders and sales, or Google Analytics. The categories of widgets to choose from include advertising, blogging, email tracking, social media, and more. Cyfe has some really interesting social tracking features, combined with detailed ROI and analytics reporting, like their Twitter Mentions widget.

9 Google Analytics Tips to Improve Your Marketing

9 Google Analytics Tips to Improve Your Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Google Analytics? Are you leveraging the many apps that work with Google Analytics? Integrating data from third-party tools, plugins and platforms with Google Analytics helps you gain insight about your online marketing efforts. In this article I'll share nine tips to help you get more out of Google Analytics. Listen to this article: You can also subscribe via RSS, Stitcher and iTunes. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. #1: Add Google Analytics to WordPress You can easily add Google Analytics to your self-hosted WordPress website using the Google Analytics by Yoast plugin. The plugin lets you configure advanced features such as tracking outbound clicks, downloads and internal links that redirect to external websites; for example, affiliate links you create using your own domain (yourdomain.com/affiliate/product). You can also use it to ignore traffic from admins and other users, track search results pages and 404 pages. Yoast's premium version offers more advanced features, such as tracking views per author, views per post type and other specific dimensions. #2: Integrate All Analytics Platforms If you want to combine Google Analytics data with additional analytics tools and platforms to gain insights about your traffic, try Segment. The platform allows you to manage data from over 100 different advertising, analytics, developer, marketing, sales, support and user testing platforms in one place. Simply install one piece of tracking code on your website, and the rest of the tracking codes from any platforms you choose are managed by Segment. Segment offers a free plan for using Google Analytics with 20 other specific platforms. Premium plans for more platform integrations start at $29 per month, based on the integrations you need. #3: Visualize Google Analytics Data It's possible to view and compare data from multiple websites at the same time in Google Analytics with a tool like Cyfe. Use Cyfe dashboards to show an overview of all of your websites' pageviews, sessions and users, then analyze the data to identify bigger trends in: Conversions, traffic sources, bounce rate and location of users Traffic from search engines and social networks Real-time traffic, including users, location of users, traffic sources and content they're currently viewing You can even use it to create dashboards with a detailed view of your websites' real-time traffic, including users, location of users, traffic sources and content they're currently viewing. With a premium upgrade, you can create unlimited dashboards and widgets from over 50 advertising, analytics, blogging, email, sales, SEO, social media and support platforms for only $19 per month. #4: Learn About Email Marketing Traffic Want to link your email marketing efforts to the traffic in Google Analytics? Email marketing platforms such as MailChimp, GetResponse, Constant Contact and Vertical Response allow you to track traffic from links in your emails to your email campaigns. For example, MailChimp lets you check one box to add UTM parameters to links when you create an email campaign so you can view traffic from those links inside Google Analytics. You can also set up Google Analytics tracking for your automation emails and campaign archive pages. #5: Link Social and Website Engagement If you use social media management tools like Buffer, Hootsuite and Oktopost to publish and schedule updates to your top social media networks, you'll benefit from linking them to Google Analytics. Link Hootsuite and you get an overview report with your Google Analytics data along with the social updates you published through Hootsuite. One custom report is included with the $9.99 per month pro plan. With Buffer, you can customize the UTM parameters you use to track custom campaigns within Google Analytics so they match the updates you publish through Buffer.

Stop Marketing, Start Engaging: How to Get Social Media to Really Work

Stop Marketing, Start Engaging: How to Get Social Media to Really Work

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media marketing to grow your business? Are you wondering how to get others to say great things about your brand or product? To discover the common mistakes social media marketers make and how to fix them, I interview Scott Stratten for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Scott Stratten, author of UnMarketing and co-host of the UnPodcast. His latest book is QR Codes Kill Kittens. Scott shares how marketers can improve social media by engaging their audiences. You'll discover how to use social media marketing effectively, and how brands can get talked about in a positive way. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Stop Marketing, Start Engaging Why did you decide to write your first book, UnMarketing?  Scott explains how he used to look at business books in bookstores, and they would all have the same information, just a different title. He always thought there was a need for his book, but he didn't want to publish it without leverage. He wanted to wait for a publisher to come to him. Once he had built his blog, someone from Wiley contacted him to ask why he hadn't written a book. This led Scott to write his first book, UnMarketing. The book was aimed at entrepreneurs. People who were able and willing to shift their minds to do things a different way. You'll hear why Scott was surprised when it caught on with corporations. In 2009, when social took off to another level, Scott realized that he would have to become more focused. So he started with Twitter. He'd already tried Twitter in 2008 and didn't think much of it, but in January 2009 he decided to try it for 30 days. During this period, he tweeted 7000 times. At the start of the month, he had 1200 followers and by the end of the month, he had 10,000. This made him realize that not only was there potential on Twitter, but there was great potential for conversation. He's never stopped tweeting since. To date he has over 100,000 tweets and 165,000 followers. Scott says that one of the biggest mistakes people make with Twitter is that they create a lot of content first and then go onto Twitter with no followers and expect to pitch it. Instead you should give to the network, rather than go out there and sell. When Scott started out on Twitter, he didn't have a blog, so he had no content to share on Twitter. You'll hear how back in 2009, Twitter was more about people talking to people. The term social strategy wasn't even around. Scott believes that if he used the same strategy now for a month, his results would be a lot different than they were back then. The platform has definitely migrated and shifted. Listen to the show to find out why Mitch Joel calls Scott a storyteller. The story behind the Instant No Button The Instant No Button is a 7-minute project that Scott threw together about 4 years ago. He loved the Instant Fail button sound and decided to do a "No" version. To date it has been clicked 20 million times. Scott says the funny thing about it is that most people have seen it, but are totally unaware that it's his. This type of project goes to show that people share great content, even if it's funny or stupid. The free No Button app has recently been launched in the Google Play Store and has already gotten 30,000 downloads. Scott has Google AdWords on there and he says that he makes fun money off of it. Listen to the show to discover the amount of money it makes in a year and why it's ...

Facebook Carousel Content: How to Make Your Posts and Ads Stand Out

Facebook Carousel Content: How to Make Your Posts and Ads Stand Out

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to use multiple images in a single Facebook ad or post? Have you tried Facebook's Carousel feature? The Facebook Carousel feature allows you to publish multiple images and links in one post or ad. In this article you'll discover how to set up and use Facebook carousel posts and ads in your Facebook marketing. Listen to this article: Why Create Carousel Posts and Ads A Facebook carousel post or ad is a creative way to get more content into a smaller space. You can feature five unique images, each with different headlines, descriptions, and URLs all within the same story. Publish a carousel post or ad as an organic story on your page wall and/or an ad unit; either can easily be viewed on desktop and mobile. According to a report by Kinetic Social, carousel ads perform 10 times better than regular ads. Plus, since 90% of Facebook users access via mobile, that's a great use of a small amount of real estate. Advertisers should get much more for their dollars by doing a horizontal ad unit that can scroll back and forth. Carousel ads are also available on Instagram. There are a few options when it comes to carousel posts and ads. Create an organic carousel post, turn an organic carousel post into an ad, or create a carousel ad from scratch. #1: Create an Organic Carousel Post To create a carousel post directly on your page, type or paste a link on your wall. It automatically populates a preview, which should have at least one image. Remember, the more images in your blog post, the more will populate and the fewer you'll need to upload directly. Typically, Facebook's og:image tag on blog posts preselects the link preview image and most blogs only have one that populates when the link is shared on Facebook. So when creating carousel format wall posts, you'll need to get creative with sourcing additional images. Usually you can find more images on the blog post you're sharing. Most links you share on Facebook will automatically populate with that preview image, which is 1200 x 628 pixels, the standard dimensions for a link post or ad. However, since carousel images are square, Facebook will crop out the center of the image. If the original image gets cut off in a way that doesn't make sense, you may need to remove the image that populates, and upload a square one. It's recommended that you size carousel images at 600 x 600 pixels. Click the plus sign and then upload additional pictures (up to five total) to use for your post. Select high-quality images that contain less than 20% text. This is especially important if you plan to turn your carousel post into an ad. Use Facebook's Grid Tool to make sure your images will be approved, should you decide to turn the post into a carousel ad. Drag and drop your images to change the order. Hover over each image and click the link icon to edit each destination URL. You're also able to edit the headline. Click on the headline and then edit the text. Your other option is to build a carousel post from the photo upload section. Go to upload Photo/Video and select Create a Photo Carousel. Then add the link. It will populate the images and allow you to add more. Facebook will populate your images into the carousel post. Add new pictures if necessary, and then edit the links and headlines as above. Boost Your Carousel Post After your carousel post gets some organic reach and engagement, you can easily turn it into a carousel ad by boosting the post. I recommend doing this through Ads Manager, rather than the Boost button, because there are more targeting and placement options. Go to Ads Manager and click Create an Ad. Select Boost Your Posts, and choose the page and the post. Set your audience, budget, and schedule. Then preview your ad. Click the Place Order button when you're satisfied with the ad. Again, keep in mind the less than 20% text rule.

YouTube Growth: How to Grow Your YouTube Channel

YouTube Growth: How to Grow Your YouTube Channel

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you post videos on YouTube? Are you looking for ways to increase your traffic and subscribers? To explore how to grow your YouTube audience, I interview Steve Dotto for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Steve Dotto, who produces Dotto Tech, a YouTube show designed to help you "discover your inner geek," by focusing on productivity, apps and more. In his former life, Steve hosted Canada's largest syndicated technology show of the same name where he entertained and informed millions of Canadians on all things tech. Steve's also been involved with theater and comedy at Second City. Steve shares how he transitioned from hosting a tech TV show to a popular YouTube channel. You'll discover how to grow your YouTube channel. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: YouTube Growth How Steve transitioned from television to new media For 15 years, Steve had a popular TV series in Canada that focused on tech. According to Steve, toward the end of the run, the Internet was becoming more relevant and the show was becoming less relevant. So about four years ago, he pulled the plug on the TV show and then took some time to figure out his next step. He started to teach, dabbled on YouTube and did a radio show. Then at a conference two years ago in Victoria, he met Mari Smith, who introduced him to the world of Internet marketing and showed him how to build a community. Steve took her advice and added his own approach. About a year ago, he really started focusing on YouTube. Listen to the show to hear how last year's YouTube/Google+ changes were key for community development. Steve's show format Steve's how-to series shows his viewers how to use tech tools—from Google functions to iPhone apps—more effectively. Steve says if you watch an episode and say, "I didn't know I could do that," "I'd like to do that" or "I should be doing that," then he's done his job. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ePVkSfKeEfI Most of Steve's videos are between 5 and 12 minutes long, which is a little long by conventional YouTube wisdom. His goal is to take on a topic and teach his viewers something they probably didn't know. Bottom line, he explains, is edutainment value. Listen to the show to hear an example of something Steve teaches during an episode. Why you should start a YouTube show Steve feels that for many different topics it's easier to convey a concept with inflection through video than on other platforms. It's also a relaxing environment to browse through and discover information. Steve says most people will binge-watch YouTube. They'll watch several videos in a row on the same topic to learn something. A video is easier to follow than a blog, it's more engaging than a podcast and you can bring all of the media types together, Steve believes. Listen to the show to discover how Steve feels about writing. What tech Steve uses for his show and why Steve sets his broadcasts up as screencasts, but uses an app so viewers can also see his face as he explains the tech. The why: Content creates a connection between the presenter and viewer. Whether it's a blog, podcast or YouTube video, there is an intimate relationship between you, the speaker, and the audience. With the vastness of the Internet, Steve believes we often lose that personal engagement that happens when someone consumes our content. So we need to make every effort to develop that relationship.

StumbleUpon Marketing: How to Drive More Traffic to Your Content

StumbleUpon Marketing: How to Drive More Traffic to Your Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use StumbleUpon for your business? Are you wondering how you can use StumbleUpon to drive more traffic to your content? To learn how your business can benefit from StumbleUpon, I interview Nick Robinson for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Nick Robinson, co-author of StumbleUpon for Dummies. He's also the social media channel manager for SAP Americas. Nick shares how StumbleUpon works and why it's different from other platforms. You'll learn how to use StumbleUpon to discover shareable content and the type of content that works best. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: StumbleUpon Marketing  What makes StumbleUpon different from other social networks Nick explains how StumbleUpon is a content discovery engine. It's a search engine and bookmarking site all in one. It's great if you want to bring exposure to your online content, which can include your website, blog post, video or infographic. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=F8DtI9e4xZ8 Nick believes that the key differentiator with StumbleUpon is the Stumble button. It takes you directly to a piece of content on another website that you are interested in. You can tell StumbleUpon what your interests are in several ways. When you set up your profile, you can specify your interests, the interests of people you follow and what pieces of content you have given a thumbs-up to on that particular website. When you click the Thumbs-Up or Thumbs-Down button, it tells StumbleUpon's algorithm if it should or shouldn't serve that type of content to you in the future. Each person's StumbleUpon experience is personalized. It allows you to curate content, promote your content and connect with communities with all types of interests. Listen to the show to find out how you can create content that's relevant to an audience within an Interest category. StumbleUpon for B2B and B2C Nick believes that any business in B2B or B2C can use the platform. It all depends on the type of content you produce. The content needs to entertain, be informative and connect with your audience. To be successful, you need to test and measure, based on the changes you learn. StumbleUpon launched their new design and a new mobile app, which has increased its mobile stumbles by 25% over a one-year period. However, the majority of StumbleUpon activity is still primarily desktop, at over 60%. Since these changes were made, around 40% of their activity comes from mobile. In the next couple of years, Nick thinks it will easily overtake desktop. You'll discover as a marketer what you need to consider with these figures in mind. According to Alexa, StumbleUpon is one of the top 149 websites in the world and Quantcast estimated that 23.4 million people in the last month in the U.S. alone have used it. As of June 2013, when the StumbleUpon for Dummies book was published, StumbleUpon had 25 million registered users. They have indexed over 100 million–plus web pages. Listen to the show to find out how much the average user "stumbles" per month and the time spent on the platform. Companies who use StumbleUpon well  Nick says that two companies come to mind, which are both primarily content publishers. The first is Forbes. They do a great job, which is primarily attributable to their company page. They use it to acquire followers and as a content feed. Unfortunately StumbleUpon has closed off access to these pages to the general ...

Creating Persuasive Videos: How to Move Viewers to Action

Creating Persuasive Videos: How to Move Viewers to Action

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create marketing videos? Are you wondering how to get people to go from passive observers to active participants? To learn how to create videos that people want to watch and get them to take action, I interview James Wedmore for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview James Wedmore, author of The YouTube Marketing Book, founder of Video Traffic Academy and--in my opinion--one of the smartest video marketers on the planet. James shares his knowledge and experience on video creation and taking your viewers to the next level. You'll learn the 5 important elements of what goes into persuasive video. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Persuasive Video Creation Why video is so important for marketers James describes how he has always considered video as a communication tool. A video can be simple, quick and efficient and can be used in an unlimited number of ways. Coming from a film background, James realised he could plug in video to everything people teach  him. You'll learn the different uses for video on your website and the benefits to your audience. James says YouTube is the most shared website and form of content inside of Facebook. You'll learn about the full potential and power of video and discover why James encourages people to get in front of the camera. Listen to the show to find out how we use video at Social Media Examiner. A 5-part YouTube video guide designed to move people to take action James explains that although the equipment you use is important, it's strategy that comes first. It's about the way the video can be executed and make it original. You'll find out the real strategy behind his videos and why he tries to share content once a week with a video on YouTube. Every video James makes is based off his 5-part template below. The 5 parts of the YouTube video template are: Attention Grabber Intro Bumper The Content Outro Bumper Outtakes You'll learn why you need to keep your YouTube videos as succinct as possible. And you'll discover what James did with his videos to have more success, great results and higher audience attention rates. Below is James' YouTube Tutorial on How to Create a Video. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-ZKbSWjvE7M 1. Attention Grabber. You don't need to spend time introducing yourself. You need to say what you are going to talk about in the video or ask a question. By 8 seconds into the video, you should have a good idea of what you are going to be talking about for the next 5 minutes of the video. James describes why it's so important in the first few seconds to make sure you tell the person watching the video what they will gain. You have to provide value for your audience. YouTube is not a place for commercials. You'll get the views by answering the questions they will have. James calls it a mini transformation. You'll find out why being able to keep their attention, allows for stronger engagement. 2. Intro Bumper. This is the time when you can throw in a little commercial. It's the best way to brand your show. It adds a level of professionalism and legitimises you. For this part of the video, which needs to be less than 6 seconds long, James explains how he used software called VideoScribetv. It's a great place to put your logo, a picture of yourself, your tag line and a tune. These can be made at a low cost at Videohive. You can then hire someone on Fiverr,

5 Social Media Management Tools to Save Time

5 Social Media Management Tools to Save Time

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you need to streamline your social media marketing tasks? Are you looking for a better way to manage multiple profiles? In this article you'll discover five social media management tools to streamline and consolidate your social media marketing efforts. Listen to this article: #1: Everypost The black and white dashboard of Everypost simplifies your business flow and makes your social media marketing a breeze. Once you log in, in the top right corner you can add accounts and choose which updates to post. You can connect your Facebook, Pinterest, Twitter, LinkedIn, Google+, and Tumblr accounts. The interface is simple. On the right, you have a cool feature that lets you pull visual content from many different sources such as Instagram, YouTube, Flickr, or Pinterest to create your own unique content to share with your audience. Most of the dashboard is reserved for typing the text of the post, shortening your URL, and scheduling the post. You have the option to post right now or schedule for later. The menu on the left side hides itself when you're working on posts, and with just one click you can access it again. It's reserved for archives, scheduling, and analytics. Everypost offers five pricing plans (one of them is free), depending on features. #2: Buffer If you're looking for software that is easy to navigate, looks simple, and can make your team more efficient, then Buffer is definitely your key to managing social media. Once you create your account, you can choose the social networks you want to add to it. On the left side, you can easily add or remove any network to your dashboard and connect your pages and profiles. Once you do that, you can use the Content tab to create and share your content. Get rich reports about your social media marketing reach on the Analytics tab. Use these analytics to improve your marketing strategy. Moving forward, use the Scheduling tab to create a custom posting schedule. If you tell Buffer to automatically post for you, you can choose the frequency of daily posting as well. Buffer offers the option of automatic posting and determines the right posting times for your brand, based on the engagement of your audience. On the right, use the Settings tab to adjust your accounts, team members, and link shortening. What most people love about Buffer is that you can add the browser extension or download the mobile app, so you can share the content you discover online, on the go! You can use Buffer for free with limited features. But if you use it for the free trial period and you love it, there's no reason to pass on the great offer, because it really does cater to all of your marketing needs in the simplest way possible. #3: SocialOomph SocialOomph offers a variety of interesting features that boost your marketing strategy. Creating an account is simple. Verify it through your email and you're ready to go. At the very top, five tabs help focus your social media management. The first step requires you to click on the Networks tab and connect your networks or groups of channels to SocialOomph. From there on you can manage each one individually. The next tab, Posting, is probably the most important. You can post updates, shorten your URLs through Bit.ly, purge your tweets and messages on Twitter, adjust scheduling times, and so forth. The third tab, Following, allows you to manage your current following or find new people to follow who might be relevant for your business. If you want to create welcome messages or instantly follow back the people who follow you, you can do that too. Finally, you can monitor your social reach and see how your strategy is working for you. The final tab, Help, lets you learn how to set up your account, follow SocialOomph on Twitter, and contact support. SocialOomph really helps you get the best out of your social media marketing. With minimal effort,

4 Ways to Save Time With Social Media Marketing Tools

4 Ways to Save Time With Social Media Marketing Tools

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you spend too much time adding customer data to spreadsheets? Looking for ways to automate some of your marketing tasks? If you're creating content for a target audience, automated tools can free up your time to engage as a human when and where it matters most. In this article you'll discover four ways to integrate automated tools into your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Search for Prospects You can use Twitter's search engine to pull together a list of leads, but the process can be time-consuming. For example, suppose you're looking for U.S. residents between the ages of 18 and 35 who are interested in Lincoln cars. Rather than do a Twitter search, let an automated tool like Audiense (formerly SocialBro) do the work for you. Once the search is complete, you'll need to check the results manually. If you added the word "Lincoln" to your search query, you want to follow leads who are interested in the car, not users quoting Abraham Lincoln in their profile. In other cases, you'll need to vet your leads. What are potential customers and audience members talking about in their tweets? Before you use automated tools to interact with users, you need to make sure that they're the users you're looking for. If you're looking for high-profile prospects, you can also use tools like BuzzSumo or Babbly to find profiles based on people's interests, past shares, and bios. For example, use the Amplification tab in BuzzSumo to search for influencers by topic. You can sort by the type of influencers you're looking for, such as bloggers, companies, or journalists. The results show each influencer's page authority, domain authority, follower count, retweet ratio, reply ratio, and average retweets. This allows you to separate and search through the list by goals and objectives. Then you can export those influencers to an Excel document and use it to target them with your marketing. #2: Segment Your Audience It's hard to remember life before Google Analytics and the days before beautiful dashboards of data existed on social media platforms. Now, you can mine most social media networks for insights and analytics data to help you understand who comprises your audience. For example, to find the demographics and locations of your Facebook fans, go to your page's Facebook Insights. Click the People tab to see a breakdown of the age and gender of your fans, where they live, and the languages they speak. Tools like Facebook Insights will provide data about your audience, but it's up to you to answer "so what?" and "why?" based on the segments represented in those numbers. #3: Engage With Leads Engagement is new territory in the world of automated tools. New tools allow you to connect with leads with strategic auto-interactions, which are a great icebreaker. Once you initiate a conversation, human interaction is essential. Your customer or audience wants to know that there are real people behind your business. Use a tool like Socedo to automate engagement with potential customers or initial engagements on Twitter. Socedo will ask you to specify who you're trying to connect with, what you hope to achieve, and what your message is. You'll also need to tell Socedo what actions to take on Twitter when you approve a lead. You'll need to approve or decline potential leads found by Socedo. Socedo will then take care of the rest based on the actions you specified. Some tools allow you to use auto-reply features based on phrases or words used in an inquiry. However, there's a margin of error that your response won't really answer the question asked. At that point, it's up to you to make sure your customers feel like they're being heard and want to continue engaging with your business. #4: Plan and Schedule Content Publishing content in real time isn't always possible when you have meetings to attend or work in a different time zone than your clients.

How to Cultivate Loyal Customers With Social Media

How to Cultivate Loyal Customers With Social Media

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want long-term customers for your business? Have you used social media to increase customer loyalty? To build customer loyalty, you need to show your customers you care. In this article I'll share how to use social media to embrace and cultivate loyal customers for your business. Listen to this article: #1: Personalize the Fan Experience The key to encouraging more customer loyalty on social media is to make your fans feel like they matter. Whether you have 1,000 or 10,000 fans, each one should feel special. A simple way to take a personal approach on a daily basis is to sign off on posts and comments with your name. Another method is to literally personalize your product or service for fans. Coca-Cola fans can personalize and share a virtual bottle of Coke and Heinz ran a promotion that gave their fans and customers the opportunity to add a friend's name to a soup can and send it to him or her. When you personalize your fans' experience, it boosts their trust and loyalty. It also gives them a chance to take full ownership of and share the experience with their network. #2: Offer Rewards Show your fans and customers you appreciate their input on your social channels by offering a reward. A lot of companies miss out on the opportunity to create more loyal customers, because they only reward customers who engage the most. While there's nothing wrong with rewarding regular engagement from fans, the key to appreciating your social media community as a whole is to reward fans based on the quality of the interaction, not the quantity. Remember, a fan who comments once, but leaves very detailed feedback (for example, a testimonial, suggestions or visual post), is just as valuable as someone who comments 40 times on posts. Involve and reward your entire social media community with offers, such as unique discounts, contests and bonus or sneak previews. GoEnnounce gave away exclusive "Welcome to College" gifts to the first 50 high school seniors who posted a photo with their college acceptance letters. When you reward all fans and customers, it gives everyone a reason to keep coming back to your page. It also shows your company appreciates both new and existing customers. #3: Surprise Fans and Customers Add to your customers' experience on social media by finding ways to create surprise and intrigue. One option is to surprise fans with a random act of kindness. For example, reward your community with a discount code when you reach 20,000 fans. Also, send fans who go above and beyond in adding value to your company, product or service a handwritten note and gift. When a young fan submitted a dragon drawing to Samsung to impress the brand, the company not only replied back with a great drawing of a kangaroo on a unicycle, but also took things one step further. Samsung sent the fan a Samsung phone, which included a case customized with the dragon drawing. Now that's what you call a surprise! Companies can also send fans a surprise on special occasions, such as after their first purchase, the one-year anniversary of their first purchase, their birthday or on seasonal holidays. Surprises are a great way to build word-of-mouth marketing. They also encourage brand advocacy, because fans who get a treat are likely to share the experience with their network. Remember, since social media conversations happen in real time, when you decide to surprise your fans, be sure to deliver the treat within a reasonable time frame. #4: Listen to Your Customers Build loyalty with your fans and customers and increase engagement by listening. Monitor daily what your customers and fans are saying about your company, whether it's a question, concern or problem, and then engage with your fans, respond and take action. Snapchat listened to their users, and as a result they created an update to make the app even easier to use. Listening is so important on social media because ...

Facebook Groups: How to Nurture a Community on Facebook

Facebook Groups: How to Nurture a Community on Facebook

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a Facebook group for your community? Are you considering starting a Facebook group? To learn how to use a Facebook group to build a loyal community that helps your business, I interview Jared Easley. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jared Easley, host of the Starve the Doubts podcast and co-author of Podcasting Good to Great. He's also co-founder of the Podcast Movement, the industry-leading conference for podcasters. In this episode Jared will explore how he uses Facebook groups to cultivate an active community of podcasters. You'll discover the benefits of building a Facebook group, as well as tips for getting started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Groups How Jared's podcasting conference got started In January 2014 Jared and co-founders Dan Franks, Gary Leland and Mitch Todd were at New Media Expo when they overheard several attendees asking why there wasn't a podcast conference. The group realized if they didn't take a step to create something, someone else would. They decided to move forward, even though there were plenty of things that could have prevented them from even getting started. Jared explains how they reached out to a few people who had put on large events, and asked for their perspective and advice. One person who gave them a lot of feedback was Phillip Taylor, who does a conference for financial bloggers. Armed with information, they turned to Kickstarter to crowdfund the conference. They just needed a small amount ($11,000) to validate the idea, and they weren't sure if it would take 30 days to raise the money or if they'd even get it at all. They asked the podcast community if they would support the conference, speak at it and share it with their network. A lot of people said yes, Jared shares, "but it's one thing to say yes and it's another thing to vote with your wallet." When the campaign was published, they hit that $11,000 within 9 hours. At the end of the 30 days, they had over three times the amount needed, which was more than enough validation to sell tickets, pursue sponsors and follow through. Six hundred people came to the first Podcast Movement Conference. Listen to the show to hear more about the Podcast Movement Kickstarter campaign. Why Jared started a Facebook group The Podcast Movement created a Facebook page so they could do ads and other promotions leading up to the conference, but they didn't initially have a Facebook group. Although they went to other podcast-focused Facebook groups to spread the word, they had to be careful, because some of the groups had a smart but strict policy on self-promotion. As soon as the first event was over, there was so much excitement that they realized they needed to create a way for the attendees to continue conversations. That's when Jared and his co-founders started the Facebook group. Not even a year later, the group has 1,600 members and is growing every month. The group is called Podcast Movement - Past, Present, and Future Attendees, so it's open to all past and potential attendees. This way, anyone who is interested in podcasting can be involved in the community and the conversations. Listen to the show to learn the original intent of the group. How the two Facebook communities have helped Jared's business The Podcast Movement group and page have served two different purposes. The Facebook page has been essential for Facebook ads and for getting the word out to people who might not already know about the conference.

26 WordPress Plugins for Social Media Marketers

26 WordPress Plugins for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to improve your WordPress blog? Have you considered customizing WordPress with plugins? One of the biggest advantages of WordPress is the sheer number of easy-to-use plugins that help marketers add functions with little hassle. In this article, you'll discover 26 WordPress plugins for marketers. Listen to this article: #1: Social Profile Integration Plugins Social Login Plenty of websites have members-only areas or user accounts, or require users to log in to comment. Social Login will let users log into your site with a social media profile. There are more than 30 different networks you can choose to make available for users to log in with, including Amazon, Facebook, Google+, Instagram, WordPress, and more. Placement options for the login plugin include registration pages, sidebars, comments, and more. This plugin is free to download and use. Snapchat Snapcode Widget Snapchat users don't always actively search for brands on the platform. Because of this, getting followers can sometimes depend on advertising your Snapcode across different online platforms, including your website. The Snapchat Snapcode Widget is exactly what it sounds like; a small widget that allows you to place your Snapcode on your site. All your blog visitors have to do is take a picture of your Snapcode and upload it on Snapchat to find and follow you. This plugin is free and easy to use. WordPress Social Stream When you don't want to choose between featuring your Facebook or Twitter feed, WordPress Social Stream allows you to create a combined feed from multiple social platforms to display on your site. You can add platforms including Facebook, Twitter, Pinterest, YouTube, Dribble, StumbleUpon, LinkedIn, and Delicious. You can pay $19 for a regular license with 6 months of support, and have the option to upgrade to an extended license and/or 12 months of support. Pin It Button One of the most effective ways you can encourage users to share your content and products on Pinterest is to add Pin It buttons to your site, and the Pinterest Pin It Button comes with a range of customizable options. The plugin will let readers select the image they want to pin from your page, although you can also select an image users will be prompted to choose when pinning. To customize your button, choose from a variety of different colors and sizes and easily place your Pin It buttons anywhere on your blog with a shortcode. The features above come with the free version of the plugin, but you can upgrade to the pro version for more customization features. Custom Twitter Feeds Placing a Twitter feed on your blog is a great way to keep your readers up to date and integrate your social media presence with your site. Add Custom Twitter Feeds to your blog to display a customizable feed. You can choose to display only your Twitter feed, a feed from multiple Twitter users, a feed from a single user, or a feed from a hashtag. The top of whichever feed option you choose will display a clickable CTA encouraging users to follow you on Twitter. In addition, the Twitter feed from this plugin is mobile-responsive, automatically takes on the stylistic aspects of your theme, and search engines can find the feed content. This plugin is free and there is a pro version available. Instagram Feed The Instagram Feed plugin will display images from your Instagram profile on your site, and help drive traffic to your profile. Place Instagram Feed on your site to display photos from non-private Instagram accounts, including yours or those that you're tagged in, which is great for sharing user-generated content. You can have single or multiple feeds, plus it's mobile-responsive and was updated with the June 1 Instagram updates. This plugin is free and there is a pro version of the plugin available. Custom Facebook Feed

Twitter Promotion: How to Encourage Others to Promote for You

Twitter Promotion: How to Encourage Others to Promote for You

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use social media to promote your product, service or events? Are you wondering how you can use Twitter to help get more visibility and sales? To learn how Twitter can be used to encourage others to promote for you, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast gives you insight into the subject. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll discover five different ways you can use Twitter to promote what you have to offer. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Promotion Why Twitter promotion? I believe that Twitter is the most frictionless form of social media communication. You can also create an enormous amount of buzz on Twitter. Here are five techniques to help you promote and boost excitement around what you have to offer. #1: Include a Customized Tweet Button on Every Single Page of Your Product When you have several pages on your product, service or event site, it's important to have the same tweet on every single page. The first thing you need to do is create a custom Twitter share button. The button options available are Share a Link, Follow, Hashtag and Mention. You want to choose the Share a Link button. The next step is to click on the option to include a different URL, rather than the Use the Page URL option. In this particular case, you'll use the home page of your product, service or event. So when someone clicks on that tweet button to share on Twitter, they'll be directed back to one central place, which is your home page. The next option is Tweet Text. This is where you can write in your own custom tweet. Also make sure you check the Show Count option, because it will display the total number of tweets. You'll hear why it's important to show the number of tweets on your sales page, and the advantages to the Via and Recommend Twitter ID options. The last step is to add a hashtag. When you visit our event page for Social Media Marketing World, you'll notice that once you click on the tweet button, not only does it have our customized tweet, but it also includes the URL for the home page and the hashtag for the event. Once you have created your custom tweet, it'll give you a little piece of code that you can put in a sidebar widget if you're on WordPress, or embed the HTML where you want it. The good news is that it works over and over again. Here are a few tips on how to craft your tweet: Write the tweet as if the user was writing it him- or herself. Make sure it's not overly promotional. Craft it in a way that it's easy to read. Include a hashtag. Listen to the show to discover the types of phrases you should use in your custom tweet. #2: Embed a Twitter Widget on Every Page That You Use to Promote When you visit the event page for Social Media Marketing World, you'll see the widget below. On the event page it's live. You can see the hashtag at the top, and underneath are the tweets relating to the event. The reason that they're all in one place is because of the hashtag. As you scroll through the tweets, you'll see the people who have clicked on the custom tweet, plus those who are talking about the event in general. You'll hear why the value proposition in something like this on your sales page is huge, and the reason why I decided to have it on every single page at Social Media Examiner. To create a Twitter widget, you first need to log into Twitter and then visit here. Next, click on Create New and then Search. You will see that it asks for Search Query.

How to Use Facebook Audience Overlap to Improve Your Facebook Marketing

How to Use Facebook Audience Overlap to Improve Your Facebook Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to learn more about the people who make up your Facebook custom audiences? Have you tried Facebook's Audience Overlap? Using Audience Overlap will let you compare your custom audiences against each other, revealing information that will help you make better decisions on where to focus ad targeting and conversion efforts. In this article you'll discover how to use Facebook Audience Overlap to improve your Facebook marketing. Listen to this article: What Is Audience Overlap? Audience Overlap is a Facebook Ads tool that allows you to compare up to five different audiences at once and see the percentage of people who overlap among those audiences. You can access Audience Overlap in the Audiences section of either the Ads Manager or Power Editor. Within the Audiences section, you can see all of the audiences you've created from custom audiences, lookalike audiences, or saved audiences. There are a few differences among these audiences. Custom audiences can be made up of website visitors, certain subsets of your website visitors, a list of email subscribers, or people who have done something specific with your app. Lookalike audiences are similar groups of people you create from another audience, which you use in targeting. Saved audiences are any sets of targeting you save. One limitation to Audience Overlap is that the audiences you compare need to have at least 1,000 people in them to protect people's privacy. How to Use Audience Overlap Audience Overlap is easy to use. Select the check boxes of the audiences you want to compare and then choose Show Audiences Overlap from the Actions drop-down menu. Whichever audience you select first will be the "main" audience for comparison. To change the main audience, click the arrow button in the upper-right corner of the pop-up box and select one of the other audiences. Here are five ways to use Audience Overlap to analyze your community. #1: Compare Website Visitors With Your Email List It's useful to know how many of your website visitors are already email subscribers. Compare your email subscribers audience to your total web traffic audience, as well as other audiences you've created (such as last week's traffic). This will help you know if you need to work on getting more of your email subscribers to visit your site and if you want to focus on getting more of your website traffic onto your email list. Keep in mind that these results aren't exact. When you upload a custom audience of your email subscribers, they won't all match up because your subscribers' email addresses have to be the same login they use for Facebook. I find that somewhere between 50% and 75% of the list typically matches. #2: See How Many Facebook Fans Visit Your Website Do an Audience Overlap comparison to find out whether your Facebook fans are going to your website. If the overlap is low, it could mean you're not promoting your own content enough. If the posts directing people to your website are not doing the trick, you may need to increase your ad budget so they get in front of your fans more often. #3: Find Out Whether Lookalike Audiences Match Your Current Audience Sometimes lookalike audiences don't perform well when you use them in ads. You can check to see how much these audiences have in common with your current audience or other saved audiences that perform well. Remember, you don't want these audiences to have a lot of overlap or you won't be reaching anyone new. However, if they have little or nothing in common, it could be an indication of a mismatch. #4: Analyze the Overlap of Two Audiences Another good way to use Audience Overlap is to compare two sets of targeting to make sure there isn't too much overlap. If you run ads for similar groups at the same time, you're essentially bidding against yourself. You may not need to use both audiences in your targeting. At the very least,

Facebook Live: Why Live Video Matters for Marketers

Facebook Live: Why Live Video Matters for Marketers

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you tried Facebook Live video broadcasting? Want to know what it means for your business? To discover how to use Facebook Live, I interview Mari Smith. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Mari Smith, the world's leading Facebook marketing expert. She co-authored Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day and is author of The New Relationship Marketing. Mari has also teamed up with Facebook to assist in educational events. Mari will explore Facebook Live, how it works, what it means for marketers, and much more. You'll discover tips to set up your Facebook Live broadcast. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Live What Is Facebook Live? Facebook Live is like Periscope, Meerkat, MeVee, and a few other apps that let you stream live video from your mobile device. Mari loves Facebook Live because whether you use the live-streaming feature with your personal profile or your page, you have a built-in audience. When you go live, the video goes out in the notifications and in the news feed and gets great organic reach. Mari believes Facebook Live video is great for marketers because it gives the ability to create a intimate, authentic connection with your audience. It humanizes and personalizes your brand. She clarifies that you don't need to download anything extra to stream with Facebook Live on your profile; it's part of the Facebook iOS app. Mari points out that Live is different from Facebook Mentions, which is only available to verified Facebook users. At the time this episode was recorded, all iPhone users had Facebook Live on their personal profiles in the United States, United Kingdom, Australia, Denmark, Norway, Sweden, New Zealand, Japan, and most English-speaking countries. On February 26, 2016, Facebook announced they'd opened Live to more countries, as well as Android users. Listen to the show to hear about Mike's first experience with using Facebook Live. Facebook Live for business Mari says when you use Facebook Live through your personal profile, you get to choose the audience. You can broadcast to the public, friends only, a specific friends list, or just a few friends. Since one of the keys from a business perspective is to broadcast live and then share it to your page, you want to go with a public broadcast. Then once it's been shared to your page, you can boost the post to reach a wider audience. When asked for examples of people using Live, Mari shares that Guy Kawasaki uses Live regularly from his page to show equipment or where he is and what he's doing. She also points to Robert Scoble, who uses Live regularly from his profile to do tech updates. Mari says she really enjoys what Carol Tuttle is doing. Carol does a Blog Talk Radio show that she simultaneously broadcasts on Facebook Live, and then hosts on iTunes as a podcast. From her Facebook Live post on her page, she shares the iTunes subscription link and the show's call-in number. Mari shares that she watched fitness expert Christine Dwyer live-stream her turbo kickbox jam class. Christine set up the camera on a tripod and pointed it into the mirror, so viewers were able to see the scope of the room and Christine teaching the class. She had a very nice, engaged audience. Mari is quick to remind listeners that while she's sharing great examples, the idea is to focus more on the application of Live and how people can use it within their industry. For example, Doreen Virtue, one of the top experts on angels, uses Facebook Live broadcasts on a regular basis to give people special messages....

Animated Visuals: How to Bring Still Images to Life

Animated Visuals: How to Bring Still Images to Life

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use visuals on your blog and social media? Have you considered animating them? To explore how to use animated visuals in your content, I interview Donna Moritz. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview visual marketing expert Donna Moritz. Her blog Socially Sorted was recognized as one of Social Media Examiner's Top 10 Social Media Blogs in 2015, 2016, and 2017. Donna explores three popular types of animated images. You'll discover tools to easily animate your own images. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Animated Visuals Why Animate As people scan their social media feeds, they're making lightning-fast decisions about what content they'll pay attention to. In this context, animated visuals add a little bit of movement that can attract the eye and add value in a short, snappy way. Donna explains that short animations can be less intimidating to create than video. Animation is simply combining drawings, photographs, text, or computer graphics to make them move. You don't need to talk in front of a camera. Short animations can also be a way to develop your audience. Donna says if you can make a strong first impression with a short animation, that animation can encourage viewers to watch longer videos and further engage with your content. Listen to the show to hear Donna discuss the findings of a small MIT study that investigated how quickly people interpret images. Popular Formats Donna says that quick animations aren't divided into formal types, but you do tend to see a few common approaches. In a one- to three-second animated image, the background is typically fixed and only text is animated. For example, she points out, Social Media Examiner does these on Instagram. She says you might also see a mini slideshow. "Video is your window of opportunity to get seen the Facebook news feed." - @mari_smith #SMMW17 #marketing #socialmedia #business #entrepreneuer #socialmediamarketing #smm #socialmediatips #smallbusiness #new #socialmediaexaminer #professionaldevelopment #smb #socialmediastrategy #businesstraining #quote #quoteoftheday A post shared by Social Media Examiner (@smexaminer) on Feb 8, 2017 at 4:58pm PST A GIF is a silent animated loop often used to convey a feeling. GIFs have become hugely popular on social media. GIFs started appearing in blog posts and emails but have spread to messaging apps like Slack and Facebook Messenger. For example, in a blog post about social media strategies that drive her crazy, Donna says the only way she could express her frustration was with a Muppet GIF from Giphy. Another type is a 3- to 10-second video, which you could create with something like the Ripl app. (More on that below.) Finally, Instagram and Snapchat stories enable you to blend and share quick successions of images or videos. All of these types of content are easy to create because so many tools are available. Listen to the show to hear about audio in short video. The Pros and Cons of GIFs In blog posts and in email, GIFs are a great way to highlight particular emotions, add humor, or simply break up the content. Donna says she once sent out the wrong email to her subscribers, so she used a GIF to apologize. However, you need to be careful about how you use GIFs. Donna recommends using GIFs sparingly. In a blog post, use no more than two GIFs, and in email one is enough. Donna says too many GIFs are like strobe lights going off at a nightclub. When you insert a GIF in an email, Donna suggests checking the file size and compressing the GIF bef...

Measuring Social Media: How to Determine Your ROI

Measuring Social Media: How to Determine Your ROI

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you trying to measure your social media return on investment (ROI)? Do you need to measure the social performance of your business? To learn how to determine the ROI for social media marketing, I interview Nichole Kelly for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Nichole Kelly, author of How to Measure Social Media and the CEO of Social Media Explorer and SME Digital. Nichole shares why so many businesses struggle to determine the ROI of their social media activities and what's really important in your social media measurement. You'll learn the most important steps that all marketers should take when thinking about social ROI. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Return on Investment (ROI) Why so many marketers struggle with measuring social ROI Nichole believes one of the reasons social ROI is a challenge is because marketers have redefined the metrics used to measure social media. Words such as mentions and retweets are similar to what was measured before. But now people have decided that social media is special, and therefore needs to be measured in a special way. Nichole believes this has set us up for failure. When you try to 1) justify what you are doing and 2) measure the return, you can't compare these two things. It then becomes difficult to compare and optimize whatever the return is. People have played with the return on investment phrase in the social realm. For example, you've likely heard of return on influence, return on engagement and return on conversation. The problem with this approach is that at the end of the day, ROI is a financial return. And whether it is the best measure for success of social media doesn't really matter, because it's the measure of success for business. Listen to the show to find out why you need to translate social media into a positive ROI. The backstory that led Nichole to social media ROI Nichole explains how she spent most of her career in corporate marketing and grew up in the boardroom. In June 2011, there was a study that came out from the Fournaise Report that said 73% of CEOs think marketers lack business credibility. The #1 stated reason was because we talk about trends like social media. Whether you agree with this or not, Nichole noticed that marketers were caught in a trap of trying to measure social media differently. And measuring social media ROI isn't as hard as everyone was making it out to be. So she set out to provide how-to information with step-by-step instructions on translating social media into something that can be compared across channels. Nichole wrote ROI-related articles for Social Media Examiner and discovered there was a never-ending appetite for help figuring out social media ROI. Nichole thinks people are still trying to understand it completely, but they are actually ready to measure now. When Nichole first started, a lot of people were talking about measurement in philosophical terms. We are starting to see companies, and marketers in particular, understand that with social media, it doesn't matter how many fans or followers they have. At the end of the day, if you can compare social media to what you spend on pay-per-click advertising and start measuring it with something simple like cost per click on all of the web traffic you are sending to your site, you have something that justifies a budget. Listen to the show to find out why Nichole feels measuring social media...

Blog Monetization: How You Can Make More Money With Your Blog

Blog Monetization: How You Can Make More Money With Your Blog

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you looking for ways to make money with your professional blog? Do you want to know how to leverage your content to monetize your site? To learn how to make more money with your blog, I interview Leslie Samuel. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. Listen to Leslie Samuel explain how you can make more money with your blog. In this episode I interview Leslie Samuel, whose Interactive Biology blog makes biology fun for students and teachers. He's also the man behind Become A Blogger, a large site dedicated to the craft of professional blogging. Leslie shares how to make more money with your blog. You'll discover the many ways you can leverage content on your blog to make money, the benefits and pitfalls of display ads and affiliate marketing and the strategy behind selling your own products and services through your site. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Blog Monetization How blogging has changed Leslie's life To say that blogging has changed Leslie's life is an understatement. It has done so much and opened so many doors for him, which is why he is so passionate about it. Blogging changed the way Leslie attracted customers to his business. In the past, he had to consciously, constantly and actively find customers. With blogging you can build a platform and if you do it right, people will actually find you. Leslie says this was a game-changer for him. The other big way blogging changed Leslie's life is that it allowed him to start making money online exclusively. Leslie started blogging 6 years ago while teaching at a Christian boarding academy. He launched the site, Interactive Biology, which explains biology concepts, one at a time, with short 3- to 5-minute videos. Leslie has since left teaching and now focuses entirely on his blogging business. Listen to the show to find out how Leslie first discovered blogging and came up with a completely unique approach to it.  The right point to begin a monetization strategy for your blog Leslie's philosophy on blog monetization has evolved over time. Where he once advised people to just start a blog and worry about making money later, he now insists that you must start to think about the monetization before you even build your blog. If you are looking to launch a professional blog, start putting things into place from the very beginning. People think of selling as a bad thing, but it's actually a way to provide more value to your audience. There's no reason to hold back from the very beginning. Listen to the show to hear how selling on your blog can be a way to provide more value to your customers and readers. Some of the most common ways bloggers make money from their sites  When it comes to making money with your blog, there's a bunch of options. The top four blog monetization strategies that you'll hear about in the show are display ads, affiliate marketing, selling your own products and providing a service. Of these monetization options, Leslie considers display ads from networks such as Google AdSense to be the simplest way to make money on your site. It requires very little work on your part, but you have to make sure you have a decent amount of traffic for this monetization strategy. Listen to the show to discover the pros and cons of display ads, as well as affiliate marketing and selling your own product or service as methods to generate more money from your blog. Best practices for display ads Relevance is the key to making money through display ads on your site. According to Leslie, there are people making as much as $10,

Storytelling: Why Stories Attract More Customers

Storytelling: Why Stories Attract More Customers

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

What's the story of your business? Are you wondering how storytelling can help your marketing and sales? To learn about the power of storytelling, I interview Dave Kerpen for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Dave Kerpen, author of  Likeable Social Media. He's also the co-founder of Likeable, an INC 500 social media marketing firm. His newest book is Likeable Business: Why Today's Consumers Demand More and How Leaders Can Deliver. Dave shares his story of how a creative idea for his wedding turned into a successful business. You'll learn how your story can help your business connect with people, both prospects and customers. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Business and Storytelling Dave's story Dave shares his story of how the creative idea he and his wife had for their wedding led them into starting a business. Both Dave and his wife have a traditional sales and marketing background and both were working in radio sales and sales management at the time. They decided to have their wedding at a baseball game. So they pitched their idea to a minor league baseball team, the Brooklyn Cyclones, an affiliate of the New York Mets. The deal was that they would take over the inventory from the game and do sponsorships in exchange for being able to get married at the end of the game and create the promotion. They created a promotion called Our Field of Dreams. Just from getting sponsors for the event, a total of $100,000 was raised in goods and services and $20,000 for charity. The advantage for the sponsors was they received a large amount of media attention. Not only did the sponsors get in front of 8,000 people at the game, they also were featured in CBS The Early Show, ABC World News Tonight and CNBC, plus thousands of blogs. One of the sponsors, 1-800-Flowers, was then featured on 86 television stations, all from a $6,000 trade sponsorship. Dave and his wife generated $20 million worth of earned media for their sponsors. It wasn't until 1-800-Flowers contacted Dave afterward and asked what he was doing next that he and his wife decided to start a company. Dave believes that telling their story showed their prospects that it's not just about understanding the tools, it's about understanding how to be creative and think outside of the box. Just because you understand the tools of social media, radio or television doesn't mean the idea isn't just as important. You still have to do marketing. By being able to tell a story, you're able to bring some real personality to what it is you do, and at the same time, convince people that you know what you are doing. Listen to the show to hear how they worked all their sponsors into the game so the wedding itself could be sponsor-free. Why should your businesses care about storytelling? Dave believes that storytelling is important because people don't care about you. It's really important to truly listen because people would rather talk about themselves. Storytelling is much more effective than going through data or any kind of sales pitch. It connects people, and gets people engaged and interested. The reason why people love going to the movies and reading books is because we love to be engaged by stories. Whether you are at a boardroom talking to your staff, or pitching to a prospect or putting content out there to the world, storytelling can bring your business alive. It can help you connect with your audience.

Your LinkedIn Profile: Why You Need to Revisit How You Look on LinkedIn

Your LinkedIn Profile: Why You Need to Revisit How You Look on LinkedIn

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use LinkedIn as a networking tool? Are you looking for ways to use LinkedIn to attract more business for your company or brand? To learn how to optimize your LinkedIn profile as a marketer, I interview Ron Nash, the "LinkedIn Whisperer," for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ron Nash, author of the books Leveraging LinkedIn and How to Find Your Dream Job, Even in a Recession. Ron is a LinkedIn preferred trainer who specializes in helping individuals and brands with their LinkedIn strategy. Ron shares the importance of having a well-developed LinkedIn profile. You'll discover how to present yourself on LinkedIn, write an engaging professional headline and summary and strategically leverage images and video on your profile page. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Your LinkedIn Profile How Ron got started with LinkedIn As a corporate recruiter and business owner, Ron discovered LinkedIn in 2003 and was an early adopter of the platform. Once he saw LinkedIn's viability in developing business clients and recruiting candidates, he started "running down that street like there was no tomorrow," as he put it. Many years later, LinkedIn considers Ron to be one of their top 1.5% of people with a large network, as well as one of their top 15% in terms of using the platform strategically. Listen to the show to find out how Ron went from using LinkedIn to recruit talent to teaching other people how to successfully use LinkedIn.  Why it's important for marketers and business owners to have a well-developed LinkedIn profile A lot of people approach LinkedIn as just a place for job-seekers and treat their profile just like a resume, which is a flat, two-dimensional experience. LinkedIn is actually a multidimensional tool that allows you to tell your stories. It's called transmedia storytelling. LinkedIn is one of the first professional platforms where you can set up your profile, stage your brand or service and tell a story with other media. Ron explains that LinkedIn is like a new TV station. With its 300 million users in 200 countries, people are on it 24/7. You'll hear why it's more critical than ever to be creative in the way you present your brand. The number-one activity on LinkedIn is people checking out your profile before they allow you into their network. So first impressions count. Listen to the show to hear how LinkedIn is integrated into the powerful networking happening at the Social Media Marketing World conference.  The biggest mistake people make with their LinkedIn profile The biggest mistake people make is that they interact with LinkedIn as though it's a resume. Ron says that it's a great opportunity, depending on how you treat your resume, but it's also a tool in which you can incorporate other visual aspects. Ron states that behaviorally, resumes are a 20th-century thing; whereas in the 21st century you have the opportunity to insert video and images. As a marketer, you have the ability to bring your LinkedIn profile to life with images and video, which speak louder than written words. Listen to the show to find out why Ron includes videos in his LinkedIn profile. What to include in your Summary Ron says that there are two ways you can position your Summary: you can either write in first person or third person. It all comes down to personal preference. When you talk from the first-person "I" standpoint,

Why Podcasting Is a Trend Marketers Need to Follow

Why Podcasting Is a Trend Marketers Need to Follow

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you considered podcasting for your business? Are you wondering if now is the right time to start? To learn about the amazing growth and the opportunities that exist for marketers, I interview Michael Wolf for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Michael Wolf, who is the host of the NextMarket Podcast. He's also the chief analyst at NextMarket Insights, where he tracks the growing world of podcasting. Michael's approach to analyzing podcasting is unique. Michael shares the research he carried out to help him discover more about podcasting, and where the market is headed. You'll discover why the business category is one of the biggest areas for growth, and the reason why advertisers are now taking notice. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Podcasting for Marketers Research carried out to discover more about podcasting for business Mike is an analyst and loves to dig deep into topics that are normally around technology and media. However, because he's a big fan of podcasts, he noticed that more people had started to use them, although he didn't see a corresponding change in attitude from people in the media world. Over the last five years, podcasting has been viewed as a less popular form of media. Even online and new media startups haven't embraced it. So Mike decided to dig in and find out why. Mike talked to many people including big-name hosts like Adam Carolla, Ira Glass from This American Life and Steven Dubner from Freakonomics. He also had contact with people behind the scenes at organizations such as Libsyn and Microsoft. During his research, Mike recorded all of the conversations he had with these people, which led to an article he wrote for Forbes in April 2013 called "Funnymen and iPhones: Why the Podcast Is Finally Coming Into its Own." Listen to the audio clip below to find out what Adam Carolla had to say. http://soundcloud.com/nextmarket/a-podcast-about-the-podcast Apple has primarily owned the investment side of podcasts with iTunes. The podcast world hasn't seen great investment in technology, developers or venture capitalists. You'll find out the kind of momentum Mike has seen when it comes to the investment side of this platform, and what podcasting categories have shown a lot of growth. Listen to the show to find out what the 2013 Social Media Marketing Industry Report revealed about what marketers thought of podcasting. Has podcasting seen any kind of uptick in 2013, and if so, why? Mike explains how the teams at Libsyn and SoundCloud, which host the files, have seen phenomenal growth. Also some of the big-name podcasters have seen traffic reach new records in download numbers every month. All of the signs are from a metrics perspective. When you talk to people about their numbers, there is definitely growth. When you look at the iTunes charts, you'll notice there are new podcasts launched every day/week across a number of categories. Mike says that part of the reason for the growth of this platform is that a lot of people see podcasting as a less crowded channel than blogging. It's also a form of deeper engagement. You'll discover what has created the perfect storm for this new growth in listenership, and why new technology built into cars will produce a whole new opportunity. Podcasts are a multitask platform that allows people to give you 20 minutes or so of their time every day or week to listen to you.

Live Video: Creative Ways to Do a Live Show on Facebook

Live Video: Creative Ways to Do a Live Show on Facebook

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you broadcast live video? Have you considered hosting a regular show on Facebook Live? To discover creative ways to use Facebook Live, I interview Lou Mongello. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Disney expert Lou Mongello, author of multiple books and audio guides for visitors to Disney theme parks. He hosts the popular WDW Radio podcast and also broadcasts a live show on Facebook at Facebook.com/LouMongello. Lou explores how to start a show using live video. You'll discover easy ways to get creative with Facebook Live. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Live Video How Lou got into live video When Lou began his Disney blog and community in New Jersey, he realized everything he was doing, even his podcast, was a one-way conversation. In 2007, when Ustream became a lot more accessible, he decided to give it a try. Lou recalls the first night he did a live stream. He'd told his wife he was going to try it out and would be back in 10 minutes. Six hours later, he was still online with a couple of hundred people who were watching, chatting, and engaging. Since then, he's been broadcasting live video every week. Between his weekly shows and any ad hoc episodes, Lou believes he's done close to 1,000 shows to date. Lou says he moved from Ustream to Livestream, then was a day-two Meerkat user and a day-one Periscope user. He thought Periscope was the best of the bunch until he got his account verified by Facebook and received early access to Facebook Live. Lou simulcasted his show, using two different devices to compare the quality, engagement, and viewer experience of the two broadcasts. Very quickly, in late 2015, he let people know he was moving off of Periscope and going all-in on Facebook Live. Listen to the show to discover what Lou loves about the growth of live video. How Lou uses Facebook Live Lou does a live broadcast show every week. Most episodes are done from his home studio, and topics range from the week's most recent Walt Disney World news and simple Ask Me Anythings (AMAs) and Q&As to showing off things in his collections. He says his in-studio shows are more about the conversation, while the offsite shows (such as when he goes to a Disney park, on a cruise, etc.) are about conveying the experience. Watch & chat with me LIVE! Let's talk Disney, and Ask Me Anything! #tw Posted by Lou Mongello on Wednesday, June 29, 2016 For his Wednesday discussions of Walt Disney World news, Lou talks about what's going on, and also makes the audience part of the broadcast. If a new restaurant is opening, an attraction is coming, or something is changing, he flips it around to make it a question. For example, he'll ask, "What do you guys think?" or "What's your favorite place to eat on property?" Whatever you talk about drives engagement, Lou continues. He always has questions in his head to initiate a conversation, and instead of asking a question, letting people respond, and moving on to the next question, he reads every response in the comments so he can further the conversation with people. Lou stresses that it's important to acknowledge individuals during a live broadcast, because when someone's name is called, it means a lot to them. His AMA episodes allow the audience to ask him questions that are personal, business-related, or relate to an upcoming Disney trip. Lou tries to go through questions as quickly as possible, and normally does a lightning round at the end. He'll do two minutes of rapid-fire questions and answer as many as he can.

Starting a YouTube Channel: How to Achieve YouTube Growth

Starting a YouTube Channel: How to Achieve YouTube Growth

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a YouTube channel? Want to optimize it to get more subscribers? To explore how to build and grow a YouTube channel, I interview Tim Schmoyer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Tim Schmoyer, founder of Video Creators, a YouTube channel and website that helps people grow their YouTube subscribers. With 10 years experience, millions of video views, and more than 200,000 YouTube subscribers, Tim is the world's leading expert on building YouTube channels. Tim explores what you need to know to build a successful YouTube channel. You'll discover how to customize your channel. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Starting a YouTube Channel Your YouTube Channel Approach Tim says if you aren't trying to grow a community, have no need for subscribers or conversions, and only want to share your videos with your family, then posting anything and everything is fine. However, if you want to build a brand around your video content to grow subscribers, views, sales, conversions, etc., then you need a more focused approach. A channel, Tim explains, is another word for your YouTube account. It's where your videos reside. For example, Tim's videos are on YouTube.com/videocreators, and when people are looking for his videos, they know that's where to find them. A YouTube channel can be focused on a topic, but it doesn't have to be, Tim says. It could also revolve around a belief, a person, etc. He stresses that your YouTube channel should be very specific to target a specific group of people and deliver a very specific value. Listen to the show to discover who comprises the demographic on YouTube. Common Mistakes People make three big mistakes on YouTube. First, many feel like they need a high-end production team and fancy equipment. Tim says you can grow a very successful channel with basic equipment. Your smartphone may be sufficient, depending on the type of content you want to make, the audience you want to reach, and the image you want to present for your brand. Start with what you have, and possibly invest in a lens for your camera and an external microphone to clip into your phone. Sometimes, a full production studio works against you, because the people have a different content focus and expect higher quality. YouTube viewers, on the other hand, are very forgiving of a shaky handcam if the value of the content is high. Second, people don't pay enough attention to the titles and thumbnails of their videos. Most of your YouTube traffic will come from related videos, suggested by YouTube, when users are viewing other content; an enticing title and thumbnail drive those clicks. Tim says a lot of the top YouTube creators he knows spend just as much time, if not more, developing their title and thumbnail than they spend on the actual content. Start with your title and thumbnail in mind before you start shooting the video. This enables you to capture the thumbnail you need. For example, a video about how to look better on stage needs a thumbnail that portrays that; it could be as simple as a picture of a crowd of people with a spotlight on the main focal point on stage. If you shoot the video first and figure out the title later, the opening may not quite connect to the title until two and a half minutes into the video. The third mistake people make is taking too long to hook viewers. Tim says that when someone clicks your video, you have 15 seconds maximum to relate to the title and thumbnail. That way, viewers feel like they're getting the value they were e...

How to Easily Manage Multiple Twitter Accounts

How to Easily Manage Multiple Twitter Accounts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you managing multiple Twitter accounts? Wondering how to streamline your Twitter marketing? TweetDeck lets you engage, monitor, and schedule tweets for multiple accounts from a single customizable dashboard. In this article you'll discover how to manage multiple Twitter accounts with TweetDeck. Listen to this article: #1: Connect Your Twitter Accounts The first step is to set up your TweetDeck account. If your company has one or two people monitoring social media, you can create one login using your company's handle as the default account. Then you can add more accounts/handles to that same user login. After you log into TweetDeck, you'll see your TweetDeck dashboard. The gray navigation bar on the left side of the dashboard is your go-to location for everything TweetDeck can do. From there, you can add accounts, write new tweets, review activity and notifications, read messages, change settings, and more. To connect additional accounts, click on the Accounts icon near the bottom of the navigation bar. Next, click Add Another Twitter Account and enter the username and password for each account you want to manage. Now you're ready to begin. #2: Add Listening Streams The most powerful TweetDeck feature is the ability to add streams, which are columns of tweets that are updated in real time. There are a number of different streams to choose from, such as User, Notifications, Mentions, Followers, Messages, Search, Lists, and more. To add a stream, click on the Add Column icon (with the + sign on it) in the navigation bar. Then select the column type you want to add. You can customize the content of each column and remove excess noise. This makes it easier to find the information you want. Click the icon in the upper-right corner of the column to access your filtering options. Keep in mind that adding lots of streams isn't always better. It's important to choose the columns that will help you reach your marketing goals. Here are five streams that you'll want to add. Notifications The Notifications stream allows you to see when you have a new follower, someone has added you to a list, or one of your tweets has been liked, retweeted, or replied to. Using this stream, you can quickly find active and potential clients, customers, and followers. Essentially it lets you monitor every handle that is engaging with your content. You can use additional filters to narrow down your notifications to engagement, users, and content type. Mentions Add the Mentions stream to monitor every tweet that mentions your Twitter handle, whether for the first time or as part of a reply/conversation. By monitoring and using this stream daily, your marketing team can track every company mention, and then react in a timely manner. You can quickly jump into conversations, offer customer support, or engage with your existing user base or potential prospects. Search Search is one of the most important streams in TweetDeck. It allows your marketing team to go beyond users and monitor content related to keywords or hashtags. Using the Search feature, you can keep an eye on topics and conversations that are essential to your business. For example, if your company is about to launch a new technology product, your marketing team can set up a Search stream to monitor all tweets for keywords such as new technology, today in tech, #techtuesday, and so on. Bonus Tip: When setting up this stream, don't forget to use Boolean operators to save space. This way, you can search for multiple terms in the same column. Messages The Messages stream allows you to read and reply to direct messages for any accounts you've added to TweetDeck. This is where you can turn your Twitter following into real engagement with prospects and influencers in your industry. Once you have this set up, you can respond quickly and appropriately as the discussion occurs.

6 Tips to Improve Your Facebook Posts

6 Tips to Improve Your Facebook Posts

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you marketing on Facebook? Do you want better reach for your Facebook posts? Using the right posting tactics will give you better results from your Facebook marketing. In this article you'll discover six tips for more effective Facebook posts. Listen to this article: #1: Create a Posting Road Map Many businesses start posting on Facebook without a plan. As a result, their posts often don't address the needs of their audience. Consider creating a road map for your posts covering various topics. For example, if you're in the fitness industry, your content could cover fitness tips, blog marketing, healthy recipes and so on. The more topics you add to your content bucket, the more variety you can offer to your audience. After you choose the topics you'll cover, create a calendar. A content calendar maps out what to post each day. Having a schedule also helps you build in enough time to create your social media images. If you're not sure how far out to schedule your posts, creating a content calendar for one week in advance is a good rule of thumb. This gives you the flexibility to keep up with timely topics. #2: Write Your Text for Skim Readers Rather than debate the length of Facebook posts, consider the decreasing attention span of users. A study by the National Center for Biotechnology Information showed that people have an attention span of 8 seconds, which is 1 second less than that of a goldfish. If you apply that to Facebook, the first three to four words of your update are crucial to grabbing your audience's attention. For help creating a compelling Facebook update, try a tool like CoSchedule's Headline Analyzer. Enter your post copy in the text box, and the tool will provide recommendations to improve your update. #3: Analyze Your Written and Visual Content, Then Optimize On Facebook, there are four types of content you can post: links, images, videos and text updates. According to a Socialbakers study (which analyzed 4,445 business pages between October 2014 and February 2015), video is the most important engagement driver, followed by text updates, links and photos. However, before choosing content types for your posts, take time to analyze your business and audience. For example, if you want to drive traffic to your blog, the link format likely would work well for you. On the other hand, if brand awareness is your main goal, images and videos are a better bet. Suppose that you want to drive attention to a link in the description. So in the post, you include an image along with the link. When you analyze the clicks for that post, you find that out of 51 post clicks, there was only 1 link click. The takeaway is that the content type you chose did not effectively drive attention to the link. Make sure that you check your analytics to see if you're choosing the right content types. #4: Consider Using Brand Hashtags Do you use hashtags while posting on Facebook? A recent Buffer study revealed that posts without hashtags outperform posts with hashtags on Facebook. However, before you dismiss the idea of hashtags altogether, test them for yourself. Is there a particular hashtag you use for your branding? Using hashtags on Facebook can make sense if they contribute to your brand positioning. Adidas frequently uses the hashtag #teamadidas in their posts because it's synonymous with their brand. Hashtags also may be effective if you're posting about a trending topic. #5: Customize Your Facebook Post Descriptions When you post a link on Facebook, it fetches the metadata automatically. This can be edited. For example, suppose that you want to republish a post. All you need to do is change the description metadata to fit the post description and suit the current context. Remember that Facebook posts are now searchable, so this is an excellent opportunity to add your keywords, too. #6: Experiment With Your Publishing Times

36 Free Places to Promote Your Website Online

36 Free Places to Promote Your Website Online


Official Wix Blog | Web Design & Small Business Tips to Promote Your Site

Now that you've launched your website your next goal is to increase incoming traffic. These 36 platforms and directories are the perfect place to start.

4 Ways to Humanize Your Social Media Updates

4 Ways to Humanize Your Social Media Updates

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to create better engagement with your fans and followers? Wondering how your business can come across as more human? Engaging on social media with authenticity helps you turn online connections into customers who feel like they know you. In this article, you'll discover four ways to humanize your engagement on social media. Listen to this article: Why Humanize Social Media Content? Setting up social media accounts and gathering faceless followers who never interact with your brand isn't enough in today's competitive marketplace. What you really need are followers that engage with your brand, form emotional connections, and become an audience of loyal customers. Unfortunately, many businesses treat their social media accounts more like advertising channels than vehicles to create lasting and honest relationships with customers. In response, people have learned to tune out promotional messages and accounts that talk only about themselves and focus on the features of their products, not the needs of their customers. If this describes your company, your messages may not be reaching your ideal audience. If you treat your followers like friends, it can make all the difference when it comes to your social media strategy. Pause for a second and think about your own personal social media accounts. Do you interact with people who constantly self-promote or post run-of-the-mill status updates? The answer is probably no. You likely interact with people who are real. People who emotionally uplift you, make you laugh, or have legitimate questions or recommendations you feel you can be a part of. The same approach should be taken in business social media marketing. Once that happens, your connections can then become brand ambassadors who significantly boost engagement and your bottom line. Here's how: #1: Use a Personable Voice Corporate-speak and lifeless posts can make a company come across as boring and unfeeling. Thankfully, what's acceptable for a business voice has changed a lot over the years. While old rules forbid contractions, first-person, and slang, the new tone of business language is very different. Now you have the freedom to talk in a much more personal and friendly voice. Try creating posts and tweets that speak to your audience in a conversational voice. You'll likely find it's easier for people to converse with you. Bon Appétit, an over 50-year-old gourmet food publication, does a great job injecting just enough personality into their posts. Even insurance companies (traditionally not the most fun-loving and carefree type of business) are learning that a little personality goes a long way. Check out the GEICO Gecko's account, the mascot of the GEICO insurance company. The account, which boasts over 20,000 followers, features quirky drawings and quips, while salesy and promotional posts are noticeably absent. Try This in Your Business Talk like a real person and don't shy away from humor, emojis, and a little informality when it comes to punctuation and grammar. Try tagging along on special days and trending hashtags. Find a way to inject your company (like the image of the GEICO Gecko in the above picture). As long as you have clear standards for what's appropriate to post on social media, you shouldn't have any problem using a conversational tone, and your audience will appreciate the personal touch. #2: Stop the Me, Me, Me Posts When friends or relatives post something monumental on social media (a finished art project, a life event, a huge accomplishment), what do you do? Chances are you share it and take the time to congratulate them and point out to others what a great job they did. Brands that have mastered social media engagement know they can do that with their social media audience as well. Whenever it's appropriate, point out something that an audience member did particularly well.

Influencer Marketing: How to Work With Influential People

Influencer Marketing: How to Work With Influential People

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you reach out to influencers? Want to create good relationships to increase your visibility and get more customers? To learn how to work with influencers, I interview Doug Karr. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview conversion expert Doug Karr, the author of Corporate Blogging for Dummies and founder of the Marketing Technology blog. Doug also co-hosts the Edge of the Web podcast. Doug will explore influencer marketing and how to work with prominent people. You'll discover how to identify and reach out to influencers, as well as develop relationships and campaigns that lead to sales. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Influencer Marketing How Doug became interested in influencer marketing After Doug got out of the Navy in 1992, he started a newspaper and did direct and database marketing. Then about 12 years ago, he started a blog. From a database marketing standpoint, Doug shares he's always been intrigued by the pockets or the gaps, and not the averages. In the direct mail days, the motto was "go after a certain age group, gender and neighborhood, and get 100% saturation." Doug found, over time, it was the smaller pockets of people who had higher conversion rates. This is true in online marketing as well. People who do SEO optimize for huge keywords with massive search volumes. Maybe they rank, but they don't get any results (meaning business) out of it. Influencer marketing is the same, in that people go after influencers. They spend a lot of money without seeing results, because they make significant errors as they select and research influencers. Doug says he tells people who are transitioning from traditional to online media that he doesn't think a lot has changed. As marketers, it's all about building trust and satisfying clients. Blogging and social media are great for that, because customers can now talk to people at different companies and get insight into their business through these channels. You build relationships virtually, then get those people to convert. Listen to the show to hear what opportunities came to Doug from blogging. How Doug defines influencer marketing Doug believes influencers are people within our industry who already have established trust with an audience. Let's say someone has an amazing audience you want to reach. The best way to get to that person's audience is to create an influencer marketing campaign and work with that influencer to help you promote your products and services. The keys are audience (find an influencer whose audience matches what you need) and reach. Determine if the influencer's reach is wide enough to make your campaign sensible from a time and money standpoint. Listen to the show to hear examples of good influencers to reach out to in the marketing and social media space. The differences among reach, popularity and influence Doug says half of the time, a company fails because they focus on reach and popularity, but not necessarily on influence. Influence is not about retweets or shares. It's about conversions. If someone makes a purchase based on a person's advice, that person is an influencer. When Doug works with an influencer, he looks at that person's target audience to see whether he or she has captivated their trust and made sales to them. One of the telltale signs that influencers are doing well is they've had the same sponsor on their site for 3 years; they don't switch them out every month. Doug also cautions that before entering into a relationshi...

6 Instagram Tools to Improve Your Marketing

6 Instagram Tools to Improve Your Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to take your Instagram marketing to the next level? Have you considered using tools to support your efforts there? Adding the right Instagram tools into your marketing flow can help you project a more professional image and give you valuable analytic insights. In this article you'll discover six tools to improve your Instagram marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Filter Your Images for a Signature Look The first step to any successful Instagram account is to tell your company's story. Your images are a reflection of your business, and you want them to appeal to your target audience on an emotional level. It's important to have a cohesive look to your images that unifies your brand assets. One tool that can help with that is A Color Story. This app makes it easy to fine-tune your photos and give them a more professional look before posting them to Instagram. The app's filters will help enhance your images and make them pop; they won't overexpose them or make them look grainy. You can use the app's five basic filters for free or buy all of the filters for $7.99. It's best to stick to one (or two) filters to give your photos a consistent look. Choose an attractive filter that unifies all of the images you post to Instagram. Tip: Avoid posting images on Instagram that are unrelated to your business or the story you want it to tell. #2: Embed Your Instagram Feed for More Visibility You want your Instagram feed to get in front of your target audience as much as possible. One way to do that is to embed it on your website or blog with a tool like SnapWidget. Embedding your feed on your site gives you free advertising and social real estate. You can also use this opportunity to ask website visitors to follow your account on Instagram. With SnapWidget, you can opt for a grid layout, slideshow, or photo map that lets users explore the places you've Instagrammed. Once you add the code to your website or blog, SnapWidget will automatically pull the latest photos from your Instagram account, and it will continue to update on your site automatically. #3: Share Photos From Other Instagram Accounts If you want to have a successful Instagram feed, it's important to develop a supporting, sharing, and engaging community. This is one of the best things you can do for your business. If you interact with and support other Instagram users, they'll likely reciprocate your actions and become active and engaged followers. Sharing other users' photos is an excellent way to build relationships with your followers and within your industry. Repost for Instagram, available for iOS and Android, makes it easy to repost Instagram images from other accounts and share their stories while giving them credit on your feed. This lets you develop relationships and at the same time share relevant and interesting images with your followers. #4: Schedule Your Instagram Posts Even though Instagram is life on the go, sometimes life gets in the way. You can't always be glued to your phone and occasionally you need a few days off from the world of social posting. Maintain an active presence online with a tool like ScheduGram. This web-based tool lets you post immediately to your Instagram account or schedule posts for later. You can manage multiple Instagram accounts so you don't have to keep logging in and out of individual accounts. You can also grant access to multiple users so everyone on your team will have access to your Instagram posting schedule. #5: Track the Performance of Your Instagram Content You want to have a strategy behind every Instagram post. Are you trying to drive people to like your photo, leave a comment, or check out your website? Once you identify clear goals for your Instagram marketing, it's important to monitor your analytics to see if you're meeting those goals. Use an Instagram analytics tool like Iconosquare to track your stats so you can see if your marketing tactics...

Being Useful: New Marketing Techniques That Work

Being Useful: New Marketing Techniques That Work

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you wondering how your business can be more useful? Do you provide youtility? To learn about youtility and a new way of thinking when it comes to marketing, I interview Jay Baer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jay Baer, the founder of the award-winning blog Convince & Convert and co-author of The Now Revolution. His brand-new book is called Youtility: Why Smart Marketing Is About Help Not Hype. Jay shares the many different ways companies are already providing youtility to their customers. You'll learn the three categories of being useful and how to implement them into your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: New Marketing Techniques What's changing marketing that everybody needs to understand? Jay believes that marketing is harder than ever. With the incredible growth in the number of media outlets, it makes it very difficult to achieve top of mind awareness in the ways that we used to be able to do. Blogs and podcasts didn't exist before, but today they have huge audiences. Companies now have to compete for attention—not just against other companies, but against everybody and everything. Jay explains that if you take a look at your Facebook news feed, Twitter account or email inbox, you'll find a combination of both personal and professional relationships. Companies are competing for attention with consumers' friends and family members and are forced to use the same technologies to get on their radar. Since 1994, Jay has worked online and remembers how people freaked out when they bought advertising on the web for the first time. He says at the end of the day, all these things are almost free, but somebody has got to pay the free. The guys who pay the free are businesses. Listen to the show to find out what you need to do to succeed against everyone and everything. The story about @HiltonSuggests and what the take-home message is for marketers Jay talks about certain people who are an exception to the rule when it comes to being amazing. But he feels that most of us aren't amazing. So the best approach for us all is to be useful. You need to create youtility. Jay defines youtility in his book as marketing that is so useful, people would want to pay for it. Jay shares the story of Hilton Hotels' program called Hilton Suggests on Twitter and how the program came about. You'll hear a great example of how they helped a guy on Twitter who was looking for a vet in the area. They helped him when he needed it most, and this will probably lead to him booking a Hilton hotel in the future. Jay says the difference between helping and selling is just two letters, but in modern business those two letters make all the difference. At a recent conference, Jay heard Gary Vaynerchuk say, "Everybody wants to be a hunter, but nobody wants to be a farmer." Youtility is about long-term play. If you sell something, you make a customer today. But if you help someone, you can create a customer for life. You need to start to think about marketing, customer acquisition, loyalty and retention over a longer time horizon. You'll hear why Jay wishes that more businesses were less self-serving and more useful. Listen to the show to hear how Columbia Sportswear uses indirect marketing and provides youtility to their customers. What youtility is and what marketers need to understand Jay says you wouldn't necessarily charge for youtility because it's marketing...

21 Ways to Improve Your Facebook Ads With Ad Targeting

21 Ways to Improve Your Facebook Ads With Ad Targeting

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Facebook ads? Are you aware of all of the targeting options Facebook offers? Facebook offers so many ways to target potential customers, there's a right advertising option for every business. In this article you'll find 21 ways to target specific audiences with Facebook advertising. Listen to this article: #1: Know Your Customers' Interests On Facebook, you can target people who have expressed an interest in or like pages related to another page or topic. This is interest-based targeting, although it is commonly confused with "likes" targeting. There are thousands of interests to target, and they're located in the Interests section of your ad set settings. Type literally anything into the search box and Facebook will suggest matching or related interests. Interest targeting usually means that you're targeting large audiences. So before you set up interest targeting, evaluate the size of your target group. Then consider combining an interest with at least one other targeting method. #2: Seek Out People in the Market for What You Sell Our online behavior tells platforms a lot about our buying intentions. By combining data from different sources, Facebook is able to tell who is in the process of buying a given product. Therefore, you can target people who are looking to buy something specific; for example, new vehicle shoppers in the market for a luxury SUV. This option is located in the Behavior section of the ad set settings. You'll see multiple categories in a scenario like this, because Facebook allows you to be that specific. In the case of the SUV, target people who are looking for a new SUV, a used SUV and so on. Experiment with this targeting option to determine which methods are most profitable. #3: Target People Based on Financial Resources If you want to sell a product or service that is tied to affordability, this method is extremely useful. Listed under Demographics, this targeting option allows you to select among Income, Net Worth and Liquid Assets. Liquid Assets is an option under Net Worth. Targeting people by income, net worth or liquid assets usually works well as a stand-alone option. When businesses combine it with a behavior that best matches their target group, the audiences are often too narrow. The trick is to choose a broader behavior than usual in case the audience turns out to be small (for example 10-20K). According to Facebook Power Editor, their data is "Modeled based on age, income, presence of children, occupation, property data, vehicle data, investment interest and census median data." #4: Combine Age and Gender With Where People Live Instead of simply targeting geographic areas, add age groups and gender to the mix. For example, target men ages 25-35 who live in New York City. This is based on the first information people share when they create a Facebook profile: age, gender and city they live in. Targeting people based on where they live can also be a great substitute for targeting certain income levels, because it presumes a certain quality of life. This method can be used right after setting up an ad set. Target virtually any state, region and city in the world (with a few exceptions). Another option is to exclude part of a region to optimize your ads even further. A few selected countries, such as the United States, also support zip code targeting. #5: Target People by Industry or Occupation For products or services that are ideal for people who work in a given industry or have a specific job, use industries or job title for the targeting method. For example, target "Employed in Arts, entertainment, sports and media." This is located under Work (below Demographics) on Facebook. The industry people work in can be a great alternative to simply targeting by office type. In fact, office type targeting actually allows you to target three more small office categories.

Small Businesses Struggle to Prove Facebook ROI: New Research

Small Businesses Struggle to Prove Facebook ROI: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook to acquire customers for your small business? Do you struggle to measure the return on your social media marketing investment? Despite a lack of concrete proof of sales, small businesses are devoting time and dollars to Facebook marketing. In this article you'll discover findings from recent studies focused on Facebook marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Most Small Businesses Don't See a Return From Their Social Media Efforts In April 2015, small business directory Manta surveyed 540 small business owners for their insights on social media return on investment (ROI). Fifty-nine percent report that they did not see ROI from their social media activities. Because the vast majority of small businesses puts most, if not the entire, social media budget into Facebook, this article focuses on that channel. Of the remaining 41% reporting that they did see returns, 17% received less than $100, and 57% received less than $1,000 for their energy and budget. One-third of that 41% (63 individuals) report outearning their social media marketing spend by more than $2,000. Social Media Examiner's 2015 Social Media Marketing Industry Report findings echo those in the Manta study. When the team asked 3,720 marketers whether their Facebook marketing is effective (which we can interpret as driving return to some extent), only 45% reported that it is. (Read here about how 60% of the respondents for the report were small business owners or executives. They either worked in companies with 2 to 10 employees or self-identified as solopreneurs.) The report also reveals that just 33% of the self-employed described Facebook marketing efforts as effective. Larger businesses have a slightly higher regard for their Facebook marketing efforts, with 50% pleased with their Facebook returns. B2C marketers also have a more positive take than B2B, with 51% of B2C marketers finding Facebook effective, compared to just 36% of B2B respondents. Key Takeaways: The significant 35% of respondents who are uncertain about whether their Facebook presence helps their business is telling. With barely enough time to keep up their Facebook page, small businesses typically lack the time and resources to gather the data needed to determine whether their Facebook efforts work. Gathering data requires that either the business owner or staff member learns or understands Google Analytics and Facebook Insights. Both of these tools require time and effort. Further, as Facebook's former Global Head of SMB Marketing Chris Luo explains in his March 2015 Fast Company article, effective Facebook advertising is moving away from the simple updates and boosting that small businesses could master easily: "Facebook has also introduced new, more sophisticated, advertising tools to directly target any user on Facebook in their newsfeed, but for the most part, these tools are used by savvy direct marketers at mid-sized or larger companies and not small businesses." #2: Small Businesses Are Reluctant to Invest Money in Social Media Small business owners are indicating their suspicion of social media marketing with their dollars. The Manta study mentioned above found that 47% of respondents invest less than $100 per month, and 40% spend between $100 and $1,000 monthly. Low spending numbers like these are surprising, given the hype Facebook marketing receives in the media. In a seeming contradiction, a recent poll of 547 small- and medium-sized business owners conducted by BIA/Kelsey and reported in The Wall Street Journal claims that social media marketing gets the majority of small businesses' ad budgets at 21.4% of total dollars. Further investigation, however, reveals that small businesses don't spend very much on marketing at all. A January 2015 BrightLocal survey of 736 small businesses revealed that 70% spend $500 or less per month on marketing. Fifty percent spend less than $300 per month.

How to Build a Periscope Audience for Your Business

How to Build a Periscope Audience for Your Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you marketing on Periscope? Want to reach more people? You can develop a following on Periscope by promoting your broadcasts, engaging with viewers and repurposing your content on other channels. In this article you'll discover how to build a Periscope audience for your business. #1: Cross-Promote Broadcasts While content is ultimately king, think about how you can attract enough of an audience to Periscope to drive results. Listen to this article: If you've already established and nurtured followers on other social channels, especially Twitter, you likely have a strong foundation to begin distributing your Periscope content and generating interest. Think about your branding guidelines for the social channels that you plan to use in your promotion strategy. Even though you're promoting Periscope content, make sure that you optimize your promotions to match the tone and format of the different channels. By aligning your promotion to each network, you increase the likelihood of earning social shares, receiving feedback and gathering an audience. Consider the following distribution tactics when planning your Periscope promotions. Twitter When promoting your live stream on Twitter, craft a brief yet compelling tweet equipped with hashtags and an attractive visual, which are some Twitter best practices. In the tweet below Michael Hyatt included hashtags to attract people interested in Periscope streams, as well as the followers of his #VirtualMentor brand. Hashtags on Twitter can make your Periscope event (or scope) more noticeable and easily searchable on the channel. Hyatt also used an informative and eye-catching visual to attract users' attention when they're scrolling through their Twitter feeds. Pinterest Pinterest is largely built on visually compelling, do-it-yourself and project-based content. Create informative content that incorporates images with a tall aspect ratio, detailed descriptions of your event and a call to action to your Periscope stream or landing page. Instagram When promoting your live stream on Instagram, consider adding a text overlay to your images. Content descriptions on this channel tend to be shorter (around 100 characters) and include multiple hashtags (try three to five). In this Instagram post, Sue B. Zimmerman promotes a scope with Kim Garst. Facebook Visual content typically does well on Facebook, particularly video. Create a brief video preview to attract attention and tag any guests participating in your Periscope stream to reach a broader audience. The LPGA promotes upcoming Periscope broadcasts on their Facebook page. This post previews an upcoming broadcast with golfer Morgan Pressel. Snapchat While Snapchat can be a tricky channel for promotions, start by creating a story to announce your Periscope stream. Since your followers won't be able to follow direct links to your content, ask them to take screenshots of your snaps that contain event details or publish snaps that reiterate the value of your Periscope stream to pique interest. LinkedIn Create a short LinkedIn Publisher article (between 500 and 800 words) to promote your Periscope efforts. Make sure to include an eye-catching visual and a call to action. You can share this content on your personal account or company profile, through LinkedIn groups or by direct messaging connections who are likely to be interested in your content. Hootsuite CEO Ryan Holmes promoted an upcoming AMA on Periscope in this LinkedIn article. Email List and Company Blog Okay, so your email list and blog aren't necessarily social channels. However, using your owned media channels to generate interest can be an excellent strategy for driving visitors to your Periscope content. Alert email subscribers to your upcoming broadcasts or write a blog post summarizing recent ones. Be sure to ask your followers for feedback and the type of content that they'd ...

7 Pinterest Tools for Marketers

7 Pinterest Tools for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Pinterest for your business? Looking for time-saving tools? Many tools and services can streamline the way you find and pin content to Pinterest. In this article I'll share seven Pinterest tools for marketers. Listen to this article: #1: Trigger Pin Posting With IFTTT IFTTT (If This Then That) is a free service that lets you automate tasks between two different platforms (apps, tools, social networks, etc.) by creating recipes. Use Pinterest to trigger tasks based on when you like any pin on Pinterest from your profile or when you post a pin to your profile. Plus, set up triggers from other channels that will lead to pinning an image to a specified board on Pinterest. For example, set up a recipe to take any image you add to your Instagram profile and pin it to a specific board on your Pinterest profile. Another option is to set up a recipe that automatically shares new pins or pins you like to other social networks, such as your Facebook page. IFTTT has more than 200 channels. Look for those that are image-centric to see which ones you can combine with some smart automations for Pinterest. #2: Pin on the Go With the Pinterest App The Pinterest mobile app for iOS and Android devices allows you to add images to your Pinterest boards from anywhere at any time. Also use the app to share photos you take with your smartphone to your Pinterest boards. With the Pinterest app, you don't have to wait until you get back to your computer to pin something you find online or see in real life. #3: Schedule Pins With Buffer Do you schedule social media updates through Buffer? Now you can use it to schedule pins to your Pinterest boards as well. Connect your Pinterest account, and then create a schedule for when you would like pins to be published on your Pinterest profile. Then you can find and add pins to share to your Pinterest profile through your Buffer dashboard. There's also a Google Chrome extension for Buffer. Buffer will fetch the images from the URL you want to share, so you can quickly schedule the right image to pin to your Pinterest board. Buffer starts at $10 per month for 12 social profiles, 200 scheduled posts and 2 team members. #4: Find Inspiring Pins With ViralTag If you like the functionality of Buffer-style scheduling and queuing of posts, but you need some inspiration for things to share, try ViralTag. This platform connects with Twitter, Facebook, LinkedIn, Pinterest, Instagram and Tumblr. Unlike Buffer, ViralTag allows you to create one sharing schedule for all connected accounts as opposed to creating a schedule for each connected account. ViralTag separates itself from Buffer in its ability to import feeds, allowing you to check other image-centric networks for inspiration, presented in thumbnail format. Another unique feature is that you can select multiple images from your feed sources and bulk-schedule them to your Pinterest and other connected accounts all at once. Schedule to more than one Pinterest board, as well. ViralTag starts at $29 per month for 10 connected accounts, visual content discovery and up to five RSS feeds for inspiration. #5: Automate Pin Publishing With Sendible If you want to automate publishing pins to Pinterest, you may want to try Sendible. Sendible allows you to connect RSS feeds to your account and automatically publish news feed items to more than 20 social networks, blogging platforms and bookmarking sites simultaneously. Choose to publish the pins immediately or add them to a queue to publish at times you specify. Sendible will automatically select the image from the URL selected, so there are no additional steps to take. Sendible starts at $39 per month for 15 connected accounts, RSS automation and brand monitoring. Note that RSS feeds also count as a connection. #6: Create and Schedule Pins With Tailwind

5 Ways to Improve Your Snapchat Marketing

5 Ways to Improve Your Snapchat Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Wondering how you can stand out on Snapchat? Want to know what's working for others? Taking a cue from businesses that are successfully using Snapchat can help you strengthen your own brand's presence on the platform. In this article you'll discover how to improve your marketing on Snapchat. Listen to this article: #1: Provide Specialized Content Many brands use Snapchat because of its authenticity. You can use this attribute to strengthen your community ties by publishing content that shows a similar but different side to your brand. For example, you can make your fans feel like insiders by providing content that's not available on your other social channels. This will excite users because they'll feel they're in the know and will develop an emotional connection to you and your content. Music producer DJ Khaled has created one of the most engaging Snapchat communities with over 2 million followers, a quarter of which watch his snaps within the first 5 minutes. With his 24-hour Snapchat stories, he provides daily insights, otherwise known as “keys to success,” through inspirational advice and commentary on his life's adventures. By providing exclusive content to your Snapchat community, you create a sense of trust and inclusivity. #2: Surprise Fans With Promotions and Perks Social media giveaways and contests are some of the best ways to build customer loyalty, and Snapchat users love them. Use snaps to offer insider access, promo codes or discounts with a Snapchat scavenger hunt. Build anticipation when you announce the giveaway or promotional offer on Snapchat prior to the launch date.  With their SnapWho campaign at the Coachella music festival, Heineken snapped clues hinting about special performances at the Heineken House. Fans were prompted to respond with snaps on which artists would be there. If correct, they received access and a sneak peek of when that concert would be happening. The campaign provided an exclusive element to concertgoers and reached fans who weren't at the event but enjoyed the content nonetheless. For a more sales-driven angle, you can post a 10-second snap with a special Snapchat referral code or share a daily deal with your followers. When you reward your community for following your Snapchat stories, they're likely to spread the word to their family and friends. You can track customer behavior and the effectiveness of the channel by seeing how many promo codes are used. How to Drive Users to Your Snapchat Account Before you embark on any sales offers, make sure to promote and drive users to your Snapchat account. Create a custom Facebook tab to promote your Snapchat account, or put your Snapchat name in your Twitter bio and use your QR code as your profile photo. For all of your social accounts, you can create images that drive users to your Snapchat account. #3: Involve Fans in Your Story Social media should be a two-way conversation with your community. Engage your followers by asking for their participation. For example, ask them to send in a selfie featuring your product or create a video on why they love your product. For the Super Bowl, Mountain Dew launched a 100% fan-driven interactive Snapchat campaign called Kickstory for their new Kickstart breakfast drink. Fans voted on what would happen next in the story by taking screenshots to indicate the level of engagement. Everlane took a different tack and asked their followers to screenshot their snap or chat with them for more information on their new shoe collection. To create more meaningful relationships, make sure you reply to your fans. You can do this within the chat feature or send back a photo thanking them. Going the extra mile on Snapchat will make users feel special and included in your community. #4: Include Branding Elements in Snaps Snapchat allows you to connect with your community and further enhance your brand's voice and tone in...

4 Free Tools to Analyze Your Social Media Competitors

4 Free Tools to Analyze Your Social Media Competitors

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to improve your social media marketing? Have you looked at how your competitors are using social? There are tools to help you determine what's working for you and your competitors, what isn't working and why. In this article you'll discover four free tools to compare your social media presence with your competitors'. Listen to this article: #1: Do a Side-by-Side Comparison Fanpage Karma will analyze your and your competitors' accounts across Facebook, Twitter, Google+, Instagram, YouTube and Pinterest. However, its most robust and useful features fall within the Facebook realm. The free plan offers a detailed, 90-day analysis for one page and a comparative dashboard for any number of competitors. The free plan will also send you weekly reports and alerts if you so choose. The free comparative analytics cover engagement, growth, most-used content sources and keywords, top posts, frequency, engagement by day and time, post type and supporters, among other metrics. The detailed analytics tack on keyword and content source engagement (via a color-coded word cloud), post length, success by post type, influencers, post history and more. You have to use the premium version to access analytics for other social networks, or for more robust analytics and exportable Excel and PowerPoint reports. These plans start at around $75 per month. The interface is unique in that it instantly displays comparative charts and graphs, allowing you to quickly and visually assess your page's strengths and weaknesses. Then dig deeper into the content types, timing and keyword tools to understand the why behind the data, and adjust your strategy accordingly. #2: Assess Facebook Page Performance LikeAlyzer will do a quick health check of any Facebook page. The tool is commonly used for competitive research because it doesn't require access to Facebook Insights to do its magic, and the features are uniform across pages. Though it doesn't present a side-by-side comparison like Fanpage Karma, the data is presented in a friendly enough way that you can easily take screenshots and import multiple analyses into a document for a competitive comparison. LikeAlyzer uses its own scoring system to assign each page an overall rank between 1 and 100, as well as averages within industry and similar brands. It will also give you metrics including likes, growth, engagement rate and PTAT (People Talking About This). Each of these metrics is accompanied by a green check mark or a red X, indicating whether the metric is strong or subpar. Additionally, the tool will check on different elements of your page by measuring responsiveness, timing, post type and page information (using the same check mark and X system). It also provides suggestions to improve the health of your page, such as what types of content you should focus on and when to post to get the strongest engagement. LikeAlyzer is excellent when you want to perform a quick check on your page, but you'll get the most benefit from it if you use it to analyze multiple competitors. Pay close attention to suggestions the tool spits out for other pages to determine where your brand can step up and take the lead. #3: Identify Influencers Klear, formerly Twtrland, serves as both an influencer-identification platform and an analytics dashboard. Search for influencers by skill and/or location and Klear will generate 10 influencers in multiple categories (celebrities, power users, casual, etc.). Upgrade to a pro account to see more results, starting at $249/month. You can view anyone's analytics profile by searching for his or her name or visiting http://klear.com/profile/USERNAME. This powerful dashboard will generate the account's top content on Twitter, Facebook and Instagram (if you manually add it). You can also see activity and responsiveness levels as well as a list of people the account most frequently interacts with.

4 Tools to Simplify Social Selling

4 Tools to Simplify Social Selling

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use social media to sell your products? Looking for tools to simplify the process? The right tools make it easier to build relationships with people who are interested in what you offer. In this article you'll discover four tools to simplify your social selling. Listen to this article: #1: Find Shared Connections With Discover.ly A key part of selling via social media is making first contact with users who are primed to buy. When the users you're reaching out to happen to be influencers on social networks, the dividends are potentially higher. A big challenge, however, is breaking the ice and initiating a conversation. This is where Discover.ly comes in. It's a social plugin for your browser that maps out the friends or followers you have in common with a potential connection. When you browse social networks with the Discover.ly browser extension active, you can see all of the friends you have in common with an influencer. You can then ask your shared connections for an introduction and get a leg up on converting the influencer to a customer. Discover.ly also offers social data about people, such as their latest tweets or recent pictures posted to Instagram. With this information, you can reach out to influencers in a way that creates a familiar bond, which (if nurtured) might eventually lead to real-world sales. #2: Tap Online Interest With Talkwalker Tracking what your target audience is saying about your brand is important. This information helps you be more knowledgeable when communicating with people and targeting potential customers. Talkwalker is a great way to take the pulse of your audience. Using it, you see detailed insights about who's talking about your brand, what their interests are and what they like or dislike about you. If you want to identify posts that express intent to purchase, use advanced search queries such as "I am looking for (your product)," "can anyone recommend a good (your service)" or "I want to buy (your product)." Talkwalker also benchmarks your brand against the competition and shows you where you fall short and where you succeed. The alert system ensures you'll receive notifications about online mentions of your brand, products and competitors. This information puts you in a position to act in a timely manner. #3: Showcase Product Images With Pablo If you take a cursory glance at the top social media networks, you'll realize that excepting LinkedIn, every platform has a strong visual component to it. There's a reason for that. According to an Ethos3 infographic, 90% of the information that our brains process is in visual form. Of all of the content that your target audience consumes, they actually retain 80% of the visual content, but only 20% of text-based content. If you're selling a product, showing an attractive image of it is four times more effective from a retention perspective. What's more, visual content gets shared on social media 40 times more often than plain text-based content. So if you produce an engaging image or infographic, potential buyers on social media are likely to spread the word on your behalf. Pablo by Buffer is a great tool for creating original and shareworthy images to highlight your products and services. You can also add a text overlay to your image. Imagine a product shot with a clever tagline and a price attached to it. Add a logo too if you want to ensure your brand doesn't get lost in the conversation. #4: Respond to Customer Inquiries With IFTTT Marketers today have a critical opportunity that previous generations lacked: the ability to respond in real time to user actions. You might already track visitors and offer personalized content and responses when they're on your site. But what about social media? How do you respond to a statement like "Can't wait to see what the new Windows 10 looks like. Gotta try it!"? You can respond quickly to user activity on social media with I...

Facebook Marketing Declines: How Business Should React

Facebook Marketing Declines: How Business Should React

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook to promote your business? Are you wondering how the recent Facebook algorithm changes will affect your marketing? To learn what the future of Facebook means for your brand or business, I interview Mari Smith and Jay Baer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mari Smith and Jay Baer. Mari is the co-author of Facebook Marketing: An Hour a Day and considered to be the world's leading expert on Facebook marketing and Jay is the author of Youtility: Why Smart Marketing Is About Help Not Hype. He's also host of the Social Pros podcast. Mari and Jay share how to be successful with Facebook's new algorithm and what these changes mean for your Facebook strategy. You'll learn how to monitor your reach and engagement, and how to navigate paid versus earned media in your content strategy. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing Declines Recently, an article by AdAge referenced an official Facebook document that said, "We expect organic distribution of an individual page's posts to gradually decline over time, as we continually work to make sure people have a meaningful experience on the site." In other words, Facebook says that they are going to show less of your Facebook updates to your fans and followers. If you want to get seen, you will have to pay to play. This news has raised a lot of concern among marketers. Previous changes to the Facebook news feed Mari explains how up until a few months ago, the algorithm that governs what content goes into the news feed was called EdgeRank. The term used now is the Facebook news feed ranking algorithm. The formula changed dramatically, with Facebook telling everyone that on any given day, a user can potentially see 1,500 possible stories. A story includes likes, comments, shares, videos and photos. Once you click Like, Comment or Share, Facebook knows what type of content to show you. Most users are aware that the majority of content shown comes from friends. This means that business pages struggle to get organic visibility. On December 2, 2013, Facebook announced they will start to decline or diminish organic reach for pages because users predominantly want to see content from friends and brands that they enjoy interacting with. According to Inside Facebook, studies show more than 40% decreased organic reach on Facebook. Listen to the show to find out what type of content Facebook will give less weight to. Is Facebook trying to protect its fans from marketers?  I recently heard Gary Vaynerchuk say that Facebook is trying to protect its fans from marketers. It seems that Facebook has realized that they need to provide a quality user experience, otherwise people won't click on the ads. Jay explains why Facebook doesn't want to devolve into MySpace. They are now a public company, which needs to continue to generate tons of advertising money. One of the ways to do this is to squeeze the algorithm. Listen to the show to find out how Facebook has used one of the oldest business playbooks in history to get you hooked. Marketers see a decline in organic reach In December, an article by Ignite Social Media showed that brands saw massive declines in organic reach that month. Jay says that a large number of brands on Facebook have seen a decline in organic reach, but there are other brands that have not been impacted by the change at all. There are some exceptions to the rule.

Crowdfunding: What You Need to Know to Succeed With Crowdfunding

Crowdfunding: What You Need to Know to Succeed With Crowdfunding

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you plan to launch a product, project or business? Want to learn how to use crowdfunding to support your next venture? To learn how to succeed with crowdfunding, I interview Emily Best. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Emily Best, filmmaker, publisher of Bright Ideas magazine and founder of Seed&Spark, a crowdfunding solution for the independent film industry. Emily shares how she stumbled into crowdfunding and what it could mean for your business. You'll discover what you need to know about crowdfunding campaigns, including how to get started and crowdfunding platforms. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Crowdfunding What led Emily to become an independent filmmaker Emily says she was "tricked into being a filmmaker." She was happily making no money as an actor and theater producer in NYC before she took the plunge. Caitlin FitzGerald (who is now on Masters of Sex) played the lead in Hedda Gabler, a play Emily co-produced. She would come to the set with scripts for big indie films that had embarrassing and dismal parts for women. The largely female production group for the play would have drinks after the show, "rage against the state of women in cinema" and discuss doing something about it. At the time, Caitlin was making a movie called Newlyweds with well-known DIY filmmaker Ed Burns. Ed shot Newlyweds with a scaled-down crew for $9,000, made possible by the video capacity of D-SLR cameras. Emily recalls during one of their rage sessions in late 2010, Caitlin said, "Guys, we should make a movie. It's so easy. And I'll prove it to you." That was the beginning. Listen to the show to hear what happened when Emily visited Caitlin on the Newlyweds set. How Emily crowdfunded her film Caitlin and Caroline von Kuhn, who wrote the script for their film Like the Water, did not write a mockumentary shot in downtown Manhattan like Newlyweds. They wrote a slow, contemplative indie drama about grief and friendship set in Maine in the summer. Since Emily's film was an entirely different scope, she learned quickly that it couldn't be shot for $9,000; their shooting budget was $85,000. Emily says they had raised $65,000 from a group they affectionately referred to as "friends, family and fools" and were looking at a $20,000 shortfall in spring 2011. httpv://youtu.be/PFDjGcLQaVk Most independent films are made by a group of friends getting together when everyone's schedules line up. This was also the case with Emily's film, so they had a very short window to find the rest of their funding. Pre-production through shooting was planned to take place from the middle of June to the beginning of August. It was May, and they had to find a way to communicate the importance of the film to their community and get the rest of the funding. Emily says it didn't take long for a bunch of women to land on a familiar message for people seeking to crowdfund projects: a wedding registry. At the time, Kickstarter and Indiegogo were new. They made a list of everything they needed: cameras, car rentals, bug spray, sunscreen, wardrobe, food, coffee and more. Emily typed it into a WordPress blog and put a PayPal link at the bottom. Then, the six of them sent it to everyone they knew. In 30 days, they'd raised $23,000 in cash and hundreds of thousands of dollars in loans and gifts of locations, goods and services. And then they went off to make the film. The community involvement for this type of crowdfunding offered numerous benefits.

How to Leverage Behavioral Data with Segment

by Today's Industry Insider @ The Kissmetrics Marketing Blog

Behavioral Data is Critical for Driving Growth Tracking customer event data, such as for Kissmetrics’ behavioral analytics solution, is an integral part to any successful online business–but I bet you already knew that. You might also know that installing Kissmetrics tracking code across your platform is relatively straight forward, though it can get complex depending […]

Local SEO Services Can Boost Your Business

by Sarah Parks @ OCG Creative

Effective internet marketing for any business often starts with SEO, that is, Search Engine Optimization. Google is constantly updating its search algorithms in order to connect customers to the most relevant results. This can make it difficult for small, local businesses to stand out among the top pages. Local SEO services provide a way for… Read More

The post Local SEO Services Can Boost Your Business appeared first on OCG Creative.

How to Nurture Leads Using Medium Letters

How to Nurture Leads Using Medium Letters

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Wondering how to use Medium for business? Want to use Medium to engage with prospects? Medium’s Letters feature lets you communicate directly with prospects so you can build meaningful relationships with them. In this article you’ll discover how to use Letters on Medium to nurture leads. Why Medium Letters? More than just a place to publish long-form content, Medium is a social network with built-in content distribution benefits. When you connect your Medium account with your Facebook and Twitter profiles, all of your followers and friends who are on Medium automatically become your Medium followers, so you'll gain an instant audience for your content. Listen to this article: A key difference between Medium and other publishing platforms is a feature called Letters. Letters are the same as stories, except they're emailed to your followers. Depending on your followers' preferences, they may receive a daily or weekly email digest that includes the latest content from the publications and people they follow. Letters takes this one step further, allowing you to send content directly to your followers' inboxes as stand-alone items. Getting access to people's inboxes is a big deal, so Letters represents a major opportunity for marketers. As Seth Godin puts it, "Permission Marketing lets you turn strangers, folks that might otherwise ignore your unsolicited offer, into people willing to pay attention when your message arrives in an expected, appreciated way." Here's how you can use Medium's Letters feature to nurture sales leads with useful, compelling content. #1: Develop a Content Strategy When you think about your Letters content strategy, consider the relationship that this content will have with your other Medium assets. Ideally, your Letters should be more conversational, engaging, and shorter than your other stories on Medium. This type of content is most likely to perform well as a stand-alone email. You could syndicate an existing long-form post as a letter, but remember that your publications followers may have already seen this content if they follow your hosted blog or other social channels. It's best to think of Letters as something different, offering useful content beyond what people can access elsewhere. Letters unlocks your audience' inboxes, so you need to handle this privilege with care. Follow the same guidelines you always do and provide real value to your readers. Remember that with Letters, your followers can unsubscribe whenever they want, just like with traditional email marketing channels. #2: Compose and Send a Letter If you don't have a Medium account, here's a great guide for getting started on the platform. Once you're logged in, navigate to your publication's homepage. (You won't be able to access Letters from your author account because only publications can send letters.) Click the down arrow next to Following and select Letters from the menu. Now you can write the content that will go out to your followers as an email. You can use all of the same layout and media-embedding features that are available for any other type of story on Medium. Once you've completed your draft, click Email Preview, which allows you to see what the letter will look like in your followers' inboxes. If you need to make any changes to your letter, you can go back to the editor and make them. Once the letter is ready for dispatch, simply click Send, and it will go out to all of your subscribers. After you send the letter, it will also be visible in your publication's feed. #3: Engage With Your Prospects Because your letter has the same features as a regular Medium story, users can interact with it just like anything else on the site. They can discuss, mark up, and recommend your letter to other users, so keep an eye on the activity. Reply and interact with your readers to learn more about them and what they like.

4 Tools to Improve Your Social Media Marketing

4 Tools to Improve Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Does social media marketing contribute to your bottom line? Are you looking for tools to boost your ROI? As social media changes from an engagement-driven environment to a conversion-driven one, new tools are emerging to help you market more effectively. In this article you'll discover four tools to improve your social media marketing. Listen to this article: #1: Connect Locally With Pointro When we think of local marketing, a narrow set of marketing choices comes to mind, such as offline marketing in local communities through events, sampling at stores, posters and fliers handed out by high-schoolers and the like. Alternately, local marketing also refers to local SEO and how to get visitors who are searching for what you offer online to walk into your store. Pointro is a relatively new social media tool that allows local business owners to connect with patrons in real time and offer them excellent service at the point where it matters most. You get a notification each time a customer checks into your restaurant or store. You can then listen to the conversation and chime in where you're needed. You also get instant access to photos taken by customers at your location and shared with their networks on social channels. Use this user-generated content to showcase customer loyalty to your brand and to enhance your credibility with future customers. Keep in mind that according to a HubSpot survey, 73% of users are likely to buy from a brand that responds to them on social media. Using Pointro to tap into that preference will build a relationship that leads to a conversion. #2: Focus on Loyal Advocates With ManageFlitter Managing relationships with social media brand advocates is a huge part of a successful social media program. Brand advocates are satisfied customers who directly impact the perceptions of other followers towards your business on social media. They also help spread a good word about your business far beyond your immediate network. In other words, cultivating brand advocates can be a huge win for converting undecided users. To be able to focus your energies on brand advocates, you need to know who matters and who doesn't. ManageFlitter is a tool that allows you to pare down your Twitter follower lists to only those users who truly like and engage with your brand on social media. By weeding out accounts that are dormant or have unfollowed you, you're freeing up your time and not wasting your marketing budget on fans that exist in name only. ManageFlitter also gives you the best times of day to publish posts for the best response, which is particularly helpful if you have a business or brand that operates across multiple time zones. #3: Reward Purchase Sharing With AddShoppers As previously discussed, brand advocates hold immense power in convincing other users to convert to your brand. A few years ago, Nielsen’s Global Trust in Advertising study revealed that 92% of customers trust recommendations from friends and family when making a purchase decision. This means the friends and families of your existing customers have the potential to turn into easy conversion targets. All you need to do is reach them at the right time with the right message. AddShoppers is a suite of tools that allows you to do that. One of AddShoppers' key features is the purchase-sharing auto-prompt that appears as soon as users complete their purchase. This feature allows users to share the details of their purchase (product descriptions, website URL, pricing and more) on social media. The tool also allows you to offer rewards (future purchase discounts, free shipping, etc.) to customers for sharing their purchases on social media. AddShoppers works well with ecommerce sites built on nearly every platform, including (but not limited to) WordPress, Shopify, Magento and PrestaShop. #4: Deliver Relevant Content With Tweet Jukebox Social media automation is a lot more than just sc...

Online Scheduling Masters: 8 Gorgeous Wix Bookings Sites

by Taira Sabo @ Official Wix Blog | Web Design & Small Business Tips to Promote Your Site

Will you resist?

The post Online Scheduling Masters: 8 Gorgeous Wix Bookings Sites appeared first on Official Wix Blog | Web Design & Small Business Tips to Promote Your Site.

Sell Products Online | eCommerce Web Design and Internet Marketing

Sell Products Online | eCommerce Web Design and Internet Marketing


OCG Creative

Sell products online with simple, low-cost eCommerce solutions by OCG Creative. eCommerce web design and Internet marketing. Take payments online.

Paid Advertising Vs. Organic To Retail Products Online

by admin @

To retail products online, owners and managers have to make certain decisions. These are how much of a budget to allocate and how to spend it to attract website visitors and turn them into shoppers. The choices often fall into two categories. One is paid advertising and the other often referred to organic search marketing. […]

The post Paid Advertising Vs. Organic To Retail Products Online appeared first on .

Twitter Marketing: How Smart Marketers Are Succeeding

Twitter Marketing: How Smart Marketers Are Succeeding

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter for your business? Want to discover how to use the latest Twitter updates? To learn more about Twitter marketing, I interview Joel Comm. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Joel Comm, a serial entrepreneur and the author of 12 books. His latest project is an apparel brand you can find at DoGoodStuff.com. Joel's latest book is Twitter Power 3.0: How to Dominate Your Market One Tweet at a Time. In this episode Joel will explore new updates to Twitter, along with video, his favorite apps and more. You'll discover how to use Twitter more effectively. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Twitter Marketing How Joel got involved with Twitter Joel, who has been building businesses online since 1995, likes to explore different technology and new ways to communicate. Twitter and microblogging interested Joel, since he had already been blogging for several years. In May 2007 Joel posted his first tweet. "In true, first-tweet form, it was utterly forgettable," Joel recalls. "I think it was something like 'Trying to figure out what this Twitter thing is.'" That was about it, until six months later, when Joel gave Twitter another try. He looked more closely, and decided Twitter was a cool platform for engagement. Sometime in 2008, after Joel accumulated about 5,000 followers, a friend told him John Wiley & Sons was looking for somebody to write a book on how to use Twitter for business. They connected and hit it off. The first edition of Twitter Power came out in February 2009. At the time, many were still trying to figure out Twitter, which posed the question, "What are you doing?" "We began to realize the heart of social media is about sharing life, relationships, the journey that we are on together," Joel says. "It's the points of commonality that we have in many of these mundane activities ... that bring us closer together. Therein lies the power of Twitter to connect people." An organic tweeter, Joel uses Twitter.com and the Twitter app on his phone. For those who like to consolidate and schedule tweets, he recommends tools like SocialOomph and Hootsuite. Listen to the show to hear both of our initial thoughts on Twitter. How the retweeting process has changed In the past if people wanted to retweet something, they would have to take all of the original tweet's text, copy it and put "RT" in front of it. They could only comment if there was any space left in the 140 characters. Joel believes Twitter finally realized that when people want to retweet, they have something they want to say about it. So now, if you want to retweet, you can quote that tweet and still have 116 additional characters left to add to it. This change makes these retweets feel like more of a conversation, because it puts all related tweets together. The way it works is simple. If you are in the app, you can retweet and share as is or quote the tweet. If you are on the site and you click Retweet, it opens up a window and you can comment or just retweet. Listen to the show to learn what Joel thinks of the Twitter character limit. Twitter video Joel starts by talking about Vine. You can record a Vine video and it automatically goes to Twitter. In addition to doing a straight video, Vine allows you to do creative things. For example, you can hold down the recording button, let up with your thumb, then point in another direction and take some other video, until you've got your full segment. Joel finds native Twitter video more interesting,

How to Boost Your Influence Using Your LinkedIn Profile

How to Boost Your Influence Using Your LinkedIn Profile

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is your LinkedIn profile working for you? Want to build a presence that supports your company role? While many people think of LinkedIn as a place only for jobseekers, salespeople and recruiters, LinkedIn can help employees build influence around any business role. In this article you'll discover three ways to build a LinkedIn presence to boost visibility for both you and your business. #1: Align Your Personal Message With Your Company's Your LinkedIn presence is unique on social media, because while it is your personal profile, the fact that it highlights your professional activities means that it is enmeshed with your employer's online presence. Listen to this article: Many companies fall flat with their social media approach to employees because it's top down (for example, "put this corporate marketing copy in your profile" or "share this status update"). And understandably, people resist. But incorporating your employer's brand message can help you, because part of your value as a professional is the team around you. Plugging into that larger message expands your capability and credibility. Incorporate Company Marketing Copy in Your Profile If you copy and paste wholesale from your employer's website, your profile will look sterile and untrustworthy. But if you pull in key phrases and ideas, you reinforce your message. Companies spend a lot of money figuring out the best way to communicate their message, and you can piggyback onto that. The Summary paragraph above is from a Dell executive's LinkedIn profile. It's a great example of how to mix a personal viewpoint with the overall company focus. Support Your External-Facing Team You may not deal with clients and prospects on a daily basis, but someone in your company does. In the online landscape, your profile is just a click away. Take look at your colleagues' profiles and see what they're talking about to make sure you align with that message. One of the easiest ways to show your teammates some love is with the social tools on LinkedIn. If you want to make coworkers look better to their audiences (and by extension, yours), click the Like and Share buttons on their posts. This will also extend the reach of your colleagues' messages. #2: Clearly Define Your Role Don't assume the people you work with already know what you do, because they likely don't. The bigger your company gets, the harder it is for coworkers to know the experience and skills you bring to the table. Whether it's through your profile or a status update, share your unique perspective so that others know how you can help them. There might not be a direct line between your social media activity and your audience (unless you're a salesperson or recruiter), but your core message needs to be clear. As a professional, you have a unique value that you bring to your work. Think of the people you serve, and share information that is relevant to them. Connect With Your Target Audience Your audience might be internal employees you support, or clients and partners who rely on your work. Be very clear about whom you need to "talk to" online. Use your headline to share information that answers questions people might have about you and how you can help them. Here's an example of effective LinkedIn profile headline from an employee of the company above. Be sure to include keywords throughout your profile that resonate with your audience. Think of it as SEO for humans. For example, if you're the compliance officer for a financial services firm, and help your employees stay on the right side of the law, include that in places like your profile headline and experience. Publish Your Ideas The ability to share long-form content through LinkedIn Publisher is a fantastic opportunity for internal employees to build a following. More importantly, when you post content on LinkedIn, it doesn't pull focus away from your day job (which could happen ...

How Marketers Use Social Media for Recruitment

by brandonshutt @ Online Marketing Institute

Editor's Note: Josh R Jackson is a contributing editor at BestMarketingDegrees.org. To compliment the brand new classes in our updated catalog, he joins us to discuss how social media is used for recruitment, and how employers can benefit.   What if I told you that 94% of recruiters have reported using LinkedIn to vet candidates? Or that […]

The post How Marketers Use Social Media for Recruitment appeared first on Online Marketing Institute.

How to Secure Your Social Media Accounts: 5 Tools

How to Secure Your Social Media Accounts: 5 Tools

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are your social media accounts secure? Interested in ways to prevent security breaches? There are tools you can use to protect your social and online accounts, and prevent them from being compromised. In this article you'll discover five tools to keep your company's social media safe. Listen to this article: #1: Get Alerts on Suspicious Activity One way to keep tabs on access to your social accounts is to install an intrusion detection system on your mobile devices. This type of app will detect suspicious activity and unauthorized access to your online accounts. One app you may want to try is LogDog (currently available only for Android), which takes on the role of a 24-hour-a-day watchdog. It can serve as your own personal mobile security system for your company's online accounts. The application closely monitors your online accounts, continuously scanning for a variety of unauthorized-access indicators. If a hacker attempts to gain access to any of your accounts, you'll receive an alert that there is unauthorized access, allowing you to take back control of your accounts as soon as possible. The app currently will monitor Facebook, Gmail, Evernote, Yahoo and Dropbox accounts, but the company plans to add more social platforms in the future. #2: Login Securely With a Password Manager Your company's social media account passwords are what stand between you and unscrupulous hackers. If your social accounts get hacked, your business's reputation may be harmed, so be sure to create strong profile passwords and modify them often. A tool like LastPass or 1Password makes it easier to protect your passwords, and store them in an encrypted vault. LastPass takes the hassle out of continuously logging in, while simultaneously ensuring online security of your accounts. It also provides a random password generator that helps you create strong, secure passwords when signing up for access to new sites. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=i_lJd3SnL5U LastPass is available to install as an app on Android and iOS devices, or you can download a browser extension to access your passwords on Windows or Mac OS. 1Password is available for both Windows or Mac OS, and Android or iOS devices. #3: Control Access to Your Social Accounts The more people who have access to your company's social accounts, the greater the chance those accounts may be compromised. If you want to minimize the risk to multiple accounts, there are tools you can use to manage access to your company's social accounts. With a social media management system like Hootsuite or SproutSocial, you can grant your employees access to your social accounts without disclosing sensitive account information to them. Access to your company's social accounts should be managed primarily by your IT staff. They can beef up security by making sure that account passwords are changed on a regular basis. If you don't change your account passwords frequently, you may not have any idea how many current or former employees have access to your company's social accounts. Keep in mind, too, that you should avoid using a work email address when signing up for company social media accounts. Your work email address may be accessible to outside parties on your organization's contact page or advertisements, which could make it easier for someone to hack your account. Another tool to make use of is the Login Approval feature. Specific to Facebook, this feature will help control employee access to your Facebook page. When you turn on the Login Approval feature, it will prompt your Facebook page admins to enter a special security code each time they access your Facebook page from a new computer, device or browser. #4: Manage Account Privacy Settings It's essential that you learn about and use the privacy and security settings on Facebook or any other social networks you use. These settings help you securely manage your online experience,

Best Dropshipping Products to Sell in Fall 2017

by Andrew Roach @ Oberlo

For ecommerce entrepreneurs across the globe, finding the best products to sell in your store is undoubtedly a difficult task, no matter how much experience you have as a store owner. There are so many different products which you can source for your store’s inventory, especially if you’re using a […]

The post Best Dropshipping Products to Sell in Fall 2017 appeared first on Oberlo.

Facebook Retargeting Spend Increases: New Research

Facebook Retargeting Spend Increases: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Want to see a higher ROI from Facebook? Have you considered Facebook retargeting ads? Facebook retargeting allows you to reach your website visitors via custom ads on Facebook. In this article you'll discover recent findings from studies focused on Facebook retargeting. Why Facebook Retargeting? While everyone has probably seen Facebook retargeting, not everyone knows how it works. Have you ever noticed that after visiting a website, suddenly an ad for that site pops up in your Facebook feed or on other websites or a mobile app? When you visited the website initially, it put a code into your browsing history, allowing it to follow you around the web. When you visit a different site or Facebook, the code triggers those sites to show the initial site's ads. Listen to this article: Retargeting is an online version of the basic sales and advertising principle of the follow-up. Without retargeting, your website has only one shot to convert. All motivation to go back to it depends strictly on the visitor. As sales and marketing statistics prove, most consumers need more nurturing. Retargeting releases your website from that one static location, freeing it to wander around the Internet, following customers with an enticing ad. Google had been handling retargeting (which it calls remarketing) for websites for years before Facebook started in 2012. Of course being on Facebook, which nearly every American visits once (if not multiple times) per day, increases the odds of getting your ads in front of someone who is interested in your products or services. Once there, you can even get them to follow you, another bump down the sales funnel. #1: Marketers Are Increasing Spend on Facebook Retargeting Companies already engaging in retargeting through Google remarketing are widening their retargeting efforts by adding Facebook to the "inventory" (options for where the ad will appear). In its Facebook by the Numbers 2015 survey of 1,000 marketers, retargeting service AdRoll found significantly increased spend via Facebook. The year spanning July 2014 to June 2015 showed increased activity and improved results over the same period the previous year. In the United States, B2B companies increased average spend on Facebook retargeting by 51%. Retail companies invested an average of 26% more. Of AdRoll's global customers, the average B2B company increased Facebook retargeting spend by 66%, and the average retail company by 31%. Key Takeaway: With 1.5 billion active users globally now, Facebook user adoption is still racing ahead. From July 2014 to July 2015, Facebook's ad revenue increased by 43%. With its enormous audience, you can narrowly target your ads and still reach a decent number of consumers. You have the opportunity to reach people who not only have indicated a need, but also have already indicated interest in specific, branded products and services. #2: Increasing ROI Is Driving Retargeting Spend One of the AdRoll survey's major findings is that running ad campaigns across a variety of Internet channels (websites, Facebook and mobile apps) results in better performance and greater ROI than staying with display ads only. As the chart below shows, adding Facebook retargeting doubles the static display-ad impression reach, and lowers the cost per click (CPC) by 26% and cost per action (CPA) by 33%. The arrival of B2B advertising on Facebook pushed up retargeting results. While many marketers considered Facebook the domain of B2C, this year B2B got impressive results adding Facebook to their retargeting destinations. As the chart below shows, on average, B2B companies that spent an additional 60% of their budgets on Facebook retargeting saw an increased click-through rate of 140%. They also reduced cost per click by 11% and cost per action by 42%. Key Takeaway: It only makes sense that hyper-targeting drives improved click-through rates.

9 Social Media Tools Recommended by Marketing Pros

9 Social Media Tools Recommended by Marketing Pros

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for new social media tools? Want to know what the experts are using? We asked top social media professionals which social tools they’re using right now. In this article you’ll discover nine social media tools to save you time and improve your marketing efforts. Listen to this article: #1: Schedule Repins Using BoardBooster I use BoardBooster to schedule Pinterest. There are several features I use daily within BoardBooster, but my favorite is the "looping" ability. This feature lets you set a board to repin an older pin from that board, and then delete the original pin or the new pin based on which one performed better. This allows me to keep each of my boards active daily while repinning great stuff. I pinned it the first time, so I know it's good! Holly Homer created Kids Activities Blog and Business 2 Blogger, a company that matches bloggers with businesses that need them. #2: Create Weekly Reports With Rival IQ Over the last 6 months, I've started using Rival IQ to track competitors and analyze the results of social media marketing. It's become a vital tool for weekly reporting. Every week, Rival IQ emails you a PowerPoint to show how your social media accounts are performing, how this compares to your competitors, any changes competitors are making and "breakout posts." For example, I get notified if a competitor changes their profile information on their accounts or if one of their posts gets a lot more likes, shares and comments than other posts. Ian Cleary is the founder of RazorSocial, one of the world’s leading marketing technology sites focused on social media and content marketing. #3: Automate Evergreen Updates Using Revive Old Post Hands-down my new favorite tool is the WordPress plugin Revive Old Post. Install it and the plugin will pull from all of your existing blog posts and post them randomly to your Twitter, Facebook and LinkedIn accounts automatically. Use it and you don't have to worry about scheduling any of your latest or evergreen blog posts on social media at all anymore. Set it up and watch the traffic flow on automation. Nathan Chan is the publisher and editor of Foundr Magazine, a digital magazine for young entrepreneurs. #4: Access Images Everywhere With Google Photos Install Google Photos on every computer and device that you own, then select the free option (up to 16 megabyte file size), and Google Photos will upload every picture it finds on your devices. It even works some magic and uploads a version of any RAW images it finds! It took more than a week, but Google Photos uploaded more than 50,000 of my pictures. Some fantastic consequences include: Automatically back up all of your pictures to the Cloud. I now have at least three copies of my photos: local Lightroom, Dropbox and Google Photos, so lots of things have to go wrong for me to lose a photo. Move photos from one device to another. For example, if you have a photo taken with a camera, you can now easily download it to your phone from Google Photos, so that you can post it to Instagram. The opposite direction works well, too; a picture from your phone is available on your computer, so you can edit it easily. Google Photos takes its best shot to make animations, stories and collages. It helps you “rediscover this day” from years ago and helps you view pictures you probably would never have seen again. Think of all of those baby pictures! The results are delightful. Search through your photos by faces and topics. For example, if I search “track,” I don't have to add other keywords for the results to show images from railroads and track meets. And remember, it's all free. The only reason not to do this is if you’ve lost your mind. Guy Kawasaki is the chief evangelist of Canva, an online graphic design tool. #5: Broadcast Live Calls to Action on Periscope Periscope is my new favorite social media marketing too...

How to Successfully Target a Niche Facebook Audience

How to Successfully Target a Niche Facebook Audience

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach new audiences on Facebook? Have you considered targeting niche audiences? Targeting niche groups of people on Facebook, in addition to your primary audience, will help you create new channels of traffic and revenue. In this article, you'll discover how to find and reach niche audiences on Facebook. Listen to this article: Uncover Your Niche Audience Sometimes, all it takes is a little brainstorming to yield an immediate option for a secondary audience. Think of your product or service as if you initially created it for people other than your primary audience to identify new shades of its features that will interest additional customer segments. For example if Dollar Shave Club's primary audience is men who use razors, it's easy to see how they would choose women who use razors as a great secondary target. Alternatively, you can go deep into Facebook's Audience Insights to learn more about your primary audience's quirks. Use any shared similarities you find to identify secondary groups of people who might qualify as a viable audience for you. Target Your Niche Audience When you've decided which audience group you want to target on Facebook, you can take advantage of Audience Optimization to ensure your post will be seen by users who are most likely to engage with it. Now that you know how to find and reach your niche audience, here are three tips to help you make the most of that exposure and visibility. #1: Speak Their Language Many niche groups use specific words, slang, or non-typical word expressions that differentiate them from others. Whether you're trying to connect with introverts, hipsters, or healthy lifestyle fans, it's important to speak the same language they do. To examine the specific language of a group, you can use Google to query phrases such as 'hipster slang.' A large gym that wants to attract a niche audience of CrossFit enthusiasts can search Google for slang that audience might use. You can also use Online Slang Dictionary or Urban Dictionary to learn the meaning of words that are unfamiliar to you. Make a list of the words used by the group you want to target and use them to construct Facebook posts that reflect a particular mood and style that will appeal to the social group you're targeting. After you publish your posts, you can increase the rate of engagement and conversion by responding to comments and questions with the same words your visitors use. #2: Reinforce Their Mood and Interests Posting pictures and quotes that appeal to the unique mindset of your niche audience can be especially effective because they're attractive and shareable. To mitigate the risk of alienating your primary audience with this tactic, make sure the images and quotes you use are relevant to your existing audience as well. Otherwise, you may not get any engagement at all. For example, this post by Nike could easily attract the notice of people interested in philology but stays faithful to the interests of their primary audience of athletes and healthy lifestyle fans. Even if you don't directly address a Facebook post to a specific niche audience, you can appeal to their interests indirectly. For example, this Walt Disney World post is equally interesting for three distinct and possibly overlapping audiences: those who are interested in Disney, in Star Wars or in food. You can take this a step further by including a question that helps your niche audience understand their opinion is important to you, thereby increasing your chances of engaging members of that audience in a conversation. #3: Support Their Social Stance If your business openly aligns with a niche audience on an issue or controversial subject, you can publish posts that make a clear statement to signify your support. For example, this post could be shared to appeal to and attract people who are interested in and support strong female role m...

Sleeknote Product Update: September 2017

by Isabella Rasmussen @ Sleeknote.com

The post Sleeknote Product Update: September 2017 appeared first on Sleeknote.com.

16 Twitter Tools for Social Media Marketers

16 Twitter Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Twitter in your social media marketing? Want to be more efficient and productive on the platform? To talk about a wide range of Twitter tools for social media marketers, I interview Ian Anderson Gray. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview social tools expert Ian Anderson Gray. Ian blogs about social tools at Seriously Social, which can be found at iag.me. He's also a website developer, speaker, and social media consultant. Ian will explore a slew of Twitter tools for marketers. You'll discover tools for social sharing, managing followers, analytics, and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: 16 Twitter Tools for Social Media Marketers Ian's background After college, Ian says he got started in the technology sphere by building websites at the web agency he founded. Then, about five or six years ago, he became interested in social media and started blogging at Seriously Social. He shares that he was most interested in the tech side of social media. Specifically how tools could help him be more efficient and productive. That's when he began writing on social media tools. From there, Ian has moved on to consulting and speaking. Listen to the show to discover Ian's original career path. Social Sharing Tools Ian starts off with missinglettr, a relatively new tool he's using as a drip-feed marketing system for Twitter. He explains that it extracts images, titles, and text excerpts from your latest blog posts, and then posts them through your Twitter account for up to a year. Simply connect missinglettr with your RSS feed, Ian says, and whenever you have a new blog post, you're notified to go into missinglettr and review the pieces extracted from that post. Select the ones you like and edit them and you'll have a whole year's worth of content from a single blog post. For example, in a list post, Ian explains, missinglettr will likely extract the title of each section, as well as your logo, some text quotes, and images. He says Missinglettr offers a free plan that doesn't include extracting images, and quotes premium plans starting at $15 a month. To keep up with the latest articles from his favorite authors and blogs, Ian uses Feedly. He explains how to take things a step further by connecting it with Buffer and IFTTT (If This Then That). After you add both your Feedly and Buffer accounts to IFTTT, you can create a recipe that says IF you save an article for later in Feedly, THEN it will be added it to your Buffer queue for sharing to your Twitter followers. Ian says it's an easy way to share the best content you find (either your own or other people's) as you read it, and mentions that it works whether you're using Feedly on a smartphone or the web. He shares that while IFTTT is free, Buffer and Feedly both offer free and paid options, and explains that for this combination to work, you'll need to have a paid Feedly account, which is $5/month. While Friends+Me is technically a Google+ sharing tool, Ian says it works really well for cross-posting whatever you put on Google+ to Twitter, as well as other social networks. The tool offers both free and paid plans. Ian likes it because Friends+Me takes only the title of your Google+ post (it knows you have only 140 characters per tweet), the article link, and the article's image, and shares it to Twitter. Listen to the show to learn what Ian really likes about Friends+Me. Content Discovery Tools If you're looking for timely content to share, Ian suggests using the Trending Now feature of BuzzSumo.

10 Ways to Use Snapchat for Business

10 Ways to Use Snapchat for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Wondering how to use Snapchat for your business? Want to create deeper connections with your followers? Snapchat can help you build an engaged following, increase loyalty, and boost your brand visibility. In this article, you'll discover 10 ways to use Snapchat for business. Listen to this article: #1: Stage an Influencer Reveal Global fast-food giant McDonald's (username: mcdonalds) isn't just about a famous redheaded clown selling toys with a meal. Professional athletes like LeBron James gave users a behind-the-scenes look at the rollout of the new bacon clubhouse sandwich. Although McDonald's didn't share the results of the promotion, it went well enough to continue. The promotion was pushed to Twitter where users were asked to follow back. To date, McDonald's has over 3 million followers on Twitter. Takeaway: You can apply this same philosophy with Snapchat to give your customers a look at what goes on behind the scenes at your company. Even if your marketing budget is only a fraction of what McDonald's is, buyers still like feeling as if they know the story behind your company. #2: Support an Account Takeover The popular young women's clothing retailer Wet Seal (username: wetseal) launched a Snapchat campaign, which was quickly taken over by a Snapchatter named MsMeghanMakeup. Meghan has over 300,000 followers and her influence was quickly felt as a halo effect over Wet Seal's campaign. The boost propelled the clothier to 9,000 connections in two weeks and over 250,000 views of the holiday "story." Wet Seal was named winner of the 6th Annual Shorty Awards, which honors the best in social media. Takeaway: To get your message seen, you can let an influential Snapchat user take over your account. You may not have connections with 300K+ followers, but even local authorities with hundreds or thousands of fans can improve your Snapchat reach. #3: Share Promo Codes Frozen yogurt chain 16 Handles (username: love16handles) used Snapchat's instant photo feature to amass followers and promote their frozen treats. They were also among the first brands to use Snapchat for coupon offers. The yogurt company earned new customers by promoting specific store locations and times, and when people snapped photos of themselves or their friends eating 16 Handles yogurt, they instantly received a coupon code for between 16% and 100% off. The catch: They only had 10 seconds to show the cashier. Takeaway: You can get your followers involved with Snapchat-exclusive coupon codes or other exclusive promos. Make it fun and your brand's reach is sure to grow! #4: Give VIP Access In the past, it took several weeks for photos from New York Fashion Week to trickle down from photographers to magazines, and then from newsstands to consumers. Now, with Snapchat, followers can watch the fashions unfold almost instantly. Lucky Magazine's editor-in-chief, fashion brand Refinery 29, and many others shared snaps of models strutting down the catwalk, allowing them to deliver images of the iconic fashion show to people in ways never dreamed of before. Takeaway: You can use Snapchat to give your followers a VIP look at your events and promotions that they'll likely never have a chance to attend in person. It's a fun, easy way to bring new life to established events. #5: Feature Your Followers Mobile and online food ordering brand GrubHub (username: grubhub) launched its first Snapchat campaign in 2013, becoming a finalist in the 7th Annual Shorty Awards. They featured their own weekly content, stories gathered from user-generated content, giveaways, and promotions. The results included a 20% increase in followers after the launch of the Snapchat giveaway. The campaign was one of many factors that contributed to its Wall Street debut in a public offering. Takeaway: Don't let your Snapchat feed become too self-serving. Make your feed about your followers, offer them value,

17 Tips for Successful Facebook Contests

17 Tips for Successful Facebook Contests

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you planning a Facebook contest? Want to make sure it's a success? An easy-to-follow checklist of tips and best practices will help you launch Facebook contests your audience will love. In this article I'll share 17 tips to make your Facebook contest a success. Listen to this article: #1: Review Facebook's Terms of Service Facebook periodically changes its rules and regulations about contests and other promotions. Be sure to check the Facebook Guidelines page before you launch your contest. #2: Set a S.M.A.R.T. Goal A S.M.A.R.T. goal is one that's specific, measurable, attainable, relevant, and timely. Make sure you clearly define your contest's goals before you start planning. Do you want to promote a new product? Grow your email list? Perhaps you're looking to gather a bunch of user-generated content such as photos and videos. To set your Facebook contest up for success, focus on one or two attainable goals. #3: Choose the Contest Type Consider running caption, photo-vote, video-vote, and sweepstakes contests, which are always popular on Facebook. Sweepstakes are the easiest to enter and the key to driving lots of entries is to pick the right prize. Del Mar Fans & Lighting's straightforward Facebook giveaway requires entrants to simply vote on which lighting product they prefer. Once they vote, they're entered. When the contest ends, a company rep will choose a winner at random. Remember, you need to develop a contest that will help you reach your goals. Try a photo- or video-vote contest if your goal is to collect user-generated content. #4: Select the Right Software Figure out what software you need to run and manage your contest. Look for software with built-in voter verification features, so everything is on the up and up. If you want to collect email addresses or other contact information, use third-party software that will help you organize all of the data you collect. If you'd like to increase engagement, run a Facebook timeline contest. Choose a comment/like importer tool that allows you to collect a Facebook user ID number and name from everyone who engages with your post. Whatever type of contest you choose, remember you can use the information you collect for future marketing efforts.  #5: Set a Time Frame Decide how long your contest will run and let your audience know. Companies offering valuable prizes, like a trip to Paris for two, tend to let contests run for longer periods of time than those offering smaller or local prizes, like a meal or a one-night stay in a hotel. Some companies even do a weekly or monthly giveaway. Palmer's Canada recently ran a "Celebrate the New Year Giveaway," during the month of January. At the top of the rules document, the contest period is listed, right down to the time zone. How long your contest runs is up to you. Just make sure you share the time frame in all of your promotions. #6: Create Rules Write a description of how the winner will be chosen, such as randomly or by community vote. For example, BroadStreet Publishing hosted a 21 Days of Love Valentine's Day giveaway. In the rules they state that "a winner will be chosen at random," among other considerations. Consider including a rule that says voting is only part of the process, and a judge or panel of judges will determine the final winner. Make sure to include a line stating that if you suspect fraud, you have the right to determine the winner. #7: Determine Who Can Enter Are you a local business hoping to increase foot traffic to your store or restaurant? Consider limiting entries to people who live within a 50-mile radius of your business. You can also specify age ranges and even gender in your contest rules. KLIM, a company that makes technical outdoor apparel, is looking for women to model its clothing. In the contest rules, they specify that they want family-friendly images and "No duck face selfies."

How to Pin Your Facebook Carousel Ad as a Page Post

How to Pin Your Facebook Carousel Ad as a Page Post

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want more organic traffic from Facebook? Have you considered pinning your ads as Facebook page posts? In this article you'll discover how to drive organic traffic and conversions by pinning a Facebook carousel ad to your page as a post. Listen to this article: #1: Set Up Your Facebook Carousel Ad First, you need to create your Facebook carousel ad. Click the green Create Ad button and select Send People to Your Website as the objective. Next, enter a URL. This is the final URL visitors click through to at the end of your carousel, so you may want to choose your main website for this one, depending on the point of your carousel. Now, name your campaign something that you can easily recognize later so you can refer back to the carousels you’ve created. Then click the Set Audience & Budget button. Next, choose your ad audience. Note that if you want to run this as an ad, you’ll want to get specific about your ad targeting. If you don’t want to run this as an ad, you don’t have to; thus, you don’t need to do anything at this point. Now set your ad budget. In case you forget, set the lifetime budget as low as $25 so that even if your ad does run, you won’t spend that much. Then click Choose Ad Creative. #2: Design Your Carousel Ad Now, you’ll design your carousel ad. First, select Multiple Images in One Ad. Next, connect your page so the ad will be shown in the desktop news feed. This is extremely important. Remove all other placements except the Desktop News Feed, as they’re unnecessary. Configure one to five images, links, and calls to action for your carousel ad using the following specifications. Note that for each carousel image, you can have different website URLs (even from different domains) and different call-to-action buttons. Once you’re finished, your preview should look like this. Be sure to click through your carousel images one more time to ensure that the images, ad copy, and URLs are correct. You can click the Review Order button to get a quick glance at all of your settings. Then click the Place Order button to place the ad into Facebook’s review queue. #3: Pin Your Carousel Ad to Your Facebook Page as a Post At this point, you will be taken to your Ads Manager dashboard. In the box to the right, you’ll see a See Post link. Click on the See Post link to go to your carousel ad post. Click on the Share link to share the post and use the drop-down menu to choose the Share on a Page You Manage option. Select your page and remove the via tag that appears in the Say Something About This area. Then add your own descriptive comment. Now post it to your page. You should see a confirmation of success. Now use the arrow at the top right to pin it to the top of your page wall. At this point, you can either let your ad campaign run or go back to your Ads Manager dashboard and toggle the ad and the campaign off. The choice is yours and won’t affect your pinned post. 8 Ways to Use Pinned Carousel Ad Posts to Drive Traffic Now that you know how to create carousel ads and share them to your Facebook page, how should you use them? In my example, I chose to feature five random blog posts at the top of my Facebook page wall. Here are some other ways you can choose to use yours: Feature your top three to five products or services. Be sure to link each to its corresponding landing page. Use the Download or Shop Now call-to-action button for products and the Book Now, Contact Us, or Sign Up call-to-action buttons for services, as applicable. Showcase the top three to five features or benefits of your products or services. Be sure to link each to its corresponding landing page. Use the Learn More or Watch More call-to-action buttons, as applicable. Display the top three to five lead magnets you have to offer to capture new subscribers to your email list.

Instagram Success: How a Marketer Grew a Loyal Following With Instagram

Instagram Success: How a Marketer Grew a Loyal Following With Instagram

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to grow your business using Instagram? Are you wondering how to build a loyal following? I interview Chalene Johnson for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast and explore how she amassed a following of 365,000 on Instagram. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Chalene Johnson. Chalene is author of the fitness book Push, a motivational speaker and her infomercials on fitness have sold millions of DVDs. She's found great success with Instagram and now teaches other small businesses how to do the same with her Instagram Impact course, and has a new podcast called Build Your Tribe. Chalene shares how she creatively used Instagram to grow her business. You'll discover how to take your Instagram marketing to the next level. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Instagram Success How and why Chalene started on social media Chalene says she started with YouTube in 2006 and Twitter in 2007 or 2008. In 2009, she got the idea for writing Push. When she told her agent she wanted to pitch a book about goal-setting and focus instead of a fitness book, he told her she didn't have the social media following or the credibility to write that type of book.  She got to work and spent a year using social media to build a platform with the intention of writing the book she wanted to pitch to publishers in New York. Listen to the show to hear how Chalene used social media when she first started. What Chalene built to support her book pitch Chalene shares that she had a ton of followers on YouTube and had just started a Facebook page when she decided to write Push. Even though she had millions of DVD customers, her agent had to remind her that publishers don't care who you know; publishers want to know if you have the ability to reach those people. To build her email list, Chalene created a 30-Day Challenge for her Facebook audience. She started with three quick videos to show how she uses her phone to organize her daily to-do list and included a simple email opt-in. Every day she delivered a 2-minute video to her email subscribers. The list grew to 100,000 in 9 months. Listen to the show to find out how Chalene collected emails from her subscribers. How Chalene got started with Instagram After successfully using Facebook to build her email list, Chalene says she was able to land the publishing deal she wanted and the book was released in December 2011. Then she noticed she wasn't getting any love on Facebook. She didn't want to learn about Facebook ads and shares that she kind of picked up her toys and stomped off the playground. That's when she began to realize her kids were all over Instagram but businesses weren't. In winter 2012, Chalene decided to become an early settler on Instagram. She started with life-casting, sharing personal images to show where she was and what she was doing during the day. Listen to the show to find out how following a favorite fashion icon drastically changed Chalene's Instagram strategy. How Instagram has changed Chalene's business Chalene shares that as a business owner and someone with a family, Instagram saves her time. She says instead of spending hours creating content, she can now spend literally 15 seconds and produce content to drive traffic to an opt-in for current or future offers. Unlike Facebook, Instagram allows her to put a call to action (CTA) in every post without affecting her engagement. Listen to the show to discover what Chalene track...

Content for Business: How to Build Your Business on a Solid Content Foundation

Content for Business: How to Build Your Business on a Solid Content Foundation

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a great idea for a business? Wondering if content marketing will help move the needle? To discover what it takes to build a content-driven business, I interview Joe Pulizzi. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Joe Pulizzi, founder of the Content Marketing Institute, author of the book Epic Content Marketing and the founder of Content Marketing World, the leading conference for content marketers. Joe's latest book is Content Inc.: How Entrepreneurs Use Content to Build Massive Audiences and Create Radically Successful Businesses. Joe will explore how you can build a sustainable small business with smart content marketing. You'll discover the six steps to take to create a content business in any niche. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Content for Business When and why Joe started the Content Marketing Institute Joe shares how he got into the content marketing industry. He was vice president of custom media (also known as content marketing) at business publishing company Penton Media until 2007. At Penton, Joe and his team helped advertisers who wanted to do something unique tell their stories. For example, if a company like Microsoft wanted to tell a story to an executive audience, Joe and his team would help them create an ongoing newsletter, a magazine, blog series or webinar series. Joe did that for seven years. Joe left Penton at the end of March 2007 and wrote his first blog post titled "Why Content Marketing?" on April 26, 2007. That led up to Joe launching Junta42, which he says was basically the eHarmony for content marketing. The idea was to match brand sites that wanted to outsource some portion of the content process (creation or distribution) with agencies that would pay for the service to get the leads. Joe explains how in 2008, with no money, no paid distribution and about 2,000 subscribers, he decided it was time to build relationships with influencers. He started a research project called The Top 100 Content Marketing Blogs. (I was on the list first for White Papers and then Social Media Examiner.) He notified everybody who was on the list, and it just took off. Fast-forward to 2009, Joe shares, the model was working and they matched up about 1,000 projects. However, they were still having trouble getting companies to pay for a subscription to the service, even though they were driving leads to them. After his best case study (they sent a $1 million+ customer to an agency, and the agency decided not to renew their subscription), it finally hit Joe that this business was not going to work. Although Joe was "in love with his product," he finally figured out the key was to fall in love with your audience and focus on their needs and pain points. His audience was asking for training, education, consulting and speaking. They weren't even ready for a matching service, because they didn't even know how to create a content marketing strategy. Joe pivoted to the education and training concept and launched Content Marketing Institute six months later. That was May 2010. "At that moment we said we were going to create the leading online destination for content marketing, the leading magazine and the leading event," Joe recalls. "And within two years we were able to do that." Listen to the show to hear how Joe and I first connected, as well as the similarities between our projects. Why now is the time to get into a content-driven business Content Inc. is Joe's fourth book. The other three are content marketing–related and f...

How to Measure Your LinkedIn Activities

How to Measure Your LinkedIn Activities

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is social selling part of your LinkedIn marketing strategy? Do you know how to measure and track your efforts? LinkedIn gives businesses a number of metrics for tracking the effectiveness of their marketing throughout the selling process. In this article, you'll discover how to measure and track the effectiveness of your social selling on LinkedIn. Listen to this article: What Is Social Selling? Social selling is the process of developing and building relationships via social networks by providing valuable content to your target audience. Ideally, this occurs at each stage of the buyer's journey, which are specific points buyers go through to make a purchasing decision. Those three stages are awareness, consideration, and decision-making. Here's how you can measure your success at reaching prospects at each of these stages. #1: Monitor Awareness Metrics With LinkedIn, you can monitor several short-term results of your social selling efforts, such as an increase in your number of personal connections, content shares and likes, and follower engagement with your company page and showcase pages. These indicate increased awareness and visibility of your business. A great strategy is to include employees in your social selling process, which will increase the likelihood that potential customers will learn about you and eventually follow your LinkedIn company and showcase pages. Number of Connections It's easy to track the number of LinkedIn connections you and your employees have, which provides a meaningful data point for your long-term social selling efforts. Why does this data point matter? Let's say that 30 of your employees are part of your LinkedIn employee engagement program, and they actively share and promote company-related content and information. Assuming that each employee has an average of 200 connections, this means you could potentially have 6,000 people viewing and engaging with content related to your company. If you can get your employees to share content authentically, it'll have a bigger impact because humans want to connect with humans within their trusted networks. By leveraging this human network, you can harness the ripple effect. Content Shares and Likes Implementing a sophisticated content marketing plan is a huge component of your social selling strategy. You need to develop a focused content roadmap around your target audience. A great way to get started is to do a content gap analysis to see what pieces are currently missing from your existing content. Develop a team-based content calendar to ensure that your team shares high-quality content on a regular basis, either by publishing articles or sharing status updates. Eventually, that content gets served to their personal connections. In return, your employees' connections may end up following your LinkedIn company and showcase pages. You can then monitor and track the number of times people share, like, or comment on company-related status updates. This will give you a clear picture of which content resonates with them. As an administrator of your company's LinkedIn page, you can access your page's analytics to see which topics people gravitate towards and what topics you can phase out. In the example below, the last status update reached 529 people. Five people clicked on the post and also interacted with it, resulting in an overall engagement level of 1.89%. To boost your inbound marketing efforts, feed this information back into your search engine optimization strategy. Number of Followers Who Find and Engage With Your LinkedIn Company and Showcase Pages One of the goals of having your employees share company-related content via their personal LinkedIn profiles is to grow the follower base of your LinkedIn company page and showcase pages. This strategy boosts the visibility of your digital assets, and you'll be able to reach entirely new audiences you didn't have access to a...

How to Promote Your Business With Personal Social Profiles

How to Promote Your Business With Personal Social Profiles

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to expand the online visibility of your business? Have you thought about leveraging your personal social media profiles? Optimizing your personal profiles to highlight your business is a great way to raise awareness. In this article you'll discover how to use your personal LinkedIn, Twitter and Facebook profiles to promote your business. Listen to this article: #1: Showcase Your Business on LinkedIn Some people view LinkedIn only as the network to use when you're looking for a job. In reality, LinkedIn can provide a variety of benefits for your business, ranging from increased website traffic to new strategic opportunities. Your LinkedIn personal profile is a great way to develop new business and network with prospects. The two profile areas that you need to focus on are the Header and Experience. Header The Header is often the first thing that catches the attention of visitors. Many of the sections within the Header are brief facts and self-explanatory. However, the professional headline section is the most customizable. After visitors look at your name and profile photo, the headline is the next likely place they'll look when forming an impression about you and your company. To edit your LinkedIn Header, open your profile, hover over the Header section and click on the pen icon to the right of the information you want to edit. Here are some tips for writing your LinkedIn headline: Be concise. Summarize your industry, skill set and anything that sets you apart from the competition. LinkedIn limits the headline section to 120 characters. Use keywords. Think about the words that your ideal client or target market would likely be searching for on LinkedIn. Or include topics that come up often in conversations about your business. For example, when speaking with potential clients, you might frequently be asked about a certain aspect of your experience. Consider including it in your professional headline to spark a conversation with clients who have an interest in that area. Experiment with new headlines. After you've developed strong headline copy, don't be afraid to make adjustments if your business needs a change or you haven't found the results you were looking for. Consider testing different keywords as you learn more about what your ideal clients are interested in. Experience The other important profile section to focus on is Experience. You can use up to 2,000 characters in this section, so it can be much more detailed and highlight the benefits of your business. On your profile, scroll down to the Experience section and hover over the text. The editing options should appear immediately. At the top of the section, you'll find buttons to reorganize your work history, create a new position or add images, presentations, documents or videos. Consider adding two to three paragraphs explaining your company's objectives and include a list of how your contributions affect these goals. This way, you're branding your business and yourself simultaneously. Additionally, include visual elements such as SlideShare presentations, links to work samples or portfolios, branded video content or any other content that helps visitors learn more about your company. Visual content helps attract your visitors' attention to each section of your profile. #2: Brand Your Profile on Twitter Twitter is an excellent platform for adding a human element to your business, distributing relevant industry-related content and keeping an eye on social conversations about your brand. If you want to align your personal Twitter efforts with your business goals, focus on providing content that serves your clients' needs and represents your business in a positive way. Each profile affiliated with your business should look the part and follow company branding standards. Start by visiting your Twitter profile and clicking on the Edit Profile button.

How to Use Facebook to Market Your Products

How to Use Facebook to Market Your Products

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have products to sell? Have you tried using Facebook ads to promote your products? To find out how to market products via Facebook, I interview Steve Chou. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Steve Chou. Steve and his wife run an ecommerce site that sells handkerchiefs and linens at BumblebeeLinens.com. He's also host of the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast and the website MyWifeQuitHerJob.com, where he teaches people how to sell physical products online. Steve explains which Facebook ad types he uses to sell his physical products. You'll discover how Steve uses email and Facebook ads in tandem. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Use Facebook to Market Physical Products Steve's Story As Steve and his wife were preparing for their wedding, his wife wanted a nice handkerchief because she expected to cry during the service. After shopping around, they imported a bunch of handkerchiefs from Asia. After using only a few, Steve and his wife listed the rest on eBay, where they sold like hotcakes. Later, when Steve's wife became pregnant with their first child, she wanted to quit her six-figure income job. They reconnected with the handkerchief vendor and opened their online store, Bumblebee Linens. At first, Steve worked as a microprocessor designer by day, and after the baby went to bed, Steve and his wife ran the business. It became such a success that they maintained their income even after his wife quit her job. Steve explains that soon afterward, their friends began wanting to have kids and quit their jobs, and they kept asking Steve how to launch an ecommerce store. Instead of answering the same questions over and over again, Steve began blogging about his experiences running the store. That's how MyWifeQuitHerJob.com got started in 2009. To generate sales in the early days, Steve used Google AdWords. His brother-in-law worked at Google in the AdWords division and showed Steve how to use it. Back in 2007, Steve generated a lot of sales via clicks that cost him about 10 to 15 cents. Steve says online content also helped generate sales. They wrote articles to help brides and provide craft ideas for their products. After three to six months, the articles started ranking in search engines and sent traffic to their store, too. Today, Bumblebee Linens sells handkerchiefs, linen napkins, linen towels, lace parasols, aprons, and more. Steve says the store has several target audiences. The handkerchief audience includes people planning weddings and an over-55 crowd. Event and wedding planners are the target audience for napkins and moms are the audience for Mommy & Me aprons. The company has in-house embroidery machines for personalizing their products. Listen to the show to learn more about the audience and the content on MyWifeQuitHerJob.com. Win-back Campaigns Steve explains that a win-back campaign targets people who have already purchased from your shop because those people are more likely to buy again. To run this type of campaign, you need to figure out who those people are, and if they haven't purchased within a certain timeframe, give them an incentive to come back. You can automate a win-back campaign with an online merchant system. For example, if someone hasn't purchased from Bumblebee Linens in 60 days, they automatically receive an email and a Facebook ad with a 10%-off coupon. To automate the Facebook component of the campaign, Steve says the ecommerce system Klaviyo allows Bumblebee Linens to export a specific segment (in this case people who haven...

Periscope: How Your Business Can Benefit From Live Video

Periscope: How Your Business Can Benefit From Live Video

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you broadcast on Periscope? Want to use it to connect with and grow your audience? To discover how to use Periscope for your business, I interview Kim Garst. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Kim Garst, author of Will the Real You Please Stand Up: Show Up, Be Authentic, and Prosper in Social Media. Her agency Boom! Social helps businesses understand the selling side of social media. Kim is also VERY active on Periscope. Kim will explore Periscope, the live video platform from Twitter, and how your business can benefit from it. You'll discover tools for analytics and saving your scopes. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Periscope: How Your Business Can Benefit From Live Video Kim's journey to live video Kim says that as everyone was coming off of South by Southwest last year, all the talk was about Meerkat. The conversation suddenly changed while Kim was at Social Media Marketing World last March when Periscope was launched. She remembers thinking that since Periscope was from Twitter, she should check it out. So, while in a pedicab heading over to that night's Social Media Marketing World networking event, she did a quick scope with Donna Moritz. Kim's second Periscope came about a month later, when she was covering an event. One of the keynotes was Ashton Kutcher and she decided to open up her phone, broadcast the keynote, and see what happened. Although Kim had very little Periscope experience and a nearly nonexistent audience on the platform, a few people tuned in and left comments. Her third Periscope was the most eye-opening because that's when Kim realized she could use the platform for business. She had Syed Balkhi on a webinar and decided to live broadcast it to her Periscope audience by putting her phone on her computer screen and holding a mic up to the sound source. Kim shares that with no prep, she simply opened up her phone, typed in the webinar title, and invited people to tune in. More than 200 people watched the broadcast. Kim soon realized Periscope could be an amazing medium – not just to deliver content, but also to connect with people. Listen to the show to hear why Kim believes live-streaming is the beginning of Web 3.0. Periscope strategy Kim shares that one strategy she's capitalized on is leveraging Periscope to create multiple pieces of content. She comes up with one or two blog topics for the week, writes down bullet points and research she wants to reference, and then gets on Periscope and speaks her blog content. For example, if the topic is 10 Ways to Do X, she'll jot down the 10 ways and talk through them during the scope. When she's through, Kim sends the recording out for transcription. When the transcription comes back to her, she has a blog post. Kim then takes that same scope material and turns it into 50+ additional pieces of content. When asked to elaborate on how she does that, Kim explains that when people talk, certain nuggets of information they share are what she refers to as "tweetable moments." She pulls those nuggets out of her scopes and turns them into visual content, straight-up text tweets or Facebook page posts, or even a SlideShare. Kim stresses that there are tons of ways to create multiple pieces content from talking it through on Periscope. Kim shares the benefits of speaking her blog posts and how she uses the feedback people give her inside her scopes to see if she missed anything she needs to cover in the written post. Kim tries to keep her Periscopes short, sweet, and actionable,

How to Customize Slack for Social Media Teams

How to Customize Slack for Social Media Teams

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is more than one person involved with your social media marketing? Are you looking for a way to improve collaboration on marketing projects? Whether your team is within an office building or scattered around the world, Slack's third-party app integrations make it easy to create a customized collaboration center. In this article you'll discover how to customize Slack for social media team collaboration. Listen to this article: Why Slack? Slack, an online communication tool for teams, is designed to replace email. Team conversations take place in chat rooms, or "channels." You can create channels for different projects or topics. You can also direct message individuals and select groups of people. All of the content that you post on Slack is searchable, including files, conversations, people, and notifications. Just enter a keyword or two in the search box at the top right and press Enter. Slack will integrate with many third-party tools, such as Google Drive, Trello, Dropbox, Heroku, Crashlytics, GitHub, Runscope, and Zendesk. It also will support community-built integrations. Here's how to integrate third-party tools with Slack and use key Slack features to communicate with your social media marketing team. #1: Choose Apps to Integrate With Slack Slack allows you to connect a variety of third-party apps. Explore the directory to find apps that will help your team. Screenhero and Google Hangouts are two communication apps in particular that you'll likely want to connect to your team's Slack account. Screenhero Screenhero is an app that lets your team use screen sharing for collaboration. Screen sharing is an easy way to present your ideas to the group without having to send files back and forth. Everyone can jump in and get problems solved quickly and efficiently without wasting time on logistics. You can initiate screen sharing with your co-workers by using the "/username" command. Coolest of all, Slack allows everyone to use their own cursor to point out elements in the shared screen. Google Hangouts No matter how much you love using Slack, not all of your vendors and clients are going to feel the same way. This is where Google+ Hangouts' Slack integration comes in handy. Google+ Hangouts chat is the perfect way to communicate quickly and efficiently with people who work outside of your Slack environment. You can also integrate a Hangouts chat with any communication method on Slack: channels, private groups, or direct/group messages. You don't have to switch between the two applications, which is a huge timesaver. Plus, it provides everyone with easily searchable instant messages. Both you and the other party keep a record of each conversation. #2: Install App Integrations To connect third-party apps with Slack, go to www.slack.com/apps. In the search box at the top of the page, enter the name of the app you want to integrate with Slack. Once you select the app, you see a page with details about it. Click the Install button to install the app to your team's Slack account. On the next page, click the Add [app name] Integration button, and the app will be installed. Next, you have the option to customize the username and icon for the integration. After you make your changes, click Save Settings. #3: Explore Other Slack Features Three of the most useful (and fun) built-in Slack features are Quick Switcher, Recent Mentions, and Create Your Own Emojis. Here's how to use and access these features. Quick Switcher Quick Switcher is the fastest way to jump to a conversation in Slack. To open the box below, press Command+K on the Mac or Ctrl+K on Windows. You can now quickly navigate a list of your channels, groups, and direct messages. Tip: Quick Switcher is just one of many features you can access with a keyboard shortcut. To see the full list of shortcuts, press Command+? on the Mac or Ctrl+? on Windows.

How to Use Native Ads to Support Your Social Media Marketing

How to Use Native Ads to Support Your Social Media Marketing

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you looking for ways to supercharge your social media efforts? Have you considered native ads? Native ads not only help build your social followers and boost social engagement, they also drive high-quality consumers to your branded content. In this article you'll discover what native ads are and how to integrate them into your social media marketing. Listen to this article: What Are Native Ads? The Content Marketing Institute defines native advertising as paid marketing that delivers useful, interesting and targeted information to your audience in a form that looks like the site's native, or non-ad, content. The different forms that native ads can take vary greatly. They can be Google paid search results, promoted listings on Twitter, sponsored updates on LinkedIn, Facebook promoted or sponsored posts or even articles on sites like Forbes, BuzzFeed, The Huffington Post and The New York Times. Native ads can also appear as content-recommendation engines at the end of articles. Here's how to start integrating native ads into your social media marketing. #1: Define Your Goal Whatever the form, native ads offer many potential benefits to your business. Joe Pulizzi of the Content Marketing Institute says native ads can help you build brand awareness and trust, plus help bring subscribers to your content. And keep in mind that your content doesn't always have to be new. Native ads can be a great way to attract new audiences to previously published posts. Additional benefits of native ads include SEO and social proof. Promoted posts on a strong social media site get your message in front of a larger audience and can drive traffic back to your website or blog. Native ads can be especially helpful if you have a new site and haven't had time to build up strong SEO. Unlike other forms of digital marketing such as banner ads, native ads on social media can collect social proof such as likes, comments and shares. This increases the credibility of your message and viral opportunities for your brand. More awareness can equal more authority in the form of links and social signals, which can produce better rankings. Native ads can also help you build social media audiences. A sponsored post on Facebook or Twitter can attract new users to follow you, and sponsored stories can grow likes and followers, but only when the content resonates with users. A sponsored post with little organic traction will do poorly. Promote social media content that is already popular for further exposure to a wider audience. #2: Develop Quality Ad Content To get the most from your native ad investment, focus on creating content that is helpful and interesting, attracts attention and provides value. And fight the urge to sell. Additionally, Zoe Robinson of Add3 suggests these best practices for native ads: Publish the content that the ad is promoting on your own site. If your article features an infographic, chart or graph, be sure it appears on your site first with its own URL. Include a call to action that links to your blog or other social channels. Quality content is key. Go beyond marketing and break down departmental silos to leverage the expertise of others in your company. Create content your audience will find less disruptive and more engaging through segmentation with tools like geo-targeting, demographics and interests. Zoe also recommends measuring metrics beyond traditional click-through rates. Consider metrics such as brand affinity or purchase intent to determine native ad success. #3: Use Native Ad Targeting PR software and services company Cision suggests targeting sponsored content to Facebook users who are already customers or lookalike audiences that share characteristics with existing fans. You can also retarget native ads to people who have come to your website to view a product or service or deliver native ads based on search interest.

Video Blogging: How to Create Consistent YouTube Content

Video Blogging: How to Create Consistent YouTube Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create videos to promote your business? Have you considered starting a regular video blog? To explore vlogging, I interview Amy Schmittauer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Amy Schmittauer, an online video expert. She founded Vlog Boss Studios and regularly produces awesome content for her YouTube channel, Savvy Sexy Social. She's also the author of the brand-new book, Vlog Like a Boss: How to Kill It Online with Video Blogging. Amy explores how video blogging can help your business. You'll discover what you need to start your own video blog. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Vlog Like a Boss What Is Vlogging? The term vlog builds off the word blog, and a vlog is simply a blog in video form. In a vlog, you can share anything you might do in a blog post, such as a tutorial or a story from your life. Consistency is best for vlogging. If you post a vlog here and there, you won't gain much traction. Amy says most vlogs that do well have a regular schedule. I ask Amy about how using YouTube for vlogging is different from the other ways people use YouTube. Amy says the purpose of a vlog is to help people discover you. Videos that may be suitable for YouTube but that don't help people discover you, such as a product commercial or an introduction to your company, don't make great vlog posts. To be discovered, think of the users who are searching for a concern, a specialty, or the answer to a question. Think about what a potential customer or audience member might want to know, create a video about the topic, and upload it to YouTube. Listen to the show to discover Amy's thoughts about vlogging on mobile apps like Snapchat and Instagram, which have video and social. Amy's Vlog When Amy launched Savvy Sexy Social, she was just getting started as a social media marketer. She thought teaching people the best way to do things on social media would to attract an audience and potential clients. She wanted her vlog to be informative and fun. She didn't want social media to feel like a chore. To juggle her content marketing with her client work, Amy says she scheduled her vlog posts to appear three days a week but she created the week's videos all in one day. She would pick three topics (which could be an app, a product, or a general social media tip), record the videos sitting in front of her bookshelf, and then edit and schedule them for the rest of the week. Amy emphasizes that people didn't have to know who she was to find her videos via search. They just needed to have a question about a topic in her videos. For instance, Amy created a video about a hack to make tweets a little longer. She thought the topic was something new that people didn't know much about, and the video became one of her popular vlog posts. The video's headline focused on the Twitter tip but the video also introduced viewers to Amy. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OJRp22IXqXY Amy shares the simple vlog format she used for a long time. She introduced her topic, delivered information about the topic that her viewers would value, and gave an actionable item that would give them results right away. Then she wrapped up with, "By the way, I'm Amy. Hope you can subscribe and stay tuned." In the last year, Amy says she's been having fun with her format so her community could get to know her a little more personally. For instance, throughout January, she documented the journey of launching a book. This approach was more of a lifecasting vlog, but her audience was learning through Amy's experience.

Starting an Online Show: How to Quickly Grow Your Platform

Starting an Online Show: How to Quickly Grow Your Platform

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you ever dreamed of having your own show? Do you want to know how to get started? There is no easier way to build a platform quickly. To learn more about what goes into starting your own show, this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast goes deep on the subject. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, you'll learn the different formats involved in both audio and video shows and the key ingredients you must have to make it a success. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Create Your Own Online Show There are some amazing talk show hosts who do incredible things by simply talking to other people. Think about Jay Leno, Howard Stern, Dr. Phil, Ellen DeGeneres and Oprah Winfrey. Oprah Winfrey started out with a half-hour, low-rated talk show in Chicago, and look at her now. The secret to her success is interviewing people. In the social media world, the big name that comes to mind is Gary Vaynerchuk. He became famous for Wine Library TV. He sat behind a camera in his wine library store and he talked about wine. He also had interesting guests who talked to him about wine. Gary has a really cool personality, which led to incredible opportunities for him. As a result of him simply talking about wine, he got a $1 million book contract. If you think of the podcasters you listen to regularly, many of them have shows where there is more than one person and there is dialogue going back and forth. The secret source of everything I've ever done is interviews. Interviews have been the key to Social Media Examiner's growth. When I launched Social Media Examiner in October 2009, I took my friend Jeff, who's a video guy, to BlogWorld. And when I went to a MarketingProfs conference in Chicago, I took my flip camera and interviewed people. I got behind the camera and talked to the likes of Chris Brogan, Steve Rubel, Jessie Stay and a lot of other people for about 10 minutes each. These interviews catapulted Social Media Examiner to incredible success. Interviews weren't the reason for all the success, but they were extremely instrumental. Listen to the show to find out why interviews are one of the reasons for Social Media Examiner's success. My backstory  I never liked reading books in college, so to be able to pass tests, I had to arrange study groups with some of the smartest kids in class. By hosting the study group, I would learn enough to be able to ask questions to get the dialogue going. From this experience, I discovered that I could learn something by interviewing people in my group. These techniques led to my future success. One of my first companies was Stelzner Consulting. I was a writer for high-tech companies, where I interviewed engineers on the factory floors. It was my job to write materials to help the organization sell. Before Social Media Examiner, I was known for writing white papers and I did a lot of teaching. In the early 2000s, I ran teleclasses, where 100-200 people would pay $39 to $59 to listen to me on the phone interviewing experts every month. Listen to the show to learn how you could become the next Gary Vaynerchuk or Oprah Winfrey. The benefits of having a show When you start interviewing successful people, other people look at you and think "WOW! That person who is doing the interviewing must be really smart." A great example is Derek Halpern of Social Triggers, who goes out of his way to reach out to scientists who do really interesting psychological research.

Podcasting for Business: Why Marketers Are Betting on Podcasts

Podcasting for Business: Why Marketers Are Betting on Podcasts

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you considered starting a podcast? Would you like to discover how to use a podcast to grow your business? To explore why marketers are placing big bets on podcasting, I interview Jay Baer and Joe Pulizzi. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Jay Baer and Joe Pulizzi. Jay is the host of the Social Pros podcast and Jay Today. He's also the man behind MarketingPodcasts.com. His company is Convince & Convert. Joe podcasts at This Old Marketing and Content Inc. He's the founder of the Content Marketing Institute and the man behind the Content Marketing World conference. Jay, Joe and I explore how podcasting has evolved since we all started. You'll discover how podcasting can help your business, how to work with sponsors and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Podcasting for Business Why Joe and Jay started podcasts Joe, who has been podcasting since November 2013, explains how encouragement and research led him to start a podcast. His company did a gap analysis to find out the biggest difference in tactics between the most and least effective marketing professionals. Two tactics—books and podcasts—are the factors that made the difference. He noticed the audio version of his book Epic Content Marketing really took off, so he figured there must be something to audio. Joe shares how his and Robert Rose's podcast evolved. Joe recalls how once after their weekly phone call about what was going on in content marketing, he said, "We should have recorded that." Robert asked, "Why don't we?" They launched This Old Marketing the following week. Jay started podcasting in January 2012, and just finished the third season of his Social Pros podcast, which totals about 150 episodes. Jay explains that Tristin Handy, who was director of marketing at Argyle Social at the time, said, "Did you ever think about doing a podcast? We should do a podcast." And Jay thought, "No and okay." They got together and decided to create a show that paid attention to the unsung heroes of social media. Jay says it's grown far beyond the expectations he had for it at the beginning. Listen to the show to discover which podcasts I listened to when I started the Social Media Marketing podcast. How podcasting helps their businesses When Joe looked at the behaviors of those who attend Content Marketing World, he realized his core customers engage in at least three different content vehicles, such as the newsletter, magazine and/or webinars. It's the third thing that's the tipping point, so he figured the audio content could be what gets people to the event. Jay says the Social Pros podcast allows them to spotlight their corporate clients, as well as interview potential future clients. Podcasting has become a strong lead-generation business strategy. It's also helped Jay from a personal branding and awareness perspective, because it positions him (and his company) as a leader in the field. Listen to the show to hear how podcasting builds customer loyalty. Their new ventures Joe's releasing a new book called Content Inc., which will be out in time for Content Marketing World in September. Rather than just doing a book, he's creating a platform. "If it's important enough to be a book, it's important enough to be a bigger media property," Joe explains. "You can launch an entire platform off of a podcast." The Content Inc. podcasts are 7-10 minutes long, and reuse and repurpose his other content. Jay recently launched Jay Today,

Visual Storytelling: How to Use Visuals, Videos and Social Media to Market Your Business

Visual Storytelling: How to Use Visuals, Videos and Social Media to Market Your Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use visuals to market your business? Are you wondering how you can tell a story with visuals? To learn how your business can benefit from visual storytelling, I interview Ekaterina Walter for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ekaterina Walter, chief marketing officer at Branderati and author of Think Like Zuck. Her newest book is called The Power of Visual Storytelling. Ekaterina shares why storytelling is important for your business. You'll discover how to get started, the type of visuals that work and brands that do it well. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Visual Storytelling How did you fall into visual storytelling? Ekaterina explains how her job at Intel for the last 5 years was building social business, and it was during her final 3 years there that she started to notice the perfect shift to visual storytelling. So for her, visual storytelling was a natural progression. Several years ago, she started to look at the data and usage of visuals versus the usage of just text and links. This led to her first blog post on Fast Company, called The Rise of Visual Social Media. You'll hear why this particular article led Ekaterina to write more on this subject. Ekaterina believes that the reason why visuals are so well-received is that we are moving into a world that is inundated with information. There are filters that allow us to stand out from the noise. One of them, in Ekaterina's view, is visual marketing and visual storytelling. Listen to the show to find out what term Ekaterina uses for the world we are moving into. What is visual storytelling and why should marketers consider it for their business? The way that visual storytelling is defined in Ekaterina's new book, The Power of Visual Storytelling, is the use of images, video, infographics and potentially presentations and other visuals in social media. The use of visuals on social media platforms can help you craft a graphic story around your brand's key values and offerings. It helps show who you are as a brand and makes consumers want to connect with you. With the rise of millennials (digital natives and the younger generation), it's essential that they not only know what you offer or how useful a product is, but also how they can be part of the movement and fit within that tribe. It's what visual storytelling allows you to do. It's how you reach that emotional connection with your customers. Recently, Jason Miller of LinkedIn created a widely shared infographic titled, A Well-Balanced Blog. The reason why this type of content works is that it's simple thinking. Our brains process visuals 60,000 times faster than text. About 93% of all communication is nonverbal. You'll hear an example of how you can gather a story from an image, rather than a word on its own. The emotional connection is critical. Studies show that blog posts with visuals drive up to 180% more engagement than those without. This means that a visual image can allow people to digest your content, then decide if they want to continue to read the article. The amount of information that is produced every 48 hours is the same amount that was produced from the beginning of time up until 2003. Every year, our attention span becomes shorter. Now it's about 3-8 seconds. Therefore you need to grab people's attention immediately. Sephora is a great example of a brand that uses images very well.

5 Creative Ways to Use Snapchat Geofilters for Business

5 Creative Ways to Use Snapchat Geofilters for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Looking for new ways to increase your Snapchat visibility? Have you thought about using Snapchat geofilters? When applied creatively, Snapchat geofilters can help you increase brand awareness, engage your community, and reach new audiences. In this article, you'll discover five unique ways to use Snapchat geofilters for business. Listen to this article: Why Geofilters? Snapchat's rise has been meteoric. Over 100 million users watch 10 billion video clips daily. The platform has transformed video storytelling, and its native tools have incredible social media marketing value. Now, you can create your own specific geofilters and use them to advertise to your audience. Snapchat geofilters are the perfect way to harness your audience's attention, because they're already digesting your content. Geofilters make it easier for your audience to engage and promote your product or brand organically. Here are some ways to use Snapchat geofilters for your business. #1: Announce New Product Launches When launching a new product, you want to encourage your community to find out more about it and ultimately make a purchase. By using a Snapchat geofilter, you're showing your audience that your products are important and worthy of branded filters. You're also adding a marketing element that connects the audience emotionally to the brand. Everlane's Elevate Summer used branded geofilters for its summer collection. The company also partnered with magazine editors for Snapchat takeovers. On the Everlane Snapchat account, the editors gave their opinions on collection favorites. With this approach, you can showcase the importance of a new product line and give real-time insights to your community on what products to check out. When you want to catch the eye of your audience for new products, create a Snapchat geofilter. #2: Share Company Culture To promote company culture and your business offerings, you can create a Snapchat geofilter for your office. Employees could become your biggest digital advocates as they use the geofilter to share with their communities. You can encourage employees to share behind-the-scenes events at your company or interview colleagues about their favorite parts of their job. This one-to-many sharing can impact your company in a positive way and your reach will be exponential. Sharing your company's strengths to a larger audience will encourage top talent to want to join the team. For Partner Day, HubSpot created a special geofilter using their signature orange hue. Employees and partners used the geofilter to highlight the best moments of the day. To encourage sharing, design a geofilter as a digital name tag that will allow users to insert text about who they are and what they do. Empower your employees to engage on Snapchat with a branded geofilter. It will help boost company morale and audience reach. #3: Promote Charity Events Using geofilters for live events creates an inclusive element that bonds the community. For charity events, they can help build awareness for a cause. Creating Snapchat geofilters for events will add an element of surprise and delight for your guests and will allow people to share the event in real time. They can also increase visibility and messaging in a fun and effective way. Imprint.City, a non-profit focusing on cultivating community through art, hosted a masquerade charity event to raise awareness. Because the attendees were already going to use social media at the event, organizers created a Snapchat filter to make the event more digitally accessible. Many community influencers used the filter, which helped spread the word about the organization and its cause. You can also use the snaps taken by your guests for future marketing materials. Promote them on other social networks or in pamphlets for fundraising efforts. #4: Support Your Presence at Trade Shows Getting prospects to your booth at trade shows can be a str...

Preparing to sell your products online

Preparing to sell your products online


Wells Fargo Works for Small Business

Tips for selling your products in an online marketplace.

25 Trending Products to Sell for Black Friday Cyber Monday 2017

by Nicole Martins Ferreira @ Oberlo

The holiday season is the best time to start your first store. We’ve compiled a list of trending products for Black Friday and Cyber Monday 2017 so you’ll know what you could sell if you’re just getting started. These products have been trending upwards making them great products for new […]

The post 25 Trending Products to Sell for Black Friday Cyber Monday 2017 appeared first on Oberlo.

5 Ways to Use Snapchat for Business

5 Ways to Use Snapchat for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you thinking of adding Snapchat to your social media marketing mix? Interested in ways to use Snapchat to strengthen your brand? With Snapchat, you can increase community engagement and brand awareness through innovative marketing campaigns. In this article you'll discover five ways to use Snapchat for business. Why Snapchat? With over 100 million daily active users and 400 million snaps per day, Snapchat is one of the fastest-growing social networks. As you might already assume, 71% of Snapchat's U.S. users fall into the 18 to 34 age range. Even if your audience doesn't fall in that demographic, Snapchat is becoming a vital part of global marketing strategies. Listen to this article: Brands and content creators are using Snapchat to produce daily stories that engage and excite audiences. Snapchat stories, which last only 24 hours, are a string of snaps used to create a video narrative. There are over 1 billion views of Snapchat stories each day. You can have a lot of fun with the platform's native tools and features by adding filters, geofilters, text, emojis, music and more, all from within the platform. Here are five ways you can use Snapchat to surprise and delight your audience and grow awareness for your brand. #1: Provide Access to Live Events Snapchat is perfect for real-time social media marketing because it can give the audience direct access to live events. You can use it for product launches, trade shows or one-of-a-kind events like the 1,000th customer to shop in your store. Snapchat gets your audience excited because you're providing a different, more authentic view of what's going on at the event. The NBA has used Snapchat in a variety of ways including at the Draft, All-Star Game and Finals. At the 2014 All-Star Game, the NBA launched their presence on Snapchat, and fans were able to watch videos from L.A. Clippers star Chris Paul, and up-close snaps of the Slam Dunk Contest. During the 2014 Finals, the NBA posted a backstage video clip of Boston Celtics legend Bill Russell with San Antonio Spurs star Kawhi Leonard. #2: Deliver Private Content You can also use Snapchat to provide special content to your audience that they might not receive on other digital platforms. Think of something unique to surprise your community of followers. Fashion brands like Rebecca Minkoff and Michael Kors have used Snapchat to debut their collections to followers before they hit the runway. At a Valentino show for Fashion Week in Paris, actors Ben Stiller and Owen Wilson took it a step further and reprised their Zoolander roles as Derek Zoolander and Hansel for a runway walk-off. They even had a "Blue Steel" geofilter at the fashion show. The use of Snapchat at Fashion Week made consumers feel included in an exclusive world, and by doing so, they felt like they were part of the event. #3: Offer Contests, Perks or Promotions Everyone loves social media giveaways and promotions, so think of ways you can keep your followers coming back for more. For example, you could offer promo codes or discounts to the fans who watch your entire Snapchat story, or ask them to take a snap while holding your product. GrubHub succeeds in Snapchat community engagement with a variety of promotions, exclusive deals and contests. In fact, they were the first brand to execute a Snapchat scavenger hunt. Each day during the five-day campaign, they asked their followers to post a daily snap, whether it was a food selfie or a food doodle. This innovative campaign showcased GrubHub's brand personality and created two-way communication between consumers and the brand. The company was able to capture user-generated content while increasing loyalty, which is a recipe for Snapchat success. #4: Take People Behind the Curtain With Snapchat, you can provide behind-the-scenes content to your community, which helps create and engage a strong following.

Viral Videos: How to Create and Promote Videos People Love

Viral Videos: How to Create and Promote Videos People Love

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you struggle to create and promote videos? Are you wondering how to make videos that go viral? To learn about the creative process of coming up with video ideas and making them happen, I interview Mark Malkoff for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Mark Malkoff, a comedian and filmmaker. Mark shares his love and passion for creating videos and several amazing stories behind his viral videos. You'll learn about his process for creating video and how to get traction. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Video Creation and Promotion Mark has created several viral videos and has been featured on many television shows. You'll hear about the stories behind these videos and what he accomplished to get this media attention. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CwYxuV2dVzw Mark shares how he grew up in love with comedy, the path he took before he started making videos and how he started making viral videos. Mark describes himself as a comedian at heart and the biggest comedy nerd. He feels that his love for comedy shines through in his work. The stories behind Mark's videos You'll hear the story behind Mark's first very successful video: the 171 Starbucks mentioned above. This is when he visited and consumed purchases at all 171 Starbucks locations in Manhattan in less than 24 hours. Just after this 171 Starbucks story, Mark approached IKEA with a project of living and working in an IKEA store for a week. And after 2 months of being persistent, they agreed. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Z9q0sB_Xp6A Mark's IKEA story brought the most publicity in the USA in the history of IKEA as a company. And IKEA ended up winning the PR Week of the Year Award for the campaign. But to Mark, it was all about the video content and his videos on this project got 1.8 million views. Listen to the show to discover the secrets behind his success. The goals behind Mark's videos You'll learn how Mark's goal is simply to do things that make him laugh and challenge him. Sometimes brands are involved and sometimes they aren't. Mark tells the story of when he got carried across New York City by 155 individuals, 9.4 miles in 11-degree weather. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Gi4ClspNrNs The aim of this video was to prove to the world that New Yorkers are nice. The video was a success. Sometimes brands come to him and other times he has to knock on their doors. Listen to the show to find out why Ford Motor Company was one of the best brands Mark has worked with.  The process of creating a viral video Mark shares his process to come up with ideas for the videos he makes. You'll learn how he goes from the ideas to creating a video project. And you'll probably be surprised by the amount of research and training involved behind the scenes for Mark's videos. Mark shares his experience of having hours of video and trying to tell the story in a short video for YouTube. Listen to the show to find out how he tests his videos. The story in the video Mark explains how it's his own curiosity that resonates with his audience. The story behind the Apple Store Challenge was to see what he could get away with in the Apple store. The video got over 1 million views on YouTube. Parts of the challenge included taking a goat into the store, ordering a pizza to be delivered there, dressing up as Darth Vader to get his iPhone repaired and a date night for him and his wife.

Sharing: The Art and Science of Social Sharing

Sharing: The Art and Science of Social Sharing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create content for your business? Want to encourage people to share it? To explore the art and science of social sharing, I interview Bryan Kramer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Bryan Kramer, a social strategist and founder of PureMatter, a social media agency. His first book is Human to Human and his newest book is Shareology: How Sharing is Powering the Human Economy. Bryan will explore social sharing and what marketers need to know. You'll discover the different types of people who share, as well as mistakes people make when sharing. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Sharing Why Bryan wrote Shareology Bryan explains that he started working on Shareology before he wrote Human to Human. "H2H was a surprise baby," Bryan says. He set Shareology aside and continued with the other, because the Human to Human philosophy seemed to resonate more. Plus, he says, Human to Human provides the best platform used for sharing and not the other way around. Shareology, which is two years in the making, is the study of how, what, where, when and why people and brands share. As a self-proclaimed anthropologist, Bryan has a lot of interest in the subject. Bryan says he always asks his audience what class they took on sharing. In kindergarten, kids learn how to share their toys, but that's about it. It's a skill people learn on top of school, and is part of some classes, like communications, but is not a focus. Social sharing comes in many different flavors, he explains. Meerkat and Periscope are new flavors, but there are so many more. Shareology focuses on the evolution of sharing: the past, present and future. Listen to the show to learn how people shared articles before social media. Why people share For the book Bryan did more than 250 interviews with executives, marketers and social media people, as well as professors of linguistics, psychology, sociology and so on, with the question "why people share" in mind. The answer came down to one thing: connection. People all have the desire to reach out and connect with other people, whether it's through sharing content and having someone reply back or by sharing other people's content and helping them out. These are the six types of people who share: Altruist: Someone who shares something specific about one topic all the time. Careerist: Someone who wants to become a thought leader in their own industry, so they can see their career grow. Hipster: Someone who likes to try things for the first time and share it faster than everyone else. Boomerang: Someone who asks a question so they can receive a comment only to reply. (This can be a troll, but not necessarily. It can be a positive or a negative situation.) Connector: Someone who likes to connect one or more persons to each other. Selective: This is the observer, which some people call a lurker. The majority of the internet observes and then selectively picks pieces to direct or private message other people. Bryan says, while people ebb and flow between different types, we all tend to lean toward one. For example, tech evangelist Robert Scoble is primarily a Hipster, but it doesn't mean he isn't a Careerist or a Selective too. Bryan also touches on the future of sharing. Bryan interviewed the chief scientist of Watson Analytics and learned the computer system Watson (the computer that defeated the other players in Jeopardy!) will be able to tweet in such a way that you'll never know if it's a person or a computer.

Organic, Healthy Food Delivery Online - Thrive Market

Organic, Healthy Food Delivery Online - Thrive Market


Thrive Market

Buy healthy food from top-selling, organic brands at wholesale prices. Shop for gluten-free, non-gmo, non-toxic products for a wide range of diets including paleo, vegan, and raw.

Facebook Ads and Beyond: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Ads and Beyond: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook ads? Are you wondering how paid Facebook marketing can work for your business? To learn about Facebook EdgeRank and paid Facebook marketing, I interview Jon Loomer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Jon Loomer, who blogs about advanced Facebook marketing at Jon Loomer.com. Jon used to do social media work for the the NBA and American Cancer Society before going out on his own in 2011. Jon shares what efficient targeting means for marketers and the metrics involved. You'll learn creative ways to generate more business on a minimal budget. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Advertising EdgeRank and why it's important Jon explains how EdgeRank is the unofficial term for Facebook's sorting algorithm. You don't see everything that's published in your news feed. It depends on your affinity, your connection with specific people and pages, how you interacted with a specific content type in the past and the 'weight' given to posts. The EdgeRank algorithm as described by WhatIsEdgeRank.com. Over time, the older something is, the less likely that you'll see it in the news feed. And in a perfect world, EdgeRank helps you see what you want to see. You'll discover as a marketer what you need to do to make sure your fans see your content and how EdgeRank can help you rise to the top. Listen to the show to find out what you need to do to encourage your fans to act on your Facebook updates. Facebook metrics marketers should pay attention to As a marketer, it depends what your goals are on Facebook. Jon explains that he is a publisher, and when people visit his website, he makes money. So for him, the more traffic the better. You'll find out why Jon focuses on consumption and a stat called link clicks. Jon explains that consumption is any type of click, whether it resulted in a story or not. It could be a comment, like or share, but it could also be a photo click, video play, link click or any other click. Remember Facebook records them all. You'll hear an example of the post-level export lists for all reposts over a given time period. You can look at it post by post, posts that had the most consumption and quantity of clicks. With a time decay on Facebook updates, Jon shares what you need to do to make sure you reach people in completely different time zones with your most popular links to help you reach a new audience. Listen to the show to find out the best time to reshare a post, with time decay in mind. Facebook targeting for marketers Over the last few months Facebook has made it easy for you to target your updates to different audiences. Jon explains there are two different forms of targeting. You can target your posts or you can target your ads. You'll hear why Jon is not a big fan of post targeting. Where Facebook targeting really comes alive is within advertising. Facebook constantly releases something new to make it incredibly powerful. On the Facebook advertising side, Jon reveals some of the newer things that Facebook has done with targeting. Last year when the Custom Audiences feature was first rolled out, it allowed you to target your offline customer list with email addresses you'd collected, phone numbers or Facebook UIDs. These are people who have proven to subscribe to your content or bought something from you in the past. Whether or not they are your fans,

How Snapchat and Periscope Can Grow a Business

How Snapchat and Periscope Can Grow a Business

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to use Snapchat for business? Wondering how to incorporate your brand into live stories? To explore how to use Periscope and Snapchat for business, I interview John Kapos. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview John Kapos, part of a long family line of chocolatiers who have run Perfection Chocolates in Australia since 1939. Online he's known as Chocolate Johnny. He's very active on Snapchat, Instagram, and Periscope. John shares how marketing on Snapchat has affected his business. You'll discover creative ideas to help your own business succeed with Periscope, Snapchat, and Instagram Stories. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How Snapchat and Periscope Can Grow a Business How John Got Started With Snapchat John shares that his store in Sydney, Australia gets bombarded with kids at the end of the school day, and he had begun to notice his sons and their friends using Snapchat. Even though he was told he's "too old" for Snapchat, he decided to take a chance. John, a self-described early adopter, started on Facebook and then got involved with Instagram. While he felt Instagram was cleaner, nicer, and crisper, he loved the functionality of Snapchat. For example, it let him do a video and include titles, add music, and so on. In the beginning, John posted photos of customers and chocolate, as well as videos of him introducing himself and making treats. In one of those early promos, he posted a picture and told his followers to screenshot it and then come in for a free hot chocolate. Two people did just that, and John shares that he's had as many as 60 people come to the store in response to a similar promotion. Now, John explains, his Snapchat stories all have a beginning, a middle, and an end, and all have a tie to chocolate. Each story also has a call to action such as Come to Perfection Chocolates, Come to the website, Come to meet me, or Be part of the party. For example, a Snapchat promotion of his Star Wars chocolate products began with an image of Han Solo and the text, "I'm in a dilemma. Help Me." The middle was an explanation of what John was making. The story ended with a call to action: "Please screenshot and tell me which one is better: milk chocolate or dark chocolate." A total of 63 people responded. Listen to the show to discover how using Snapchat has turned John's store into a global brand. Working Your Brand Into Snapchat Stories Everyone has a story, John believes, and he says it's all about getting out of your comfort zone and telling your story. People tell John he's got an advantage because he's promoting chocolate, and everybody loves chocolate. However, John doesn't think that should make a difference, and shares that he's helped a dentist create funny stories that make children want to come and see him, and a mechanic in New Zealand build a story around how to change a tire. John reiterates that anyone can create stories with any product, they just have to step out of the box. For example, he explains, spotting a large chocolate Easter egg in his store inspired a Snapchat video about two chocolate rabbits that mated to produce a 10-pound chocolate egg, out of which came a white chocolate elephant. John also creates stories about his characters, Johnny Chocolate, a chocolate 'dealer'; Johnny's bodyguard, Frankie; and Johnny's drag-queen girlfriend, Vanilla Chocolate. Listen to the show to hear what happened when John set out to prove he could go a week without using chocolate in his snaps.

7 Ways to Use Facebook Native Video to Better Connect With Your Fans

7 Ways to Use Facebook Native Video to Better Connect With Your Fans

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you create videos to connect with your audience? Are you using Facebook native video? When you publish videos to Facebook, the result is high visibility and a greater likelihood of engagement. In this article I'll share seven ways to connect with your audience using Facebook native video. Listen to this article: #1: Preview Long-Form Content An effective use of Facebook native video is long-form content previews. If you have a long video you plan to share, choose a highlight to use as a preview to post on Facebook. This little chunk of video gives your audience a taste of what they'll get in the complete video.   A 10- to 15-minute video is too long to capture the attention of the average Facebook user. A 1- to 2-minute preview video is the perfect length for Facebook consumption. If viewers are intrigued, they're directed to your YouTube channel to watch the full video. #2: Share Daily Tips, Tactics and Advice When building an audience, consistency is incredibly important. Your audience appreciates your perspective, experience and expertise. The more often you can deliver value to your audience, the more often you'll get value back from them.   Since engagement with a Facebook page is often cited as a relevancy factor in Facebook's EdgeRank algorithm, daily videos that inspire interaction from fans can drastically improve audience reach. Remember, however, that value is the most important factor. #3: Record Videos on Location The ability to easily upload and share videos from a smartphone to Facebook leads to an incredible opportunity. Record and share reports, news and updates from conferences and other events instantly with your Facebook audience. While Facebook native video doesn't have the streaming capabilities of Periscope and Meerkat, the ease of capture, upload and distribution from your smartphone makes Facebook video nearly real-time.   Immediately publishing conference interviews, on-location tours or other behind-the-scenes content to Facebook also gives your non-attendees an experience that's the next best thing to being there. #4: Answer Audience Questions Create a more engaging experience for your Facebook audience by answering their questions in a video and posting it directly to Facebook. Fans and customers frequently reach out to you as an industry expert. Sometimes a video is a more effective way to communicate than a blog post, especially if it's a question you get asked over and over again.   Answering the question in video takes less time than writing a blog post and allows you to explain in a clear, direct manner. Using video also provides a personal and thoughtful touch that a few sentences of text never could. #5: Create Brief Explainer Videos Short videos work well on Facebook. Think of how average Facebook users consume content on the platform. They keep scrolling until something interesting gets them to stop. Even then, viewers want something quick and easy to consume before they move on to the next thing. A 45- to 90-second explainer video is a great piece of content to attract attention and awareness to your brand without detracting from the Facebook experience. Don't expect Facebook users to take direct action from an explainer video they consume in their news feed. But that's not really the point. This is just one more branded touch point on the path to conversion that cuts down on time during the sales cycle. #6: Create Video Ads The Facebook advertising platform provides marketers the ability to generate ads with Video Views as the goal. Using Facebook’s Power Editor, marketers can build entire ad campaigns using video and optimize the advertising spend for increased video views. Video ads can include a direct call to action (CTA) such as Shop Now, Learn More and Sign Up. As a best practice, make your CTA relevant to the experience they'll get after clicking the button. For example,

Ten things I’m doing to heal from burnout

by launchgrowjoy @ Launch Grow Joy

During the last 10 years I’ve started 7 businesses and sold 3 and closed down 2, wrote 2 ebooks, spoke at more than 10 conferences, participated in more than 100 webinars, online trainings, telesummits & podcast interviews, traveled to many beautiful places, had 3 children, moved 9 times, bought 3 homes and sold 2 of...

The post Ten things I’m doing to heal from burnout appeared first on Launch Grow Joy.

How to Help Your Staff to Curate Content

How to Help Your Staff to Curate Content

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Is third-party content part of your social media marketing mix? Do you have multiple people in your company who discover content? With the right process, a team can become a content-curation powerhouse. In this article, you'll discover how to set up a collaborative workflow for content curation. Listen to this article: #1: Establish Team Structure Collaboration starts with structure. It's vital to establish clear roles and communicate exactly who's responsible for what. Two roles are needed: a coordinator and a group of contributors. Coordinator The coordinator's job is to identify major topics that your target audience cares about, and to make a master list of how all of these topics can be grouped together. For example: Leadership Social media marketing Online marketing Email marketing Landing pages Conversion rate optimization Product development Pricing strategies Industry news Fun stuff Next, match these topics to the contributors in your company so that they collect and submit content they naturally run into. Contributors Contributors help you generate a diverse flow of all things sharable. As you assemble contributors, remember to look beyond your social media or marketing team. Accessing more cross-discipline sources means you'll have more content to choose from. What matters is quantity, creating what Andy Crestodina calls a "content cannon." Ask specific people for specific amounts of content on designated topics within set timeframes. Hi Tim, The last optimization report you researched turned out great. In fact, I'd love to share many of the helpful resources you found while putting it together on our social channels. The next time you come across something like [article], please send it to me on [collection tool]. Even better, since I know you work on projects like that regularly, please provide me with three posts and an infographic along those same lines by next Friday. Thanks, Aaron This specificity is crucial in the next step. #2: Choose a Content Collection Tool The content your contributors suggest will come in all shapes and sizes: long-form blog posts, short-form posts, quotes, infographics, charts, stats, case studies, slide decks, videos, white papers, and more. For collaborative social media, it's essential to find a tool that allows you to gather and schedule content. Here are some tools to consider for collecting content. Slack Slack allows you to create topic-specific channels such as #leadership, #product-dev, #customer-service, etc. As you create each channel, invite specific contributors based on the types of content they naturally come across. With Slack, you can even create custom emoji reactions to note which channels you plan to share the content on. Trello Use Trello to build a social media collaboration board. You can organize your contributors' suggestions based on the type of content. Or organize your contributors' suggestions based on topics. Memit Memit brings together the clipping and collecting abilities of tools like Evernote and Pocket and will allow multiple users to contribute directly to topical collections. In addition to saving links, you can save contributions directly to your preferred cloud platform. This represents a great two-for-one feature. It allows you to maximize not only social content curation, but also internal curation of useful resources. As the coordinator, you can select and share content directly to platforms like Twitter, Facebook, Google+, and LinkedIn. Metrics are also tracked. Regardless of the tool you select, be sure you can create multiple, manageable collections for each topic and invite contributors to the specific collections. #3: Evaluate Content for Fit It's important that the content you share on social media stands out. For this, your selection process needs some criteria.

12 Creative Ways to Use Facebook Cover Images for Business

12 Creative Ways to Use Facebook Cover Images for Business

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to do more with your Facebook cover image? Wondering how other businesses are using Facebook cover images? Your cover image is the perfect space to tell visitors more about your brand or products or drive home a call to action. In this article, you'll discover 12 creative ways to use your Facebook cover image for business. Listen to this article: #1: Inspire a Purchase You hear a lot about using video to show how people use a product or service. The same opportunities exist with photos. When you show off your product in your Facebook cover image, you're planting ideas with your customers that can inspire them to engage with you. In this cover image, Edible Arrangements puts its product front and center with a "Happy Birthday" message in the background. It's subtle, but you can use this tactic to paint your product in a way that says, "this is something special." It's a clever way to position the colorful display, because we all know someone with a birthday coming up. #2: Share Your Value Proposition Could you define your business in a single second? One of the best and simplest ways to spice up your Facebook cover photo is to challenge yourself to find creative ways to one-line your value proposition and present directly to the people who find your brand on Facebook. That's exactly what EYStudios did with a recent cover photo: a sharp and impactful one-liner that expresses who they are and what they can do. Lee Odden's team at TopRank Marketing shoots for the same impact. #3: Express Your Personality Any kind of visual content is a huge part of marketing, and it's one of the best avenues to show off who you are and the personality behind your business. Your cover photo is a great spot to showcase content that aligns with how you present your brand in other places online. MailChimp uses its cover photo to show off the company's personality, along with some clever use of negative space to fix your attention. #4: Appeal to the Senses Any business in the food industry (restaurants, catering, etc.) has a stellar opportunity to grab attention using enticing photos of their mouth-watering offerings. With seasonal changes that bring about new dishes and menu updates, you can swap out Facebook cover photos to showcase what's new on the menu, along with new promotions. It can be effective to have a call to action to help describe a product and get visitors moving. However, sometimes it doesn't hurt to let the product image speak for itself. Little Caesars takes that route by showing off a close-up of their new stuffed crust deep-dish pizza. In the same vein, Papa John's shows off its product to cater to people who love the look of a mouth-watering pizza. In addition, they saved space to promote a key relationship with Major League Baseball. When customers love a specific thing about your business, especially a certain product, you can leverage that connection in your Facebook cover photo. Olive Garden is confident that their customers are addicted to endless breadsticks and massive salads. So, customer favorites are featured in a zoomed-in shot, which makes you feel like you're sitting right at the table. It's cruel, but effective. #5: Speak to a Niche Audience For product-based businesses, the Facebook cover photo is a perfect way to feature new or seasonal products, along with your newest and grandest promotions. To maximize impact, include compelling copy and information about the products along with release dates and calls to action. Logitech G, a company known for computer accessories, used their cover photo to promote a specific line of products. They've highlighted an affiliation with the ESL (Electronic Sports League) to promote products for gamers. Like the Papa John's cover, this kind of affiliation can improve a business's position with specific customers. #6: Inspire Creativity

Facebook Reactions: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Reactions: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you seen the new Facebook reactions? Wondering how they'll affect your Facebook page? Facebook reactions let Facebook users go beyond liking a post by allowing them to choose from six emojis that show different emotions. In this article I'll explore how Facebook reactions work, and how your Facebook page can get the most from them. Listen to this article: Facebook Reactions for Fans The new Facebook reactions work pretty easily for users. When users hover over a post's Like button in the Facebook news feed, a personal profile timeline, or a Facebook page timeline, they will be able to choose from one of the new six Facebook reactions. Everyone can breathe a sigh of relief that Facebook reactions do not include a Dislike button. Hence, people cannot dislike your latest post (product, service, content, etc.). These reactions will simply allow expressions of like, love, laugh, wowed, saddened, or angered by your post. The feature will work similarly for mobile users, but users will hold down the Like button instead of hovering over it. Some mobile app users have noted that you must restart or update your app to get the new feature to work. Others have had to log out of their account and log back in again. Facebook Reactions for Pages From a Facebook page admin perspective, a few things will change. For starters, you'll see in your notifications that people are reacting to your posts instead of just liking them. On the posts themselves, you'll see an array of icons representing the different reactions that people have left on the post. On older posts, you'll see the new icon that represents likes, and on newer posts, you'll see all of the newer icons representing the different reactions that people have. People can also go back to older posts and add new reactions. You can click on the link to see the breakdown of which fans had specific reactions so you can see who likes, loves, and has other feelings about your post. Since page posts are public, it's important to understand that everyone can see the breakdowns of Facebook reactions, including people who are not admins and not even fans of the page. This means that you can go to other pages and see the breakdowns of reactions on their posts as well. This can be useful for competitor research as you can get a good feel for how people will react to specific types of content, status updates, and announcements – especially since you can get a quick summary of the reactions right at the top without having to scroll through the entire list. Note that only Facebook page admins will see the Liked / Invite buttons. If you are not a page admin, you only see Add Friend / Follow buttons next to people's names. So far, Facebook reactions only work on the Like button for the main posts themselves, but not on comments. So don't expect to react to comments anytime soon. In terms of your Facebook page's Insights, you can see the full breakdown of reactions for each of your posts by finding the post and clicking on it. There, you can see the full post details, including the new Facebook reactions counts. From an Insights perspective, Facebook reactions do not count as negative feedback. In other words, an angry reaction isn't categorized in the same area as a Hide Post, Report as Spam, Hide All Post, or Unlike Page. Hence, any reaction can be considered a good one. Now that you know how Facebook reactions work for your fans and for your page, here are some ways to get the most from them. #1: Encourage Fans to Use Reactions People love trying new things. Simply invite your fans to test out the new reactions on your page today. Not only will it teach your fans how to use this feature, but it will also boost your page's overall engagement and organic reach. For example, I initially planned to boost my post to test Facebook reactions, but I ended up canceling the promotion.

Search to Social Ads: How to Use Google With Facebook to Build Niche Audiences

Search to Social Ads: How to Use Google With Facebook to Build Niche Audiences

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Does your business serve a specialized customer base? Wondering how to reach specific niche audiences with Facebook ads? To explore a strategy for retargeting specialized audiences using Google ads in combination with Facebook ads, I interview Shane Sams. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Shane Sams, the co-host of the Flipped Lifestyle podcast, a show focused on helping families make money online. He describes himself as a normal guy from Kentucky who loves helping others. He's also the founder of the Flip Your Life Community. Shane explains how to use website traffic generated by Google ads to retarget Facebook users. You'll discover how highly focused keywords help manage your marketing costs. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Search to Social Ads Shane's Story Shane and his wife Jocelyn met at the University of Kentucky. After graduation, Jocelyn initially worked a corporate job and Shane coached football. They then decided to become schoolteachers, which they did for about 10 years. Shane taught social studies and continued to coach, while Jocelyn was an elementary school librarian. After some bad experiences at work, Shane realized he had traded control of his life for job security. He started looking for other things to do because he knew there had to be a better way. This was in 2012. One day, as Shane and his wife were driving around town, Shane said, "I wonder if I can get 100 people to send me $50." She asked what he was talking about and Shane said that out of the 7 billion people on the planet, surely 100 would give him $50. If they all did that in a month, it would be $5,000, and for 12 months in a row, it would be $60,000. If they could do that every month, they could quit teaching. Shane didn't know how he was going to make this money but he was determined to figure it out. He began seeking information about business. One day while mowing the grass, Shane decided to look up business podcasts. An image of a guy looking at the podcast art with his eyeballs caught Shane's attention. It was Smart Passive Income with Pat Flynn. In the podcast, Pat talked about how he sold a study guide and would email it to people. Shane decided he and Jocelyn could sell PDFs of information. After trying different things online, they were finally able to figure it out. They sold lesson plans to teachers and football playbooks to coaches. A year later, Shane and Jocelyn replaced their income. As soon as they quit their jobs (which they did on September 27, 2013), people started asking questions. For example, Lindsay, a friend of Jocelyn's, quit her job to be a stay-at-home mom and wanted advice on making money online. They helped Lindsay create digital products and she made $1,000 on the Internet in a month. This money enabled Lindsay to be at home with her daughter every day. After Shane and Jocelyn realized their experience and knowledge could change the lives of others, they started Flipped Lifestyle. It has helped a lot of people. People ask why it's called Flipped Lifestyle. Shane explains that everybody flipped out after Jocelyn and he left their jobs, where they had tenure and insurance. Shane recalls how his mom cornered him and said, "Shane Sams, you have babies. You have lost your mind. You have flipped out. And I do not approve of this decision." Hence, Flipped Lifestyle. Listen to the show to hear Shane recall how much sharing online business skills meant to his friends. Why Combine Google Ads With Facebook? Early on, Shane and Jocelyn discovered a lot of the marketing advice available online didn't work for ...

How to Use Pinterest to Connect With a Local Audience

How to Use Pinterest to Connect With a Local Audience

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use Pinterest to build relationships with your audience? Do you want to strengthen ties with your local community? Including a strong geographic focus in your Pinterest marketing can help you create more visibility with people who live or are interested in your locale. In this article you'll discover how to use Pinterest to connect with a local audience. Listen to this article: #1: Add Geographic Information to Your Profile Along with your keyword-rich explanation of what your business does and what you pin, be sure to mention what areas you serve or where your business is located. This helps you show up in Pinterest search results for your area, and lets people know if you're close enough for them to visit or engage your services. If your local business profile is missing this crucial bit of information, click the Edit Profile button to go to your profile. Make sure to enter your location and add more geographic cues in the About You section (think "Serving the Lakes Region of Southern North Carolina") and consider whether your followers might appreciate the extra hint. This is especially helpful if you're a franchisee. Don't limit yourself too much, though. Granite Ridge Estate, a wedding barn, lists their small-town location of Norway, Maine, but also uses "New England" so people searching a broader area have a good chance of discovering them. Adding geographic information may seem like an obvious step, but you'd be surprised how many local businesses leave it out. Suppose you're a photographer looking to attract new business. How will people know if you're close enough to hire if you don't tell them where you are and how far you'll travel? Make it easy for people to find you and buy from you. #2: Optimize Your Boards and Pins for Local Searches Adding your location to the descriptions of individual pins can help people find you when they do a search on Pinterest or Google. That's right, pins (as well as boards and profiles) can be indexed by Google. Include your town or state name in a board or two, as well as any applicable pins. If you serve several areas or your area is known by several names, have a board for any location that people might search for. It's perfectly fine to have more than one board with similar pins. Here's a Granite Ridge Estate pin that pops up in a Google Search for "Maine wedding venue Norway." The exact number of searches performed annually on Pinterest is unclear, but with 100 million users, you can be sure it's significant. VentureBeat reports that the number of Pinterest searches has been increasing by about 81% per year, so it's in your best interest to optimize for search. If you search for "barn wedding new England" on Pinterest, you'll see one of Granite Ridge Estate's boards. The combination of the board title, description, and pins on the board helped the business show up for this search. How can you use this tactic for your business? Wherever appropriate, add your location to your boards, board descriptions, and pin descriptions. If you want people from out of town to find you, think about how people would look for your area. They may not search for Norway, Maine (it's tiny), but they might search for "Southern Maine," "New England," "Maine," or "Southern New England." Using keywords strategically can help ensure your business shows up in location-centered searches. Go through your account and make sure you've used a location wherever it makes sense. For example, if you're a photographer and you pin your work, add the location to the photos in each shoot. Did you take those amazing bridal photos at Scarborough Beach, Maine? Tell people that! #3: Repin and Engage With Fellow Local Businesses Pinterest is more of a search and discovery platform than a true social network. However, there are social elements that allow you to stand out from the crowd of solitary shoppers and pin collectors.

How to Manage Your Facebook Page Effectively

How to Manage Your Facebook Page Effectively

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you manage at least one Facebook business page? Are you using all the admin features? Facebook pages include many tools to help marketers and business owners get the most out of their business presence. In this article I'll share how to use Facebook's features, tools and settings to manage your business page effectively. Listen to this article: #1: Access Your Facebook Pages There are a few ways to access your Facebook pages. To see all of the pages you are linked to as an administrator, editor, moderator, advertiser or analyst, go to your Pages bookmarks. From there, click on the link to the page you want. To use your Facebook page to like other Facebook pages or comment on posts, click to log in as your page. Plus, select the settings wheel icon to add specific pages to your favorites in the left sidebar of your Facebook screen. Alternatively, access your pages using the drop-down arrow in the menu at the top of your Facebook screen. #2: Navigate Your Page Menu At the top of your Facebook page, there's a menu to direct you to the main features of your page. You should see this menu when logged in as your personal profile or as your page. The first item in the menu, Page, will take you back to your Facebook page from your Messages, Notifications, Insights, Publishing Tools and Settings. Here are the rest of the features. Engage With Users Privately Through Messages If you'd like, enable Messages in your General page settings. This will allow Facebook users to send private messages to your page. Note: You can only reply to messages your page has received. You cannot send messages (as your page) to people who have not messaged you. A great feature in Messages is saved replies. Create a template for common responses you can easily personalize to send through your page's private messaging. Click on any of your messages create a new reply. Check Notifications for Recent Engagement Notifications give you a quick summary of people who have engaged with your page, as well as their interaction. If someone asks for your contact information using a prompt on your Facebook page, like the one shown below, you'll find it in Requests under the Notifications section. See a full timeline of activity related to your page, including when other people or pages mention your page and when others share your page's posts, under the Notifications section in Activity. Review Your Analytics With Insights Insights are your Facebook page's analytics. This is where you'll learn more about your fan page audience growth and engagement. Insights show you which page posts get the most engagement, and whether your fans match your ideal customer base (age ranges, gender and location). Plus, learn how people discover your page by clicking the Visits tab. Schedule and Publish Posts Through Publishing Tools The Publishing Tools feature lets you create Facebook updates to be published immediately, schedule posts to be published at a future time and draft posts to save for later. To publish a status, photo, video, offer, event or milestone immediately, go to the Published Posts section and click the Create button at the top right. To schedule a status, photo or video post, go to the Scheduled Posts section and click the Create button at the top right. Use the drop-down next to the Publish button to get schedule, backdate or draft options. Be sure to review your analytics on the Published Posts tab as well. Search by keyword for specific updates to see their statistics. In addition to reach, it includes the name of the application used to publish the post to your page. Use this data to see which posts have the most engagement, and determine if posts shared through your page have more reach than those shared through third-party tools. #3: Configure Page Settings Your page's settings allow you to control everything from visibi...

Meerkat and Periscope: How Businesses Are Using Live Mobile Broadcasting

Meerkat and Periscope: How Businesses Are Using Live Mobile Broadcasting

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you interested in live mobile broadcasting? Have you tried Meerkat or Periscope? To learn about mobile broadcasting apps, I interview Brian Fanzo. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Brian Fanzo, partner and chief digital strategist at Broadsuite, a company that helps businesses succeed with social and mobile marketing. Brian is one of the leading authorities on Meerkat and Periscope. In this episode Brian Fanzo will explore the live mobile broadcasting apps Meerkat and Periscope and what they mean for your business. You'll discover the pros and cons of each platform, as well as how to get started. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Meerkat and Periscope How Brian got started with mobile broadcasting Brian, who calls himself a change evangelist, has a technology background and a love of social media. He is always looking for ways people can leverage technology to be more productive and tell their story in unique ways. Brian likes to jump on every new app: it’ll either fail fast, and he’ll uninstall it or he'll run with it! Mobile broadcasting definitely falls into the later category. Brian shares how he was introduced to Meerkat. He was speaking at the Mobile World Congress in Barcelona, when he got a message from someone who worked at Twitter, telling him that Ashton Kutcher and Gary Vaynerchuck were on a new video app. About 35 seconds later, Brian had downloaded it and clicked the start button. Meerkat came out February 26, 2015, and Brian was on it March 2. Brian took to Meerkat immediately. He put his mobile device on his tripod, hit the stream button, put in the event hashtag and was live. He treated it like he does his regular YouTube videos: walking around, describing the event and sharing it with his audience. About three minutes in, someone commented, “I see the Samsung booth, can you turn to your right.” That’s when Brian realized he didn’t just bring the experience to his audience, he was letting his viewers be a part of it. People in the United States could dictate what they saw in Spain. "It felt interactive, like having a true conversation," he recalls. Since Brian was about to go to South by Southwest,  he put some strategy behind his Meerkating. Brian contacted a couple of brands that were holding different events, and asked for backstory, so he could be prepared to cover them. During SXSW, Brian did a Meerkat of all the sessions he went to, as well as a preview each morning and recap every evening. About 300-800 people watched each stream, no matter what he was talking about. Periscope was released into the Apple store during Social Media Marketing World (the last week of March 2015), and Brian recalls using Periscope for first time during the opening keynote. Listen to the show to hear where Brian was when he heard about Periscope at Social Media Marketing World. How live streaming apps work "Live streaming isn’t anything new," Brian explains. "It’s really just turning on a video and opening the portal to anyone who wants to use it." What's new is the fact that we’re able to download an app, sign in with a Twitter account or phone number, click stream and post the link. Then anybody in your Twitter community can click on that link and watch whatever you’re showing on your phone. The big piece is the mobile aspect. It’s as simple as a basic tweet and hitting the “stream” button. Listen to the show to learn how and where to watch a Meerkat or Periscope live stream. Businesses uses for live broadcasting

How to Use Facebook Ads to Boost Your Best Content

How to Use Facebook Ads to Boost Your Best Content

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you use Facebook ads? Have you considered creating Facebook ads from your top-performing organic posts? To explore how to identify and boost your best Facebook content, I interview Larry Kim. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Larry Kim, the founder and chief technology officer for WordStream. He's a frequent blogger, pay-per-click expert, and social advertising ninja. Larry explains how to improve the performance of your best content with Facebook advertising. You'll discover how to budget for Facebook ads. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Use Facebook Ads to Boost Your Best Content Larry's Backstory Larry's company, WordStream, does search engine and social media advertising, and Larry believes that it's important for businesses to do both types. For instance, B2B software companies build new features, functions, and solutions that nobody is searching for yet. However, with social ads, these businesses can target people who are likely to buy their software based on demographics, interests, or behaviors. Unlike an individual advertiser who has data about only one business, Larry is able to spot trends and patterns in online advertising because WordStream manages approximately $1 billion of ad spending across Facebook, Bing, and Google and runs thousands of campaigns for different clients. WordStream analyzes all of these campaigns to figure out data such as the typical cost per click and typical engagement rates. Listen to the show to discover the percentage of WordStream's clients using Facebook advertising. How Algorithms Work To understand the algorithms, Larry says it's important to think about the context in which your ad appears. (Our conversation focuses on Facebook, but Larry says the same is true for ads on Twitter and other social media platforms.) When you sponsor or promote a post, you're one of thousands or even millions of companies going after the same audience. Larry explains that the Facebook algorithm is designed to handle that volume in a way that keeps Facebook engaging for users so they come back. To determine which posts to show users and how much to charge the advertiser, Larry believes that the algorithm looks at many different factors, but the main one is engagement (clicks, likes, comments, or shares). A post with low engagement has an engagement rate of 1% to 2%. (Only 1 or 2 people out of 100 engage with the post.) A high-engagement post has a rate of 10% to 15%, and the average is around 2.5% to 3%. Larry emphasizes that Facebook doesn't want users' news feeds filled with ridiculous updates that no one cares about. A company trying to promote garbage content with low engagement rates will be dinged with very few ad impressions. The ad might not even be shown. If the ad does show, the click-through rate will be expensive (a few dollars per click versus a few cents). The reverse is also true. Facebook rewards companies that promote interesting content by showing their ads and charging only pennies per click. Listen to the show to hear Larry's thoughts about how engaging ad content needs to be compared to organic content. Unicorns Because algorithms reward engaging content, Larry believes that the winning advertising strategy is simple: promote your unicorns. These outlier posts do spectacularly well. They get three to five times more traffic than the average post and are among the top 1% to 3% of your most engaging content. For instance, a unicorn post might have a 20% engagement rate,

How to Create a Facebook Video Ad That Moves People to Action

How to Create a Facebook Video Ad That Moves People to Action

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Facebook video ads for your business? Want to improve your conversions? Well-structured video ads command viewers' attention and prompt them to take action. In this article you'll discover five steps to crafting the perfect Facebook video ad. Listen to this article: Why Facebook Video Ads? Facebook's head of ad product Ted Zagat recently said that a year or two from now, Facebook will be mostly video. This is likely the reason why we're seeing so many great new features for video advertisers. When you create a new ad campaign in Power Editor, you can choose from a number of objectives for your video ads: Clicks to Website, Page Post Engagement, Video Views and Website Conversions. Facebook is continuously adding new options as well. For example, Facebook automatically creates custom audience lists of people who've viewed your video ad. Until recently, these lists would be created only if you chose Video Views as the campaign objective. But now, if you use another objective (Website Conversions, for example), these video engagement lists will also be created automatically. This means you can easily retarget these groups of people later, similarly to retargeting your website visitors. Writing a Video Ad Script To create a video ad, you have a lot of different options. Of course, you can use a recording of yourself (or hire someone to do it for you), but you don't have to. Using videos with animated text, images and music can be equally (if not more) effective. To create strong ads, it's important to get your targeting right, and communicate a powerful message. This article walks you through a framework you can use to create the perfect Facebook video ad script with only five lines of text. For each line, you have a specific goal: grab attention, build interest, elicit desire, create conviction or add a call to action. To guide you through this method, you'll follow the creation of an example video ad for a free recipe guide, with the goal of growing your email list. #1: Grab Attention How do you grab attention in today's attention-deficit world? Start with a question. You want to immediately focus on the main pain point or desire that your target audience is experiencing right now. What are your customers' biggest problems or struggles? What are they frustrated about? What are their biggest wishes? For this step, it's important to focus not only on the problem or desire, but also on how that makes people feel. When you do this correctly, you have what's called an audience-to-problem match. You want people to instantly recognize themselves and say, "Hey, that's me!" If they do, they'll likely be curious about what else you have to say. The ad above tackles a typical frustration that a lot of people can relate to: struggling to eat healthy. #2: Build Interest Once you've successfully captured your viewers' attention, you need a way to keep it so they'll watch the rest of your ad. In this second phase of the script, hint at your solution by creating an open loop. You want to paint a picture for viewers that it is indeed possible to get rid of that problem or struggle. At the same time, you don't want to reveal what the actual solution is. Only hint at it for now. This ad creates interest by using the words "new" and "easy." Can you see how this approach is creating an open loop in your viewers' minds? If they're still watching at this point, they'll likely want to know what that new and easy method is. #3: Cultivate Desire For this line of the script, create desire for your product or service. Describe your offer in a way that makes it sound amazing and like something viewers must have. To do this, focus on a specific benefit of your product, or how it's different from the alternatives out there. How-to and step-by-step guides are always popular because they help people solve specific issues.

Mobile Local Marketing: Reaching the Mobile Customer

Mobile Local Marketing: Reaching the Mobile Customer

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a local business? Want an effective way to market to people who are near you? To explore how to reach your customers with mobile marketing, I interview Rich Brooks. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Rich Brooks, author of The Lead Machine: The Small Business Guide to Digital Marketing. He's also host of The Agents of Change podcast and The Agents of Change Digital Marketing Conference. Rich explores how local businesses can use mobile marketing to deliver relevant messaging to their customers. You'll discover how to combine mobile marketing with social media. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Mobile Local Marketing The Importance of Mobile In 2017, every business should focus on mobile, Rich says, especially businesses with physical locations and a local audience. Mobile is important because people always have their devices by their side. For example, when Rich takes his daughter to volleyball practices in different towns, he uses Waze on his phone to get directions. Then after dropping her off, he goes to Yelp to find a coffeehouse or asks Google or Siri to find the nearest supermarket so he can go shopping. While he waits in line, Rich explores Facebook, Twitter, or Instagram; plays a game; or reads a news article. Because people are always on their phones, local businesses can attract customers who are looking for information on the go and making immediate decisions. If those people are in your area, you can capture their business with a strong mobile presence. Listen to the show for more about how potential customers use mobile. Mobile Offers and SMS Messages To engage people on mobile, Rich says you can create mobile offers, which are being redeemed at 10 times the rate of old print coupons. Mobile offers take many forms. You can run a Facebook campaign on mobile, promote an offer that's available on a mobile device, or tell people they can download a deal onto their phones and show it at the counter. Another option is SMS text messaging. Rich explains that SMS offers work a lot like email marketing. For example, a pizzeria can send people discounts. A massage therapist near Rich gives customers who opt into SMS text messages first dibs on appointment times that open up due to last-minute cancellations. To send SMS marketing messages, you start by finding an SMS marketing vendor in your area. These vendors work similarly to email marketing vendors, such as MailChimp, Constant Contact, AWeber, and smaller local players. Your vendor assigns you a short code and customers opt into your SMS messages by texting that code and confirming they want to receive your messages. Rich says a pizza restaurant might tell customers, "Text Pizza to 004400." After you're set up to send messages, you can start building your SMS marketing list. Rich emphasizes that people will sign up to receive messages only if you offer an incentive for signing up. For a pizza business, that incentive might be a dollar off, a free topping, or free delivery. Rich suggests promoting your SMS list on your social media profiles, website, flyers, and product packaging (such as pizza boxes). Rich says you can expect a smaller but more engaged audience for your SMS messages. Fewer people will opt in, but right now those who do are much more likely to look at their text messages immediately. Rich predicts that engagement with SMS messages may drop off if people become overwhelmed with text messages, but says that currently SMS is still fairly new and can be a boon to a local business.

Facebook Marketing Mistakes: What to Avoid and Why

Facebook Marketing Mistakes: What to Avoid and Why

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you struggling to make Facebook marketing work for your business? Many marketers don't know how to connect with their audience on Facebook in a meaningful way for their business. To learn how to get Facebook marketing right, I interview Brian Carter for our new Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This New Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a brand-new show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Brian Carter, author of The Like Economy and LinkedIn for Business. Brian shares insights into the common struggles and misconceptions marketers have with Facebook marketing today. You'll learn what to focus your efforts on and a few simple tactics that work. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Marketing for Business The misconceptions marketers have about Facebook. Brian explains why constant promotion is boring and what marketers should do instead. He describes how marketers should be using Facebook, and if you are not already on Facebook how to check it out and interact. You'll learn why it's all about selling the dream and bridging the gap. One thing to do is to have a vision of the life that your customer is trying to live and portray that through photos and maybe even videos. Brian shares some examples of businesses doing this well.  One of these businesses creates their own someecards. Discover how you can test this kind of tactic in your Facebook marketing. Listen to the show to find out how you can create cool stuff to get people to start sharing more of your content. The biggest mistakes marketers repeatedly make on Facebook. Brian describes the 5 things you need to do to sell on Facebook as shown on his Facebook Diagram below and outlines the mistakes marketers make at each one of these steps. Once you have your fans and you have reached them, you still need to persuade them. Listen to the show to find out how to make Facebook marketing work for your business. The Facebook metrics you need to pay attention to and why Consider the possibility that your business might be having trouble because people may not be aware of you or they're not engaging. You might not be showing up in their news feed or maybe you're showing but they're not buying for some reason. Look at the metrics to figure out which part you're having trouble with. You'll learn how to balance the number of fans on your Facebook page with the effective reach of your Facebook marketing and what Brian considers "trash-can metrics." Listen to the show to learn how to determine the metrics that matter most to your business. How B2B businesses can approach Facebook marketing Brian discusses the different options to target B2B customers on Facebook and feed people into your sales funnel. When it comes to ads, you need to have passionate fans. Your fans have to be passionate, affordable and they need to be buyers.  Discover how to get to know your customers in Facebook terms. Ask "What other things do your customers like?" There are a couple of tools for finding out your fans' likes: Optim.al and Infinigraph. Listen to the show to find out more about qualifying your audience on Facebook. Brian shares his best Facebook marketing tip: Share a photo and give a call to action such as "Click Like if..." To find out more about Facebook, check out our first podcast episode with Mari Smith, who shares insights on Facebook mobile. Survival Tip: Use Images on Facebook Recently Mari Smith and I experimented with this and it really does work. If you want to get maximum exposure for what you share on Facebook, use images to dominate Facebook news feeds.

5 Tips for Selling Products on Instagram

5 Tips for Selling Products on Instagram

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you wondering how to sell your products on Instagram? Want some tips to get started? To make the most of interactions with customers on Instagram, your images and descriptions need to stand out and purchasing needs to be as easy as possible. In this article you'll discover five tips for selling your products on Instagram. Listen to this article: #1: Develop a Signature Look Before you start posting, think about how you want to position your products on your page. The right product placement is key to driving Instagram sales and engagement. Identify the aesthetic you want for your page and stick to it. Once you have your product shots, use Instagram's internal filters or an app like VSCO Cam to make your photos visually sharper and clearer. Remember that you want to showcase the true product to your customers, so sometimes no filter works best in social selling. If you want to show one product in a variety of ways, try the Instagram Layout app. The app makes it easy to combine multiple images into a single image. Use it to show your product at different angles, which is particularly useful for fashion and jewelry businesses. Rocksbox showcases their products in an effective and consistent manner on their Instagram page. They feature close-ups of their products or have a model wear them. People can really see the products and find out how to incorporate them in their everyday fashion. #2: Give Product Descriptions Something Extra While it's important to be clear about what you're selling, you also need to attract the attention and interest of likely customers with your descriptions. One way to do that is to add a few relevant emojis. They help break up the copy and work well with an emoji-obsessed demographic. Birchbox uses emojis to detail their products and how to purchase them. Here, the emojis help viewers understand what scents are in each perfume. #3: Promote Product Visibility in Search With Hashtags Hashtags have a lot to do with how your products get discovered on Instagram. You can use Instagram's Search and Explore feature to view the top hashtags for your demographic and vertical, and then use three to five of them in your social selling campaigns. Don't forget to create and use your own branded hashtag, too. Do a daily search for that hashtag to see who's using it, and consider regramming the best photos or videos from fans on your own marketing platforms. Use the Regram app to easily feature your customers' photos on your Instagram feed. #4: Make Purchasing Easy Now it's time to convert your followers into customers. Use an Instagram selling tool like Have2Have.It to add a shoppable link to your Instagram bio. This will eliminate the clunky user experience created when you include a website or Bitly link in your product posts. By clicking on the link in your bio, followers are taken to a page (with the same look and feel as your Instagram page) where they can purchase your products. You can import your products from ecommerce databases like Shopify and WooCommerce into Instagram, and analyze the results so you know what products are converting. Then you can focus on promoting those products to increase sales. The Have2Have.It dashboard also includes conversion tracking, so you can attribute revenue to the platform itself. For social media managers trying to prove ROI for Instagram, this is key in social selling. #5: Partner With Influencers You can expand brand awareness and increase sales by partnering with Instagram influencers to reach an audience that's specifically targeted to your products and services. Simplify the process of connecting your brand and influencers with a tool like Captiv8. From search, discovery and workflow management, you can solidify the relationship right in the marketplace. Figure out the best product placement that's in line with the influencer's authentic voice and the trending hashtags and cop...

5 Ways to Get More LinkedIn Leads

5 Ways to Get More LinkedIn Leads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you struggling to build a pipeline of quality leads? Wondering how LinkedIn can help? With the right forms of targeting, pitching, and engagement, you can use your LinkedIn profile to secure warm leads for your business. In this article, you'll discover how to create an effective lead generation process with your LinkedIn profile. Listen to this article: #1: Use LinkedIn Search to Identify Prospects While getting more likes and followers for your company page is important, it doesn't necessarily generate leads. For lead generation, you need to connect with the right audience. Start by narrowing down the job roles you want to target; focus on the people who are most likely to understand the technical benefits of your product and have the authority to make a buying decision. You should consider talking to CMOs, CEOs, CTOs, COOs, or other heads of departments your product or service fits into. For example, if your product is a social listening tool that helps companies with brand mentions, crisis prevention, and other monitoring opportunities on the web, you would search for and connect with heads of marketing or digital marketing. After you connect with relevant people, pitch them with a soft sell. Introduce yourself and your company in a soft tone. Instead of trying to tell your new connection how amazing your company is with 500 words, ask to schedule a 10-minute call. It's also important to follow up on your pitch if you don't hear back. Follow up after a week and again after two weeks. Use Google Sheets and a good CRM to maintain the flow of leads and track each lead's stage in terms of conversion. #2: Connect With Website Visitors on LinkedIn When you add the following code to your website, you can see everyone who visits your website in the Who's Viewed Your Profile section on LinkedIn: These people are validated warm leads because they've shown some level of interest in your company. As you find people who fit your ideal lead, you can follow up with them via a LinkedIn InMail or an email from your personal business account. For example, your message could read something like this: Hi NAME, Hope you are doing well. My name is NAME and I am the DESIGNATION at COMPANY NAME. I just took a deeper look at your website and understand that your company might be looking for PRODUCT FEATURES OR SERVICE. At YOUR COMPANY NAME, we are SHORT DESCRIPTION OF YOUR PRODUCT FEATURES OR SERVICE. FEATURE 1/SERVICE OF YOUR COMPANY FEATURE 2/SERVICE OF YOUR COMPANY The companies that have been working with us for a long time include CLIENT 1 and CLIENT 2. I was wondering if we could schedule a call sometime this week to discuss this further? Regards, YOUR NAME DESIGNATION PHONE COMPANY NAME #3: Make Your LinkedIn Profile a Resource If you follow the lead generation process thoroughly, you'll form a significant number of connections over a short period of time. You'll need to engage your growing audience by sharing educational material that can help them. For example, if your product is solving problems in the hospitality industry and your leads are upper management of hotels, it's best to share content from your profile that talks about that topic. You should also consider publishing similar content on Pulse. The point here is to share valuable content that will help you build credibility with your target leads. To streamline this process, you can use tools like Hootsuite or Buffer to schedule content from your LinkedIn profile. #4: Share Advice in LinkedIn Groups One of the best ways to gain credibility, and by extension the notice of prospects, is to share your knowledge and insight with the very people you want to work with. LinkedIn groups offer a way for you to find these people and warm them up. If, for example, your company sells products or services related to the human resources industry,

9 Productivity Tools for Social Media Marketers

9 Productivity Tools for Social Media Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you a busy social media marketer? Looking for tools that will save you time? Using the right tools to stay focused and work more efficiently will help you get more done in a day. In this article you'll discover nine productivity tools for busy marketers. Listen to this article: #1: Save Content Inspiration for Later Use Evernote to create a journal of content ideas and inspiration sources. With text, audio and image options, you can type, dictate or snap an image of whatever has caught your eye. Evernote syncs with all of your devices, so you'll have access to it wherever you are. Reach for it when you're feeling stuck for content ideas. #2: Block Distracting Websites Throughout the course of a day, we have distractions coming at us from a variety of directions. If you intend to spend just a few minutes on Pinterest, only to end up spending half a day looking at recipes, you need Cold Turkey. Use Cold Turkey to group distracting sites, such as social and news sites, and then block them off for certain time periods. Remember, if you're a social media manager who uses native websites to schedule your messages, this probably isn't the app for you. The app works great when you're putting off real work, like drafting your next blog post or newsletter or creating a report for your boss. Set it up for an hour or two and allow yourself some time to write distraction-free. #3: Create Canned Email Responses Do you get a lot of similar emails from customers, such as questions about your return policy or other support-related questions? Save yourself some time and effort with the Canned Responses add-on in Gmail. Rather than write a new response every time, you can save an email as a canned response and use it over and over again. What's great about this feature is that it's not a simple auto-responder that feels robotic and soulless. You can edit canned responses to personalize them for a particular recipient or tailor your answer to a question. To access it, go to your Gmail Inbox and click on the gear icon and select Settings. Then click on the Labs tab to find Canned Responses and select Enable. Now you can save or access your canned responses in the lower-right corner of the New Message window. #4: Secure Account Log In Credentials Do you keep a list of all of your passwords for emails, websites, social media platforms and third-party apps and tools? Is that document really safe? What if you're on the go and can't remember your password for a site? 1Password is the solution for protecting your passwords and giving you quick access to them. The app will store your passwords securely, and autofill them whenever you need them. It's available for Mac, Windows, iOS and Android and as a browser extension. #5: Automate Recurring Tasks Think about all of the repetitive and mechanical tasks you do in the course of a day. Then delegate those tasks to IFTTT and free up your time to focus on bigger things. You can choose from a huge list of social media recipes or create your own. Maybe you want to build a Twitter list for a specific hashtag or get an email notification when someone mentions your business in a tweet. #6: Find and Attribute Images Do you spend a lot of time looking for images online? Have you ever tried to hunt down one specific image? Whether you followed a dead end link or are looking for attribution information to credit an original source, TinEye can help. Use the TinEye browser extension to do a reverse image search and find the original source of any image. #7: Create Tasks From Emails We're all bombarded with emails asking us to do things and complete tasks. You're likely overwhelmed with the sheer volume of email you receive and the challenge of trying to stay on top of requests. If you're using Gmail, you can create to-do items right from your email messages. After you open a message,

Book Marketing: Wisdom From Seth Godin

Book Marketing: Wisdom From Seth Godin

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering how a master marketer thinks about books and the launch process? To explore book marketing, blogging and podcasts, I interview Seth Godin. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I'll interview Seth Godin, author of 17 books, including Purple Cow, Permission Marketing and Tribes. He blogs every day on topics related to marketing, leadership and more. He also has an excellent podcast mini-series called Seth Godin's Startup School. Seth and I explore his latest book along with his thoughts on publishing and marketing books. You'll discover Seth's philosophy on writing, the importance he puts on blogging and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. How to subscribe/review on iPhone. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Book Marketing Seth's new book Seth's latest book is called, What to Do When It's Your Turn (and It's Always Your Turn). He explains that he usually comes up with the title early in the process, and then writes the book to go with it. However, in this case, the title came second to last. The book exists because when his son was heading off to college, he asked Seth to write down his advice. A letter to his son turned into a book for everyone. It's a heavily illustrated book about fear, bravery and doing work that matters. Seth's background is in publishing and he was a book packager for 12 years, during which time he and his team wrote 120 books. These included almanacs, books on gardening, business and everything in between. In 1999, he started writing books as a solo author. One person with a point of view. That's when things shifted for him, he says. "I didn’t say, 'What book do I need to write next, because I need to pay the bills?' I said, 'What do I care enough about saying to put myself through all the pain and suffering it takes to bring a book into the world?' Seth's first "real book" was Permission Marketing which has his picture on the cover. Listen to the show to discover why Seth believes all of his books are marketing books. How Seth decides what to write when it comes to his books Seth doesn’t think he has much say in what he chooses to write about. While he is very strategic in most elements of his life, his best writing is not strategic at all. "I start with an itch and the writing is my scratching of the itch," Seth reveals. He starts a new book every few days, and some of them only last a paragraph or two, which is why it’s great to have a blog. If a book won’t go away, then he has to write it. Seth believes most people shouldn’t look at the book business as a way to make a living. The book business is an organized hobby, and a fabulous way to bring ideas into the world and a great thing to leave behind. For those who want to write a book to become a paid, professional author, Seth says, don't. Instead, think about using books as a generous way to spread ideas and earn trust. Listen to the show to learn why Seth doesn’t discuss upcoming projects with his peers. Why Seth decided to publish and distribute this book on his own Since most people don't finish the books on their Kindle, Seth wanted What to Do When It's Your Turn to be only available on paper. He also didn't want people to buy just one copy of the book. "If you buy 1 copy, I send you 2. If you buy 3 copies, I send you 5. If you buy 8 copies, I send you 12," he explains. "If you get an extra copy of a book, you have to give it away." Since ideas are now spreading person to person and not top down, Seth wanted this book to be his experiment with horizontal publishing.

Establishing Trust: How to Build Relationships With Social Media

Establishing Trust: How to Build Relationships With Social Media

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Are you wondering how to best build a platform with social media? Do you want to learn how to build trusted relationships online? To explore how to establish trust with social media, I interview Chris Brogan for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Chris Brogan, CEO of Human Business Works and author of several books including The Impact Equation. Chris shares his experiences in building trust online, and the importance of having a blog if you want to grow the reach and exposure of your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Building Trust, Online How social media has changed Chris talks about his views on how social media has changed over the last 3 years. He shares that when he co-founded an event called Podcamp in 2006, he believed podcasting and video blogging were going to change the world. You'll hear Chris share what matters today in social media and how he feels podcasting has recently made a comeback. He explains that email marketing isn't dead—it's bad email marketing that's dead. Instead we need to be more personable and relationship-minded. Chris describes how platforms have come and gone and why it's community that really matters. Listen to the show to find out why community has stayed the same since Chris started. How to make your social media audiences count Chris talks about why only having a Twitter feed is like living in a hotel room and thinking you've made it. He shares the reasons why we need a place to call our own. Chris explains the importance of having a blog or a website. You need to have a "primary home base," as it's the ultimate centerpiece that you need to use any social platforms. If you don't have one, you're throwing away your opportunity for business and influence. Listen to the show to find out how Chris's blog has attracted business opportunities. How to obtain "reach" Chris shares how the larger structure of The Impact Equation is the idea that if you have really good goals, they will drive unique ideas. Next, you need a platform where people can see those ideas. You need a human element or a network of values. You need people who care about the information you share online. These are the components of social media success. Chris explains his definitions of reach and exposure. He describes ways of achieving audience capture. When you have a basic website but don't have an email newsletter, you have a passive connection to your audience. When you only have a Twitter account, you have a very passive connection with your audience. This is because people don't know how to get back to the "meat" of what you're saying. Listen to the show to find out great ways to increase your reach. How to gain trust online Chris shares the common problems people face when it comes to being human across the web. We are born looking for faces and need to see people on the other side of our communication. You'll hear why your "About" page is relevant and it's not just about logos. Chris explains how historically business was based on face-to-face networking and the difference now that things are moving online. Chris talks about the "comma problem" and how marketers can improve their email pitches. Learn why it's not simply about pressing the +1 on complete strangers. As Guy Kawasaki said, "Nobody is from nowhere." If somebody is of value to you, you find ways to express that and it'll go a lot further than hitting the +1 button.

How to Use Video to Strengthen Your Brand: 6 Ways for Better Branding

by Maciej Fita @

  We’ve all seen how rapidly the use of video is growing. The number of videos created for marketing or brand-building purposes increases in huge strides every day, and you don’t want your brand to be left behind.   There are hundreds of ways to use video, but using video in these 6 ways will
Read more

Writing and Social: Why the Written Word Is Your Marketing Advantage

Writing and Social: Why the Written Word Is Your Marketing Advantage

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you write content for your business? Are you looking to improve the quality of your writing and your storytelling skills? To explore why the written word matters in social media, I interview Ann Handley for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ann Handley, the co-author of Content Rules and chief content officer at MarketingProfs—providing training and education to empower both large and small business marketers. Her newest book is called Everybody Writes: Your Go-To Guide to Creating Ridiculously Good Content. Ann shares why she decided to write a book for marketers about writing. You'll discover how to improve your writing for social media. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Writing and Social What led Ann to write this book Ann explains that she wrote Everybody Writes because she looked for that book, and it didn't exist. She wanted a book that was part writing guide geared toward marketers, part handbook on good sportsmanship in content marketing and part reliable desk companion for people creating content on behalf of brands and companies. So she wrote it! Ann wrote her first book, Content Rules, four years ago with C.C. Chapman. That was the beginning of the conversation about content marketing. These days, she explains, being able to write well is a necessity. Everybody Writes came out of Ann’s love for good writing and her desire to see marketers do a better job with their content. Listen to the show to learn more about Ann's first book, Content Rules. Why the written word is so important to marketers Ann explains that since we're all publishers in this age of technology, our words become our ambassadors. Our writing conveys a lot of things about us. It can make us seem warm, fun, competent and trustworthy. But it can also make us seem boring, humdrum and confused. Choosing the right words to tell our story is really important, especially when you want to connect with your customers. In a world where we all have a platform, whether it's a blog or a website, words matter now more than ever. Listen to the show to hear what people said to Ann when she told them she was writing a book on writing. What non-writers need to know about writing Ann believes we are all writers. If you have a website, work in marketing or post on social media, you're a writer. To learn to craft better content, just develop the necessary writing muscles. Ann talks about a story she tells in the book. As a non-athlete, she could never do a pull-up or a push-up. About a year ago, Ann started working with a personal trainer and then four months ago, she did a push-up. It's just like writing. If you want to get better at writing, or at push-ups, you just need practice. Everyone is capable of becoming a better writer. Listen to the show to learn what keeps people from believing they can write. How to develop writing muscles To get better at writing, you need to make it a priority. One tip Ann emphasizes is to give yourself permission to write badly and then fix what you've written. The main thing with writing content is to start somewhere. Write anything, and then edit it well. Listen to the show to discover what voice-to-text tools you can use to create early drafts of your content. Why stories are important and how to tell good ones All humans like a good story. The way you can tell if your story is good, Ann says, is as soon as you get into telling it,

How L’Oréal Became a Top Global Beauty Brand

by Monique Danao @ Word-of-Mouth and Referral Marketing Blog

L’Oréal is one of the world’s top beauty brands. In fact, Forbes estimates that it’s worth $107.5 billion! How does the brand maintain its seat at the top? In part, through innovations in technology, beauty and advertising. 1. Makeup.com – publishes great articles and social media posts A quick look at L’Oréal’s Makeup.com reveals beauty […]

The post How L’Oréal Became a Top Global Beauty Brand appeared first on Word-of-Mouth and Referral Marketing Blog.

Marketing Day: E-commerce SEO mistakes, Facebook tests new ad format & interactive native content

by Amy Gesenhues @ Marketing Day – Marketing Land

Here's our recap of what happened in online marketing today, as reported on Marketing Land and other places across the web.

Facebook Ad Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Ad Changes: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you run Facebook ads? Are you familiar with the latest changes? To explore a number of recent changes to Facebook that will impact all advertisers, I interview Jon Loomer. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Jon Loomer, a marketing expert who specializes in Facebook advertising. Jon is host of the Social Media Pubcast and blogs at JonLoomer.com. Jon explores Facebook ad changes and what you need to know. You'll discover updates to the 20% text rule, custom audiences, and more. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Facebook Ad Changes The 20% text rule change Jon explains why the 20% rule was created and says that until recently, any Facebook ad image with more than 20% text would be rejected. The text ratio was measured by placing a grid over the image and if there was text in more than 5 out of the 25 boxes, it was considered over the 20% text limit. Since Facebook has abandoned the rule, advertisers can have as much text as they want in their image. However, the more text in the image, the less reach it will receive and the more it will cost to run such an ad. Now, when you upload an image to the Text Overlay tool, Facebook will rate the image as: OK, Low, Medium, and High. Facebook is general about the guidelines, Jon explains, but there is no longer a grid. Basically, zero text means it's OK, and 20% text is considered Low. However, if you compare Facebook's example for 20% to the actual 20% rule, it's actually a little bit more than 20%. Facebook says if you have been following the 20% rule until now, you probably won't see any changes. However, Jon thinks the system for detecting the text is a little buggy, although it's still early on. For instance, he talks about an image of nature that was flagged for having text. Jon says the best approach is to test it. Experiment with little or no text in your images, and compare the results. You'll need to determine what text you absolutely need. The logo is another potential issue since not all logos are created equal. Jon's logo has never been flagged. However, sometimes they detect it and sometimes they don't. Many advertisers and users love memes and big call-to-action text, and now they can boost them. Jon says you probably need to do a manual bid and bid really high to get that ad seen, but you never know. It may be extremely effective. Listen to the show to discover whether the text scale is at play on organic posts. Facebook custom audiences Jon is a big fan of Facebook custom audiences, which is creating audiences of people who have visited your website. It's powerful since these people already know who you are. However, Jon explains, there is a weakness in those audiences. All audiences aren't created equal. In an audience of people who have visited your site over the last 180 days, some visited once, others visited 50 times. Some people bounced after three seconds and don't even remember being there, while others have spent hours on your site. Until recently, you couldn't differentiate the two. With the new website custom audiences' advanced feature, you can create an audience based on frequency. For instance, base it on how many times someone has visited your website or performed one specific action, such as a purchase or a registration. Now, when Jon promotes his blog posts, instead of targeting all of his website visitors from the last 180 days, he focuses only on those who visited at least three times. The quality and the cost per website click have been much better.

Monetize Your Platform: How to Grow Sales With Your Online Platform

Monetize Your Platform: How to Grow Sales With Your Online Platform

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Have you built your own platform? Are you wondering how to monetize it? To learn how you can use your platform to generate real revenue for your business, I interview David Siteman Garland for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview David Siteman Garland, who is the host of The Rise To The Top podcast. His video and audio podcasts are focused on equipping bloggers, podcasters and YouTubers to grow a sustainable business with their platforms. He also wrote the book Smarter, Faster, Cheaper: Non-Boring, Fluff-Free Strategies for Marketing and Promoting Your Business. David shares how he grew his platform and the various ways he has monetized it. You'll learn how to get started generating revenue and the price points you need to look at. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Platform Monetization Why people struggle to make money with their platform David says it's a classic problem for most people. The platform space falls into two different categories. The first one is when it's a hobby. Here people have great content but don't know what to do with it. The second one is where you have the classic "Internet marketers" who have figured out how to make money but their content isn't great. David's advice to those who have great content but struggle to make money is you have to remember that you're positioned extremely well. If you have great content that's a side hobby, you can turn it into a legitimate six-figure–plus business. David started out the exact same way. What he and his friends have achieved shows that it's very attainable. You'll discover why it's a good position to be in if you're a blogger, podcaster or YouTuber. A lot of the time, people lack strategy on how to generate revenue. In David's eyes, the hard part is building your audience, community and trust. Once you have all this in place, the monetization angle can be brought in pretty easily. The hardest challenge is to start with no platform and no product. If you already have the platform, then you are 50% of the way there. Listen to the show to find out how you can use technology to accomplish what traditionally businesses had to pay a lot of money for. What is the platform you have built?  David started his platform The Rise To The Top in 2008, when it was a simple interview show for entrepreneurs. His show now focuses primarily on what he calls mediapreneurs, who are people with a platform. He currently has over 7 million community members. When David was on the journey of building his platform, he realized he was pretty good at creating content, building his audience and getting out there. The main struggle for him was how to turn it into a sustainable, long-term business. There are many ways to monetize a platform. It doesn't come down to which one will be best, it's more about which one you are really excited about and want to do. You have to feel comfortable with it. You'll discover the many ways you can monetize your platform. From a content perspective, David publishes two brand-new shows every week on his platform. One is an interview and the other is a video for his The Rise To The Top and DSG TV YouTube channel. You'll discover what both of these involve and the areas he focuses on and why. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=jDv4DsRy_ys Listen to the show to find out how David discovered the options he went with. What you should do before you monetize your platform

Main 5 Reasons Retail Websites Lose Sales

by admin @

Retailers are loosing millions of dollars each year due to website inefficiencies. An inefficient website can cause a company to waste marketing budgets, loose customers, and experience a hard time with customer acquisition. Here are the main 5 reasons retail websites loose sales. Of course, when we discuss retail websites we mean e-commerce websites. E-commerce […]

The post Main 5 Reasons Retail Websites Lose Sales appeared first on .

Instagram Ad Rollout Will Make It the Top Media Buy: New Research

Instagram Ad Rollout Will Make It the Top Media Buy: New Research

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Are you using Instagram for your business? Have you thought about advertising on the platform? Instagram just began offering paid advertising opportunities through select developer partners. In the coming months the platform is expected to create a Facebook-like self-serve option for any budget. In this article you'll discover findings from studies about Instagram's current reach, and the potential to reach targeted audiences with ads. Evolution of Instagram Ads In December 2014, Instagram reported its user base hit 300 million, 64.2 million from the U.S. alone. More exciting to brands and marketers than strict user numbers, however, was the engagement rate. Instagram users like, comment and re-gram at a rate of between 3.1% (Socialbakers research) to 4.2% (Forrester research). Comparably, Twitter and Facebook posts have engagement rates of .07% and below. Listen to this article: With population and engagement numbers like these, of course brands wanted to get access to Instagram audiences. For three years now, Facebook has been working on the correct advertising mix for Instagram. Until June 2015, businesses could only reach Instagram audiences by posting content, commenting, sharing and liking consumer posts. Instagram's few brand partners could place sponsored posts, much like Facebook's boosted posts. Strict ads, however, were not available. In June 2015, Instagram rolled out the call-to-action buttons Shop Now, Learn More and Install Now, which take users to mini-apps within Instagram, rather than brand websites. That way, users stay on Instagram once they've shopped, learned and installed. Now Instagram has provided advertising opportunities for all brands… provided you enter via one of their developer partners. These partners include Ampush, Brand Networks, 4C, Kenshoo, Nanigans, Salesforce Marketing Cloud, SocialCode and Unified. They require a minimum spend, so if you're a small business, you won't be able to take advantage of Instagram's new advertising opportunities until later in the year. Facebook's advertising followed the same path: It offered advertising to certain brands and then eventually made ads user-friendly enough that a developer intermediary was not needed. If you don't have the budget to utilize developer intermediaries, now is a good time to familiarize yourself with Instagram so that when the ads roll out to everyone, including small businesses, creating and posting an ad will be a simple task. On its blog, Instagram explains: Instagram ads will be available to advertisers of all types later this year. We are currently testing self-serve buying interfaces and APIs with a small group of partners, and we expect to make them more widely available over the coming months. With the context understood, small- and medium-sized businesses must evaluate whether Instagram is the right place for them. The following research will help with these decisions. #1: Instagram's Access to Facebook Data Offers a Significant Opportunity Lighting a fire under many marketers, Instagram currently doesn't have the pay-to-play platform that Facebook instituted in spring 2013. Before that point, companies that had built Facebook audiences had the luxury of getting each post to nearly every earned follower. Facebook then dropped organic reach to 6% and lower, forcing companies to pay to boost posts for as little as $1 per day if they wanted to reach more of their earned audience. Conversely, on Instagram, for the foreseeable future, each post will reach close to 100% of its earned audience… free! Well, free except for the time costs and any costs involved with Instagram's partners or other outside consulting. When Instagram will go to the Facebook-style pay-to-play platform is unclear. Until that time, you'll save significant marketing dollars experimenting with which content wins the most attention, engagement and likes. This said,

How to Set Up a Shop Section on Your Facebook Page

How to Set Up a Shop Section on Your Facebook Page

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Does your business sell products? Have you considered setting up a shop on Facebook? Facebook allows you to add a Shop section to your Facebook page so customers can buy your products directly from Facebook. In this article you'll discover how to add a Shop section to your Facebook page. Listen to this article: Check if You Have Access to the Shop Section To find out if you have access to the Shop Section feature on your Facebook page, visit your page and look for the Add Shop Section link below your Facebook page cover photo. You can see Shop sections in action on Facebook pages such as American Kennel Club, Basics Products, The Awkward Yeti, ARDO USA, and Snow Lizard Products. Snow Lizard Products is powered by Shopify, so you can compare it to the others to get a feel for the difference between shops powered by Facebook versus those powered by ecommerce solution providers. If you're a Shopify or Bigcommerce customer, you can learn more about selling on your Facebook page using their respective links. So the good news is that it's not a feature available only to major retailers. The bad news is that it seems to appear at random. If you have the Add Shop Section link on your Facebook page, follow these steps to start selling products on your page. #1: Click the Add Shop Section Link Clicking the Add Shop Section link brings up a prompt explaining what this section will allow you to do. Click the Add Shop Section button to continue. #2: Agree to Merchant Terms and Policies Next, you're asked to agree to Merchant Terms and Policies on Facebook. Be sure to read these over. They include important information about what you can sell on your Facebook page, how problems will be handled during the "test phase" of the Shop Section launch, return and refund policies, and other details. #3: Add Business and Payment Processing Details Once you've agreed to Merchant Terms and Policies, you'll enter your business details and set up payment processing with Stripe. If you have a Stripe account already, log into that account first and then click the link to connect to an existing Stripe account. Otherwise, you'll need to set up a Stripe account and then proceed with the following setup. Once you've finished this setup, your call to action button changes to a Shop Now button, which takes page visitors to your Shop section. #4: Describe What You Sell Next, describe what your Facebook page shop sells in 200 characters or fewer. #5: Add Products to Your Shop Now you're ready to add products to your shop. To do this, click the Add Products button. You'll then be able to configure the following details for each of your products. You can find Facebook's detailed guidelines and recommendations for photos on the product listing guidelines page. They include the following: You must have one image for each product. The image must be a real image of the product, not a graphical representation, illustration, or icon of the product. It's recommended that the image is a minimum of 1,024 x 1,024 pixels. It's recommended that the product image has a white backdrop or captures the product in use in real-life situations. The image cannot contain text (calls to action or promo codes), offensive content, advertising or promotional material, watermarks, or time-sensitive information. You'll also need to follow the guidelines and recommendations for your product description. They include the following: The description should pertain to the product only and be easily digestible, making use of short sentences and bullet points. The description cannot contain HTML, phone numbers, email addresses, long titles, excessive punctuation, all letters capitalized or in lowercase, book or movie spoilers, or external links. Finally, you'll find a few guidelines and recommendations about product variants. In short, you can have only four variants per product and va...

Social Strategy: How to Build a Sustainable Social Media Marketing Plan

Social Strategy: How to Build a Sustainable Social Media Marketing Plan

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you have a social media plan? Are you wondering how to build a social media strategy for your business? To learn about the importance of a social media strategy, I interview Neal Schaffer for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Neal Schaffer, author of Maximizing LinkedIn for Sales and Social Media Marketing. He's a social media consultant and coach. His newest book is Maximize Your Social: A One-Stop Guide to Building a Social Media Strategy for Marketing and Business Success. Neal shares the unique insights he gained while working overseas with companies that had to build their sales organizations from scratch. You'll learn the core elements your social strategy needs to be successful and sustainable. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Marketing Plan Many marketers are solely focused on the 'how' rather than the 'why' of social media Neal states that you should operate with a plan. The most precious resource for a marketer is time. Social media can drain your time, especially with the emergence of new platforms. You need to have a plan—and more importantly, an objective—and be able to measure what you are doing. For a small business it's one thing, but if you are doing it on behalf of a client or a brand/company, they want to know what they will get out of their social media budget. As social media becomes a mass skill, Neal thinks we'll see a lot more corporate oversight into what people do in social media. If you concentrate on the tactics alone, then the value of a Facebook like is meaningless. It might be a secondary metric, but at the end of the day, you need to know how it affects your business objectives. If you just look at the tactics, you completely miss the whole business picture. As a small business owner, it's easy to get caught up in the numbers. There is more focus on the 'how,' because you can be too concerned about trying to keep up with everyone else. You'll hear Neal give an example of a hotel client's Facebook strategy and how it's not all about the number of likes you have compared to your competitors. Likes are important to companies that want to get brand recognition in the marketplace—although it's not a business objective, it's more brand awareness. Listen to the show to find out why the number of likes is only one indicator in comparing yourself to your competition. How working abroad helped Neal in the new world of social media After graduating from college, Neal moved to Japan, where he helped three companies in the high-tech industry. Neal says it provided him with a lot of extremely holistic business experience. He had to launch their sales organizations from scratch and had to figure out how to get brand recognition across different countries in markets where they weren't known. These jobs included sales and marketing, attending conferences, hiring people, dealing with legal issues and offering customer support. All of these roles led Neal to a very holistic view of social media in terms of not just using it for marketing but throughout the enterprise. You'll hear why storytelling helped strengthen these Chinese brands and Japanese technology. Neal gained unique insights while working with these companies and it has given him a way to look at things in a practical, rational and actionable way. Listen to the show to find out about the analogy of thinking about a social network like a country.

How to Build Raving Fans in Unconventional Ways

How to Build Raving Fans in Unconventional Ways

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want enthusiastic fans? Looking for unique ways to engage your audience? To discover how he grew a large and thriving fan base, I interview Pat Flynn. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Pat Flynn, the founder of SmartPassiveIncome.com, a website dedicated to helping people start businesses. He's also host of the Smart Passive Income podcast and author of Will It Fly? Pat explores unconventional ways to build loyalty with your fans. You'll discover which forms of content are better than others for creating raving fans. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: How to Build Raving Fans in Unconventional Ways The Beginning of Smart Passive Income Pat built the Smart Passive Income blog in the latter half of 2008 as a way to showcase how he was finding success with Green Exam Academy, a website with resources to help people pass the architecture exam. On the blog, Pat shared how he'd built his business, things he wished he would have done, and mistakes he made. In October 2008, he started including income reports (how many products he sold and how much money he made), not to show off but to provide inspiration. Pat believes that by keeping people in the loop of his activities and leading by example, others benefit from his knowledge. Over time, the Smart Passive Income blog became more about experimenting with new tactics, documenting, and sharing what Pat learned along the way. Pat says that's how he became known as the crash test dummy of online business. Back in 2008, if you had told Pat that he would be a leader in this space, he says he would have laughed. He didn't think that was what he wanted. Now Pat is owning the role, trying to lead by example and starting a movement of authentic entrepreneurship. Listen to the show to hear Pat explain more about crash test dummies. Nurturing Fans in the Early Days While Pat got a lot of encouragement via the comments on his blog for the first couple of years, he never thought of those commenters as fans. Then in July 2010, he started his podcast. Later that year, strangers came up to him at a conference and chatted like they were old friends. Nobody at the conference mentioned his blog. Pat thinks his fans connected more through the podcast rather than his blog because they viewed the podcast as more real. He explains that the written word gives you a feel for who a person is, but a podcast puts you in the ears of your listeners. For listeners, the feeling is similar to being part of a conversation. Pat says he's very much himself on air, and shares personal tidbits in each episode to help his audience relate to and connect with him. For example, at the beginning of every show, Pat's voiceover guy John Melley (who does our intros in a different accent) reads a random fun fact about Pat. For example, "Here's your host. He's a Sagittarius who loves long walks on the beach: Pat Flynn." or "Here's your host. He was an 11-pound, 12-ounce baby." Pat says he once met a woman at a conference who told him she loved his show and randomly added, "When I had my baby, he was also a giant." That small fact immediately connected them, because she could relate. When you share fun little facts about yourself, Pat notes, people can find something they have in common with you and decide to follow you. This isn't true only for podcasts; the same thing can happen on your blog or your video channel. Listen to the show to discover Pat's thoughts on using video versus a podcast to connect with people. Being Yourself

Social Media Science: How Behavior Impacts Social Media Marketing

Social Media Science: How Behavior Impacts Social Media Marketing

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Want to understand the psychology behind why people interact via social networks? During this fascinating interview I explore these very concepts. To learn about the science and psychology of social media marketing, I interview Ric Dragon for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Ric Dragon, author of Social Marketology and CEO of DragonSearch. Ric shares tips on how businesses can build relationships on social media. You'll learn how relationships develop and why the concepts of gamification and gifting are important. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Social Media Science How to develop relationships via social networks People look for other people like themselves, which is called group affinity. People want to find like-minded souls. It is much easier in this age of social media than ever before. Ric shares insights into the importance of small-talk in building relationships. You'll learn how small-talk is an extension of social grooming and how sharing a little about yourself humanizes you and makes it easier to grow your social networks. Ric talks about how people bring common salad to social media. Listen to the show to learn more about building relationships on social media. What gamification and gifting bring to social media Ric explains what gamification and gifting are and the different types of elements within social media. Learn why the most powerful rewards are the unexpected ones. You'll hear about different ways you can gift someone. Ric explains why it's important to measure the depth of engagement and also how to measure the effectiveness of your company's social media activities. Listen to the show to learn why the need to reciprocate is very powerful and relevant to your social activities. How communities develop via social media  Strong communities can form very quickly on social media and sometimes there are micro-communities.  Ric talks about how strong communities can form spontaneously on social media. He also talks about how these communities form around hashtags. You'll learn why listening is important for both pre-existing communities and when communities are forming. Ric talks about online ethnography—the studying of people in an in-depth way online. Listen to the show to learn about how communities develop. How to craft the right brand voice on social media People project personality onto brands and Ric explains why this is important to remember when you shape your brand voice. Ric shares how brands can create the right voice. For example, you need to make sure that even though you want individuals to have their own voice when they speak for your company, you also want this voice to be consistent. Listen to the show to find out why it's important to be consistent. The different subcategories of social media marketing  As social media evolves, the word community is thought of in different ways by different people. The expression social media also has different definitions for different people. Ric explains how there are at least five different types of social media projects. You'll learn why Ric believes brand management will experience the biggest area of growth. He says people are thinking most about brand management and when the brand has a really strong sense of purpose, it becomes a valued member of the community. Listen to the show to discover more about brands using social media well.

Messenger Chatbots: How to Get Started

Messenger Chatbots: How to Get Started

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering if Messenger chatbots are right for your business? Want to know how to build your own chatbot? To explore why and how to create Facebook Messenger chatbots, I interview Ben Beck. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode, I interview Ben Beck, a bot expert who writes a weekly column for ClearVoice.com. He has an online course focused on generating leads with chatbots. Ben explores what you need to know to get started with chatbots. You'll discover the best tools for creating chatbots. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Messenger Chatbots Ben's Story Ben's relationship with bots started when he was a teenager in the mid-1990s. He chatted with ALICE, the first bot to use natural language processing. ALICE had a rudimentary interface that worked via the Internet. You typed into a little box and a response showed up. Although Ben looked at the code for ALICE, it was too complex for him to figure out how to tinker with it. However, ALICE sparked Ben's interest in chatbots and he's been watching them ever since. Fast-forward to 2004. Ben got into online marketing, starting with SEO and online advertising. Over the last six or seven years, his interest shifted to marketing automation and email marketing. In the last five years, Ben has been using systems like HubSpot and Marketo to do email drip campaigns and as robust solutions for lead generation. Last year, Facebook released the option to use chatbots inside of Facebook Messenger. People naturally converse with these bots to get information about a business, submit information, get help with booking vacation plans, and more. Ben thinks bots will be the new lead generation method. Although bots may not unseat email, they'll be just as big. Listen to the show to hear my thoughts on the impact of Facebook. What's a Chatbot? A chatbot is a software application built to simulate a human-like conversation. Ben believes it was Matt Schlicht, the creator of Octane AI (a chatbot-building platform), who compared chatbots to a game of tennis. For the longest time, chatbots have followed a chat-reply, chat-reply sequence (or hit it over the net, receive, hit it back). Chatbots are now starting to take on human-like capabilities. The range of a chatbot's abilities can be huge. For instance, if you were planning a family trip to Disneyland, you could visit their site and type questions into their pop-up box like, "What time does the park open on September 12?" and a chatbot could give you the answer. In this hypothetical example, the bot watches for certain patterns in a string to determine the response. An advanced chatbot could use the best in artificial intelligence (AI) technology to learn. For example, Disney could take their conversations with customers over the last five or six years and feed them into their AI platform. The chatbot could become more human-like by studying questions and responses between an actual person and a park guest. However, the way a bot learns through AI capabilities has the potential backfire. About a year ago, Microsoft released Tay, a chatbot that learned by interacting with people on Twitter. For the first day or two, tons of people interacted with Tay, but as a result of people's communications, the bot became racist and picked up other bad conversational habits, so Microsoft had to pull it down. Listen to the show to learn more about Microsoft's chatbot fail. Facebook Messenger Chatbots Currently, Facebook Messenger has more than 1.2 billion users and Facebook is putting a lot of money into getting people on the platform.

List Building With Social Media: How to Grow Your Email List

List Building With Social Media: How to Grow Your Email List

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you want to grow your email list? Wondering how social media can help you grow a list of prospects? To learn how to grow your email list with social media, I interview Amy Porterfield for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview Amy Porterfield, co-author of Facebook Marketing All-in-One for Dummies. She's also the host of the new podcast Online Marketing Made Easy and she specializes in online training. She blogs at Amy Porterfield. Amy shares how Facebook marketing has helped grow her email list. You'll learn tactics that work for growing your list when it comes to using social media. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show. List Building With Social Media Amy's list-building story Although Amy focuses primarily on Facebook marketing, she has noticed over the years that social media is a great place to grow your leads. As an online marketer, her email list is really the heart of her business. Back in January 2010, her email list consisted of about 600 people. She realized she had to do something about it. From then on, she has made a conscious effort to focus on publishing content to attract leads. Today, she has an engaged list of around 50,000. Amy goes into detail on how she attracted online marketers, entrepreneurs and small business owners to her content to get them interested enough to sign up for free giveaways and thereby grow her list. Amy explains how her business model is creating info products for people to learn how to use Facebook to grow their businesses and get more traffic to their websites. Listen to the show to find out why having online information products is important. Is social media alone sufficient? Amy tells us although social media has become saturated, alone it isn't enough to get the exposure your business needs. You also need an email list. Social media is a great way to build relationships, make connections and sell your programs, products and services. But when you pair social media with an email list, you will expand your reach. It's a great combination for getting exposure and staying top of mind with your audience. Listen to the show to find out why our email list at Social Media Examiner is the core of our success. Some ways marketers can increase their list size Amy loves to create Signature Promotional Giveaways (SPGs). You'll discover how these giveaways work to your advantage and why they are so effective. Amy shares why she decided to create a webinar once a quarter as part of her strategy to grow her email list. When you opt in, you have access to a free 60-minute webinar and get live access to Amy. This gives you the opportunity to ask questions and at the same time get great content. Other free high-value pieces of content can be an ebook or a video series you've created. Make sure it's premium content you give in exchange for a name and an email. Amy shares one of the best tips she received from Derek Halpern of Social Triggers regarding using an opt-in on your blog. Hint: It's not just about them spending money with you. Listen to the show to learn how Social Media Examiner added 10,000 names to our email list with the 2012 Media Marketing Industry Report. Tips for using video and webinars to increase your email list Amy explains the reasons behind the 2-minute videos she makes to promote her future webinars. People's attention span on social media is very small,

Snapchat and Podcasting Growth: What the Research Reveals

Snapchat and Podcasting Growth: What the Research Reveals

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Wondering if you should get into Snapchat? Is podcasting something you're considering? To discover more, I interview Tom Webster from Edison Research about his latest study on Snapchat and podcasting adoption. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Tom Webster, vice president of strategy and marketing at Edison Research and co-host of the Marketing Companion podcast. Tom is a specialist in consumer behavior and media consumption. Tom will explore his brand-new research from The Infinite Dial, focused on Snapchat and podcast adoption. You'll discover reasons to embrace Snapchat and podcasting for your business. Share your feedback, read the show notes, and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: Snapchat Growth About the study Research from The Infinite Dial series dates back to 1998, according to Tom, and it's the longest-running study on digital habits, behaviors, and consumption. They have trending graphs for areas, such as Internet radio, that go back to 1998. Plus, they've measured all kinds of behaviors and patterns in relation to consumption of audio, video, social, and mobile. Tom has been involved with the study and has been the voice of the studies on webinars since 2004. When the series started in 1998, it was focused more on digital audio. While today's brands and streaming audio like Pandora and Spotify weren't around back then, there were plenty of others. For example there was Broadcast.com, which Mark Cuban sold to Yahoo, NetRadio, Spinner, AOL Radio, and lots of other fledgling brands, Tom explains. The survey was a means to track them and put them in their place in the universe. As behaviors started to migrate to various media (as opposed to the text-driven medium that it had been previously), The Infinite Dial started tracking that too. Over the years, they added podcasting, social media, and so on. Essentially, if people do it online, The Infinite Dial is interested in measuring how it's consumed. The Infinite Dial's goal was always to create the survey of record in the various fields covered, so they spend nearly six figures in hard costs on mobile and landline telephone sampling to make a study that's random, representative, and projectable to the United States population. Tom loves coming out with new facts every year that corroborate what he sees people do online. Listen to the show to learn more about the survey sampling and why they survey via telephone. Podcast growth One of the things Tom loves about doing survey research is that although it reflects the current state of America, it typically lags behind what the digerati think. It can lag by quite a bit, he says, but if it's a real thing, it eventually gets there. The Infinite Dial added podcast tracking back in 2007. Two years ago, before Serial popularized podcasting, research showed that 15% of Americans 12+ listened to a podcast in the past 12 months. While that's a huge number (tens and tens of millions of Americans), it had been growing steadily, but not exponentially. Podcasting inched up from 9% in 2008 to 11% to 2009. And to 12% in 2010. For a short time, podcasting plateaued before jumping to 15% in 2014. After Serial came out, there was enormous advertiser, brand, and insider interest in podcasting. Listenership went from 15% in 2014 to 17% in 2015. In 2016, podcast listening has surpassed 21% already. That's a 24% increase year over year in the percentage of Americans who listened to a podcast. The Serial effect didn't happen immediately, Tom continues, although it made people a lot more aware of the on-demand content out ther...

YouTube Strategy: How to Plan Your YouTube Marketing Success

YouTube Strategy: How to Plan Your YouTube Marketing Success

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you create videos for your audience? Are you curious about what works on YouTube? To discover more about YouTube video strategy, I interview Owen Hemsath. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is an on-demand talk radio show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. In this episode I interview Owen Hemsath, a YouTube consultant and president of Videospot, a YouTube consultancy that helps authors and brands succeed on YouTube. Owen also writes on YouTube strategy for ReelSEO. Owen will explore how to put together a smart YouTube plan and how to monetize your YouTube videos. You'll discover the importance of video today, as well as the biggest mistakes marketers make with YouTube. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below. Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are some of the things you'll discover in this show: YouTube Strategy Owen's story Owen explains how he decided to pursue his dream of doing video. When Owen began making videos for his ecommerce website and started making money, he realized he could be more successful helping other business owners leverage YouTube than he could doing his own product demos. Owen is now a YouTube specialist and has a YouTube course that teaches the process of building a YouTube channel for business. httpv://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KgbwS4kfwyY He currently spends 60% of his time working with clients in a group setting and 40% of his time acting as manager for bigger channels that are looking to connect with brands and monetize. Listen to the show to learn about Owen's early experience making videos. The importance of video today Owen believes that because relationships can be formed through digital communication and social media these days, the value we place on face-to-face interaction has been minimized. Video brings that face-to-face interaction to everyone, since people can use video to develop a one-way relationship with their viewers. He shares that this type of interaction can take place on YouTube, Snapchat, Facebook video, the live-streaming apps (Meerkat, Periscope and Blab), Twitter and Instagram video. Owen explains the relationship between Google and YouTube, and why you're more likely to be found on search if you're leveraging a video content strategy in your overall marketing plan. Listen to the show to hear Owen's thoughts on why people are turning to video, movie comparisons to YouTube and predictions for the future. Mistakes marketers make with YouTube The first thing Owen cautions against is using YouTube as a compilation channel, a holding ground for every video you've ever made. For instance, you may have a couple of Q&A videos with your staff, an old commercial and some home video of the company picnic. All of these videos have low views, and there's no real cohesive strategy. The second thing Owen calls out is violations of what he refers to as the 3 Ps: Platform, Purpose and People. Marketers often violate the Platform when they repurpose their non-YouTube video content (Google hangouts, Meerkat videos or portrait videos) for YouTube. Repurposing leads to a violation against People. YouTubers want to engage with your content, comment and be a part of your community. He says that when marketers repurpose, such as putting their Meerkat videos on YouTube, they're telling their audience they don't care enough to create content for them. The third violation involves Purpose. Marketers need to have a purpose for their videos. They must figure out what they're trying to communicate with their video and the business objective of that video, whether it's to build subscribers, get more shares, grow a list or sell a product. Marketers who don't consider purpose when developing their content strateg...

How to Create Quality Facebook Canvas Ads

How to Create Quality Facebook Canvas Ads

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you want to reach more mobile Facebook users? Wondering how Canvas ads might help? Facebook Canvas lets you create full-page, interactive mobile ads that work like landing pages for tablet and smartphone users. In this article you'll discover how to create quality Facebook Canvas ads. Listen to this article: Why Facebook Canvas? Facebook Canvas is a new tool for advertisers, built specifically for the mobile platform. Facebook users can scroll through Canvas ads to view photos, watch videos, and discover your company's story. Canvas is free to use beyond the standard Facebook advertising costs, and its drag-and-drop interface requires no coding knowledge. The ads are fully immersive, so there's nothing else on the page vying for users' attention when they're scrolling through or clicking on the content in your ads. And while interactive media is normally a concern because of loading times (long loading times drive people away in every corner of the web), Canvas ads load almost as soon as they're selected. This is because they're hosted on Facebook rather than redirected to an outside page. In fact, they can download up to 10 times faster than general mobile web pages. Here are some ways you can use Facebook Canvas to maximize the impact of video ads for your business. #1: Complement Videos With Text and Images To use Canvas effectively, you need to take advantage of everything it has to offer. The tool allows you to share much of the same content you can post on your website, such as articles, photographs, videos, and even products. You have the option to display photos in carousel format, which Facebook introduced last year. You can add up to five images with optional links in one Canvas ad. Facebook is slowly rolling out the ability to create a carousel of videos as well. While there may be an emphasis on video in Canvas ads, you should also consider using other content options to better tell your company's story, highlight your products, and pique consumer interest. A genuinely compelling multimedia Canvas ad will capture attention and engage your audience, which can translate to increased web traffic, more conversions, and more sales. You can also use your video content in a variety of ways. For example, you might create a video that highlights the core principles of your brand and then include a carousel of products. Alternatively, you might include a series of customer testimonials or behind-the-scenes highlights of your company. Tailor your video to your marketing goals, whether that's greater brand awareness or increased sales, to get the best results. Kit and Ace used this video in a Canvas ad to bring awareness to their brand and get their line of all-day technical performance apparel in front of their target market. . #2: Tell a Story With a Series of Video Clips Facebook allows a maximum of 2 minutes of video for your canvas, but you can split up the video content however you want. One tactic is to use a series of 15- or 20-second clips, as in this social media campaign for Evan Williams' Bourbon. . Not only are shorter clips more likely to hold your audience's attention than longer videos, but they also give you the freedom to explore different facets of your business or highlight individual customer experiences. This greater flexibility in storytelling allows you to truly guide your audience through the experience and direct them toward what you want them to see. #3: Draw the Viewer in With Immersive Content Videos let you harness the power of both visuals and words to tell your company's story. It's important, therefore, that you come across as genuine and sincere. Design your videos (and your entire canvas) to elicit some sort of emotion, whether it's funny, heartfelt, or exciting, and then tailor your words to that goal. Keep your language simple, but emotional. Never use business jargon or buzzwords in your video ads.

Facebook Live: What Marketers Need to Know

Facebook Live: What Marketers Need to Know

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Have you heard of Facebook Live video? Do you want to use Facebook Live for business? Facebook Live lets you connect with your fans, friends and followers by sharing real-time video of what you’re seeing and doing. In this article you'll discover how to broadcast with Facebook Live and use Live video in your marketing. What Is Facebook Live? Facebook has steadily been releasing Live over the last several months. It came out in August 2015 for verified public figures through the iOS Mentions app. Early in December, Live became available to select people on their personal profiles and then to all verified Facebook pages later in the month. Listen to this article: Facebook originally introduced Live to only an elite group of users for two primary reasons: to control the demand on the bandwidth and to hopefully set a higher standard for the videos streamed so there's less "noise" in the news feed. Facebook is controlling the reach of Live broadcasts through the news feed ranking algorithm, as with all organic posts. In the coming months Live will roll out to more Facebook profiles and pages, and will become available on Android. Live is currently available to some iPhone users only. Even if you don't yet have access, you can start planning your Facebook Live strategy or use some of these tactics on the numerous other live-streaming services such as Blab, Google+ Hangouts, Periscope and Meerkat. Regardless of whether you have or plan to use live streaming, you can still upload videos regularly to Facebook. #1: Broadcast With Facebook Live You can broadcast Facebook Live through your profile or through the Mentions app. To broadcast through your profile, tap to update your status and click the Live icon. Next, write a quick description in the status update (this is your title). The description is what will go out in the news feed and in notifications. Just like with your other personal status updates, you may also want to choose the audience before going live. Select friends only, a specific friends list or public. Then tap Go Live. You can point the camera at yourself or outward to capture your surroundings. During the broadcast, you'll see the number of live viewers, which friends are tuning in and comments in real time. While people are watching you, invite those viewers to tap the Subscribe button. This way, they'll get notified the next time you're live. After you end your live broadcast, it will be saved on your timeline like any other video you upload. If you don't already have the Follower option enabled on your personal profile, I recommend enabling it. Doing so will allow you to reach a much wider audience, as anyone on Facebook can choose to follow your public updates. To enable the Follow feature, go to your settings and click Followers in the left column. Then, next to Who Can Follow Me, select Everybody. Now, any of your friends or followers can subscribe and see when you go live. Keep in mind, if your previous post was public and you wish to share your next post with friends only, you'll need to select that option. Note: To broadcast through the Mentions app, the process is similar. Open the app, tap the Post icon and then tap Live Video. The only difference is you don't select an audience, since everything you post is public on a business page. #2: Improve Your Video Facebook recommends several best practices for Facebook Live. In addition, here are several of my own recommendations: Have a focus for your broadcast. Know what you plan to talk about ahead of time so you don't have a rambling discussion about nothing. Knowing what you plan to talk about and doing it well will do wonders for your reputation. Create a compelling title. It goes without saying that you should relate the title to the focus of your broadcast. When people get a notification that you're live, the title is the only thing they see when deciding whether they...

4 Reasons LinkedIn Premium Is Good for Marketers

4 Reasons LinkedIn Premium Is Good for Marketers

by @ The Social Media Examiner Show

Do you use LinkedIn? Have you considered a LinkedIn Premium account? While most people start with the free version of LinkedIn, there are a number of useful paid features that make a Premium account worth the investment. In this article, you'll discover four ways LinkedIn Premium can help you improve your marketing. Listen to this article: Why Use LinkedIn Premium? LinkedIn was developed specifically for growing your business and building relationships. Marketers and business owners spend money on their businesses each month; whether it's a CRM tool (like Salesforce or Nimble), a business consultant or virtual assistant, or a tech person or service to manage their website. LinkedIn is that same type of investment, yet with social aspects. Plus, in some cases, it's easier to see the results of your efforts on LinkedIn than with other resources. LinkedIn's Business Plus features are integrated and easy to use within your LinkedIn account. (Note: There is also Sales Navigator, which is a sales prospect management tool.) Here's how LinkedIn Premium can help your business. #1: See Everyone Who's Viewed Your Profile While a free LinkedIn account shows you only the last five people who viewed your profile, a Premium account shows everyone. If more than five people a day view your profile, it's worth investing in Premium. With a free account, if you decide to be anonymous, you lose the ability to see who's viewed your profile. With a Premium account, you can remain anonymous and still see who has viewed your profile. You also have more sorting tools with a Premium account. That way you can see if people from a specific company, industry, or with a specific title have viewed your profile. The people who view your profile are usually clients, prospects, colleagues, classmates, or competitors. An additional level of detail allows you to better engage with people and be more specific in your responses and messaging. Plus, you can see which competitors look at you and find out what they're doing. From Who's Viewed Your Profile, it's easy to send a message to your first-level connections or invite new people to connect. Click on their name, and invite them to connect from their profile. This does two things: It allows you to view their profile and customize the invite. If you just click Connect from Who's Viewed Your Profile, LinkedIn will send out a default invitation. Connection Requests Always customize your connection requests. Even though they're harder to see on desktop, they pop right up in the mobile app. Because more than 50% of LinkedIn members use the mobile app over the browser, it makes sense to customize your invites. When inviting someone to connect from this area, I recommend the following text: "I noticed you viewed my profile on LinkedIn. I'd love to answer any questions you have. Let's connect to make communicating easier." When sending the connection request, choose Friend as your option for how you know someone, since people can no longer see how you know them. The designations in Who's Viewed Your Profile (such as company name, where they live, and their titles and industries) will help you see whether your profile is attracting the right people. If the people who view your profile live in another country, are in an unrelated industry, and are nowhere near your target client, you're probably not connecting and engaging with the right people. This is a red flag to update your profile, engage more with the right people, and post more relevant content. Ranking To find your ranking on LinkedIn, click on the same link to see who viewed your profile. This will show you how you rank within your connections and your company. With Premium, you also see where you rank in comparison to other professionals like you. Your LinkedIn ranking only has to do with who viewed your profile; it has no bearing on who you are as a person or in you...

Create A Successful Online Marketing Campaign With Sean Malarkey

Create A Successful Online Marketing Campaign With Sean Malarkey


Eventual Millionaire

Sean Malarkey walks through his process for creating a successful online marketing campaign. He also gives details on what software he uses.

Following Your Passion: How Content Can Help You Grow

Following Your Passion: How Content Can Help You Grow

by @ Social Media Marketing Podcast helps your business thrive with social media

Do you follow your passion? Are you wondering if there might be a link between content and living your dreams? To learn how publishing content can get you to where you want to be, I interview C.C. Chapman for this episode of the Social Media Marketing podcast. More About This Show The Social Media Marketing podcast is a show from Social Media Examiner. It's designed to help busy marketers and business owners discover what works with social media marketing. The show format is on-demand talk radio (also known as podcasting). In this episode, I interview C.C. Chapman, co-author of Content Rules. He's also a blogger at Digital Dads, a photographer, a long time podcaster and founder of the Cleon Foundation (an agency focused on causes). His newest book is Amazing Things Will Happen. C.C. shares his story of how creating content about his passions has helped him gain the success and audience he has today. You'll learn how to follow your passions, while achieving your goals. Share your feedback, read the show notes and get the links mentioned in this episode below! Listen Now You can also subscribe via iTunes, RSS, or Stitcher. Here are